Home

Contents - AND

1. In the All Layers tree view select aM a ereiche ame andard Layers the layer or the layer group af Freie Grafik a E andar ayers whose attributes you want to set if eee Description If an object symbol cable etc AA Netzplan oN possesses the Colour from Layer dip Freie Grafik Nzpl Pee i gt Kabel Printing Color x attribute the color selected here sy Kabel GF eerie will be used to display the object e i Visible Yes z Pa Kabelbeschriftung If an object possesses the Colour sg iii Printable Yes v from Layer attribute amp Objekte P P ee Objekte Text Fe it will be printed out with the Objekte GF Use in material ist Yes color selected here P Objekte GF Text Objects from this layer are E Test Layers visible are printed out and k SD ac will be included in the bill of es a E E materials materials list Apply to Here you can globally assign f Curent Sheet C All Sheets C Use as defaulbf the future a Planning type and a status to all objects on the selected layer Adds a previously stored layer list to the current project Existing layers are not deleted ea eee EE Save Settings Cancel x AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 216 of 452 6 Project organization 6 4 Layers 6 4 2 Defining layers for worksheets The Visibility Print and Materials List attributes can be set separately for every worksheet Choo
2. a Advanced Network Design V 4 3 Copyright c 2010 AND Solution GmbH Licensed for AND Solution GmbH 81829 M nchen Karl Schmid Str 14 Version 4 3 Build 887 20 AND FibreCoax International Serial Number 11000 Press F1 for help Standard Modus No object No selected object BI 001 13 00 1 00 FANG AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 12 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 1 The AND program window and its elements 2 1 1 Toolbars Commands and functions that you use on a regular basis are available as icons in the toolbars The commands are grouped into functional blocks and placed in various toolbars Use the VIEW gt Toolbars command to switch toolbars on or off Toolbars can be either docked for example in a position near the window edge or freely positioned floated anywhere on your screen To position a toolbar drag it by the move handle or double click it and then drag the window by the title bar 2 Docked toolbar The object selection window is a special form of the toolbar It displays icons and components from libraries and makes them available for use in drawings Show as List Show as Iree Eind Symbol Meta Objects Show as List Show as Tree Eind Symbol Meta Objects SAT75A W R J F Meut3vrt lib EE Symbols GD VERT F fb fe ABZw F1 FACH ED ABZW F 2 FACH SAT 90 4 W R SBX 177 l BE ABZW F 3 FACH OO B A MULT
3. m i Project Data Projects and Sheets Project Header Project Propetties Project CAmpanies Order Info Project type Projects AN i Identification NE3 Project No i Client Used Project Type unknown v Select the project here DE wl A 2 Th e d ata of th IS p roj ect City district Street are d IS p a yed h ere House number House number to House no supplement House no supplement to State Created by dominic pittroff at 10 12 2010 changed by dominic pittroff at 10 12 2010 Template Set Template Delete Template Version Status Unknown v Date v V System must be redesigned Must be checked in field Note Managers Professional Tradesman No Salesman Acceptance by po Completion Date 12 00 00 Acceptance at 12 00 00 p Sort options Set numbers Cancel Record the most important data in the Project Header tab that is project number and type headend address and point of delivery This data is very important and must not be forgotten AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 219 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options Applying project settings from the template file Note This program function is implemented with Build 637 and higher You can assign a project template to any project A project template is a group of properties that affect the work performed on a particular project This project is
4. Destination Coordinates Left 3420002 9991 625 Right 3421 996 093201 24 Top 5724081 80553753 Bottom 5721 917 93281529 Keep aspect ratio Coordinate System Coordinate System EEPE ih tem emer t te esr Refference System DHDN PD DE 1995 lt 5m Rauenber Zone Native Meridian Strip v Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH 5 1 Maps Page 188 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps 5 1 4 Calculating cable lengths Once you have correctly set the ruler and are using the scale see figure below Item the cable lengths will be calculated automatically see the System Data window using the PROJECT DATA gt Project and Worksheet Data command Projects and Sheets Sheet Basics Sheet View Settings GIS Scale El Projects E empty project Unnamed Symbol Size Site plan The ratio between symbol coordinates IV to sheet coordinates 1 882001 4940547 Scaling for length calculation V Use Scale m per coordinate 3 Start value in m 0 2 Minimal length 0 add charge ____ V Adjust symbols cE m per sym coord Sort options Set numbers Please note If an additional margin is defined the length calculation for cables will differ from the calculations for trench ruler and dimensioning objects Calculating the length takes attached components into consideration Calculations are made u
5. AND Solution GmbH Page 293 of 452 8 Settings 8 1 Factory settings Checking additional factory settings You can check for additional factory settings in the warnings of the network check Set up warnings for Net Check 1 2 Warnings V Check net structure Ompares the internal libs with the ext rnal ones for every used component and Setup amplifiers ompare the stored factory raster fileAwith the calculated raster at every socket Temperature drift C Check remote supply 4 Check socket levels Check factory raster Check bridge points Check linked libraries Check open tap pin levels _ Check distortion Factory raster data C Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Change values Check upstream Test point CURRENT TARGEA com Check leakage limit Additional Factory Settings Be cipal pi Save Setings LoadSetings Cance _ If the use of the factory settings is activated in your program version the Additional Factory Settings option will appear in the warning settings for the network check If you activate this option this options will be available Check frequency raster for factory settings If you activate the Check Frequency Raster for Factory Settings option the frequency raster for each outlet output will be compared to the company raster Any deviations will result in a warning in the output window You can specify settings for the company
6. Location Search Don t search C Search in whole project recursivly C Search in sheet Default font Arial Western Select Update all labels when dialog is closed r Save Settings Load Settings Use font E in Dialogs Cancel OK Automatic labeling for Amplifiers Format string Min number of digits for sheetnumbers 0 Min number of decimals for lengths 0 Location Search Don t search Default font Font size 32 V Label immediately after insertion V Show edit dialog V Edit Location Set Format string for automatic labels read only Searchinsheet C Search in whole project recursivly M Use font Arial western F Update all labels when dialog is closed c Save Settings Load Settings Select in Dialogs Cancel With this setting the Create Drawing Object Data window will automatically open after plotting an object so that you can enter the data If Auto is highlighted that means an automatic length label or number is already set and that this value will automatically be generated If you wish to enter individual values do so in the entry field When you are entering individual values the Auto button see figure below Item 0 will be switched off a Drawing Object Data Cable Lengths Cable Nr 1 Location Inst No Nr 2 Calculated 0 00 m Manual 0 m Temperature group y new
7. e Target level at each TAP exit The target level at each tap exit point should be as close as possible to the target value 77 dBuV in this example e Target attenuation return path at each TAP exit The target attenuation for the return path for each tap exit point should be as close as possible to the target value e Calculate best solution requires more time You can have the system calculate the best solution automatically e Target level depending on the number of subscribers If you activate this option you can define the target level depending on the number of subscribers Enter the level setting by clicking Settings Optimization will now be performed depending on the values entered AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 157 of 452 3 Automatic Drawing Mode 3 5 Tap Optimization AND examines both directions to find the signal direction and collect and calculate the taps between the two ends MiP 001 00 1 001 nc 92 4 954 f2 0 68 2 MiP O03 In this example AND collects and optimizes all taps between the open component on the left and the end component on the right orange component The collected and calculated taps are displayed in the output window together with their values Result of optimization for Target Level 77 0 dByy for Tapis 78 0 dByv 79 3 dByv 77 6 dBwy Result 3 9 dB Press F1 For help Default mode No object AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH
8. c cece ees 355 Calculating the return path level at one DONG oea 337 Calculation for optical networks 366 Calculation Result window eec eee 300 Calculation S ttingS cccsscceesseeeeeeenees 361 Calcula ti ns escsivweaisentiesnwe aed sentinanreniin 299 Changing CONNECTIONS c cece cece e eee 59 Changing the apartment numbering in DIOCK S stinctueadiaanveateeianieienerGsanteeesls 130 Changing the direction of view 168 Check frequency raster for factory settings T cote eats ire std ue A E A anecoca areca 289 Checking bridge points cccee eee 313 Checking distortion products 5 314 Checking EMC test points 0000ee 321 Checking for remote power incompatability A COMPONENTS merice 405 Checking open tap pin levels 314 Checking socket levels sceseeeeeeeeeees 313 Checking the network structure 311 Checking the remote supply 05 312 Checking the return channel 8 320 Civil works building ccc cece cece eee ees 169 Civil works planning ccceeeee scene eens 154 Cl ster planiga neha aa aen 186 CNR calculation in the forward path 299 Color Information WiINdOW eeeeee 18 Coloring optical sections ccceeeeeeeee 110 Coloring remote powering areas 405 Comleting lists network plan 141 Completing plans network plan 141 Comp
9. AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 184 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps Defining the GIS coordinate system You can create GIS coordinates for a main worksheet without being connected to the AND server To create a GIS coordinates system for the main worksheet proceed as follows First choose the PROJECT DATA gt Project and Worksheet Data command Projects and Sheets Sheet Basics Sheet View Settings GIS Scale Projects GIS oO Activate th IS option 1 sr tate V Use GIS in this sheet 0 Coordinate System 2 Se ect a re fe re n ce Sy ste m n Current Reference System The corner coordinates of the ee DHDN PD DE 1995 lt 5m Rauenberg Bessel v 2 worksheet are shown here Native Meridian Strip v You can change these Here you see the source for the Corners of the sheet GIS coordinates system let 5408748563 oht RATOTOR aR 6 top ggg bottom It can be a user defined source from Baa o a an imported geo referenced DXF file or a raster imported from a GIS Area project imported via NetInfo Corners of the sheet obtained from Sort options Set numbers Cancel 2 The basic data of the worksheet can also be recalculated for a different reference system Click the button to do this The GIS Framework window will open Fa 7 Gis Reference Systems a Current coo
10. AND Client Manual IV C Default LIB directory C 4 ProgramnData ahD LIB File Name Kathrein2stEDG M Kathrein 3 lib microducts lib NEUTZBE LIB HEUTZGG64 L16 HEUT2H LIB NEUT254T LIB NEUT25TA LIB HEUTAVAT LIB Neutsbky lib Heut Neutdyrt lib dj AND Solution GmbH 671772009 10 54 671772009 10 54 31672010 1 06 3 12 20 1999 2 25 12 20 1999 2 26 12 20 1999 2 26 12 20 1999 2 27 12 20 1999 2 27 12 20 1999 2 20 B18 2000 6 75 2 10 27 2005 9 54 H Edit Library List eer Libraries 1 neut2gga lib neut2hv lib Load s neut2sat lib neut2str lib Dejfte neut2vrt lib neut3bkv lib Show neut3gga lib neut3hy lib gt neut3opt lib Edit neut3sat lib neut3str lib Replace neut3vrt lib neut4bky lib Linkstate neut4yrt lib optneutral lib phil3str lib E poly2bky lib poly2gga lib Delete Unused Libs poly2hv lib poly2str lib poly2vrt lib poly3bky lib poly3aga lib v List Objects Current document for iking AND1 F Link libres into drawing file Dele prices times of components for libraries saved within the drawing F Load only authentic libraries efore replacing a library ask whether to link the library C On every change f Only on essential changes component type pin position C Only if objects are missing V Update crosstexts automatically after loading a library Save Settings Load Settings Replacement libraries C Prog
11. 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode FormatString node contains the numbering format string Please see the section with the numbering in AND for the list of possible placeholders that can be used here AND This is the new Auto numbering dialog Automatic Labeling and Numbering Apply for Default z planning type Applicable rules i Format E E Commercial building a Commercial building C oe J Technical facility Cad J Clamp et Amplifier Default Headend A Level B v o applies for Test Point 2 Amplifier List Apply automatic format to Channel List do not apply Fibre Cable Create counter for objects 9 Coax Cable with no counter in Location rectangle endosur do not create 2 Termination Device Trench point 7 4 mW p Add Delete Apply Rules source legend 2 Force J Project Global Warnings Location Search Don t search Search in sheet Search in whole project recursivly Default font Arial Western Select Use font in Dialogs Update all labels when dialog is closed Reset label s textsize Save Settings Load Settings The numbering format of an object type has now multiple sources The numbering format is taken if present from the next places 1 2 3 Metadata xml if that object has a metadot for which numbering format NumberingInfos XML node from the p
12. 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options To define a legend layout for all worksheets set the legend style in the sheet settings These settings then apply to every new sheet of this type that you create Sheet tpe Defaut sheet 1st sheet Settings Scaling Sheetsize DIN A4 160 174 Use Scale 9 us ellen s Hier 7 00001 m Per coordinate width fien Height E 3 0000 Start value in m Type Default sheet 0 20001 Minimal length l Site Plan fo ooon 2 add charge Show grid lines W Adjust symbols Grid line Spacing fo ARDI m Per apm coord Snap to Grid MW Show Cable numbers M Show Conduit lenghts pene r tait landscape portrai above 0 00000 mi F Show remote supply pins It they indicate UE M Show remote supply pins It they trdicat Error M Show ready made cable connectors M Show sheet connector numbers Show tap output order numbers f Ascending Descending Symbolscale jo 25000 Legend Style C Dynamic Report name Save report with file 0 Static Title width 15 Z of sheet width Height 5 of sheet height Save Settings Load Settings Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 232 of 452 6 Project organization 6 6 Status 6 6 Status NDS has been implemented to allow you to store status information on design alternatives documentation projects and other objects The status of design altern
13. 9 Calculations AND automatically calculates amplifier levels subscriber and connection point levels remote powering return path and network performance for CTB CSO C N MER and BER AND also calculates the exact overall levels scenario and distortion spectrum for optical networks HFC and takes into consideration component ripple cable characteristics and interstage components CNR calculation in the forward path The calculation of the carrier to noise ratio is almost the same as the calculation formula commonly used in the industry The CNR at the output of an amplifier stage is calculated according to the following simple formula CN Fout CN En 4 10 10 10 CNRout Carrier to noise ratio at the amplifier output CNR Carrier to noise ratio at the amplifier input Z Pi dBuV F 1 V dB kTAf dBuVv Pin Input level at amplifier stage dBuV F Noise factor of amplifier in non logarithmic scale V Amplification of the stage in non logarithmic scale F 1 V dB l Value of F 1 V in logarithmic scale k Boltzmann constant T Temperature 293 15 K Af Bandwidth of the channel in Hz This differs from the formula usually used in the industry by the use of the correction term 1 V which is only significant for smaller amplifications Co o e AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 304 of 452 9 Calculations 9 1 Calculating levels 9 1 Calculating levels AND calculates
14. AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 308 of 452 9 Calculations 9 2 Amplifier settings e You can position and set a suitable connector component by hand If for example six possible connector components are available for a particular slot the calculation effort is reduced approximately by a factor of six when it is in a fixed position However this makes setting less flexible If an optimum setting can only be obtained by replacing the fixed component AND will not find them again If it is not possible to set the target values for all output levels at once a warning is output in the output window When specifying these settings in the Amplifier Data tab see below only the adjustment possibilities of the current amplifier level and all of its upstream levels are used For interstage amplifiers with multiple parallel output levels specifying the settings via the tab is complicated because setting one output level may affect the associated parallel level The procedure of setting all amplifiers at once is much better here because all of the output level target values can be simultaneously coordinated and set AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 309 of 452 9 Calculations 9 2 Amplifier settings 9 2 2 Setting individual amplifiers Left click the amplifier to open the Edit Object window with the Amplifier Data tab For multi level amplifiers a separate tab exists for every amplifier level Amplifier Data N
15. Connection ID Start Start Name End Rack End End Name Customer F m Rack Start v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v Usage Service State Priority Cable Cable Owner Data Fiber Owner Data 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Rack Sta seta ts lg KVZ 123 Museumsstr KVZ a Museurmsstr KVZ1233 Museumsstr Z12333 Museumsstr KVZ1233 Museumsstr KVZ1233 Museumsstr KV 41233 Museumsstr EV 12335 Museumsstr KV 1233 Museumsstr KVZ Museurnsstr KVF123 Museumsstr KVZ TTE Museumsstr You rearrange the order of columns by moving a column heading to a new position while keeping the left mouse button pressed You can change the column width by dragging the heading dividing line Any changes you make are stored and retained when you next start the program AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 94 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode The context menu in the connection information window The context menu for this dialog box contains the following commands WIUSEUMSSIT RVZ 1455 WIU EME Ti Rooted 7 KVZ 1233 Mu 3 Edit Route _ Z133 Mu 5 Mark optical line KVZ 12333 Mu 6 Refresh KWZ 1233 Mu f KWZ 1233 Mu 9 Jump te End KVZ 1233 Mu 10 Excel Export KVZ 1233 Mu 11 KWZ 1233 Mu 17 Interconnect Plan KVZ 12733 Mu rir Locate Fiber Breakage a Context men
16. Curent Reference System Comers of the sheet left right top bottom Corners of the sheet m obtained from Page 210 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets Scaling for length calculations Sheet Basics Sheet View Settings GIS Scale Here you switch the geo schematic network planning based on the topographical maps that eee are loaded into the background Site plan e y Site Plan Only deactivate this option again when either to sheet coordinates the worksheet is empty or the existing objects 0125 are positioned on the raster grid of the orthogonal worksheet type B a Identifies the factor between AND worksheet coordinates and the length to be coordinated E e Only change this value manually in exceptional D2 Miniman O cases as this value can be more easily set ooo zae O a 0 125 m per sym coord using other functions If the calculation of a cable section produces a shorter value than the one specified here the minimal length will be used instead of the cacalculated length An additional percentage factor is added to the calculated length to compensate for cutting wastage and height variations AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 211 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets 6 3 3 Labeling of worksheet connections with the target address This function is implemented in AND 4 0 as from Build 788 Summary You can label
17. Making sense of your networks Making business sense Advanced Network Design SF AND Client UserManual www and solution com y Advanced Network Design User Manual AND Client Version IV C Author Various Document name AND Client EN pdf This document contains 452 pages Date of publication 2013 10 01 All information in this manual has been included after careful review but is not deemed to be a warranty of product qualities AND Solution is liable only to the extent defined in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery Changes to the product in the service of technical progress are reserved AND Advanced Network Design Copyright 2011 AND Solution GmbH Paintlib Copyright 1996 2002 Ulrich von Zadow and other contributors LibTiff Copyright 1988 1997 Sam Leffler amp 1991 1997 Silicon Graphics Inc LibSmi Copyright 1999 2002 Frank Strauss Technical University of Braunschweig Copyright 1995 1999 Kungliga Tekniska H gskolan Royal Institute of Technology Stockholm Sweden All rights reserved DTL Copyright 2000 Michael Gradman and Corwin Joy This maual is protected by copyright The manual and the software wholly or in part must not be reproduced disseminated altered or translated into any other language or converted into any other format without the express prior written authorization of AND Solution 2013 AND Solution GmbH Munich Germany All rights reserved AND
18. Shortcut To increase the text size click on the hotspot like you want to move it pot k The user should see the hotspot like this Hii Jr then press 2 gt the text size should increase stop when the text size is like you desire Result E ew Var gt H Hew ar gt New Yar gt J New Yar To decrease the text size make the same steps but press 1 Move hotspot Independent hotspot can be moved as any other object via object context menu entry Move object or by dragging the object with mouse As result the hotspot geo position is directly updated in server when mouse button is released Delete hotspot Independent hotspot can be deleted as any other object via object context menu entry Delete object or by pressing the DEL key After user confirmation the hotspot is deleted from database too Clear hotspots Context menu Manage hotspots contains a new entry Clear hotspots which allows deleting all hotspots of a certain type from database according to user rights When this entry is selected a new dialog is displayed which allows selecting the hotspot type whose hotspots are going to be deleted In a later step it s intended to allow deleting selected hotspots within a cluster hull Search hotspot s Like any other dot the independent hotspots are searchable too For searching an independent hotspot the Search control dockable bar will be used The resulted hotspots can be located i
19. iV Components of this layer will be printed iV Components of this layer will added to the material table Visual Settings Oo Zz t l E View Mode for Rastergraphics D s 4 Visibility Show grid lines Grid line s spacing 32 l Cable numbers IV Conduit lenghts above oo _ Tap output order nu A c V Ready made cable connectors lv Remote Supply pins ector numbers ShowifOK M Show if ERROR Linestyles Display Show lines without linewidths affects display and print O Local display settings Linewidths and scales Scale according to symbol coordi _ 1100 Line width according to symbol coordinates only cables and conduits 50 5 Optional shift factor in relation to cable s line width for second thin line of cables 10 fe 7 Scale independend line width affects all other lines 10 00 mm Caution These values came from global settings and can t be changed permanently Any modifications will be lost when file is closed Sheet Basics Sheet View Settings GIS Scale AND Client Manual IV C If the current document is a server document the map section can be changed by specifying coordinates in the global coordinates system or in the current projection coordinates system It is better to use the background editor for this Automatically sets the most suitable projection for the currently specified coordinates AND Solution GmbH Coordinate System
20. out Warning Level CheckNet Check Optical bridge point without signal Warning Level CheckNet Check Optical bridge point without signal Warning Level CheckWNet Check Optical bridge point without signal Warning Level CheckNet Check Optical bridge point without signal Warning Level CheckWNet Check Optical bridge point without signal Warning CheckENet ChecE Optical point without signal Warning Level CheckNet Check Optical bridge point without signal Warning Level CheckWNet Check Optical bridge point without signal Warning Level CheckWNet Check Optical bridge point without signal Warning Level CheckWNet Check Optical bridge point without signal Press Fl for help Fig 31 The output warnings can be dealt with one after the other by clicking on them AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 396 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts 9 13 4 Trenches This chapter describes integration of the duct package into the trench concept The AND trenches as they now are are retained Trench line cross section with duct package You open the context menu of the duct package and execute the function Generate Trench Sheath Fig 32 This draws a trench sheath around the selected duct package U PU RERUN Yp e A Take Create Trench Envelope Block Deployment Deploy Microduct Add text label s Remove text label s Lock object I Component information R Calculate optical power Q
21. A power supply must be a Power Supply type component In this case the Power Supply tab is displayed in the lower right third of the window Power Unit Data Maximum power is only relevant for warnings in AND am tao jen i AND issues a warning if more power is being taken from the source than is allowed by this maximum Masimum Curent E00 m Fis power consumption 22 0 Wl Type f Remote Supply C Locale Supply Use a list of values for power consumption Mr Voltage M Current m AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 402 of 452 Entering cable resistance Select a cable in the component tree of the Component Editor Click the Cable Data tab 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering Enter the ohmic resistance per 1 000 meters here YS a Frequency Attenuation 100m Resistance 19 0 Ohm1000m 47 00 MHz 2 70 dB Linestyle 100 00 MHz 3 80 dB Dot Long Blank Dot v 0 0 S jis T No double line 0 1200 Readymade fixed length 1000 00 MHz 13 60 dB 2000 00 MHz 20 50 dB 300000 MHz 700 dB Cable reference MHz dB Type Direct cable MHz dB Reference 59 210 El MHz dB MHz dB Mz eB Mkz B MHz dB MHz dB Mz cB at temperature 20 0 E Entering the resistance of passive components Select a component in the component tree of the Component Editor Click the Standard tab Standard Package Data Min Fiq a Hz Resistance 10 00
22. AND Solution GmbH Page 86 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Cassette rectangle object type A cassette rectangle is drawn around the bundle to document the position in relation to the cassette Kassette 4 Fibers and bundles automatically inherit the cassette number of the cassette rectangle surrounding them The position of the splice symbol determines its association with the cassette frame If the splice symbol is located within a rectangle the installation number of the cassette appears in the splice report and on the switching plan The command for drawing a new cassette rectangle is listed as an item in the context menu d iA E Ore a La New Location Rectangle Ctrl F5 la New Headend Frame Ctrl Shitt F5 New Legend F5 New Cassette Rectangle Ctrl F8 The old style cassette numbers are retained in order to support cassette assignment at pure data level in case there is no space for the cassette frame aj LapingT ppe L Laying Type Cassette number s Set eee for all Co Cot CO CO rm Fiber lhormatior n Connection Mr 3 ma Mael lLn Ne i Mi AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 87 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode The data entered in this dialog box overwrites the frame association defined by the position in the cassette frame If at least one bundle with a manually edited cassette number is located inside the cassette fr
23. B Move object N Copy object E Delete object F Color Layer O Edit location T Label P Pin information G Substitute group A Take X Calculation object M Multiply Cables Insert Splitpoint Tap Optimize Lock object I Component information Set counter manually Add breakage symbol R Calculate level Y CSO CTB C N Calculation Generate Logic Plan J Show Signalpath Colored Insert OLE Object Ctrl V K Load block Load sheet Print active View Properties Enter 2 Move the mouse onto the test point test point changes color to lilac and press the T key AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 59 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Showing levels If you would like to see detailed level information for a test point click the test point and the following window will open Edit Object Object Data Level values Mr 1 Distortion Data Nr 2 Data to Display Mr 3 E Test point Live TP large Component information Base data Mr 1 Symbol Data Mr 2 URL i URL Colorlayer informatiori i Color layer informatic D prhamic data Level values Mr 1 Distortion Data Mr 2 i Data to Display Mr Ausland 1 PEE EEE EEL LI Add to TP History ik User alexander tolke pag CEA n A n iii iil H i il i O50 Time 3 05 24 PM Description Level range 71 5 66 9 dbp 4 In this window you can enter the test values in the
24. Edit Opens the dialog box for editing the selected WMS document Delete Deletes the currently selected document Set as default Configures the currently selected document as the default document That means that this document will be used when an AND project without an embedded WM document is opened Reload documents Reloads all available WMS documents from the relevant directories The default document is marked with a yellow star AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 181 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps A red marking indicates that the WMS document cannot be edited or deleted because the document file is write protected or you do not have the rights required to modify this file WMS Document dialog box In the WMS Document dialog box you can edit WMS documents in which you create edit or delete WMS data sources You can also change the order Z Order of the WMS data sources or create a duplicate of the current WMS document ag WMS Document Name Bayern mit Srabungsatlas Data Sources Datasource Create ue Grabungsatlas Sonstige Institutionen in Bayern Vermwaltungsgrenzen Bayern Digitales Orthophoto 2m BY Cancel OK WMS Document dialog box Opens the dialog box for editing a new WMS data source Edit Opens the same dialog box for editing the currently selected WMS data source Deletes the current WMS data source Move Up Moves the currently selected data source up
25. In the Open window select the variable list that suits the report type and click Open b To enter variables manually Select VARIABLES gt EDIT The EDIT window will open Enter the name of the variables fos as you can use any of those in the Variables list J in AN D Variables Fomula Dynamic Object Variables Then click New Variable Description e The variable has now been entered ao ae The variable name is automatically given Postion aw prefix Bisri ieee 2 Delete OK Cancel 6 Save the template with FILE gt Save Store the report templates in the Report directory provided 7 Now start plotting the elements to be output in the report AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 433 of 452 Sections of the report worksheet The worksheet is divided into sections Every section is a drawing worksheet where objects can be plotted and then printed with the report Every section has a millimeter ruler for defining the size oa the section Here you draw the document header objects for example date and title of the document In the Feed section you set the page break for multi page reports like the headers and footers in Word documents In the synopsis you set up the design of end of the report Content could be things like totals or signature fields If your report contains multiple datasets in list form for example bills of materials sp
26. Load ettings Cancel Save Settings Signal points Level settings Save Cancel This function checks all distortion products in all channels for every active component or subscriber connection Set up warnings for Net Check wi arming Here you specify which distortion products are to be checked Check net structure Setup amplifiers Temperature drift Check remote supply Check socket levels Check bridge points Check open tap pin levels Check distortion Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream Test pomt CURRENTYTSAGET com CI Check leakage limit AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Examination HES MEd wt Checks that should be made during oromot O CTE Composite Triple Beat C50 Composite Second Order C N Noite distance Carrier to noite for analog channels C N Noise distance Carrier to noise for digital channels C71 Carner to interference for digital channels BER Bit error rate for digital channels Page 319 of 452 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check Ww Y z Set up warnings for Net Check Warnings Check net structure v Setup amplifiers Temperature drift Check remote supply Check socket levels Check bridge points Check open tap pin levels Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream Test point CURRENT TARGET com Check leakage limit Here you activate or de
27. MwstSatz VAT rate currently AND Material Einstellungen 16 Allgemein Mehrwertsteuer Rate MwstWort VAT word MwSt AND Material Einstellungen Allgemein Mehrwertsteuer Word NameOfController Acceptance by AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Zustandigkeiten Acceptance by NameOfFirstTimeDrawer Network drawing AND PROJECT DATA Projekt creator Kopf Status Created by not editable NameOfLastChanger Last change by AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Status Changed by not edita ble NameOfManager Manager name AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Zustandigkeiten Manager AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 440 of 452 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer Variable NameOfSalesman Name of salesper AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf son Zustandigkeiten Salesperson AND file name Network type AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Technik Network type Planning object AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf NetListFileName NetType Objekt Identifikation Postal code city Street No ObjStruktur Object address Name of operator AND PROJECT DATA Projektfirmen company Betreiber Name Operator telephone AND PROJECT DATA Projektfirmen number Betreiber Phone City OperatorCompanyName OperatorCompanyPhone OperatorLocation AND PROJECT DATA Projektfirmen Betreiber Street Postal code City Ope
28. On the left select the layer you wish to edit and transfer it to the list on the right using the gt gt button Now you can edit the vectors in the converted layer like you would edit marker lines Draw new vectors in the respective new layer copies After you have made the desired changes in the layer copies open the Background Conversion window again as described above and switch to the Convert AND to Background tab this is the recommended method After that the background layers are frozen and can no longer be edited Options Create layers for new objects f Background conversion kd x 1 l All layers Convert to DXF o o 3 Oo The All Layers option transfers C Select Layers g the previously converted layer into the DXF or eee E GIS layer group depending on the selection ERI Ecte Lironda E in the Convert to field Flschen Tex re The Use Original Layer for Previously Imported HF Ted o 3 n Sere C Flache Liniendar a Entities option converts back to the original layer fi g n V Use original layer for previously mported entities Select area EE i Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 193 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps Editing backgrounds Background objects are loaded DXF or raster files You can load multiple background objects into a worksheet Use the icons on the toolbar to
29. SI Show label Show both flabel and symb Fixed appearance Square Global Layer Address Select Layer Crder 1 Label Format Street So lt otreet gt House no gt Label height 1 Label position on relative to symbol Label position on relative to symbol 1 o Variable display name Specific Data May be empty Country COUNTRY we ST integer ooo ooo d City CITY String v Street STREET String v House number HOUSENUMBER Integer we House number supplement HOUSENUKNBERSUPPLEMENT String wr Eenden name Appearance Minimum size Label color Show label Edit logical condition Link to object metadot Link to Link by cme Suppose the CSV file is ready saved on your computer Observation Make sure that the first line that will be used like header must have columns names match the same with the variable names NOT variable display name from metadot AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 262 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Go to Manage hotspots Import hotspots W Import options X Column separator Tab character Text is enclosed by I Import file has header Decimal separator i Create new metadat Hotspot Find matching metadot Position Colurnn No position f WT Column 7 Two columns olumn Destination reference system Space character f Other character
30. Steckverbindung Symbol 1 17dB Stichab MA BauteilInfo ii Basisdaten Nr 1 Nr 2 D mpfung 0 0 dB Symbol Daten Nr 2 Standardpaket Nr 3 Frequenzgang Nr 4 oo HF Eingang a URL Richtung einfrieren URL T te ik V Fernspeisung aktiv Gruppe fo Anschluss Info V R ckweg speren Maximalstrom 99 A Anschluss Info e Steckverbindung Pinnamianha N atan mi Signalquelle A Punkt Text Punkk C Nodeld Objld 29 RP 440 signalquelle B The drawing above indicates how by blocking the return path for point C you can ensure that AND accepts the return path receiver at signal source B AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 343 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation 9 4 7 Return Path calculation as part of the network check The return path check in the network check consists of two parts e Level check e Disturbance check You can define what is to be checked in the Return Path Laser window see Page 341 Level check AND calculates the attenuation to the return path receiver for all return path transmitters sockets or worksheet outputs The return path transmitters sockets with the smallest and largest attenuation are output in the output window for every service Double clicking the corresponding message causes the associated return path transmitter to flash Unlike the amplifier settings this calculation is carried out for all active services Dete
31. and with patch field PFO4 mounted to mounting pin MO1 of the rack Pin PO1 yields the hierarchy path RO117 PFO4 M01 P01 Hierarchy path From the hierarchy of symbols and rectangles the hierarchy path is built as a sequence of installation numbers with separators or replacements of the installation numbers e Parent symbols are always included even if they have no installation number or address e Rectangles are included if an installation number or address is given Standard syntax for hierarchy paths e Rectangles are separated by e Mounted symbols are separated by e Pins and splices are separated by e Type and address replacement are surrounded by brackets e g Type e Rack position is separated by if appended see settings The standard syntax may be changed using the More button of the display options dialog see below Examples e RO117 PFO4 H4 PO1 Rack Symbol with installation no RO117 mounted patch field with installation no PFO4 on rack position H4 pin with name pin name PO1 pin name in the library note rack position H4 comes from mounting pin name of rack library e RO117 PFO4 H4 PO1 Rack Symbol with installation no RO117 mounted patch field with installation no PFO4 on rack position H4 pin with name pin name PO1 pin name in the library note rack position H4 comes from attribute of PFO4 no mounting information e E121 C01 KO001 B02 F04 FO5 B06 K0002 Enclosure E121 cassette C01 splice
32. kokao Socket 16 fis Cable 28a kes _ kakano Socket 16 fis foame 28a kes __ _ HK 4 20 Socket 16 inko Bambus Cable 277 KESN Kakao Socket 16 inke Bambus Cable 277 KESN ___ kakao Socket 16 inke Bamouslcabie 277 KESN HK 4 20 Socket 16 fiak Bambus Cabie 279 kesa _ _ anse nn es a an aaa A a nann enn 6 Fs a 9 fo o 2 10 11 12 13 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 419 of 452 11 Output options 11 1 Printing 11 1 4 Printing drawings drawing sections or blocks Printing drawings To print out a network drawing choose FILE gt Print or click the printer icon The Print window will open Printer Specify the worksheet you want to Name ENA Properties print here State Ready Type Canon iA C2620 PCL5c Location 10 0 0 230 1 Comment Write into File Printing Range Copies C All Number of Copies 1 c 1 1 Block Printing drawing sections To print out the section of the drawing visible on the screen choose FILE gt Print Current View The print preview window will open T AND FibreCoax 4 3 Main Alternative 43 Main Alternative 261_2_HK Onet HK 261 20 f int i PDF Export Info Zoom In Close Activate printing here Projekt Main Alternative 261_2 HK_O net lt HK 261 2 01 gt Datum 10 13 2010 9 43 Printing blocks Select a block from your network drawing and press the P key for P
33. this button will cancel your operation When Ok button is pressed a new XML file containing the hotspot data is generated then the hotspot in inserted in database The hotspots will be added in overview the hotspot is visible if the assigned layer is visible Edit hotspot data Different from dependent hotspots independent ones must be available for edit ing moving deleting The independent hotspots are edited as objects with attached dots Modal properties dialog or dock able dot properties bar via object context menu entry Properties respectively Dot properties Both mentioned dialogs will send data to server database for updating when editing is finished Example A hotspot can be re edited click on hotspots When Edit object dlg opens the user is able change DOT Name the variables Text size Text Angle Text Justification position When the user confirms the dlg with Ok the information is sent to server database for updating Special case Text size Click on hotspot When Edit object dlg opens the user is able to change Text size To see the modifications in metadot properties in Edit hotspot properties dlg set Show Label option to Show both symbol and label Default value is 1 New Var Modify Text size to 4 and the label will change size New Var AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 270 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots
34. vidual components to the tem perature groups The individual cable can then be assigned to a tem perature group in the draw ing itself using the Edit Ob ject window Checking the remote supply Set up warmings for Net Check Wamings Check net structure Setup amplitiers Temperature drift Check remote supply Check socket levels Check bridge points Check open tap pin levels Check distortion Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream Test pomt CURRENT TSAGET com Check leakage lirit For check of level and distortion Check redundant optical line too 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check Set up warnings for Net Check Warnings i Check net structure i Setup amplifiers Check remote supply Check socket levels V Check bridge points C Check open tap pin levels C Check distortion V Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream Test point CURRENT TARGET com C Check leakage limit For check of level and distortion Check redundant optical line too The Temperature Drift Check calculates the levels and distortion ratios at minimum and maximum temperature If this calculation finds limits that are exceded or amplfiers that don t reach their target values warnings are generated The temperature limits are determined from the temperature group affiliation of the components Edit temperatu
35. 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode In constant power mode the amplifier is regulated to a fix output power That power is the total power of all signals together I e if you have a total power of 20 dBm and 4 signals each Signal has 14 dBm if you have only 2 signals you have 17 dBm for each signal Constant power mode is the initial value after creation In AND 4 4 and lower all optical amplifiers were in constant power mode In constant gain mode the amplifier has a fix amplification Each input signal will be ampli fied by that amplification By default power and amplification are given by the values out of library They can be optional ly overwritten by user AND stores whether the values are user edited If you do a group replacement for an amplifier and amplification and power are not edited until now the new amplifier will inherit the values from the new library object But if that values were user edited they will be kept AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 68 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Optical terminal devices The Edit Object window contains the Terminal Device tab for physical terminal devices laser optical receivers 4 Edit Object _ gs GS Object Data Create reports about all wner Data terminal devices and routes janie dain for the selected customer RA dann The listed customers are Se aie i atabase entries biel the global project T custo
36. 40 150 260 370 480 590 700 810 CTB spectrum for 91 channels higher frequency range digital calculated without the transmission function Worst CTB ratio 56 6 dB at 591 25 MHZ AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 357 of 452 9 Calculations 9 8 Information about the distortion product calculation The accuracy of the results can be further improved if you specify amplification ripple data in the library You will find more information about entering measurement series in the Component Editor Help If you want to track the calculation results in detail you must make sure that in the distortion calculation the library entries for level and pre emphasis are always interpreted in the context of Setting the Return Path Transmitters see Page 330 Power lines A signal is usually defined by two values level and pre emphasis Defining the complex frequency response curve of a level with just two values greatly simplifies the situation AND offers the use of two different definitions of the terms level and pre emphasis You can switch between the two definitions using the Use Power Lines for Amplifier Setup option see section in Editing Return Path Services Page 328 Definition A Level Level in highest channel Pre emphasis Level in highest channel Level in lowest channel This definition is easy to understand and widely used It is used as a standard presetting The disadvantage of this definition is that by s
37. A B PHT a a 3 a rT ams e e j S He MPJ co f m ef MP 24 iae a L J B out C out C out C out 7817665 C out C out C out o 3 O Here you will now find all details regarding the amplifer station This does not result in any restrictions regarding the calculation You now have a powerful design that improves overview clarity Like the amplifier station the connection points in the above example can also be implemented as worksheets which are then carried over to Network Level 4 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 202 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets 6 3 1 Creating worksheets Whenever you create a new project document an empty worksheet is automatically creat ed This can be used immediately for Network Level 3 components You can create additional worksheets using the toolbar in the document window ne New Sheet Standard F3 Here you select the type of worksheet New Sheet Amplifier Shift gt F3 you wish to create G New Sheet Headend Ctrl Shift F3 E New Sheet NL4 Installation Ctrl F3 New Sheet Optical Node New Sheet variable from Lib Alt F3 The worksheet types e Standard This is an empty dashed line frame that is useful when the contents are not best repreented by symbols or icons e Amplifier This type is suitable for amplifier st
38. AND Solution GmbH Page 177 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps Importing multiple raster files If you would like to load more than one raster map into the background of a worksheet switch to the Arrange Background plotting mode Here you can load up to eight raster maps simultaneously They will be automatically if tab or tfw files are available or manually arranged to fit seamlessly together You will find more information in the Background Editor section see Page 192 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 178 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps 5 1 2 WMSClient Plugin With the AND WmsClient Plugin it is possible to query maps via standardized WMS to fetch them from any WMS servers and to display them as a background in AND Gis projects WMS documents The AND WmsClient Plugin administers information about the data sources from which WMS data are requested and via the layers that are communicated in the WMS queries The plugin administers these information in own documents These own WMS documents are stored with the filename extension mapdoc either in the glob al setting path or in the user directory and loaded from there A number of GUI elements are used to select and manage these documents These are de scribed in Section 0 A WMS document contains a list of WMS data sources each describing the WMS server and a list of the WMS layers to be used in queries As the result
39. AND Solution GmbH Page 282 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 1 Creating NIS structures 7 1 Creating NIS structures You can create an NIS structure either from a drawing or independently of a drawing 7 1 1 Creating NIS structures from AND drawings Open a drawing for which you would like to create an NIS structure Choose the PROJECT DATA gt Generate Project Structure command A new document will open The NIS structure will be shown with a toolbar ie Sb ee SE i 7 1 2 Creating NIS structures without drawings If you do not have a drawing for a network or you have a drawing with network logic that you want to document you can generate an NIS project and create objects within it A file of type nis is created when you save the NIS project AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 283 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 2 Displaying NIS structures 7 2 Displaying NIS structures The NIS editor offers a range of options for displaying networks thematically 7 2 1 Displaying nodes NIS nodes can be displayed in symbols or in text Use VIEW gt Symbol View from the menu to switch the display between the two options In addition you can show the address and or installation number in the symbol view Do this by choosing VIEW gt Show Addresses or VIEW gt Show Installation Numbers The following example shows you an optical node in Symbol viewText viewSymbol
40. Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Schochenmiihle Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Schochenmuhle Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch 1554 94 7 8 Chollerstrasse 6 Rotel 6300 Zug offen Hoch 1554 94 7 8 Chollerstrasse 6 Rotel 6300 Zug offen Hoch 1554 94 7 8 Chollerstrasse 6 Rotel 6300 Zug offen Hoch SSK Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch 1554 94 0 9 Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Rotel 6300 Zug Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Bohlbach 6300 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Bohlbach 6300 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Bohlbach 6300 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch H henweg 630 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch H henweg 630 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch 1554 94 0 6 Dorfstr 126300 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch 1554 94 0 6 Dorfstr 126300 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Loebern 6300 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Loebern 6300 Chollerstrasse 6 offen H
41. Copying using the mouse Select the object by moving the mouse pointer over it and drag it to the desired position while holding down the left mouse button While you position the object you can rotate it in 90 increments by pressing the R key Or you can snap it to another object using the F key see also Snapping Page 132 If you are working in geo schematics you can also rotate the object in 1 or 2 increments with the S and D keys Copying using the keyboard Select the object by moving the mouse over it Press the B key to activate the moving mode Move the object in the desired direction with the arrow keys Press the spacebar to deactivate the moving mode While you position the object you can rotate it in 90 increments by pressing the R key Or you can snap it to another object using the F key see also Snapping Page 132 If are working in geo schematics you can also rotate the object in 1 or 2 increments with the S and D keys AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 36 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 12 Deleting objects 2 12 Deleting objects Delete objects by selecting them and pressing the Del key delete Now the selected object will blink red and a query window will open asking you whether you really want to delete the object Confirm the deletion AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 37 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 13 Loading libraries for object selection 2 13 Loading libraries fo
42. Costing components are defined in the library with the Component Editor There are two types of costing obects e Length objects can only refer to cables and cable channels The length of the reference object is used to determine the quantity of the costing object e Piece objects can only refer to symbols Price calculation for materials and labor If you want to output a list of with prices for material and labor select MATERIAL gt Report The Edit Component List window will open Order No Ar Name Description S Q Unit Pr EM A BIEz6 5 E265 Entzerer 6 5 jen 4 u HF Patchkabel HF Verbindungskabel fixe 4 1 tn Click here to create a new list m ee a a a You can change the contents of T ii A individual fields in the bill of materials Double click a field and enter your data D oooo Calculate Package Units Filter Objects by State All I Filter by Task You can add materials or edit entries with the right mouse button Add Merge Get Difference Completion 4 m Zi Time h fo Hardware fo All fo Ready 5 Entries 5 objects passed filter Layer Art Ord No Notice Please note that for reasons of documentation authenticity the last bill of materials calculated in a project is saved when the OK button is clicked to exit this window
43. Fig 15 The red microduct cable for house 2 remains unchanged because the status is built The microducts of houses 4 6 12 10 and 8 are newly set The colors have been rearranged AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 385 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Assignment options Assignment Order a Assignment Order Order Order from top from left from bottom from right J top bottom top left right left bottom top bottom right left right Fig 16 and Fig 17 Assignment options The first of these dialog boxes is shown if the height of the duct package is greater than its width Otherwise you left right is shown instead of top bottom If the checkbox is activated the microducts that were reserved in the LibEdit are also extend ed Editing microducts Changing the color It is possible to change the color of a microduct manually This is done by opening the editing window of the object by clicking on the relevant microduct You will find the desired color under Conduit The colors with gray text for example Blue 2 are already being used but they can be exchanged with the current color of the microducts Microduck from top to bottom 1 fromtopto bottom 1 _ frombottomtotop 30 3 State from bottom to top f rom top to bottom from bottom to top f 4 from top to bottom from bottom to top Fig 18 Colors that can be selec
44. Finally press the Esc key to finish plotting the cable Place the label in the desired location and press the Esc key again oS Ss 6 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 167 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 4 Trench cross sections 4 4 Trench cross sections A trench cross section object allows you to view the contents of a trench section that is to see which cables and conduits are in the trench A trench cross section consists of three parts The trench cross section object 90 itself Plot the icon across the trench with a start and end point The arrow 0 indicates the direction from which you are looking into the trench cross section The trench cross section label with a virtual conduit graphically shows the data for the trench cross section for example how many conduits and cables are in the trench Enter this data in the Edit Object window You can change the direction of view by right clicking the trench cross section object and choosing the change direction of view command The arrow now indicates the opposite direction The conduits displayed in the Edit Objects window are mirrored Here is how you draw in a trench cross section 1 Click the New Trench Cross Section Area icon on the toolbar The mouse point will take the form of crosshairs with a small square in the middle 4 Click on both sides of the trench for each point The trench cross section label
45. KO0001 B02 F03 FO7 B05 KO0002 Cable No KOO001 Bundle No 2 Fibre No 3 to CableKOOOO2 Bundle 5 Fibre 7 If no cable number is given e g for pigtails the splice side may be left out altogether By default the splice name is only displayed for the start point i e only in reports dynamic labels only exist for symbols not for splice points The splice name display can be turned on for destination points too e g if more than one splice resides in a cassette and the cassette information is not sufficient AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 121 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 2 14 7 Automatic numbering of objects The new numbering was created to address some issues and lack of features of the current numbering e Ability to detect on object move that its counter collides with an existing one and allocat ing it a new one for example when an object with a sheet counter with value 1 is moved into another sheet where the counter 1 is already used the current numbering allocates the object a new counter e Issues on sheet operations related to counters e The new numbering allows numbering setting for a lot more object types than previously e There exists now the possibility to have numbering settings per library object and per metadot e A new counter type was added location rectangle counter which can be used to number all objects inside a location rectangle e An external counter typ
46. Line Styles Display options Dimensioning Styles Testpoint Settings Exitpoint Defaults Target Level Settings User Select language Additional Settings Thematic colouring Fiber Bundle Settings NIS Sketch Trenchplan Print Rect Tasktable Save All Settings Save settings for other users Factory Settings In addition to the program settings menu many of these settings can also be saved in each project if they influence documentation authenticity Please note that AND creates a profile for each user That means in most cases the settings made only apply to the user logged into the operating system This ensures that every user can configure his or her own AND without affecting other users AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 292 of 452 8 1 Factory settings 8 Settings 8 1 Factory settings Stored factory settings can be used to carry out objective independent of project settings network tests This function is intended for use in monitoring network plans created externally Because external planners may have changed settings at their discretion the settings saved in a project do not guarantee that all requirements will be met during a network check In this case the factory settings can be used to reset previously made settings to their original status You will find the following functions under OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Factory Settings e S
47. New Doc will generate a new empty document AND Information Sheet is not empty Do you want to clear it or to create a new project AND Information i If you selected Delete in the Worksheet is not Empty window and at least one signal source exists in the active sheet AND will ask you whether an existing Signal source should be used in automatically generating the network If you confirm this message with Yes you will be shown a list of the existing signal sources from which you can select the desired signal sources AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 154 of 452 3 Automatic Drawing Mode 3 4 Generating a drawing AND Information i This message appears if the network to be generated does not fit in the active sheet The workspace is not wide Select OK to enlarge the sheet accordingly or enough for the drawing Cancel if you do not wish to generate the network Enlarge it Cancel AND Information i Select Yes if you want AND to reduce the Sheet to the smallest possible size Resulting network would fit into a smaller sheet Otherwise select No AN Do you want to decrease the sheet size This message appears if the automatic function cannot find the components or libraries and cannot load them In the output window you will find a message about which components could not be loaded e A feed point is selected in the automatic function as t
48. Only calculates the difference between the loaded materials and the currently available materials in the project Enhance Enhances the loaded material in order to compare it with the missing materials in the current project Edit form Starts ReportDesigner and enables you to edit the current report form or create a new form Printing To print out the bill of materials click the Print button in the Materials List window AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 416 of 452 11 Output options 11 1 Printing 11 Output options In AND there are a variety of options for outputting data You can print to a printer or plotter export data to Word or Excel and generate reports that you can design individually with ReportDesigner 11 1 Printing In AND you can print out the following elements e Test point lists Distortion spectrums see the Calculating Network Performance Worst Values in the Network section Page 352 Bills of materials see the Price Calculation for Materials and Labor section Page 415 Network topologies Connector lists Drawings drawing section or blocks Splice boxes A detailed description of printing options is also given in the GisArea manual see Section 1 2 11 1 1 Printing test point lists Test point lists show all test points of either the current worksheet or the entire plan You can print this list or export it to a text file or Excel worksheet Measured data for test points can
49. Program Settings gt Thematic Colouring Options from the menu The Thematic Colouring Options window opens Thematic colouring Options State Colouring Options State Select the status for which you want State color a to define a color here linewidth Noma R 2 Then define a color M Draw Crosses over the objects Signal Path Colouring Signal Path Color ov Free Wires Colouring h Free Wires Color M Free wires limit 12 i K V Show Dialog for entering the free wire limit Save Settings Load Settings Cancel ox l eR wae AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 236 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status Orders Orders are implemented as from Build 816 Summary On the Planning Type and Status toolbar there is an Order combo box that displays the current order Planning Type Default Status Unknown ask Task xy k Fig 1 The current order is Order xy All newly created objects are automatically assigned the current order as an object attribute If an existing object is moved so that the connected pins change the moved object will also be assigned the current order The bill of materials and the interconnect plan can be filtered by orders The order can be modified all at once using the block editing function for many objects The status of the order e g built can be propagated to all objects Orders can be marking active Bundles
50. R function there also ist the option to use the compatibility settings Each of the hierarchy path settings is edited with a dialog like the following one with a different title and maybe some fields deactivated and with different standard values Hierarchy Path Dynamic Label Settings m Hierarchy Path Address Maximum levels of path p Destination labels NON AON NTH ol V Relativize destination with respect to start CTH 0 Append Splice for Destinations too NON NON 0 Min Levels NON 2 Relativized address replacement if empty 2 Installation Number If the installation number is empty or forced replacement is selected it can be replaced If the replacement is empty and the constant replacement text is empty the level is not displayed in the hierarchy path J Replace installation number even if not empty force replacements Whole path replacement if empty Library Symbol Jv 1 If empty replace by symbol type 2 Replacement if empty E m Internal Symbol AutoSpliceBox Bundle J 1 If empty replace by symbol type 2 Replacement if empty m Rectangle Jv 1 If empty replace by address Jv 2 If empty replace by symbol type 3 Replacement if empty a m Pin Name Jv 1 If empty replace by relative partner pin 2 Replacement if empty Replace pin name even if not empty force replacement Emit Pin Name as R
51. Right clicking with the mouse on a location on the screen opens the context menu This means the commands and functions possible at this location are shown This is a quicker way of carrying out command and is used very frequently in AND AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 21 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 3 Working with the mouse Answering the query window with the mouse or keyboard The program displays a window for various functions to wait for a decision from you This window can contain two or three answer buttons You can answer by clicking the appropriate answer button with the left mouse button However it is faster regardless of where the mouse pointer is if you simply click the desired answer with the left middle or right mouse button If you would rather answer using the keyboard the left mouse button is represented by the Esc key the middle button by the N key and the right button by the spacebar Delete object Click with the left mouse button Esc key Click with the middle mouse button N key Do you want to delete the linepart Click with the right mouse button spacebar Click with the left mouse button Esc key Choose cabletype E Click with the right mouse button spacebar Assign cable type f Fiber 1x6 Fiber 1x2 Choose from library Cancel This functions are only available if the program is set to AND 3 2 compatible keyboard and mouse inputs Options
52. Select 1st object of the route will appear in the context menu of the symbol Zoom all Zoom into Zoom detail zoom last Ctrl PgDown Select all objects CTRL 9 B Move object M Copy object E Delete object F Color Layer Edit location T Label P Pin information 5 Open sheet Lock object Remote supply activated I Component information Manage Layers used by Object Ki krl R Calculate level Ctr E Reverse Level Select first object of path Y C50 CTE C N Calculation Generate Logic Plan 5 Generate Logic Plan For Remate Powering J Show Signalpath Colored Insert OLE Object K krl K Load block Load sheet Save sheet PrintiExport Schematic Plans Print active View Properties Enter Add Hotspot Here i Set hotspot geo position here AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 105 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Options dialog The following dialog box appears Coloring Options a x Color of Free Wires wy Minimum count of Free wires Don t show this dialog in Future concel_ Here you can set the minimum number of free fibers and the color of the routes project setting By activating the No Longer Display this Dialog Box checkbox you can suppress display of the dialog box program setting The dialog options can also be changed using the menu Menu Options gt Program Settings gt Thematic Colour
53. Snapping The snap function for component connections is a positioning assistant with which you can precisely place component icons on existing icons or a cable That is a component is placed such that at least one of the connections for that component is lying exactly on an existing component connection or cable The snap function is automatically active and causes a component being positioned always to be pulled to a connection as soon as one of the component connections approaches an existing connection This happens when the distance between the two connections is less than 5 pixels If the mouse moves away again the icon disconnects and moves with the mouse again As soon as a component being positioned touches a cable with the mouse cursor the icon on the cable will be aligned important this only applies to cables on the mouse cursor not to all cables near the connections because AND would otherwise not be able to decide which cable to use If you wish to plot a cable and attach it to a component connection but no other cable is connected there the snap function is effective That is positioning the cable is finished at this connection and other cable data may be queried that is you can go ahead and plot the next cable Otherwise the cable cannot be positioned on the selected connection You can also receive assistance by activating the Snap with Tone option in the default settings A successful connection will a
54. The corresponding pin will be shown red in the drawing Select the desired pin and click OK 8 The Select Assembly Object window will open again AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 139 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Planning status If you would like to differentiate in your plan between the parts that are still being planned and the network sections that are already completed use the planning status 1 2 Select the power supplies that you want to identify as being planned A block will be created Click the block with the left mouse button The Edit Window will open Under General Properties on the Common Properties tab choose the in planning being planned option from the drop down list box for the Status If you select individual objects and assign planning status you can find the status on the Location Installation No tab in the Status drop down list box Color settings for the various planning statuses can be defined using the OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Thematic Coloring option Define the status color here Making the planning status visible You can make the planning status of individual objects visible by activating the Show Planning Status in Color S icon on the Warnings toolbar AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 140 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 15 Optical connectors optical connections 2 15 Optical connectors optical connections
55. The headend is located in this second worksheet SAT IF distributions single cable systems are possible in theory However IF compatible components must be selected These single cable systems are mainly suited for loop through networks with low subscriber numbers Because most headend systems are allowed to have relatively high output levels you may find that the automatic function tries to compensate for potentially low dB with an amplifier In some circumstances such an amplifier can no longer be found minimum amplification is too high AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 156 of 452 3 Automatic Drawing Mode 3 5 Tap Optimization 3 5 Tap Optimization Set the target attenuation and target level for the taps as follows Select any passive component for example a cable and choose the Tap Optimization command from the context menu The Optimization Options will open Optimization Options i l x Optimization Targets EOT AAR R Target level at each tapoutput fo dbp Target upstream attenuation to each tapoutput Eoo dB Search best solution Take extra time m Target Level in dependency of the amount of subscribers gt tings Target Level Limit Level fo dB Cancel e Target attenuation forware path at each TAP exit The target attentuation for the forward path for each tap exit point should be as close to the target value as possible 12 dB in this example
56. V Add a Crosstext for this Data Format Text Mm Kabelnr Installation Type Un Note If you wish to change properties subsequently such as the length of a cable always do so in the Edit Object Window see Page 16 and not directly in the label text because this has no effect on the calculation functions The label text will be adjusted automaticall AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 129 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 2 14 9 Design drawing and positioning assistance AND assists you in a variety of ways so that you can create a correct network plan quickly and easily Rotating while positioning AND provides the following key commands with which you can rotate an object while positioning it D key rotate through 2 S key rotate through 1 R key rotate through 90 O key reset to 0 A key rotates to adapt to the object being positioned AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 130 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode LocalArea Coax _ FibreCoax Vectorizing background plans EAA A background plan see Chapter 5 can be a site plan a topographical map or a story floor plan of a building These plans often contain information that you do not require in your network plans If you do not have graphics software like AutoCAD to create plans in the necessary form use the AND design and plotti
57. a Automatic Route Connection r Settings for Automatic Route Connection Used Object Type Links Bundles Connection Type spliced Wire State planned Priority Mid Automatically Use bundles for autospliceboxes else use links Object State Planning New Z Cancel If Used Object Type is set to Links the pin pairs in the sheets are connected using a pair of link objects If Used Object Type is set to Bundles the pin pairs are connected using a bundle The attrib utes of the created bundles can be defined in this dialog Connection type Spliced patched wire state priority If Automatically is set AND will use bundles if at least one of the 2 pins to be connected be longs to an Autosplicebox Otherwise AND will use links In the combo box Object State you set state of all objects created during automatic connec tion Requirements The sheets contain no multiplexing elements Splitters DWDM Automatic connection does not support multiplexing elements path dividers inside the sheets In this case the following warning is displayed in the output window Sheet lt sheet name gt is containing a multiplexer or splitter Maybe the result must be corrected manually AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 73 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode If you have luck the result is still OK If not best is to establish the connections in
58. a EE ga BT Al 3a BT Al Otfenbachstr 6 1 Faser B41 A1 3a B2 Ad Offenbachstr amp 2P E eung sa Bz Ad sa B4 AS r BO Cffenbachstr 10 34 B4 A3 4 Faser B1 Ad ten The displayed name of the route 23 11 4 in this case can be entered in the dialog box for editing the route in the ConnectionId field The Print Sheets button fills the AND print preview with all worksheets of the route From there the worksheets can be printed or exported in PDF format The Splice Patch Order checkbox filters according to the Splice Patch in Order status Bundle connections with another status are removed from the interconnect plan AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 98 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode g Locate fiber break The distance to the break location from one cable end is entered by the user If the sought location is within the project the break is labeled with a break symbol on the cable and AND jumps to this position If the break location is outside the current project the end of the route flashes and the remaining distance to be break location appears in the output window AND always searches for the break from the cable pin into the cable The direction of the break location search is therefore already defined when the cable pin is selected Starting the break location search The search can be called in two ways Either directly from the context menu of one pin of a fiber o
59. for the conversion of field strength dBuV m to output dBuV where f is the frequency in MHz and c is the speed of light AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 345 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Noise in the return path For the return path transmitter of type Worksheet Outputs see Calculating the Return Path Level at One Point Page 342 the noise is simply taken from the ratio in the Noise Ratio field Noise is divided into two parts e Noise during cable modem transmission e Permanent cable modem noise Noise during cable modem transmission This portion increases with the transmission level and is therefore described as the ratio in dB If your service is defined as a Time Multiplexer this noise is counted exactly once per receiver If your service has subchannels the neighboring channels will also be subject to interference by transmission in a subchannel In the Edit Upstream Services see Page 328 window enter by how much less in dB a directly neighboring channel is disturbed than the transmitting channel itself Also enter by how much less more remote subchannels are disturbed Using these two values AND can calculate noise during transmission in all other subchannels Where frequency multiplexing is used AND assumes that exactly one cable modem is transmitting in each subchannel at any one time In the Check Return Channel window see Page 325 it is always assumed that the modems
60. o Si Floor City supplement Part of the building I City district ee z a I Areasearch 100 Address ype comey ae ety Cy suppe Cty dstict_ Street House na Denmark 2970 H rsholm Hovedgaden 16 Created if Denmark 2970 H rsholm Hovedgaden 16 E Denmark H rsholm Hovedgaden 16 Description M l v B KHOLMEN 0 M l v B KHOLMEN 35 Mal BAEKHOLMEN 33 Text Size ft nee eee of gt Text Justification I r OK ee Geopos POINT 325271 Search in DB Delete Create as new address OK Cancel The area search might be combined with the regular search filters so it might address queries of type search for all addresses 50 meters around the cursor position which have the City and description like 4 Press Search button gt The list returned is a list of valid addresses in the vicinity of the component 5 Select the applicable address from the given list example City Freising House Number 14 then press OK button gt The address fields are filled with the selected address information AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 230 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options 6 5 4 Sheet legends AND distinguishes between static and dynamic sheet legends Static legends are automatically generated by AND and filled with content from the existing program variables see Section 11 4 2 on Page 439 ff They cannot be changed An example of
61. plus offer him beside the blob based architecture also a fully DB open possibility to operate with additional data This is often an argument for a GIS based system Hotspots are project independent and will be updated direct within DB and not via checkin The access to such objects should be via import export and editing within client via SOAP and direct via database access The target is to manage and visualize data within the geographic context History In current NDS system we already use so called dependent hotspots These hotspots are created for existing objects in plan projects In metadata xml is specified which dots should get hotspots and the metadot of the hotspot These hotspots are just simple representation of plan objects in overview projects and belong to the same project as the plan objects AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 249 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots 6 8 2 Application functional detailing Visualization Showing within overview All Hotspots of different types that have geo position are visible within overview Client Viewer Web Hotspots do relate to global layers whose zoom ranges has to be considered in query and when showing them The objects are not hold in top files but fetched from database by doing a geo query e The hotspot has the graphical appearance according to graphical appearance color size and conditions set by user in independen
62. ratio is fixed while the noise ratio is dependent on the number of residential units behind the connection point Distortion ingress data AND assumes that the ingress in the apartment can reach the network via every user output of a socket This apartment distortion ingress is calculated using the values in the dialog box as follows The Assumed Ingress value is converted into density with the Ingress measured at bandwidth and attenuated with the Assumed screening in the apartment and Assumed screening of the building values For more information see the Power Line section see Page 358 The shielding factor of a component is extracted from the library In the library there are two values for the shielding factor one for the forward path Screening field and one for the return path Return Path Screening field The following two elements determine which type is to be used if the return path shielding according to the library is OdB not specified If the Use forward screening option is active and a forward shielding has been entered in the library this value is used otherwise a standard shielding factor is applied The Component screening button opens the dialog box for defining these standard values 3 values dependent on component type AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 325 of 452 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check Test point actual target comparison If you have entered the measured values for the
63. some paths may be ambiguous and would otherwise disturb the sorting order consider e g two hierarchies with installation numbers A B C and A B C they both yield hierarchy path A B C Also if no installation number is given or the numbers are the same sorting uses the positions of the objects and if these are the same on different sheets it uses the internal IDs Moreover sorting by hierarchy can first consider the address and then the hierarchy or only the hierarchy It is highly recommended to use pin port number with leading zeros in the library editor and installation numbers compatible with alphabetic sorting for each level e g PO1 P02 P03 PO9 P10 P11 P12 since without leading zeros level wise sorting will dis turb the intended order P1 P10 P11 P12 P2 P9 Grouping The optional group line is designed to work with the sorting by hierarchy if the context of a connection point splice patch pin changes i e if the hierarchy without the lowest level AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 374 of 452 9 Calculations 9 12 Calculation for optical Networks splice pin changes a group line is inserted e g before a pin of the next patch field is to be listed Order of the Splice sides For splices as reference points as opposed to destination points next final the two splice sides are equivalent The splice sides can be ordered line by line given comparison criteria The ordering is
64. than once Opens the Worksheet Presettings window see below Deletes the entire worksheet irretrievably You select a predefined sheet size here As you can specify the actual size of objects using the symbol scaling function this setting is not very important It is used on the one hand for compatibility with Type Default sheet x landscape I Fix form Defaultsheet B portrait Sort options Set numbers Cancel earlier AND versions and on the other hand for presetting the printout size If the symbol scale is not changed you can assume that the symbols will be the same absolute size when printed out if the specified sheet size corresponds to the paper size when printed out The feature in AND allowing you to scale the sheet size freely for any paper size in printing is not affected by this Note If components have already been drawn in the sheet some sizes in the selection list may be grayed out because scaling down to this sheet size would lead to components lying outside the sheet border Sheet presettings Here you specify the settings for newly created sheets m Presettings for Sheets Edit presettings for Application z Sheet type Default sheet 1st sheet v Settings fix variable Sheetsize DIN A4 160 x 114 z C free Width 160 Height 114 Scaling M Use Scale 3 0000 0 2000 Type Default sheet Site Plan F Show arid
65. the link is the cable like side because logical objects are in the list higher than real symbols If you have at the start point 2 objects with same rank in the list i e a cable connected to another cable the cable side is the side of the start object The object which was selected when breakage search was called Color codes of fibers Fiber optic cables are themselves made up of bundles of individual optic fibers To be able to distinguish between these individual optic fibers colors are assigned to the bundles and fibers based on color codes Cables are assigned different codes Therefore several color codes can be created for cables Color codes can be defined in LibEdit 256 or 255 colors are available for this The color codes are stored in the library and apply to all programs If a conflict arises when a library is opened because the ID name and codes of the library and program differ the program asks whether the ID should be replaced or the code overwritten The color code assigned to a cable can be viewed in AND in the object properties bundle fiber settings If a cable has not been assigned a color code the program uses a standard color code that is defined in AND If a color code contains fewer colors for fibers or bundles than are actually contained in the cable the color code for the n 1 bundle fiber starts from the beginning again n max index color code that is with the first color etc CdsClasslib Co
66. the querying software function re ceives a map for each data source listed These maps are joined to form an overall map with separate display options for each data source WMS documents can be embedded in AND projects That means that when the AND project is next loaded the configuration previously used at the same of saving that is the currently selected WMS document with any modified visibility settings will be restored again even if the WMS document files used at the time of saving are no longer separately available WMS data sources A WMS data source contains the URL of the WMS server to be used as well as the display options that are required when the maps of all WMS data sources of the WMS document are joined The WMS data source also contains a hierarchical list of WMS layers with information about their visibility WMS layers A WMS layer contains information about its own visibility that is whether it is available for viewing whether it will always be displayed or never or automatically Automatically means depending on the current display scale A range of scales within which the WMS layer will be used in the query to the WMS scanner can be defined as a default visibility setting The visibility can be preset to Auto On or Off It is additionally possible to define that any coordinate bounding box that may be active will be ignored in the query GUI elements WMS documents are managed and display of the sup
67. you can call menu commands select objects from a library or the worksheet zoom the worksheet or select another sheet You can recognize standard mode by the white arrow shape of the mouse pointer Shape of the mouse pointer in standard mode bs Positioning mode You are positioning mode after you have seleced an object from the library and are plotting it on the worksheet or after you have selected an object on the worksheet and are moving it You can recognize positioning mode by the black cross shape of the mouse pointer Crosshairs comprising a vertical and a horizonal line light blue and the selected icon violet are also attached to the pointer Shape of the mouse pointer in positioning mode Block mode You will be in block mode after you have selected more than one object on the worksheet Any subsequent actions then apply to the whole block of selected objects The dashed border shows the objects in the block On the status bar you can see whether you are in standard positioning or block mode In positioning mode it will also specify details about the objects you are positioning Default mode Position symboal Position cable Position text Select block The following drawing modes are distinguished Network planning Civil works planning Background arranging View setting in the GIS Area module only Tile editing in the GIS Area module only AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Pag
68. 291 AND Solution GmbH Page 5 of 452 coco 0 cD 0 0 9 9 W 00 wwuwuww NN H ONUMBRWNEeE NO e NO UB WN Ee N e WOODOGD OOG P VOLVLLVLOVP OOH OVP O N e NNNNN 27H U APPAAARARA W NNN PER AUNE Contents SGUEINGS oirrne iea 292 Factory SCCUINGS isrisarii iA AA Aa Aa 293 Project Setting S sirsiran 295 TESCPOINCSEHINGS ririri rara a a n a a a EA 296 Program settiNgS siiri a 299 AUCO GVE asiriene o a AE ueawanstaeatnds ontacanitawsdadstatawenites 299 Setting program DSCNS lt 5 seamed oe cera a e E A A eS 300 Setting line styles and display options ssssssssssssssesssrsnesssnssnsnennsnennssenneseene 301 Setting User Males assa irea E E E bade E recta cesdsaaeceanseas 302 Setting the program language arrean a A A O A Aa 302 Additional Settings arraina iea ANO EAE A aad eae AETA 303 CalCUlatiOnS iscrta pnn TR Roar n ar 304 Calculating levels orricriirii aAa 305 Possible reasons for level calculation failure sssssesnssnssnnsnnnnnrrnnsrrnnerrsnenrenns 306 Reversed COMDONGEIUS iin a a a a a 307 Amplifier Settings ciririsarririnnapr siaaa 308 Setting all amplifiers at Once sssssssssssssssnsssnnssssnsssnnssrnnesnnnesnsnesnsnrenesennesenne 308 setting individual amplilerS cetonas a E T E 310 NetWork CHECK rinoceri A AE AAR 315 REturn path CalCulaliOn arinrin aAA Naa Ai 327 ECItING UDSroan SERVICES iaar a A O A TOA 328 Setting the return path transmitter s sssssssssssssssrsnssrnnesssnesnsnesnsneensseen
69. 4 Report designer 11 4 Report designer Report Designer is a tool for creating and editing report templates that are used in AND for printing lists and for recording network data A report template defines the layout and structure of a report You can use various graphical objects to define the appearance of the header page breaks and layout You can also add variables and functions to the templates that are then filled in with the appropriate data from the AND network drawing when printed For example the Date function is replaced by the current date when the report is used in AND Skillful use of variables and functions will make your report template independent of an AND network file enabling its use in other applications too 11 4 1 Creating report templates A report template is created in two steps e First create a new template file specify the type of report this file is intended for and then load any required variables e Then design the report template Creating new report templates 1 Start Report Designer Ideally the icon for this program prvesisnexe should be on your desktop 2 The program window of Report Designer with its own menu and toolbar and document window for a new report opens The document window contains the worksheet It is divided into section for the various sections of a report Head J Feed pd Synopsis Data Preview window AND Client Manual
70. 68 6 223 25 68 7 231 25 68 7 247 25 68 8 263 25 68 8 v 210 00 370 00 530 00 690 00 850 00 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 361 of 452 9 Calculations 9 9 Calculating test points Setting frequency displays In addition to levels for the benchmark frequencies you can also select any level and display it at a test point Do this by selecting the level you want to display by clicking it in the list of frequency values on the Level Values tab Selected levels have a checkmark in the first column Level values Mr 1 Distortion Data Mr z Data to Display Nr 3 Testpoimt History Mr 4 48 25 67 30 119 25 67 96 E s a 175 25 Gi 191 25 68 52 o 207 25 68 59 o TII I RU RR Now under Frequency Display on the Data to Be Displayed tab select the Display Selected Frequencies option Now the other selected levels will be displayed on the test point Setting frequencies for multiple test points Select OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Test Point Settings and click the Live Test Point Object Settings button in the Test Point Settings window Now click the More Settings button in the Live Test Point window The Selection of Displayed Frequencies window will open Here you can select all test points for which you wish to select a certain number of frequencies in order to display them If you select a signal source only the test points for this signal source will be displayed All channels in the selected sign
71. 7 1 Setting planning types for the project Choose PROJECT DATA gt Planning Types from the menu to open the following window Edit Planning Types Selecta planning type and All planning types Planning Type specify whether it is to be used Planning Type Name NL 3 in the project i ls Available in current project Specify here whether the selected Pi e a planning type will be linked with TE Laver EReee a layer and then select the layer a if applicable d Save Settings Load Settings coce f AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 234 of 452 6 7 2 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status Setting a status for the project Choose PROJECT DATA gt Project and Sheet Data from the menu Select a project Click the Oder Info tab Click here to make a status setting for the project Select a status and delete it if it is not needed in the project Click Add to enter a new status AND Client Manual IV C 7 i Project Data Projects and Sheets Project Header Project Properties Project Companies Order Info Project type El Projects Planni i empty project anning company Unnamed Name AND Solution GmbH Fill automatically Street Karl Schmid Str Nr 14 Zip City 181829 M nchen j Phone Specialist John Doe Order info Order number Feit History Date of order Deadline History SP Number new Settings SP Numb
72. 8 Route 4 Route 5 Lange Route 6 Lange Route 7 7 Lange 0 m Stationen 190 0 m Stationen 0 m Stationen 0 m Stationen IO n n IgE H J in w w www l v In this window the search for the output items 3 and 8 was performed and then the line with route 2 was clicked The routes appear in ascending order of their length The names of the stations are formed according to the following rule If the installation number of the worksheet symbol is not empty this will be taken as the name Otherwise the street and house number will be used as the name If these are empty too in the case of worksheet symbols the worksheet name is used in a final attempt For lengths spare lengths on the worksheet are taken into account Clicking a route colors the route with the set color The coloring is removed automatically if another route is selected or if the line is deleted The coloring can also be deactivated manually by unpressing the depressed button labeled free on the toolbar Efes AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 107 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Selecting defective fibers This function is implemented in AND 4 0 as from Build 788 In the dialog box for editing a fiber optic cable the Defective fibers gt gt button now appears If you press the button a table appears with the status of the fibers OK or defective To change the statu
73. AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 145 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 16 Creating a new document General procedures for creating a network plan Creating a complete network plan involves many separate steps Sticking to to a specific sequence throughout will speed up the whole process 1 First decide whether you want to work in a schematic or geo schematic format The geo schematic method has the advantage that in addition to network information it contains approximate location documentation within the plan Furthermore cable lengths are automatically derived from the scale which speeds up your work The disadvantage of this method is that you have a less clear overview of the switching plan when working in more complex networks This disadvantage is however compensated for by the NIS schematics generator in FIBRECOAX only In the geo schematic format you have to provide a topographical map or a site plan in DXF vector BMP TIFF or JPEG file formats Vector maps have the benefit of being zoom independent with regard to resolution In many cases such maps have different layers levels that are individually colored and can be hidden Raster maps are typically more inexpensive and easier to obtain for example by scanning If at a later date a different trench dimensioning is needed raster maps will be too inaccurate Load the map as a background The scale can be carried over when using DXF maps Wit
74. AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 221 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options Drawing types The project number see figure below item is interpreted independently of the drawing type Project Header Project Properties Project Companies Order Into Project type Identification es Project No Client Project Type unknown id O unknown NE4 Object HE4 Real Estate NE4 System itu NE3 Cluster r Headend cant m These drawing types are predefined in AND If you require other types please contact us Project technology tab t Anlagendaten xl Projekte und Arbeitsbl tter Projekt Kopf Projekt Technik ProjektFirmen Auftrags D aten Projekttyp E Projekte E leeres Projekt Netzinformationen Unnamed Netetyp C DAM QPSK 1 Versorgungstyp unbekannt moe Frequenzbereich bis jo MHz A J R ckweg m glich R ckwegfrequenz fo MHz I Riickweg skin Leistungsaufnahme 0 Ww Automatisch Austullen r Statistik gt r Kabellangen r Position gt Teilnehmer fo B Linie oo m Koordinaten 5 00 a 00 H user jo C Linie oo m Ausdehnung 5 00 1 00 NEZ ps 0 Neg 00 m i T Netzcheck erfolgreich Signal Lieferant j Sortierung Nummerieren Abbrechen You acquire the technical data for the project in this window If you press the Fill Automatically button
75. Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Olenkhende Munsterstrahe Elisenstrabe Elisenstrabe Chaussestrabe Chaussestrahe Chaussestrahe Chaussestrahe Chaussestrahe Chaussestrahe Chaussestrahe Chaussestrabe Chaussestrahe Elisenstrabe Elisenstrabe Chaussestrahe Chaussestrahe Chaussestrahe Chaussestrahe Cha nreesk alie 3 Click the desired location in the list shown and then click Search 4 A blinking red rectangle will now appear in the drawing All objects within this rectangle belong to the searched location rectangle Note If you are working in an AND server environment or a GIS area environment the locations will also be found in unopened drawings Many network operators now also require that you enter the location rectangle Search Edit Bolte Delete Unused Locations o Cne e Delete Unused Locations You will find a detailed description of the search options in the GIS Area Manual see Section 1 2 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 62 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Amplifier lists Descriptions levels entry and exit points and equipment for selected amplifiers are displayed in amplifier lists in the drawing To draw in an amplifier list use the New Amplifier List FH icon on the toolbar Open a rectangle by dragging with the mouse e Inserting the amplifier in an amplifier list Select the amplifier and press the V key for I
76. BER for any grid notify you of all required plug connections and create bills of materials with costs and assembly times 1 1 Target group of this manual required skills The target group of this manual is all users of the AND software Readers are assumed to be familiar with using personal computers and the Window operating system No skills in operating CAD programs are required AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 8 of 452 1 General information 1 2 Components of the NDS documentation 1 2 Components of the NDS documentation The documentation of the NDS software is structure into two groups 1 User documentation 2 Administrator documentation The user documentation comprises the manuals AND 4 1 GisArea incl Design Alternatives LibEdit WebInfo ViewToGo Glossary List of shortcuts The administrator documentation comprises the parts e Installation e Maintenance AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 9 of 452 1 General information 1 3 Conventions 1 3 Conventions This manual contains the description of all available versions of AND that is LocalArea COAX and FIBRECOAX Not all functions are available in all versions If a function is only available for certain versions this will be indicated accordingly Pay attention to the following figure Ww Ww Ww If a function is only available in certain license versions this is indicated by a checkmark The abbreviatio
77. CDs User Semice Fights Read Add T Admin Delete Check In Out l Delete Add i M Add M Admin Tee Check In Gut Delete Services rights CREATE Create Hotspots service right is used to manipulate hotspots Possible operations add edit move delete hotposts clear hotspots of certain type aa Properties hotspots by Add i Delete Rights hotspot hotspot rights Add Add AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 278 of 452 Services rights MANAGE 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Manage Hotspots service right is used to manipulate types of hotspots Possible operations create hotspots of certain type edit or delete hotspot type Create Edit Delete hotspots by hotspots by hotspots by t t t No rights Services rights IMPORT Hotspot Import service right gives you the permission to import hotspots You need at least Add rights Services rights EXPORT Rights Import Hotspot Export service right gives you the permission to export hotspots You need at least Read rights Legend AND Client Manual IV C Rights Export cannot do can do AND Solution GmbH Page 279 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Behaviour Hotspot XML files will only be generated at Export for Offline Viewer Every time when an Export for Offline Viewer is performed through FillLo
78. Connection Nr 3 Splicing Splice attenuation 0 00 Ww Use Default Cost per Fiber 0 EUR W Use Default Type spliced cubfopen RackSlot number latched Set Cassette for all VW Ines Cassette number s AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 144 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 16 Creating a new document 2 16 Creating a new document In general when creating a new document we recommend the following prepared steps so that you can use the AND automatic functions and quickly complete a correct network plan I 2 Create a new document with the FILE gt New Network Plan NET command Load the libraries that you need a Open the context menu in the objectt selection window select the Edit Libraries List command and click the Load button b The cursor is in the Quick Search entry field Enter the name of the library you need for example neut3 Now all items will automatically be selected that begin with the text you entered c Click the Load button and then OK to load the selected libraries The objects will be displayed in the object selection window d You can display the objects of a certain library by opening the context menu in the object selection window and choose the Select Library command Use the Neut3vrt lib library for example Enter project data Make a habit of recording project data for every document Important data includes for example the project number and the ad
79. External Duct Description Diameter 0 000 Material Duct color by Owner Cable ld Cable Name Belongs to Duct Color by Cable Id Color by Cable Type Show Hide All Cables from Selected Trench Color by Duct Color by Duct Owner Show Hide All Cables from Selected Duct i J Propagate the Information for this Trench to the Neighbouring Trench Cross Sections crcl Then select the assign buried cable to a conduit placeholder from the list of conduits Cables and Conduits List Cableld Cable Name C1 COAX 1 Le TEx Tragsell C3 126E fles Innenk abel Unassigned Unassign cables Assign to selected duct placeholder Send To ey e eee Ret mo r y ShowHide All Cables fron Conduit placeholders are treated deleted moved etc just like normal conduits They can be recognized by their white filling color instead of the gray filling color of normal conduits AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 169 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 4 Trench cross sections 4 4 1 Twisting conduits in trenches If you are plotting a drawing for an existing populated trench the conduits may be twisted that is they may be arranged differently at the beginning and at the end of the trench There are also points along a trench line where conduits can be added By positioning double cross section labels this structure modification can be made visible on all sides
80. Fig 5 Fiber and Bundle Settings dialog box In the Type Related Settings list the symbols of the selected and non selected splice and connection connections can be defined Selection is always performed irrespective of whether the status color is on or off Only the current order has the Marked checkbox selected by default When the current order is moved the checkbox is automatically also moved AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 240 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status The context menu provides the following editing options Insert Order A small dialog box is provided for entering the name of the new order The status of the newly created order is automatically the currently set status on the Planning Type and Status toolbar Fig 1 The data is automatically the current data the order is automatically the active order the checkbox active is also automatically moved Delete Order Deletes the selected order and deletes it from all objects of all open projects If there was at least one object located on this order a window will appear with the following message for example The order was deleted from 12 objects Rename Order A small dialog box is provided for entering the new name The new name must be unique that is names already in the list are prohibited Renaming should be the exception Set as Active The selected order becomes the active order Updat
81. GlS Ingertion Foint E GIs insertion point r Gis Insertion Point Coordinates Er URL Coordinates in actual projection 4 r World Coordinates W G S84 PR UAL ESSERE 7a i 7 80119437 zi Color layer information E 2A a eal eal io Colorlayer informatic 5318521 14079612 4079612 _ lt Latitude a7 39855152 ep Dynamic data i GIS Insertion Poirt Gauss Krueger 3 degree wide strips DHDN PD DE 2001 lt 3m Rauenberg Bessel Meridian strip 1 a degree E m Type f Auto Manual F GFS Position SSS Latitude o 00000000 Longitude 0 00000000 Height ooo m Cancel e Specify the GPS coordinates of the point select the the Geo Reference option and close the window with OK e Select the second GIS insertion point and specify its GPS coordinates e Now choose the PROJECT DATA gt Project and Worksheet Data command and go to the Scale GIS tab Projects and Sheets Sheet Basics Sheet View Settings GIS Scale E Projects GIS El empty project i Unnamed V Use GIS in this sheet Coordinate System Current Reference System _Trensfor to another reference system Corners of the sheet left 33399000000 right 66654000000 top 39997000000 bottom ooo04000000 Get Comers from GIS Insertion Pts Corners of the sheet User Edited obtained from V User edited Sort options Set numbers Cancel OK e Click
82. GmbH Page 3 of 452 Contents 2 14 7 Automatic NUMBDENNG OF ODJOCES iisccisanshae Setar pisamixeaeiieeiiebi heheh a 122 2 14 7 1 Setting the numbering format cc ccccccs cece essen eee eee eeeeeseeeeeesennnaneteeseessseeeeaaens 122 2147 24 RUS Of DPFECCU EN CC ih iddinarke iane a osee erases poiaa A A wee oSiaiS 123 2 14 7 3 Editing of the numbering Settings from idlOG ccc ccccce eee e eee e eee ee eeeeeeeeeaeee 124 27a COUNTERS MIM COIU NG w icscmadersaseniinavarndsraieieeanoiaved stars akatneeved stare miaxeravad AAAA 127 2 145 7 4o2 External COUNTE S arne eas we idaaa nunc one mate A ema ee aaa TA 128 2 14 8 Immediate editing of objects when plotting cc cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeee eee eenees 129 2 14 9 Design drawing ANd positioning ASSISTANCE ccc cccececeeeeeee essen eee eens eeeeeeeeaaaaees 130 2 15 Optical connectors Optical CONNECTIONS cccceeneseeeeeeeeeeeeeessnnnnneeeeeeeeeeenes 141 2415 1 Optical plug connections in the component editor cece eee eee eeeee eee e eee eees 141 2 15 2 Testing optical plug connections IN AND ccc ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeee seen eee eeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaes 142 2 15 3 Attenuation of the optical CONNECTIONS ccc eee eeeeeeeeeee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeaaaaaes 143 2 16 Creating a new document siiecsiinnescctanccdentncccnnrissecnnneeesscenssentnnveansesevennnecens 145 3 Automatic drawing ALS 6 a eee aaa L AaS 3 1 SCICCTING a NEUWOFRK type wriicccetmeiecatanece
83. GmbH Page 337 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Setting a return path amplifier manually Manual setup is only recommended in exceptional cases because it requires you to readjust the amplifiers manually after every network change Reverse amplifier Enter the values in the Amplification and Equalization and activate the fixed option If you control the amplifiers with plugged components connect the attenuators Pad and Equalizers manually and Amplification 120 d8 Amplifier 5 65 MHz Signat 20 50 MHz T fixed Target Values Current Values jon 20 0 a dB Amplification 11 0 dB rs Amplification 19 0 dB Equalization 0 0 dB Preemphasis 0 0 dB Preemphasis 0 0 dB Plugged Components activate the fixed option Attenuation 3 0 dB Pad Padi 148 lt C fined Equalization foo dB Equalizer Attenuation to next amplifier 11 0 dB Total atte to caffe modem 20 0 dB Input pad of next amplifier 9 0 dB iv Control options that you have fixed are not altered by the return path amplifier setup in AND Setting in AND Oo Target Yalues ella Amplification 11 0 dB my Preemphasis U 0 dB Here you can see the target values that AND found as a function of the selected adjusting method e If the selected adjusting method is Attenuation Compensation the target amplification is identical to the maximum attenuation of the next amplifier e
84. Label position on relative to symbol 0 0 Label position on relative to symbol 1 0 E Variable display name Specific Data I Variable 1 VORIABLE 1 String e Show Label This allows the user to choose what he wants to view about the hotspot symbol fixed appearance label or both Show label Ino label Show both label and symbol means that both label and symbol will be displayed in overview Ex P var Show only the label means that only the label will be shown Ex first war No Label this is the default value which means that the user can see the hotspot in overview only as symbol ex Square color green Ex To see how changing label height and position affects the symbol in Hotspot properties dlg set Show label to Show both label and symbol AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 252 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots e Label height default value 1 0 and defines the label height this can be changed to whatever value e Label position on X relative to symbol establish the position relative to the symbol default value 0 0 Ex With default value 0 0 E val O 3 first var e Label position on Y relative to symbol establish the position relative to the symbol default value 1 0 Ex set position to 5 Set position to 3 gt Result Ex With default value 1 0 re val Set position to 5
85. Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 275 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Jump targets References Projects E OG_Lap_UEP rrr _Spen Double click on it and the project were the UEP is will open The UEP is blinking red v a Let see how the link was created from UEP to hotspot We will make the same steps 1 Right click on UEP and choose Search Jump Targets 2 Check Jump Targets References Here you will find the linked object in this case the hotspot of type dh_uep the UEP itself and VP HauseinfUhrung in this case Jump targets References Projects 1 dh_uep EDG Lap UEP Lap EOG_UEP_Haugeintuehrung Lap 3 s E 2 We Clear list Open BK UP Lap BK UP LP Yersorgungspunkt Position Am Vogelsang 18 56291 Kisselbach YP Hauseinf hrung LP Hauseinf hrung In you want to repeat this steps Clear list of jump targets references first AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 276 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots B If the current dot is a dot which can have an independent hotspot linked to it you can add attach a hotspot to this object As result a hotspot will be created in overview at same position Example e Create an hotspot type linked to an object I will use in this example Operation building e Check in a project find add the object within the project then check in it e
86. Measured column which is used to compare the actual and the target values You will find more information on this topic in the Calculating Test Points section see Page 360 You delete a test point by deleting its test point component Associated objects will automatically be deleted AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 60 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Headend frame The headend frame does not save any information It is meant to enclose headend components in order to use alternate calculation methods to those for the distribution network However this is normally not necessary If you wish to save information about the headend location use the location rectangle instead of a headend frame Draw in a headend frame using the New Headend Frame gj icon on the toolbar Open a rectangle by dragging with the mouse Location rectangle Addresses are normally the most important keys for accessing information AND allows you to store an address for an entire project or just for each component You can use the location rectangle to enclose parts of a drawing and assign an address to the rectangle For example you could define a location rectangle for a house Location rectangles have advantages not available with normal address entries e The Object from the Management System type sockets in a location rectangle can store subscriber data e The apartment layout can be created Object from
87. Plotting other objects The toolbar in the document window contains icons for plotting various objects H T AM t u 6 0 d B B O 4 4 B E ea R In the following sections you will find explanations of the various icons and how they help to plot the corresponding objects Surfaces The amp button creates a new object of type Surface This is a continuously closed polygon Marker rechtangles and marker lines Use marker rectangles and lines to optically identify highlight or create relationships with parts of a drawing It is also possible to indicate simple topographical elements houses streets with houses Marker lines are simple line objects that have no effect on the calculation There are different ways to display the lines solid dashed dotted dot and dash To draw a marker rectangle or line click the icon in the toolbar and draw it in the worksheet in the shape you desire Draw a rectangle by clicking two opposing corner points in the worksheet Draw a line by clicking the start and end points in the worksheet If the line is to change the direction click the location where the line is to have a corner point Finish drawing by pressing the Esc key Marker Rectangle solid F gett tans Shoo Ff Marker Rectangle dotted Ctrl F6 iM Marker Line dotted Ctrl F Marker Rectangle dash dot Shift F iM Marker Line dash dot Shitt F Marker Rectangle dashed Ctrl Shift F Marker Line das
88. Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options 6 5 2 Installation numbers An alphanumberic installation number can be entered for every plotted network element These installation numbers have a special meaning for certain categories Cable The cable number is needed to identify the cables on both sides of the conduit Within a house the cable installation number identifies the location of the apartment within a house comprising the number of the house object number apartment location These numbers are created either by the automatic function see Background Editor Page 192 or by the automatic apartment numbering function see Project Manager Menu Item Page 225 erstellt Sockets The installation number of the first socket in the apartment contains the apartment location This is a four digit number created either by the automatic function see Automatic Drawing Mode Page 148 or by the automatic apartment numbering see Automatic Apartment Numbering Page 227 Test points The installation number contains a unique project wide serial number that is normally identical to the number of the test point label See also the Automatic Drawing Mode chapter Page 148 Amplifiers The installation number is also the amplifier number which is typically generated automatically See also Chapter Automatic Apartment Numbering Page 227 Amplifier lists The installation number is also the number of the amplifier lis
89. Properties lv All Objects Common Properties t Operations over Bloc Specific Properties h Location Layer Color Nr 1 Color layer information Nr 2 General Properties Planning Type Default x Task Status Unknown Date Modify objects in sheets Modify sheets recursively Object Type V hd Location type no location record h Installation type unknown hd a ee ee oe r Reference Serial number T ype Supplier T ype Po Serialnumber lV Use as partname Frames In AND frames allow you to select an icon from a variety of display formats Use this function if for example you want to identify graphically the signal direction or a diplex filter The different frames for an icon do not have to be the same size that is have the same number of pins which makes any later changes more difficult Frames are created in the Component Editor While positioning you can switch between the various frames by using either the Previous Frame or Next Frame functions or the 1 key previous or the 2 key next AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 138 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Assembly objects Macros Assembly objects also referred to as macros in AND simplify the creation of complex components out of individual parts A macro can consist of a maximum of 4 individual components Components can be assembled if they have assembly
90. Right click the new cable and choose the Connect Cable via Trench 0 command 3 The cable will now automatically be routed on the trench path AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 163 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 3 Laying cables in trenches 4 3 1 Duplicating cables If you wish to have more than one cable of the same type in the trench proceed as follows i 2 3 Select the cable in the trench and right click it Press the V key for Duplicate Cable The Duplicate Cable window will open Multiply Cables Copy Count i Spacing 100 of the Sheet Connector Symbol or 0 m 0 means itis not used Place on both Sides of the Original Cable Fan Out the Cable End Paints Enter the number of cables In the Spacing field you can enter either the spacing between the cables or the distance in meters if you are in site plan mode and are using this scale Note If you use the second spacing option the reference to the worksheet connection icon will be disregarded If you wish to place the cables on either side of the duplicated cable you have to select Place on Both Sides of the Original Cable The Splice Cable Ends option can then be selected if you wish to have the ends of the cables equally distant from one another outside the trench Then click OK 4 3 2 Plotting cables in all directions If you are working in a system with multiple connected trenches and wish to route a cable to all o
91. Se Import File content Ferdinand A3 Cugir ALEA 515600 Decembrie 334 Alba Iulia ALBA 6S4323 Result Mr Mame Attributes Type 1 Ferdinan Ugir 4L64 515600 Mota Decembrie 33 Alba Iulia ALEA 654323 Nota AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 266 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Variable Value in CSV file Expected Type column matched for variable Result type Integer 33 Str Sed pr Takes the integer value When finding another value different from integer in this case the space it stops Integer Di oe tee iat The left and right Spaces are not imported in database on import String Alba P er The left and right Spaces are not imported in database on Uat Alba is si The left and right Spaces are not imported in database on import Import XML file from AND Client When importing XML files the metadot must be ready created in database and the xml file saved on user s computer ready to be imported It will be used the same menu entry Manage Hotspots Import hotspots Import Option dlg After choosing the xml file to import all fields and options will be disabled except Import and Cancel options So the import of xml file is done in two steps 1 Choose the xml file to import The user can observe that Import file content and Hotspot fields will be full with information according to new data imported 2 To start the import the user j
92. Settings gt Program Paths function to specify the directories in which you wish to save your various files This path should not be changed because otherwise the libraries for the Libraries open drawings will no longer be found fetter are lL Tererfnee In AND Smart Server mode this path must be shown on the server or proxy Drawings 410 0 0 11 XSETTINGSSPROJECTS B servar Config Files 4410 0 0 119 SETTINGS ML E This is the directory that is accessed Block Files 10 0 0 119 SETTINGSSSEL E when the library path is not available or Symbol Selection 10 0 0 11 SETTINGS SEL E the required library has not been found Headends MIOD O118 SETTINGS PROVECTSS 5 there It can be used for Background Maps C USERS OOMINIC PITTROFF Sa cevradieareccen Templates 10 0 0 118 SETTINGS TEMPLATE 6 ibrary path indicates the server e ie path indicates a local i Signal Sources 4 10 0 0 1184SETTINGS4TP_RASTEF 5 directory should be updated Frequency Plane 510 0 0 118555ETTINGS TF_RASTEF B manually from time to time Reports 10 0 0 119 SETTINGSSREPORT E e Archiving INI Files 4410 00 17 SSETTINGSSINI B All current libraries are in the library path and all old libraries are in the Information substitute path Main Folder C APROGRAM FILES f lt S6 CDS 34ND This ensures that only current Temporary Files CAUSERSSDOMINICPITTROFFSAPF components are available in the component selection in the library p
93. TOR ssw naaa a 213 Laying cables in trenches cccceeseeees 158 Level calculation possible reasons for fall UNS reiron a a an 301 Level specifications Setting return path receivers jirata aa aa 330 Leve tab rrenari aa a a 147 LID ECIC M nUal sccisctawsicsctunt hata xaewn awestalawntvelsawiaels 9 Libraries embedded check for factory SOWING S dass ovation cade aoc eas 289 Libraries OrGaniZatiOn cccceeee eens 196 Libraries vendor independent 196 Library for attenuation values 301 LINKING LIDFAri S cece eeceeeeeeeeeee seen eee ees 42 Linking projects using the AND Smart DOCU Clr aie E 195 Linking projects without using the AND Smart Serve nsr tenn adtiesiseatieateeanis 194 Live test DOIRES eariad di ess 291 Loading a background MapP seseeeee 172 Loading library for object selection 38 Loading sheets ssnssssnesssnnnssrnnesrene 210 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Index Location Information window 18 Location rectangle sssssssrersnrsrenrsrrnns 61 EOCARIOINS ics aa A A 223 LOCKING ODIEClS mirenan eaa 34 Macro assembly Object ceeeeeeeeee 134 Maintenance Manual ccccceeseeseeeeeeneeaes 9 Manually inserting connector components PETTE E EET A AE AEEA ET ET 308 MODS oara an a SA 171 Marker MNES ernaia aa aa 52 Marker rectangle s ssssssssssrersnrsrennsrrnn 33 Marker rectangles ccccceeeeee
94. These represent the assembly component 2 pchrankBOx60x25 _ 434434 11 001 0015 606 32 113 5 Position the assembly component near to the object to which it belongs 6 If you wish to assign additional assembly components to the object proceed as follows a Click the existing assembly components b The Edit Object window will open c Click the Add button In the list that appears select another assembly component and click OK d Use this procedure to add any further components 0 and click OK when you have finished The assembly components will now be shown rdblock 2xF Schrumpf 32 7 5 43443411 001 0015 606 32 119 Notes If you would like to quickly assign an assembly component to many objects proceed as follows 1 Select the assembly component and press the N key to copy 2 The copied assembly component is now attached to the mouse pointer 3 Move the mouse pointer to the component to which you wish to assign the assembly component and click it Now the assembly component is attached to the component with its line 4 Move the mouse pointer to the location where the assembly component should be and click again with the left mouse button 5 To assign it to another component repeat from step 2 6 Press the Esc key to finish copying AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 64 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode OLE objects OLE objects offer the option of displaying da
95. To make sure that the list is up to date always click the New from Drawing button when you open this window AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 415 of 452 10 Bills of Materials 10 3 Costing objects in bills of materials Explanation of buttons and options in Edit Materials List window OK This saves the bill of materials in the project The next time the window is called the saved bill of materials will be available once again Caution The saved bill of materials does not necessarily display the contents of the current drawing Click the New from Drawing or Enhance buttons to make sure that the bill of materials contains all of the elements in the current drawing Consider package sizes If a component is available in different package sizes this can be taken into account in the bill of materials If the package sizes for a component are stored in the library the most cost effective package combination will be identified The quantity of packages will then be shown not the component Auto update If this option is activated the bill of materials will be automatically updated from the current drawing when the window is called Object status filter With filter you can filter the objects of the material list by their planning status see Page 414 Excel export Creates the bill of materials as an XLS file in Excel Add Adds new drawn material to material that has already been calculated or loaded Subtract
96. Warn when channels are outside of an amplifier s frequency range Distortion Calculation Calculate CSO CTB with modulated carriers The values in the source are always unmodulated Level reduction for modulation 3 0 dB ORN N od a oy plo a ee Rr ae Apply to CSO CTEB in signal source too Calculate intermodulation noise also slow Default values for level reduction QAM16 16 0 dB Radio 6 0 dB QAmM 64 10 0 dB DYBT 10 0 dB Q4M128 10 0 dB QAM256 6 0 dB v Mark remote supply areas colored Default Raster Which raster should be used for the given frequency range if the library doesn t contain that information 47 450 MHz BK450 Change CSO CTB with FM Radio Channels slow Change 47 606 MHz CENELEC29 Change ithmi ipli 17 0 Logarithmic multiplier CTB 47 860 MHz CENELEC42 Change Logarithmic multiplier CSO 10 0 Default Cable between floors Worst case distortion CNA at high T CSO CTB at low T Type Length U U m Level uncertainty J U dB 7 Standard Cable for Length Calculation Opticals Type xi min Level UUU dBu Splicingloss of a splicepoint 0 10 dB Optical power reserve 0 0 dB v Fibre Cable between links T Type Patchkabel SM 3m laa x Length 3 0 m dByy dBmi dBm v Coax cable between links Apply the unit to test points label too Type PRG 11 CU lK Length 20 m J Include distance to sheet symbol center for cable length peta Update linked exit points a
97. _Funetign __ Switches the WMS plugin on or off If the plug in is WMS plug in switched off no maps will be fetched and displayed It is then also not possible to edit WMS documents Update map Starts a new query for the current WMS document taking the selected visibility settings of the WMS layer into account Note For performance reasons and to avoid unnecessary queries a map will not be automatically reloaded every time the WMS documents or WMS layer visibility are changed For that reason the map must be reloaded manually after such changes That can be done either using this button or by forcing redrawing e g by zooming or scrolling in the drawing Gray levels Switches map display between color and black and white Manage Opens the dialog box for managing the WMS documents WMS documents Note If an WMS document is embedded in the current AND project this function will open the dialog box for editing the embedded WMS document see Section WMS Document dialog box below Otherwise the WMS Documents dialog box will open see Section WMS Documents dialog box below Embed current Embeds the current document into the AND project The document button remains pressed while the document remains embedded Choose With this combo box you can select the WMS document WMS document currently to be used only if no WMS document is embedded in the current AND project AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution Gm
98. a Crosstext for this Data Format Text Abschnitt Z Nummer Auto Installation No Installation Type Unknown You can output existing information about trench sections in project lists Project Data Project and Sheet Data Alt Y Alt A Gis Area Settings Generate project structure Layer Table Manage AND object Layers Planning Types Table Fault List Trench defaults Locations Customers Project lists Numbering and Labeling Update labels Update labels and adjust size Reset All Counters Unlock all locked objects Save Project Settings Adopt Settings from Template CTRL U Export Project Structure to Custbase AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 428 of 452 11 Output options 11 3 Reports To do that select English Language Acceptance CabelList Leakage eport Orderln OrderOut OrdersListU ut Project nfokl et Reale stateList SignalPoints Cancel to open the following BR smun x Acceptance Report Projectnumber Clientnumber Description Created by Last changed by Installation Date Controlled by Number State system must be improved checked Auto Check failed Nettype nal Bridge Points Rewer Path not possible Reverse Path not active 0 00 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 429 of 452 11 Output options 11 3 Reports Report lists The following list shows the re
99. additional program 5 298 Settings Program 4s ston Geis Gis ves 287 Settings DFOJECE ornis T 290 Setup for Testpoints window 5 291 Sheet ICO SIGS rariores a 226 Sheet Presetting windOW ssssssssssss 204 Sheet Settings tab sssssssssssssessssss 205 SHECT transitions inii anaa a Viaus 57 SRNOrTCULS aonr 9 447 Showing levels cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesessees 60 Signal sources specifying data for signal SOU COS i eaa AAE seme 358 Single clicking an ODjeCt ccceeeeeeeeeeees 21 SHAD PING ea raa a a E A 127 Snapping components to cables 128 SDACEDAl siesati temenaes 24 Specifying search options key data 214 SPICE DOK ausissent aaa 111 SPlICe REDOT iscavvcolteuiseetieatadeitaanwestes 368 Standard mode sive eas 25 Starting the remote powering calculation SLARCON tind seal minaaa 394 SaS ee ne eee ee 228 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Index Status Dal sirenen aee 15 Status information cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 228 Status terms for design alternatives 228 Status terms for objects cece eee 228 Status value of object statuS 8 409 Status graphical display for objects 228 Switching layers On and Off assesses 212 System Data window 184 212 214 Tap OPUIMIZATON ooren a sien e mewn 152 Target reception level for return path GIMP irririk aini Ena 317 Temperature drift cccccceeuueesseeuseuneeens 312
100. and at least one upstream service is Ree BE Matte ZI M fixed defined the return path amplifier will Fer 00 o me Les automatically be connected when the Frequency Range Retum Path Amplifier REVOT 15 1548 l amplifier symbol is created 75 670 MHz Piot PETINE The return path amplifier data that you selected above is displayed here Reverse amplifier Amplification 115 dB Amplifier 5 65 MHz Signal MHz Regulators fixed Target Values Current Values Amplification 1 0 a dB Amplification dB Amplification 1 0 dB Equalization 0 0 a dB Preemphasis dB Preemphasis 0 0 dB Plugged Components Attenuation 0 0 dB Pad ione fixed Equalization 0 0 dB Equalizer none fixed Attenuation to next amplifier dB Total atten to cable modem dB Input pad of next amplifier dB Passive distribution network dB Note If the library symbol of the amplifier for the active return path calculation for the network check see page 344 is a multimedia socket see Page 331 it is automatically used in AND for display purposes if a return path amplifier is inserted as the connector component AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 336 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Fevegmamplitier Maximum amplification of the al ifi Amplification 20 dE Amplifier 5 65 MHz Signak 20 50 MHz AaAMPpIITIer Frequency range of the ampli fier according to the libra ry Regulators fixed Tar
101. and selected in a block Overlaps and loops are not permitted with cable conduits and AND removes conduit segments to avoid this There are two ways of connecting two cables through a conduit so that it is seen as one cable e Draw in two cables so that they each have an end that terminates at the cable conduit Select one and press the Z key for Assign Now the selected cable will begin to blink and AND will wait for the selection of the second cable which you do by clicking it You can also select a cable in another sheet by using the Page or Page V key to switch If possible AND will then connect the two cables e Draw in a complete arrangement with signal sources splitters or multitaps and sockets Route the cable from the splitters to the sockets in a conduit Then select a conduit segment and press the Z key for Assign AND automatically searches for all possible connections However for it to function the network must be error free calculable all the way to the splitter and must contain conduits because AND decides based on the splitter levels which sockets will be connected with which splitter exit point worst level with the shortest path To disconnect two cables in a cable conduit select the cable and press the L key for Disconnect The two cable section will then be disconnected Note Changing the length of a conduit segment automatically changes the length of the cable running through it Conduits can be generated
102. anywhere within this window AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 20 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 3 Working with the mouse 2 3 Working with the mouse A mouse with two buttons and a wheel is recommended for optimum efficiency in AND Pointing to an object Selecting In AND simply pointing at an object with the mouse is an action When you point to an object in the worksheet you are actually selecting it The next action you perform using the keyboard for example deletion will apply directly to the selected object Single Clicking an object Editing e Clicking once on an object in the worksheet opens the Edit Object window e Clicking once on a component that has ist own worksheet e or clicking once on a worksheet connection opens the corresponding worksheet Double Clicking an object Applying Use the double click to e Plot a component in the worksheet Double clicking an object in the object selection window applies the object in the drawing The object is now attached to the mouse pointer which is automatically located in the middle of the sheet From there position the object This is an alternative to holding down the mouse button and dragging the object from the object selection window onto the worksheet e Select a layer for future objects Double clicking the desired layer on the Layer and Color toolbar sets it for future plotted objects Right Clicking a location Opening a context menu
103. are displayed white Fertig NUM AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 285 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 2 Displaying NIS structures 7 2 4 Remote powering view The Remote Powering view shows you the remote powering areas All nodes associated with a remote powering area are displayed in color Specify the settings for the remote powering view under VIEW gt Remote Supply View db a w o ES el WEE TI Jaelan EJIE E EE EHE EE 7 2 5 Compressing location rectangles You can use the VIEW gt Collapse Location Rectangle setting to display locations that have been bundled into one node This makes complex NIS structures clearer NIS in standard view A node with a compressed location rectangle is displayed with a thick dashed line NIS displayed with compressed location rectangles AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 286 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 3 Navigating in NIS structures 7 3 Navigating in NIS structures 7 3 1 Zooming NIS structures For all zoom actions the mouse pointer is the central position Place the mouse pointer on the node area you wish to view Use the and keys to zoom in or out If your mouse has a wheel you can use it to enlarge or reduce the image You can also use the context menu commands e Zoom all To fit the entire project to the visible area of the document window e Zoom
104. are typically icons of type optical adapter D O keij E TE Libel Unknown son an s ws File Edit View Window Ta Disa e ala REE A E E l al 21O are E Patchpa Bo 4 Symbol Properties Component Type Optical Adapter v ido ida Wo o Ho ido Optical Splitter Inelevant for NIS generation Remote Supply Adjust Standalone Set max current to all pins Use in netlist C Use in civilworks C Use in both 4 gt Symbols 1 i 4 gt 1 Basic Data Symbol Data Attributes F Press F1 to obtain help NUM AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 141 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 15 Optical connectors optical connections 2 15 2 Testing optical plug connections in AND The optical connections are tested as part of the Find Connector function which is called on two occastions e As separate function Calculation menu Test Optical Connections menu item ALT O e As part of the network check if the Test Plug Connections option is activated in the warning settings Alt W No adapter search is performed in the case of optical connections The existing optical connections are tested only and a warning is shown in the output window for each unsuitable connection To remedy an error you must replace the patch cable pigtail with the unsuitable end by a suitable item In the case of bundle obj
105. as from Build 820 After you have drawn in or copied a bundle the following dialog box appears by default with the most important bundle data fm Drawing Object Data Bundle M Bundle Connection Type spiced O Wire State planned tti itst s Priority Mid i Task Taky Object State Planning New gt Attenuation foo dB Add a Crosstext for this Data Format T ext eze Auto Kabelnr Installation Type Unknown Cancel The dialog box is already filled with the default values So you do not need to make any entries but only confirm with OK The default values for the order number and object status are defined on the Planning Type and Status toolbar The other data connection type fiber status priority and attenuation are taken from the fiber bundle settings Display of the dialog box can be suppressed by clearing the Display Editing Dialog Box checkbox in the settings for numbering and labeling for bundles and all planning types Automatic Labeling and Numbering E x Automatic Numbering Automatic Text Automatic Filename Dynamic Objects A4 b Apply for fan Types planning type Automatic labeling for fEundie Format string E r Font size 22 Min number of digits for sheetnumbers a Min number of decimals for lengths o I Label immediately after insertion MV Show edit dialog Edit Location Set Format string for
106. automatic labels read only m Location Search Don tsearch Searchinsheet Search in whole project recursivly m Default font Arial westlich Select E ae Update all labels when dialog is closed Reset label s textsize Save Settings Load Settings Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 70 of 452 Block editing function also for bundle data Implemented as from Build 816 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode The data of the semiautomatic dialog box are also offered in the block editing function Biel Es tet Edit Object Object Data Block 3 Objects Objects Properties Bundle 3 Connection Type iit i Common Properties i Operations over Bloc Specific Properties M Common Properties Mr 1 Operations over Block Nr 2 Specific Properties Mr 3 Attenuation O dE Cancel y The block in the above figure contains four bundles Bundles 4 Connection type fiber status priority and attenuation are entered in the Special Properties No 3 dialog box Bundles tab The selection boxes for setting the status and order are to be found on the Shared Properties No 1 tab card AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 71 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Fiber optic cables The special feature of optical cables is that they can contain multiple bundles of
107. box Calling the function Right clicking a route line in the Connection Information dialog box opens the context menu for the route x M cok Wave Opn CT Sart TRackSan Sottaa tnd Rac tnd ind Nore Cuore Ch ft Vottinger Str 36 1000 H Edit Route Vottinger Str 36 Mark Optical Line Vattinger Str 36 Refresh Vattinger Str 36 o Jump to Start Vattinger Str 36 o Jump to End Vattinger Str 36 Jump to Initial Pin Vattinger Str 36 o Excel Export Vottinger Str 36 terconnect Vattinger Str 36 o Locate Fiber Breakage V ttinger Str 36 DPDWDDMDDDADADADAD oO Oo o o o O Create NIS for this Route V ttinger Str 36 20 Vottinger Str 36 Rosenstr 26 Vattinger Str 36 Rosenstr 26 Vattinger Str 36 Rosenstr 26 Vottinger Str 36 VMN NNR RPP PPP PP Pee ne wwe Sonon ew Rosenstr 26 Vattinger Str 36 Rasancty IA VaAttinoaar Ste IA If the Interconnect Plan menu item is chosen here the following dialog box will appear with the interconnect plan AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 96 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Interconnect Plan dialog box Object _ Location Connection From Cable Bu To Cable Bund Opt entry exitpoint Rosenstr 26 not cut 1322 Vottinger Str 2b not cut Fiber 24412 B1 Fiber 24x12 B13 Excel Export Print All Sheets Swap Order M Splice Patch order only Marked tasks E only a One line appears for eac
108. calculated and click OK 6 Now the label text for the cable is attached to the mouse pointer The cable to which the text is related is displayed red and blinking 7 Move the mouse pointer to the desired position in the worksheet for the text The text is still attached to the mouse pointer 8 If you want to rotate the text press the R key to rotate the text in 90 increments 9 If you want to resize the text press the the 2 key for larger the 1 key for smaller and 3 to 9 for predefined sizes 10 Click with the left mouse button to place the text in the worksheet 11 If you wish to plot additional components of the same type begin again with step 2 12 If you do not wish to add any more cables press the Esc key to finish Plotting cables in AND is generally done by clicking individual points that will then place the cable A distinction is made between schematic and geo schematic methods see Page 27 In schematic drawings AND links the plotted points so that the cable only has right angles Please note that in schematic drawings there is always a preferred direction If for example you first move the mouse upward from a selected point the cable will be drawn such that it first goes upward or downward and then to the right or left If for example you first move the mouse to the right from one clicked point the cable will first move right or left and then upward or downward to the next point You can change the preferre
109. connected by sheet connector mi croduct conduit or link are compared If the cable types differ both cables have non zero length and are no pigtail a warning is dis played in the output window For each chain it will be checked whether the data are equal for all members are equal If there are differences the leading cable is determined applying the following rule The cable with non empty cable number is the leading one If 2 cables have different non empty cable numbers we have an unresolvable conflict If there are several cables with the same cable number we look to the owner The cable with a non empty owner is the leading one If 2 cables have different non empty owner we have an unresolvable conflict As third criterion we look to the wire owners If we have several cables with cable number owner and wire owners all equal the longest ca ble is the leading cable If the leading cable could be determined without conflict it s data will be propagated from the leading cable to the other chain members automatically If there are conflicts the chain is remaining unchanged and a warning is displayed in the out put window Note If you get conflicts please be cautious when viewing the differences that you leave the cable dialogs with CANCEL If you would leave that dialog with OK you already resolve the conflict AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 51 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 2 14 3
110. dB BER 1e 6 Page 320 of 452 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check Setting target values for return path amplifiers In the Network Check Warnings Setup window click the Target Values and Options button The Return Path Amplifier Setup window will open Alternatively you can open the window with CALCULATION gt Preset Reverse Amplifier s Target Values Coe gt j q xX Adjust Return Path Amplifiers 5 j j 5 i J Adjusting Methods Alllevel values refer to bandwidth 2 0 MHz Bandwidth Target Level at Receiver S ource p T eee i The return path amplifier s network is adjusted as a unit The first amplifier will be adjusted that the reverse signals reach the and optimized according to the following priorities receiver bridgepoint with that target level Target levels reached G San RE dBuv Unity gain i e the same attenuation on all parallel branches Use value set in service Max cable modem sending level This adjusting method is global if the network is modified at a f i int Calculate from the FM Level at the bridge point particular position this could possibly have an effect on the value of all targetlevel 157 FM Pegel max sending level of cable modem the amplifiers in the network Advantage The planner has little to concern himself with The C Take level entered in bridgepoint If zero take 107 dBy adjustment is flexible and is successful under various conditio
111. dB max Frg i 05 pi Preemphasis i 5 dE Plugged Preemphasis 15 dB Attenuation ps H dE Pad db Pad dB fixed Egudlieatian me dB Equalizer 7db EQ 7 0 5dB v I fixed Frequency Range Return Path Amplifier Feturm23dB 23 188 gt 47 662 MHz Piot none AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 313 of 452 9 Calculations 9 2 Amplifier settings Default amplifier settings The default settings for permissible tolerances for deviation from actual and target values are made in the Set up Warnings for Net Check window Select CALCULATION gt Setup Warning Settings The Set up Warnings for Net Check window will open Click Amplifiers Setup to show the window contents for these settings i Set up warnings for Net Check Warnings AND generates warnings if an amplifier cannot be adjustg4 as desired Here you can specify tolerances that regulate the activation of tfs warnings The smiley in the amplifier dialog also uses this tolergAces to compare target value and current value Choose this option to use the power line for the amplifier settings Setting method as for older AND versions If makes sense to use these options if you do not require a particular signal pre emphasis at the amplifier output but want to force the program to insert a particular output equalizer 4 Check net structure Setup amplifiers v Temperature drift V Check remote
112. decimals for lengths 0 Si Derader Nimber W Label immediately after insertion E teens W Show edit dialog 6G GIS Location Iw Edit Location g GPS Location Set Format string for automatic labels read only 3h GIS Height W MDU Count e Bridgepoint Min Attenuation E Bridgepoint Max Attenuation Location Search Dontseach C Searchin sheet C7 Searchin whole project recursivly u Bridgepoint Min Level U Bridgepoint Max Level X Bridgepoint Max Level Difference Default font o T h Ow Arial westen Select E Use font E ET eee in Dialogs Y Trench Type Update all labels when dialog is closed 96x Object Address ev Transponder Number Save Settings Load Settings Cancel B Bundle Number Object Identifier AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 115 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode In the Settings for field you can define whether the labeling will be performed separately according to plan types In the Automatic Labeling for field you can select the object type for which you would like to set the automatic labelling You can define a different label type for every object type In the Format String field you can define how the label will be structured Do this using the wildcard for the various entries in the library The program assists you with structuring the format string Click the arrow L to open the drop down list box with all possible wildcards for
113. decision can be made as to whether all splice costs are summated or listed individually The splice costs are entered in the bundle settings The splice costs apply to one fiber that is the splicing of a bundle with twelve fibers costs twelve times the entered price Bundles are located inside splices in so called cassettes or racks or slots AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 82 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode The rack or slot applies across the bundles However fibers can be located in different cassettes That is why there are n cassettes per bundle n number of fibers in a bundle In the Object Properties the cassette can be entered individually for each fiber or for all fibers at once Besides bundle properties the Object Properties dialog box also provides information about connection elements FO cables This includes color codes of cables which fibers of the FO cable are connected to which via the bundle number in bundle fiber number in cable fiberID fiber states routing information start end as well as connection information connectors Splice boxes There are splice boxes that were defined as a Lib object in a library and auto splice boxes that can be automatically generated at a fiber optic cable end Auto Splice box Auto splice boxes adopt the bundle number fiber number and color code of the optic fiber cable They are depicted expanded like fans containing
114. done using a dynamic label placeholder its value is calculated for both ca ble bundle ends and then the values are compared The end of the smaller value string is displayed on the left of the splice name and so are the connected destinations The compari son values are determined using the display options of the report settings Example 1 NIN N umbers I n N ext as comparison value If the splice symbol of a bundle is in enclosure E0120 cassette C03 E0120 C03 and its connection fibres are K1 B01 FO1 cable K1 bundle BO1 fibre FO1 K2 B02 F02 cable K2 bundle B02 fibre F02 then there are two equivalent names for the splice K1 B01 FO1 F02 B02 K2 K2 B02 F02 F01 B01 K1 If the NIN Values of the two ends are K2 B02 F02 gt E0119 C03 K1 B01 F01 gt E0121 C03 then the two NIN values of the two ends are compared E0119 C03 lt E0121 C03 and thus the splice is ordered in the report line as K2 B02 F02 F01 B01 K1 and the left right connection points are listed accordingly Example 2 OTH O bjid TH is as comparison value The name of the splice points starting from the bundle ends is calculated e g e OTH starting from random first end K2 B02 FO2 K1 B01 F01 e OTH starting from random second end K1 B01 F01 K2 B02 F02 and since e K1 B1 F1 K2 B02 F2 lt K2 B2 F2 K1 B1 F1 the report line is ordered such that K1 B01 F01 is displayed on the left Other The option
115. e Transform coordinates Source reference system Import file content Country zip City Street Housenumber Housenumbersupplement Denmark 9630 Baandrup Borgergade 61 A POINT 32531897 000000 6263630 000000 Denmark 9630 Baandrup Borgergadet624 POINT S2551894 000000 6283809 000000 carcel Browse and choose the CSV file to import Choose the column separator in this case Check Import file has header option In the CSV file to import the user has to specify the position There are two possibilities Write the position like in this example POINT 32531897 000000 6283830 000000 and specify the column that represents the position in WKT column in this case the column number is 7 Specify geoposition by separated coordinates X Column and Y Column For example the coordinates are written in CSV file using two columns column 7 and 8 Import File content Country Zine City Street Housenumber Housenumbersupplement Denmark 9630 Baandrup Borgergadet64 4 32551897 OO0000 6283830 000000 Denmark 9630 Baandrup Borgergade 65 B32531894 000000 6283809 000000 Column f 0 Two columns co Column El AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 263 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots e Find matching metadot Because the variable names are the same with header specified in CSV file to import see first row in Import file content the match betwee
116. edit the objects aor a BeOS EA Zoom Factor 5 00 Selecting background objects Select the icon on the toolbar and click a background object The object is now selected You can recognize a selected background object by WY the hatching 0 o the squares at the corners and centers Use these eight points 8 to scale the background object If you move the mouse over the selected background object the mouse pointer will take the shape of crosshairs If objects are superimposed the topmost object is always selected first 2 To select the object underneath it press the Shift key Vd Moving the background Select a background object and drag it to the desired position by holding down the left mouse button You can also move the object using the arrow keys Scaling the background If you wish to scale a background object that is enlarge or reduce it select the object and drag one of the squares around the edge of the box Loading additional maps into the background Use the Open an Existing Raster or DXF File f icon to load a further file into the background This will create a new background object AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 194 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps Zooming and moving the background Use the Zoom or Move icons to zoom or move the background This will not change the background itself in relation to the edges of the worksheets You can zoom or move to
117. filter This search dialog has also a Search button which starts the search and the result are brought and displayed into a search result list in the same dialog The Search returns just 20 results The link will be made with the selected dot in the results list dh_uep DOT Name Text Size 1 00 Text Angle o oo Text Justification Base align Left Reset reference Geopos POINT 3400887 561 639 5547715 741790 Reset geopos Humber C DEU 56291 Kisselbach Hauptstr Dreifinger Mauerdurchfuehrung yy DEU 56291 Kisselbach Am Vogels Fremdmauerdurchfuehrung S68 DEU 56291 Kisselbach Am Vogels ra F __ Ok Cancel The link can be created from hotspot to dot or from dot to hotspot like in examples A and B from next point AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 274 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Search Jump targets links Search Jump targets function can be used by creating a link from an independent hotspots to a dot that can have an independent hotspot link to it and vice versa too from a dot which can have an independent hotspot linked to it to an independent hotspot So we will have case A and B A If current dot is an independent hotspot the linked dot is searched based on meta type and the link key see 0 into DB and the result is added to jump targets dockable bar Example I created a hotspots types dh_uep Suppose the
118. fine Complex Sheets In complex sheets containing cassettes or devices the course of the bundles will be rarely cor rect Manual customizations will be necessary The automatic function is still helpful because you can use the logged objects as proposal which you can work through Fibre breakage search direction can be specified Implemented from Build 4 5 1492 on AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 77 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode When searching the fiber breakage at a given distance the search direction can be entered too Distance to fiber break Distance to fiber breakage 845 3 m Direction into symbol into cable era If we have 2 pins at the start point of the fiber breakage search we have 2 possible directions to start routing a walking through the object the first pin is belonging to b running through the object of the second pin In the very most use cases one of both connected objects is more cable like This is used for specifying the direction If into cable is activated the routing is started by walking through the more cable like object otherwise routing is started in the opposite direction AND is using the following list for the decision how much cable like an object is Real cable Bundle Autosplicebox Logical object Link object Sheet connector Real Symbol I e if you connect a link with the pin of a real symbol
119. for Open Linked Project This works in both directions Linking projects with the AND Smart Server You will find information about his procedure in the AND GisArea Manual in the Entry Exit Points chapter AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 200 of 452 6 Project organization 6 2 Organizing libraries 6 2 Organizing libraries The libraries contain all of the components you will use in your plans Each library contains a file with the lib extension If multiple people are working with AND we recommend organizing the administration of the libraries and possibly giving that responsibility to only one person This is important because the quality of the libraries determines the quality of the documentation and the calculations and thus your planning security In addition it becomes problematic if multiple users are working with different sets of libraries while drawings are being exchanged or used in common call centers AND has to then compensate for any differences by limiting access to the external libraries This is particularly the case when revisions are being made for network expansion The following are suggestions that have proven reliable in practice e All AND users should access a common directory in the network for the libraries Standard users should not be granted write priveleges to this directory e Agree on one or very few administrators of the libraries They should be qualified to handle
120. for large drawings If this option is switched off you can recalculate all live test points manually with the M key However all test points will be automatically updated before printing Updating additional distortion products If you switch on the Update Additional Distortion Products option it functions exactly like the Update Test Points Automatically feature described above but only for distortion products This option is helpful if there are live test points in the drawing that also show distortion products in addition to the level Please note that the distortion product calculation takes some time and it is called after every change Correcting level values for reductions If the display of the incline is more important than the real level activate the Correct Level Values for Reductions option AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 296 of 452 8 Settings 8 3 Program settings Digital channels can contain level reductions that lead to lower levels For the purposes of display the reductions are added to these real values to obtain an analog channel level equivalent Example MP 002 Here the option is swiched off Here the option is switched on The digital channel reduced by 10dB would correspond to an analog channel with 98dBuV In the image on the right you immediately see the pre emphasis of 4 5dB Either or a is used to differentiate between the settings Test point list settings Choos
121. for multiple worksheets using conduit sheaths worksheet connections for conduits AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 114 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 2 14 5 Automatic labeling of objects After plotting an object you will be asked to position the label text It is recommended that you select a suitable automatic label Correct labeling and numbering is important for materials lists test point lists and other reports See also the Automatic Numbering of Objects section see Page 122 Set automatic labeling with the PROJECT DATA gt Numbering and Labeling command and the Automatic Labeling tab P Project Number WS Sheet Number N Installation Number D Part Name 0 Order Number WL Supplier A Amplification oa Attenuation M Cable Length Format Length m Total Cable Length l Total Cable Length Over Channel Automatic Labeling and Numbering F Max Frequency In Cable Set Street Name Automatic Numbering Automatic Text Automatic Filename Dynamic Objects 4 4 T City Name H House Number from Apply for Default planning type AEE f Floor Z Zip Code Format string aN R Signal Source Number Automatic labeling for yrs ise I Location Information J Subscriber Number Subscriber Name g gt p Subscriber First Name Font size 32 xe s Subscriber State Min number of digits for sheetnumbers 0 a b Subscriber Billing Min number of
122. given by the settings for microducts AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 389 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Automatic Labeling and Numbering Automatic Numbering Automatic Text Automatic Filename Dynamic Objects Ar 1 Apply for Default x planning type Automatic labeling for Microducts Format string M total m P gt Font size 24 Min number of digits for sheetnumbers 0 To move a marker drag on the endpin To delete a marker move the mouse over the marker and select the context menu command Delete Object shortcut E The marker s length is considered by all functionality calculation bill of material crosstexts You can delete all markers by the context menu command Delete All Length Markers All microduct legs to one segment In site plans and earlier program versions the microduct legs are connected automatically to the nearest segment In inhouse projects this can be unwanted i e look to the left 2 bridgepoints in the ground floor 4 0G 3 0G 20G E ET 1 0G EG i Tit bee e m n d arRo A bennem mmm il alillilil 5 Pah diag E To overcome this there is an option Connect all legs to the same segment A Edit Object Object Data Duct Package E Duct Package Duct Packe Component information e Base data Nr 1 i Duct Package Mr Length 31 00 ri L Color layer
123. if more complex objects like amplifier stations or NL4 networks are displayed separately in NL3 plans Worksheets assist you in this and you can draw them into NL3 plans like components Worksheets can take the form of any icons Open the worksheet and schematically plot the network of complex objects Use worksheet connections to connect this partial network with the parent network This ensures proper calculation This structure makes it possible to display headends fiber optic networks coaxial networks all node and amplifier stations as well as the network level 4 in the houses in one document project and retain a clear overview An extensive network can also be spread over multiple documents and interlinked using entry and exit points 6 Execute the necessary level distortion product and remote powering voltage calculations For this give the signal source any frequency and level plan you wish and give the amplifiers target values Do this by simply clicking the drawn objects In the window that opens you can enter the desired data and change it at any time The changes in the network can be tracked in the drawing using elements called live test points You can also select any component connection and calculate the level or the distortion ratio These calculations can be done at any time during the drawing process even if the net work is not yet completed 7 In addition to the calculation methods mentioned above th
124. in the output window i e There is one path from 4 to E with at least 2 free wires Pena Oe benekna SDan iid inielet Wibes alike a iheiilaiaes Connections in sheet B i Zi1 Wire 6 2 gt 6 2 Connection is already existing Created object from 6 3 to 6 3 Connections in sheet 221 Created object from 6 2 to 6 2 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 72 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode If you click on a line Created Object AND jumps to that object For the other lines AND is jumping to the sheet symbol Kind of connection defined in the project settings For the kind of objects to be created you have the choice between links bundles and automat IC This is a project specific setting stored within the project It can be edited in the dialog appearing on the following menu command Extras View Manage hotspots Windows 7 Inhouse Automatic Alt U 4 Bw Program Settings gt Auto Save Function Seana p Program Paths Line Styles Display options lust vie Dimensioning Styles Background editor g Sty Link Display Settings Layer templates o Testpoint Settings greene tgs Sees Srase Exitpoint Defaults A RETETEI TELTETETE Target Level Settings User Select language Additional Settings Thematic colouring Fiber Bundle Settings e aa Fns B neime Sketch Trenchplan Print Rect
125. lines Grid line spacing 32 F Snap to Grid V Show Cable numbers V Show Conduit lenghts above 0 000001 m Show remote supply pins if they indicate OK V Show remote supply pins if they indicat Error V Show sheet connector numbers Show tap output order numbers Symbolscale 0 125000 Legend Style cS Orientation landscape portrait V Show ready made cable connectors Ascending Descending C Dynamic Report name F Save report with file Static Title AND Client Manual IV C Width 15 of sheet width Height 5 of sheet height Save Settings Load Settings Cancel i AND Solution GmbH Page 209 of 452 Sheet settings tab For every sheet you can specify the attributes visible print and Add to Materials List Hide display in color or delete DXF background Hide display in color or delete TIFF background Show a help raster grid lines This simplifies the placement of objects in schematic worksheets Upward of a certain cable length that length will be displayed Installation numbers displayed on cable ends Line thickness Scale GIS tab Activates access to GisArea on the AND Smart Server 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets Sheet Basics Sheet View Settings GIS Scale Layer Settings for Layer m Freie Grafik Nzpl v Edit Layer List l Components of this layer are visible
126. mentioned 4 In the table above Export button information about this export is done In CSV file were exported 3 hotspots of type Hotspot type 5 Same steps must be followed when exporting via XML file AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 268 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Manage Hotspots A new menu entry Manage hotspots was added to the main menu The new services rights are needed to use the new functionality 2 4 Services rights Add new types Menu that allows the creation of new hotspot types O Add a new hotspot in overview The needed rights for availability of this functionality is described in O Services rights MANAGE Delete types Access and function is comparable with Add new types The function offers the deletion of the whole data related to a type 0 Delete hotspot or the deletion of a certain type 0 Clear hotspots Warnings will be shown before the operations start and deletion right privilege is needed to use the function Modify types Hotspot type can be modified according to user rights The menu entry Manage hotspots Edit existing hotspot type is available in toolbar When the metadot is modified all hotspots within the database will be modified according to new information rules added Any hotspot can be individual modified by a simple click on it The variable values or the name of the hotspot can be modified Add
127. move the mouse pointer over the box all objects in the block will be displayed blue You have the following options for selecting blocks Exact selection with a marker rectangle Hold the left mouse button down and drag a box from the upper left to the lower right in your worksheet All objects that are completely within the box will be shown blue This means that they belong to the selected block After the box has been moved the objects will be displayed black again and the border of the block will be displayed with a dashed line As soon as the mouse pointer is again moved over the block the objects and the border lines will be shown blue again Approximate selection with a marker rectangle Hold the left mouse button down and drag a box from the lower right to the upper left in your worksheet All objects that you touch they do not have to be completely within the marker rectangle will be shown blue This means that they belong to the selected block and are selected After the box has been moved the objects will be displayed black again and the border of the block will be displayed with a dashed line As soon as the mouse pointer is again moved over the block the objects and the border lines will be shown blue again Using the Ctrl key Hold down the Ctrl key and click one after the other on the objects you wish to select The objects will be displayed blue At the same time a dashed line block will appear Use the Ctrl key to
128. next to Horizontal Raster and Vertical Raster AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 290 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 4 Editing the NIS network structure 7 4 3 Deleting nodes and links Select the nodes or links that you want to delete and press the Del key A window will open for you to confirm the deletion Only one node can be deleted at once If you have selected more than one node you can select the Next button to delete another node The node to be deleted will blink red 7 4 4 Editing project data You can edit project data by choosing SETTINGS gt Project Data from the menu The NIS Project window will open Enter the data there 7 4 5 Deleting NIS projects You delete a project by deleting the corresponding project file Project files have the NIS extension AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 291 of 452 8 Settings 8 Settings 8 1 Factory settings Most settings can be accessed in the OPTIONS gt Program Settings menu Here you can save all settings for future projects and program starts This is generally not necessary however because any changes made in settings windows can be saved there as well Here you can save all settings for new users An administrator for example should use this function to save all settings immediately after installing AND When AND users log in these settings will be applied Auto Save Function Program Paths
129. object and choose Search Jump Targets 0 Search Jump targets links A hotspot was created as reference Jump targets References Projects Metadat Hpt ty e a en Main Alterrative KOG_Fehlettexsty VE Project dianaz_ 7977 Main Altemative en 5 If you choose next to delete just the hotspot then the hotspot and the link between them will be deted If you choose to delete the object then the object and the link will be deleted AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 259 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Link jump between hotspots and other dots AND objects Independent hotspots can be linked to another dot or AND object Also a jump between them and the linked object s dot s is offered Any user is able to define a link between an independent hotspot and a dot in the same manner as he defines a link between a dot and another dot editing a dot then set a reference to it from another dot via context menu entry Another solution offered is to edit the independent hotspot properties and use the link button for searching and setting a reference to it For setting a reference between an AND object and an independent hotspot a new menu item was added to the AND object context menu called Set hotspot link to it this should either create a new independent hotspot of a certain type and link to it or search for an already existing one then link to it Possible opera
130. of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 1 The AND program window and its elements Sub windows appearing as tabs Drag this sizing handle to resize the window The size will remain as you set it Tab tree for switching tabs Click the second level to display the corresponding information in the tab window on the right The first level shows the type of information on each tab AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 17 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 1 The AND program window and its elements Sub Window for editing You can also open the individual sub windows of the Edit object window directly with a hot key or with the context menu Dynamic data This sub window opens automatically when you click the object Component information You can call this sub window directly by pressing the I key for the object or choosing the Component information item from the context menu For an object originating from a library the Basic Data No 1 tab will open Location information Installation number You can call this sub window directly by pressing the O key for the object or choosing the Edit Location item from the context menu This is where you create the installation and serial numbers as well as the location Color Layer information You can call this sub window directly by pressing the F key for the object or choosing the Color Layer item from the context menu This is where you edit the color of the active object
131. of the numbering settings from dialog Besides the read only dialog that shows this information there is an Auto button that allows the user to re set the numbering format based on the current rules and the current object properties 2 14 7 4 Counters in editing If an object type has numbering format with a counter in it the objects of that type get an au tomatic counter value which is a free value not used by other objects of the same type The user may though edit the counters using the context menu T Label P Pin information C Edit connectors Splice Patch Report M Mount object X Calculation object Unmount group Lock object I Component information Set counter manually A Convert to Sheet Leave sheet R Calculate level Y CSO CTB C N Calculation Generate Logic Plan Generate anir Plan Far Remnte Dowerinn When this menu action is clicked a dialog is presented where one can edit a new counter value Enter new counter Old counter 1 New counter Delete Auto Cancel The current value is shown in the dialog One can edit this value directly or use the two but tons Delete means that this object does not have a counter value set and the installation number can be edited as opposed to a read only installation number when the counter value is non zero This is useful when one wants an object outside numbering Auto button searches for a free counter and allocates one to the
132. of the switch point This is how to reorganize twist the conduits in your drawing 1 Click the trench cross section object The Edit Object window will open with the Trench Cross Section tab To reorganize the cables drag the cable from one conduit to the desired target conduit 2 Pull the cable you wish to move out of a conduit by holding the mouse button down and dragging it to the desired target conduit AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 170 of 452 4 4 2 Trench sections 4 Civil works planning 4 4 Trench cross sections When plotting a trench section certain default settings are carried over in the properties You can subsequently change these properties If you click the line of a trench section the Edit Object with will open with the Trench tab fa 4 Edit Object L Shao Object Data Trench Data Here you will find the geometric properties of the trench o D o The general properties provide l information about the type of in stallation the surface etc El Trench segment 3 URL Geometrical Properties URL Color layer information Color layer informatic Length 24 86 m Owner Data Owner Data Dynamic data Trench Data Database Location Inst No T Width 30 0 cm l Trench Type Earth ad Reservedfor New Surface Cost EURO per meter I Mounting Time oo
133. only if deviation to target i greater than 2 0 dE Warn if target cannot be reached In the input field for Equalization enter the threshold value for the equalization setting AND only sets the equalizer if the slope within the bandwidth exceeds the specified threshold AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 322 of 452 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check Adjusting methods AND offers two adjusting methods for return path amplifiers AND sets up the return path amplifier network as an entity according to the following rules in descending priority Rule 1 Unity gain principle Maximum attenuation to the cable modem must be the same for every cable at every cable connection point For the connection point between two house networks with 35 and 38 dB passive attenuation to the connection point for example this means House amplifier 1 should amplify 3dB less than house amplifier 2 Rule 2 The target reception level at the receiver must be reached Rule 3 Max transmission level Behind every house amplifier the cable modem transmits with the greatest attenuation with maximum level Rule 4 System level The system level is applied at the input of every line amplifier The program suggests the optimum system level when you press the Determine button opt system level max transmission level max house attenuation in network Adjusting Methods The return path amplifiers network i adjusted as a unit and optimized acc
134. optreutral lib has changed essentially AN Press No to leave the old library as linked in the drawing No Option On Every Change Even on small changes such as component name price etc the above query dialog box will appear without the word major If Yes is selected the library will be replaced if No is selected the library will be linked Option Only on Major Changes The above dialog box only appears on major changes On small changes the library in the drawing will be replaced by the current library from the library directory without confirmation Option Only If Components Are Missing The library in the drawing is always replaced by the current library Confirmation is only requested if components are missing from the current library 2 If the option Update Crosstexts Automatically After Loading A Library is activated the texts will be updated immediately if they show the data of a library object In previous versions of the program that was only the case for major library changes The option is on by default AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 40 of 452 Displaying the Libraries Use this to display all loaded libraries Here you select the library you want to display exclusively User Defined Libraries 2 Fundamentals 2 13 Loading libraries for object selection Astobopt lib Neut3vrt lib kath4str lib sciatll bkw Lib Show as Tree Loading Private Collection Setti
135. other way Due to one of the causes mentioned above no consumption can be deter mined The amplifiers are therefore as Sumed to be locally powered Page 408 of 452 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering 9 14 8 Displaying remote power current in live test points You have the option of displaying the remote power current and the associated voltage for a given point in the drawing It is similar to displaying levels in live test points You can specify which values are to be displayed in a live test point by selecting OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Test Point Settings Test Point Label Settings r j gt a AT a Displayed Data To display the calculated remote powering currents switch on the Calculated Remote Powering option Please note To use the selected display options for existing test points the Apply to All Test Points op tion must be activated V Calculated Levet eseeeesesoscceceeeeososoes sTeteceseceeed l Calculated CSO l Calculated CTB Measured Level Measured CSO Measured CTB Remote powering values are identified in the live test point by the FS prefix AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH F Calculated CNR Measured CNR L F Calculated BER Measured BER Calculated MER C Measwwetf MER Calculated Reverse Path Level Max Cable Len Taps f Calculated Remote Power gt Frequency Display No Frequency Show Frequency U
136. planning mode Indicating signal direction by arrows The signal direction on single fiber bundles and cables can be indicated by one or more arrows Example The black arrows on the fibers indicate the signal direction In the figure above the yellow bundle is given one direction arrow the green bundle two direction arrows To display direction arrows mark a block and select the Insert direction arrows context menu item In the following figure for example the direction arrows are inserted for the selected block around sheet 93 Meaning of menu items Krol of type of type Zoom all Zoom into Zoom detail Zoom last Select all objects Ctrl PgDown TRL 6 B Move object N Copy object E Delete object F Color Layer O Edit location T Label P Pin information A Take Create Trench Envelope X Calculation object M Multiply Cables Insert Splitpoint Tap Optimize Z Toggle cable s direction Lock object I Component information Set counter manually Delete direction arrows Leave sheet e Insert direction arrows All single fiber bundles and cables are given a an additional direction arrow e Delete direction arrows All direction arrows in the block are deleted AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH T p a a a Page 90 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode The direction of the arrows are updated manually by clicking the toolbar button i
137. points These points then become the navigation points This function is available when using the AND Smart Server or AND FIBRECOAX version You will find more information about this in the Entry and Exit Points chapter in the AND GIS Area Manual 2 5 Looming AND provides different ways of zooming a drawing in or out e Move the mouse pointer to the location you are interested in and press the key or the key to enlarge or reduce the worksheet view e Move the mouse pointer to the location you are interested in and press the SHIFT key left right mouse key With every press of the Tab key you switch between the detail medium and overview zoom levels You can also choose these zoom levels using the context menu e On the toolbar next to the zoom icon A open the list of zoom options and choose the desired level After that you can change the view size with every click of the zoom icon A p Ma Zoom in Zoom out Zoom Rectangle Zoom All BBA AA Zoom Bounds Use Zoom In or Out to incrementally enlarge or reduce the view To use Zoom Rectangle you have to place a box around the area you wish to enlarge To do this click the upper left or lower right corners Use Zoom All to show the entire worksheet including legend Use Zoom Borders to reduce the worksheet so that all components are visible in the work ksheet without legend e Use the scale setting optio
138. raster under Change Raster The Signal Sources window will open upon selecting the Change Raster option Please note To accept your changes you need to save your frequency raster with Save to File You can specify the name of your company raster in the Windows registry under LOCAL_MACHINE Software CDS AND 4 0 0EM FACTORYRASTERNAME This is a character string file type and only the file name is entered not the entire path for example MyCompany src If this entry does not exist in the registry the standard name FactoryRaster src will be taken from AND Check embedded libraries for factory settings If you activate the Check Embedded Libraries for Factory Settings option every embedded library is compared with the company library of the same name from the library path If the libraries differ significantly you will be shown a warning during the network check Significant library changes are Library object does not exist in the company library Differing object type Number or position of connections is different Number of frames is different Number of data packets or their connection definition is different AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 294 of 452 8 Settings 8 2 Project settings 8 2 Project settings The project settings have a direct effect on the active project These settings can only be made when the project window is open Save the project settings by choosing the PROJECT DATA gt Save Program Se
139. reads the following data from the libraries For consumers e Is the consumer remotely powered or localled powered e What is the constant output of the consumer e How high is the maximum current and the minimum voltage For remote power supplies e How high is the constant output voltage of the power supply e How high is the maximum current that the power supply can produce For connection elements e Ohmic resistance for cables every 1 000 meters AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 400 of 452 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering 9 14 4 Specifying remote power data in component editor Defining remote power compatible connections To set up the remote power compatibility of all connections of a component proceed as follows 1 First select the component in the component tree in the Component Editor window 2 In the lower right third of the window select the Symbol Data tab The following window will open Symbol Properties Component Type Passive Components F Active Appartment Termination 1 Has Transponder No I Autonet Compatibility V Show in Amplifierlist V Remote Supply Set max current to all pins Use in netlist C Use in civilworks C Use in both 3 Activate the Remote Supply option To set up the remote power compatibility of individual connections for a component proceed as follows 1 First select the component in the component tree in the Component Editor
140. reducing in the worksheet views 2 7 1 Navigating between documents You have two options for switching between multiple open documents projects e On the Projects and Sheets toolbar choose the desired project from the list next to Project Projects and Sheets x Project Main Alternative RegionUebersicht_Di gt Sheet LUnnamed gt Scale 1 670043468 r e Click the desired project name in the Window menu Alternatively you can use the shortcut Ctrl Tab AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 28 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 7 Navigating and zooming 2 2 Navigating between worksheets To switch between different worksheets in a document you have the following options Click the worksheet icon in the active document a component for which a sub worksheet has been created or click its connection You can recognize a worksheet icon by the dashed border around the icon Click the connection to open the sub worksheet Click the worksheet icon to open the sub worksheet The associated worksheet will open The section of the image is set to appear in the middle of the screen Click the worksheet connection If you are in the sub worksheet use the S key or the Exit Worksheet function in the context menu to return to the parent worksheet Press the Page or Page y buttons to switch to the previous or next worksheet These buttons are also available when positioning components If for exa
141. special case has been implemented If the tap is entered at the input the continuing output of the tap is taken as the only path Tap offs are therefore ignored as possible paths Example Almweg2 Alrmweg 4 alweg 34 seestralse 3 Beispiel A I gt 7 Seestralke 3 Beispiel B Talweg 34 In example A the labels show the worksheet connections on worksheets Almweg 2 Almweg 4 and Talweg 34 as the target address SeestraBe 3 in each case The label on the worksheet SeestraBe 3 is Talweg 34 because the tap off outputs to sheets Almweg 2 and Almweg 4 are ignored In example B the first tap has been replaced by a splitter The labels of the worksheet connections on worksheets Almweg 2 Almweg 4 and Talweg 34 are again Seestrasse 3 because for the splitter too there is only one opposite input for each output The label on the worksheet Seestrasse 3 is now because there are two output pins as possible paths to the input pin of the splitter The path search stops at this point AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 214 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets 6 3 4 Saving and loading worksheets Loading and saving worksheets makes planning complex networks more efficient For example a previously created headend worksheet or an amplifier station can be plotted like a symbol with its entire content If you save some of your important worksheets they can be used again later in your n
142. starting values for floors will also be allocated If you select the Do Not Number Subsequent Connections option only end sockets will be numbered Otherwise all even loop through sockets will be numbered If you select the Delete Other Cable Numbers option the cable numbers will be deleted for all cables that are not connected to sockets whose numbers were changed Note The following general standard is recommended Cables should contain an object number apartment location outlets should only contain the apartment location This way the cables on the multitap can also be distinguished when the cables converge from more than one house to one point To find the outlets that only have the apartment location we recommend they be enclosed in a location rectangle with the object number as well as the installation number AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 135 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Creating and changing amplifier lists with blocks AND offers you the option of inserting multiple amplifiers into an already plotted amplifier list Select all amplifiers and create a block These amplifiers can be in different worksheets Press the V key for Add Amplifiers to Amplifier List to add them All amplifiers in that block will be displayed in the amplifier list If you wish to delete some amplifiers from an amplifier list select those amplifiers This creates a block Press the U key for Remove Ampli
143. symbols can be moved manually by dragging them with the mouse AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 101 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode The break location symbols are deleted manually using the context menu of the cable The break location symbols can also be inserted freely in the context menu of the cable V4 El i N Griff 4 E fa Ort der Bruchstelle Fig 2 Handle in the center of the break location symbol To move and activate the delete function the mouse pointer must be located on the handle in the center of the break location symbol Case A The break location is located outside the boundaries of the project In the output window a message to this effect appears stating the remaining distance to the break location for example Fiber break is outside this project There are 535 7 m of cable length from the last pin to the break location Clicking the message takes you to the last object of the route in this project If the last object is a connection point with a link to a partner project the name of the partner project will appear as part of the output line With the shortcut CTRL J you can jump to the partner point and continue the search there with the remaining distance to the break location AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 102 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Additional properties of the pin information window If you switch to ano
144. text file default ftc in the TP_RASTER sub folder of the AND program directory A frequency can have more than one abbreviation which must be separated by The following text file would assign frequency 133 25 to both XY7 and E034 Ph default ftc Editor iof x Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht K5 C5 K6 C6 K7 C7 K8 C8 K9 C9 K10 C10 For analog channels frequencies are the vision carrier frequencies otherwise they are the mid range frequencies of the channel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 365 of 452 9 Calculations 9 11 Calculation settings 9 11 Calculation settings You can specify different default settings for the calculations You open the Calculation Settings for Current Project window by choosing CALCULATION gt Setup Calculation settings Calculation settings for current project _ gt Additional Warming Default values for level reduction warn when channels are outside of an amplifiers GAaMi N60 dB F adic Eo dE Distortion Calculatior O4Me4 10 0 dE DOVET 10 0 dE a Calculate CSO CTB with modulated carriers AMT c 10 0 db QAMZ56 4 0 dE The values in the source are always unmodulated Level reduction for modulation eal dE i Mark remote supply areas colored E Default Raster Which raster should be used for the given frequency range if the library doesn t contain that information C CSO4CTB with FM Radio Channels slow 47 4
145. the button Get Corners from GIS Insertion Pts AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 187 of 452 m Scale selection 5 Editing background files Improting geo referenced DXF or raster backgrounds When importing geo referenced DXF or raster backgrounds it is possible to select the coordinates The following window for setting the coordinate system will open Settings for a DXF background Settings for a raster background Scale types Gi ME EA J Layer printing color defaults to layer color Reset all object colors to ByLayer m Source Coordinates Left 3409748 67 Right 341 0049 78058671 Top 5318556 89 Bottom 5318302 48 I Switch to max coords m Coordinate System Coordinate System Gauss Krueger 3 degree wide strips v Refference System DHDN PD DE 1995 lt 5m Rauenber w Destination Coordinates Left 3409748 67 Right 3410049 78058671 Top 5318556 89 Bottom 5318302 48 Coordinate System Coordinate System EE Wess Sitges tetris est ay Refference System DHDN PD DE 1995 lt 5m Rauenber x Zone Native Meridian Strip Cancel Settings for a raster background m Source Coordinates Left 2627623 25 Right 2629703 75 Top 5725059 82 Bottom 5722979 32 Coordinate System Coordinate System Gauss Krueger 3 degree wide strips Y Refference System DHDN PD DE 1995 lt 5m Rauenber
146. the calculation settings menu Calculation last item AND Client Manual IV C r Calculation settings for current project Additional Warning frequency range wy wan when channels are outside of an amplifier s Distortion Calculation A Calculate CSO CTB with modulated carriers The values in the source are always unmodulated Level reduction for modulation 3 0 dB Apply to CSO CTEB in signal source too Calculate intermodulation noise also slow CSO CTB with FM Radio Channels slow Logarithmic multiplier CTB 17 0 Logarithmic multiplier CSO 10 0 Worst case distortion CNR at high T CSO CTB at low T Level uncertainty 0 0 dB Opticals M Splicingloss of a splicepoint 0 10 dB Optical power reserve 0 0 dB Units dByV dBmi dBm Apply the unit to test points label too 4 Include distance to sheet symbol center for cable length Update linked exit points automatically Suppress entry exitpoint signal transfer Save settings Load Settings Default values for level reduction QAM16 16 0 dB QAM64 10 0 dB QAM128 100 dB Radio 6 0 dB DYBT 10 0 dB QAM256 6 0 dB z Mark remote supply areas colored Default Raster Which raster should be used for the given frequency range if the Change Change library doesn t contain that information 47 450 MHz BK450 47 606 MHz CENELEC29 47 860 MHz CENELEC42 Cable between floors Type Length 0 0 Sta
147. the component editor Only the library administrators have write privileges in the library directory e If it is not possible to set up a common library directory because the branches are too far apart set up a copy or use the AND Smart Server e In AND set up the main library path to the common directory described above and using the operating system priveleges setup make sure that access to the main key of the registry is write protected for standard users This ensures that this common directory is always accessed first e Prepare the various current component selections for the different user groups NL3 and NL4 planners see the Loading Libraries for Object Selection section Page 38 These should then be used via a template or as the standard This will load the associated libraries in each case Vendor independent libraries Typically component information in the libraries contains detailed data from the manufacturer for example the order number The advantage of this is that the components can be precisely mapped using their calculation and technical parameters and that an order can be placed directly from AND to the manufacturer Some companies use vendor independent components during the planning phase In this case set up a neutral library with the components to be used We recommend filling in the Item Number field with the data from the ordering system for example SAP no Then do your network planning with the neutral compone
148. the desired length e If lengths and distances are specified in a level plan you can use the keyboard design assistant where you will enter the values using the keyboard Here is how you work with the keyboard design assistant 1 Activate the construction mode by selecting the keyboard design assistant with the Keyboard Design Assistance icon on the toolbar On the right side of your screen the keyboard entry window will now appear x e O 7 7 7 7 ai 3661185 34 Yi 594574401 Li 6982560 42 Fi 56 38 Previous point J current Mouse position step 10 00 In field X enter a length if the drawing direction is horizontal In field Y enter a length if the drawing direction is vertical 0 In fields L and F enter lengths Under Relative to select whether the relational point for the calculations of the next point is the current mouse position or the previously set point Double click the desired cable in the object selection Move the mouse pointer to the location in the worksheet where the start point Should be placed and left click Now press the M key to select the Current Mouse Position option in the design assistant Press the Enter key to set the start point Now press the L key for example and enter a length Press the Enter key to set the second point of the cable If you wish to set another cable point press the X Y L or F key and enter a value Press the Enter key again to set the point
149. the drawing is interpreted by AND Data will then automatically be entered in as many fields as possible AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 222 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options Project companies and order data tab Project Header Project Properties Project Companies Order Info Project type m Administration Name Street Zip City Phone Specialist r Management Name AND Solution GmbH Fill eres arsam i automatically Zip City 81829 M nchen Phone P Specialist Max Mustermann Projects and Sheets El Projects E empty project i Unnamed Project Header Project Properties Project Companies Order Info Project type Planning company Street Karl Schmid St Nr pa Zip City 81829 M nchen Phone P Specialist John Doe Fill automatically m Order info Order number Edk Histon Date of order Deadline History SP Number new Settings SP Number old Sort options Set numbers The data in these two windows are required for creating reports For example acceptance reports are automatically filled with this data AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 223 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options Project type tab Projects and Sheets Project Header Project Properties Project Companies Order In
150. the entire test point list can be output on the printer e Export exports the test point list in an as yet to be determined text file in ASCII format e Excel Export exports the test point list ot Excel Excel must be installed and functioning e The Only Current Worksheet option limits the list to the test points in the current worksheet e Settings opens the Settings window to set the list Use these options to determine what potions a 2 s will be included in the column headings eee 2 Here you specify the units of measurement V Channel description V Modulation type V Frequency R l Channel name V Reduction V Units in header for the values in the list ai a a The level values are then correspondingly O laa n fe dBy f m f m converted You can omit or include individual eG gt columns for printing here No E Shows one line and only one line E Location ae BI PALS SF I5AMzPAL BG W UKWU 2F 87 5 MH2FM RadioR 4 0 dB in dBuy H PALE OF 168 3 MH2PAL BG 4 for each test point M UKWU7OF 108 0 MHzFM RadioR 4 0 dB in dBpV G PALC 5F 175 3 MHzPAL BG i 7 DIGF 113 0 MH2QAM 64R 10 0 dBlin dBpy V PALC 6F 182 3 MHzPAL 5 Shows one line for each test point DIG PilotF 121 0 MHzQAM 64R 10 0 dBfin dBp A PALC 7F 1892 4AzPAL BG j f V PALS 4F 126 3 MHzPAL BGR 0 0 dB in dBpy V PALC OF196 3 MH2PAL BG even if no value IS available V PALS 5F 133 3 MHzPAL BGR 0 0 dB in dBi SA PALC 9F 203 3 MHzPAL BG PA
151. transmit noise simultaneously Frequency Multiplex The number of modems emitting noise at the same time is indicated by the number of subchannels Time Multiplex Only one modem transmits at any one time The second column of radio buttons is currently provided for information purposes only AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 329 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation 9 4 2 Setting the return path transmitter There are two types of points that the program detects as return path sources You Subscriber socket user outputs AND assumes that a potentially transmitting cable modem exists at each user output of a subscriber socket see Setting the Return Path Receiver Worksheet outputs To avoid confusion Worksheet outputs are the end of an NL3 plan a They are symbols that typically look like this WE 20 WWE 30 Either the attenuation to the cable modems or a fixed level is specified for these points enter the data for the worksheet outputs as follows Click the worksheet symbol The Edit Object window will open In the tree displayed below Object Data under Dynamic Data select Bridge Point Return Path Return Path iix o Enter th e num b er of Res d ent i a l Objektdaten Signal Ubergabepunkt Nr 1 Ein Ausgangs Punkt Nr 2 UP Riickwe gt Units M D Us l l A seated wa Statistische P Daten A 2 If you activate the fix option eae Wobnungesneten WE I Fai Symbol Daten Nr
152. user wants to create hotspots of type dh_uep linked to UEP First step is to create a link from dh_uep properties dig to the UEP by ID see picture Link to objeckt retadat Link ko LEF Link by fio CIEE tec eect ct nee ny ne PENT err a ili Cancel ME4 Detail Blind coupler Next add an hotspot of type dh_uep within an overview In Dot properties there press Set reference this button is used to create a reference link to an UEP the object type chosen to be linked too A Search dialog will open Here are available all UEP objects The Search returns just 20 results You can be more specific when searching by using filter Number Choose an UEP from list confirm the dialog with ok Result the link is created Now that the reference is created let s see how the link was created from hotspot to UEP First of all if you search the hotspots it receives a special attribute is it has reference Search result list Mr Marne Attributes Type File 1 hokspoki wep dh_uep External interface 2 l 3432375 dh_uep External interface Iss dh ep dh uep External interface Right click on hotspots created and choose Search Jump Targets zoom all zoom into zoom detail zoom last Ctrl PgDown Dok properties Search Jump Targets B Move object E Delete object F ColorfLayer Lack object Check Jump Targets References Here you will find the linked object in this case the UEP AND Client
153. value pairs you must first activate the Use List for Power Consumption option 0 The specified dependency must be monotonically falling because the calculation in AND requires commutativity AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 406 of 452 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering 9 14 7 Remote powering outputs and error messages Not all connections between them are re mote power compatible Consumer is not No connection between connected to the consumer and the remote power POUES ing Some connections are not properly superim posed Such connections can be found using the Network Check gt Check Network Struc ture option There is no source in old libraries power supplies are often defined as graphical symbols instead of as power supplies Components are incorrectly defined in the library For example according to the li brary power supplies sometimes have only one assembly point but no real connec tions Short circuit be 2 remote power Block the remote power on a connection be tween remote sources are connected tween them powering sup to each other plies Short circuit During a remote pow Try to identify the loop path and break it there is a loop ering path search the path program came upon a point where it had al ready been The path search turns in a circle within a component There are two ways of correcting the error a Define the connectio
154. with marking active orders are marked with different splice symbols The order of an object in the database appears in the system solution Table AND_ATTRIBUTES AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 237 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status Description in detail Order combo box See Fig 1 The combo box shows the current order By changing the selection you can rear range the current order By entering a new order name a new order is created or if an order already exists with this name you switch to that order The line with the empty text is the space holder for lt no order gt Order object attribute Each object has an order attribute that can be edited in the Location Inst No sub dialog box f Edit Object UNM Na Object Data Location Inst No Nr 1 ymbol P FTTx 1 Reference Component information Installations Nummer Base data Nr 1 Symbol Data Nr 2 Optical Bridge Point Nr 3 ea eae oe Object Type po Location type lis location x Color layer information Color layer information Installation type inside z Owner Data Owner Data Dynamic data Owner Optical Source Nr 1 Termination Device Nr 2 Installation year Entry exit point Nr 3 Production year Database Location Inst No Nr 1 Installation Company Installation Technician General Properties Planning Type Default Task Task xy v Status
155. you can define the socket in the library as follows 1 In the library define only one user output for the socket whose attenuation is described by its own standard packet 2 In the standard packet enter the attenuation of the return path user output in the return path frequency range and in the forward path the user output attenuation for the forward path 3 Do not forget to activate the Describe Attenuation via Standard Packet option in the user output Example The 10 16dB multimedia outlet in the CDS_neutral lib library AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 331 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Individual reverse level of signal source In the dialog for editing a signal source is a tab named Return Path Target Level where you can enter the target receiving level for return path for this signal source lolx Object Data Signal source Nr 1 Retum Path Target Level Nr 2 E ntry exit pal LURE Color laper informatio Reverse Target Level jad Et Colordlayer infor l Owner Data os Owner Data l Dynamic data Signal source Mr 2 Return Path Tarc n Entryesit point N Database n Location Inst Mo Cancel The initial value of the reverse target level is 0 dBuV O dBuV is a special value which means not valid or not entered For a signal source with reverse target level of O dBuV AND takes the target level from the project settings as i
156. 02 F04 FO05 B06 K0002 Enclosure E121 cassette C01 splice from cable KOO01 to KOOO2 Note the splice name is shown only if this is configured in the settings Hierarchy parent symbols and containing rectangles A hierarchy can be defined for symbols e g a patch field can have a rack as a parent symbol In order to define this relationship the symbol for the patch field has to be marked in the library editor in the tab Symbol Data as an Assembly Unit and a lower Assembly Unit Level has to be given to the patch field and in AND the rack and the patch field have to be connected via a mounting pin AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 117 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Mounting pins also may have a pin name e g the mounting pin name of a symbol can be set to MO1 in the library editor in order to name the mounting position MO1 This pin name can be displayed in the hierarchy path if this is configured in the dynamic label settings The pin name of the mounting pin of the rack symbol in the library editor has more priority than the rack position attribute of the patch field in AND Two documentation styles There are thus two documentation styles see above e Rack as a rectangle with installation number R0117 containing the patch field PFO04 enter rack positionM0O1 in AND Pin PO1 yields the hierarchy path RO0117 PFO4 M01 P01 e Rack as symbol instance with installation number R0117
157. 10 Fig 1 For signals without ripple both definitions deliver the same values for level 100 dBuV and pre emphasis 10 dB AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 358 of 452 9 Calculations 9 8 Information about the distortion product calculation Pegel i z f z Pegel 86 0 dBpV _ Frq 55 000 MHz Cursor auf beliebige Frq 40 150 260 370 480 590 700 810 Fig 2 In contrast to Fig 1 the level in the highest channel was reduced by 3 dB to 97 dBuV According to Definition A the level 97 dBuV and pre emphasis 7 dB According to Definition B the level 99 8 dBuV and the pre emphasis 9 8 dB i i Pegel 86 0 dByV Frq 55 000 MHz Cursor auf beliebige Frq 102 5 El 100 0 HEE i T 95 0 Hy EE E 92 5 Le Ea 90 0 eS FERRER UE Lat atal G ll EEEE EI 1 EEEIEE ae 87 5 E g t jE 14 aes Pop a blir b 1 LEi H HE E Pb EEFI 40 150 260 370 480 590 700 810 Fig 3 A signal located after four cascaded amplifiers takes the exact component ripple values into consideration According to Definition A the level 100 dBuV and the pre emphasis is 10 dB According to Definition B the level 102 7 dBuV and the pre emphasis is 11 dB The advantages of Definition B are in the distortion calculation The amplifier whose output level is shown in fig 3 produces ap
158. 2 Signalquelle Nr 3 this number remains the same even if the number of residential units is E T E cit D mpfungen Pegel im R ckweg later changed by other program Farb Layerdnfo f Farb Layer Info Pegel fix eingestellt 107 dB un ctl Ons E Dynamische Daten i C i digne lbeigabepun dynamisch nach FM Formel berechnet For the return path level either o Ein Ausgangs Punk C D mpfung dB enter the minimum and maximum o E a eee eI attenuation for the cable modems Ortsangabe Inst Nr ee oe ee A a level that IS fixed Verstarkung von dB bis dB or which is calculated according to the FM Formula For the distortion signals in the return path you can either apply the standard values or enter the Verstarkung d Annahme fur Storsignale im R ckweg lt fix eingestellt Ingressabstand 150 0 dB Rauschabstand 70 0 dB ingress ratio and noise ratio xi manually Manually entered values C Werte aus Einstellung Ubernehmen are not changed when you later Einstellung andem change the standard settings Ei Abbrechen The default values for this data can be entered via OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Exit Point Defaults AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 330 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Multimedia outlets If the socket has separate user outputs for forward and return path multimedia sockets
159. 2 15 1 Optical plug connections in the component editor The connection type is described as an optical connector reference Connector references can be assigned to component connections and cable ends Asymmetrically assembled patch cables and pigtails can also be defined Assignment in the Component Editor is performed in exactly the same way as for RF connector references r Edit Pin njaj sjaje aaj 7 Zelk a i7 Pin Type Neutral Optical pin ID 5 r ora Redundant oam nha on F Do not show level in Amplifierist mpi Properties Connector Reference Type F ee Reference ON cod Ee wry sle Ater Oete Sroda S a VPS amp FL to etter heis However the following differences from RF connector references do exist e References of optical icon connections are either sockets female connectors or connectorless There are no male connector references for icon connections The references of a cable are either male connectors or connectorless e If an optical icon connection is a socket this means that the component has to be connected by a patch cable or pigtail of the same reference e If an optical icon connection is connectorless reference to cable this means that the component has to be connected by splicing to a cable with the same reference e Optical adapters as separate components are described by icon icons of type optical adapter Patch panels
160. 2 Kan le 42 CW Analogkan le St rabstand am selektierten Punkt CTB Abstand 60 0 dBc Frq 646 608 MHz Cursor auf beliebige Frq CNR 30 0 A o a o o el e eee _ E een m S SES al E aa ee pae E a 1 1 a ag 5 o 70 0 mui 150 TTT UTS OAA 370 480 590 700 810 o CTB spectrum for 8 dB pre emphasis calculated with the transmission function The worst value is 60 0 GB That means operating this amplifier with 8 dB pre emphasis improves the CTB ratio by 5dB Even if the actual channel spacing deviates from the catalog spacing deviations occur for the worst ratio 91 Kan le 68 CW Analogkandale St rabstand am selektierten Punkt CTB Abstand 61 4dBe Frq 119 123 MHz CNR 30 0 Piet UATE wer ii Th 40 150 260 370 480 590 700 810 Lt A ak eh dt iM fh dell aad willl hl que mine CTB spectrum for 91 channels higher frequency range digital calculated without the transmission function Worst CTB ratio 61 4 dB at 135 25 MHz 91 Kan le 68 CW Analogkanale Storabstand am selektierten Punkt CTB Abstand 56 6 dBc Frq 550 760 MHz CNR 30 0 50 0 a rt ci A AnS An ANY AaS ANS D ANS AN ANA DNAN A A A An A A ADS ANS 1 paii
161. 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode o Display with Min Level lt 3 PF04 P07 For all hierarchy paths start and destination points the maximum number of levels can be limited i e the outer part of the hierarchy path may not be displayed i e o Max Level 3 0 means no restriction o Hierarchy path complete KS80 R018 PF03 P07 o Display R018 PF03 P07 The start context is the hierarchy of the start point without the lowest level splice pin It is shown in the splice patch reports in the group line and may also occur as a dynamic label CTH Installation Number Pin Name If the installation cable number is not given a replacement may be shown if there is a type and its display has been enabled it is displayed if there is no type or type replacement has been disabled a fixed replacement string can be displayed This setting is separately provided for user defined library symbols and internal symbols For location rectangles the address may also be specified as a replacement for missing installation number to be displayed Pins do not have an installation number Instead they may have a pin name supplied in the user library If a pin does not have a pin name instead the relative hierarchy path of the partner pin may be displayed e g for a sender symbol placed on a pin of a patch field the output can be e Location Sender without partner pin replacement sender not mounted e Location Sender Rack Patchfi
162. 5 a When you select and optical pin and press the R button the window is filled with information The window contains the following information columns Bundle number Bundle color Fiber number Fiber color Wavelength if a signal exists on the fiber Optical output at pin to which the information in the window applies Fiber ID Connection ID Identifier of the optical route file type Text Start address Installation number of the start location rectangle Target address Installation number of the end location rectangle Status of the route Open Assigned Planned Reserved Splice patch order Priority of route Low Medium High Intended use Rack position of starting point Rack position of end point Service User Customer Cable name if the pin belongs to a real cable Cable owner data if the pin belongs to a real cable Fiber owner data if the pin belongs to a real cable AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 93 of 452 This window can be docked just like the output window The information displayed in this window continues to be available while you are working You can show or hide individual columns by right clicking on the column heading and setting and removing the checkmark for individual columns I 1 k j H amp a T rae ef Col Wave Onc Start ry Bundle Color Fiber Color Wavelength Optical Power dBm
163. 50 MHz BR450 Change 47 BOG MHz Logical multiplier CTB 17 0 CENELEC29 Change Calculate intermodulation noise also slow 47 360 MHz CENELEC42 Ch Logical multiplier CS0 i 0 0 Default ange Opticals Cable between floors 0 10 dE Type gt Length 0 00 m Optical power reserve oa dE Splicingloss of a eplicepaint Units i Standard Cable for Length Calculation det dB mi dEr Type nk Barbus F min Level 65 00 By Include distance to sheet symbol center for cable length mea Warn when channels outside of an amplifier s Frequency range option This option is activated as default and is generally useful A warning is output if for example frequencies of more than 606 MHz enter a 606 MHz amplifier In general for level calculations frequencies that are outside the frequency range of a component are regarded as filtered out In the case of the 606 MHz amplifier this means that the AND level calculation displays no frequencies greater than 606 MHz behind the amplifier AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 366 of 452 9 Calculations 9 11 Calculation settings Calculate CSO CTB with modulated carriers option You can perform CSO CTB distortions either with or without modulated carriers You specify different limit values for each calculation type see Test Point Settings Page 296 The difference between the results of calculation of modulated and unmodulated carrier
164. AL BGR 0 0 dB in dB PALC 10F 210 3 MHz2PAL Bl 4 t Always print measured row Signal transfer over entry exit points can be switched off Implemented from Build 1580 on The automatic transfer of signals can be switched off AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 297 of 452 Activating the option for one given entry exit point 8 Settings 8 3 Program settings 7 m a i Edit Object Object Data 3 Symbol ONT Component information Base data Nr 1 Symbol Data Nr 2 Optical Bridge Poin URL URL Color layer information Color layer informat Dynamic data Optical Source Nr Termination Device Entry exit point Nr MDU Nr 4 3 Database Location Inst No P This Object Partner Object A Optical Source Nr 1 Termination Device Nr 2 Entry exit point Nr 3 f MD 41 gt Name down ID Version Signal Transfer Z From Project Settings On Partner ID Partner Name Partner File Connect A If From Project Settings is checked the entry exit inherits from the project whether the signal is transfered to the partner project This is default The checkbox below is disabled in this case If From Project Settings is unchecked the checkbox below is enabled to allow editing of the automatic signal transfer of the current entry exit Editing the project setting This project setting can be edited in the dialog for
165. AND uses the attenuation specified here for every splice point Because a splice box has one splice point per fiber the value can also be interpreted as the attenuation of a splice box Optical output reserve field This value is using in checking the optical output at the input of an optical receiver Because of stability problems in the transmitter laser it is advisable to reduce the admissible output window at the input of the receiver by a certain amount Example If the output range for the input according to the library is 4 0 to 4 0 dBm and the output reserve is 0 5 dB a warning is already output on calculation of the optical output at the optical input if the output is not within the range of 3 5 dBm to 3 5 dBm Logical multiplier CTB field This value determines how the program summates the CTB ratios M multiplier from this field CTB1 _CTB2 CTB1 CTB2 M log 10 10 M 20 corresponds to an in phase sum worst case but not necessarily realistic The default value is 17 Logical CSO multiplier field This value determines how the program summates CSO ratios see CTB The default multiplier value for CSO is 10 Level reduction with modulation field See description for Ca culation with Modulated Carriers option AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 367 of 452 9 Calculations 9 11 Calculation settings Default values for level reduction group box Here you can specify the defau
166. ATA Projekt Technik frequency Netzinformationen Return path fre quency ReversePossible Suitable for return AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Technik path Netzinformationen Return path possi ble RSCurrentVoltage Remote supply current voltage RSDistortion Remote powering distortion RSLevel Remote powering level RSName Remote powering name RSPlugComponents Remote powering connector compo nents Graphic for apart ment mirror num ber of residential units in a structure 1 2 Graphic for apart ment mirror num ber of residential units in a structure 3 9 Small multiple dwelling units SubscriberCount Number of sub scribers SuesCount Number of signal bridge points SystemAdministrationPhone House manage AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Firmen ment telephone Hausverwaltung Phone SystemAdministrationServic AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Firmen Hausverwaltung Name SystemFacilityManager House manager AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Firmen Hausverwaltung House manager SystemSignalProvider Signal supplier AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Technik Signal supplier SystemState State of system AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Status State AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 442 of 452 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer Variable Meaning Program reference TimeOfControl Control date AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Zustandigkeiten Completion TimeO
167. Calculations 9 10 Frequency plans Connection button only available in the FibreCoax version Loads a signal source from a file and connects the signal source with that file If the signal source is connected to a file you are automatically asked whether you want to update the signal source as soon as the file changes This function is intended for AND users without an AND server The loaded signal source file is usually the exported worksheet of an NL3 drawing This ensures that the signal sources in all dependent NL4 drawings are updated when the parent NL3 drawing is changed You can generated signal source files from the worksheet outputs of an NL3 drawing as follows For all worksheet outputs simultaneously by selecting CALCULATION gt Export all output points or for individual worksheets by selecting the context menu item Create signal source Meaning of the columns in the signal source window Short name of channel for example K5 S10 U12 Program name Vision carrier frequency in the case of analog channels mid range I p 9 9 p 9 8 frequency in the case of L Channel Program Frq MHz dB Type Bandwidth Red C N Mux CTE CSO digital channels ee ee ri Channel level Channel type for example PAL QAM64 Video bandwidth of channel in MHz Level reduction for this channel in dB Noise ratio in dB 00000 Practical tips for using the signal source window The list supports jumping from one inp
168. Comment 5 Owner Data 2 ee oie Type and Form Visibility Work sheet Ippe Default sheet Y Preview Mo preview k 6 Database ae i Lacationdlnat Mo Fix form Show pin numbers gt V Show symbol Amplifiersheet P and in project data dialog Project Data O Projects and Sheets Sheet Basics Sheet view Settings GIS Scale El Projects g empty project ye Unnamed i Unnamed Identification ID 1 No 1 Object Mo Auto Number Sheet 1 Sheet Name Unnamed Comment Logical Size fix DIN A4 1602114 C variable 160 tree Clear Sheet Type and Form Orientation Load Sheet Type Default sheet landscape The numbering format for a project can be found in project data dialog AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 126 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Project Data C Projects and Sheets Project Header Project Properties Project Companies Order Into Project type i Projects a empty project Identification Unnamed ProjectNo Project Q PrjsQ a Unnamed Unnamed Project Type Unbekannt Chent Address Zip City City district Street House number House number to House no supplement House no supplement to Note that by default there is no numbering format for projects It can be defined by adding it from autonumbering dialog see Editing
169. Component information in Base data Nr 1 No f1 Attenuation 12 5 dB Symbol Data Nr 2 Default packet Nr 3 Frequency Respons Pi Type iia H URL Fix direction URL Color layer information cr Color layer informatic E Pin info Cut off reverse path P V Owner Dat Owner Data B Dynamic data a Level Mdu informatic Connector Reference tabase Location Inst No Nr Type Female plug Reference able AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 47 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 2 14 2 Plotting a cable Proceed as follows to plot a cable 1 Inthe object selection window click the cable you would like to plot 2 Move the mouse pointer to the position in the worksheet where the cable should begin The mouse pointer takes on the shape of crosshairs because it is now in positioning mode 3 Click with the left mouse button to set the cable start point 4 Move the point pointer horinzontally or vertically to the end point If the cable has to be routed around a corner because of the plans click each of the corner points to arrive at the end point Press the Esc key or the right mouse button If the end point is on a component connection Esc is not possible 5 If automatic labeling is active the Create Plotting Object Data window will open Enter the cable length if it has not been automatically
170. D Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 435 of 452 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer Inserting variables for data fields X m Abe Uae eo Selection Line Rectangle Bitmap Text Datafield Description OrderNumber Owner OwnerAdress OwnerName Pasition Price ProductNumber On the toolbar open the list of data field variables Double click a variable to select it Draw a box at the position here you want the data fields to be placed Inserting check variables Alternative texts Check variables are used to lay out text in alternative ways in a report template As soon as you insert a check variable from the data field variables list for example MustDoFieldCheck the Alternative Texts function in the EDIT menu becomes active You can now write alternative texts for the variable value in question Edit alternativer Text f r Caeck ariablen 7 x Ifthe text that the report generating program aoe e ne ri Pa a for example AND assigns to the variable reae Bedingung WAHR is to be used you must set the Standard option iiaiai at aii Paa meen 1 i Vorschriften Bedingung FALSCH Die Messungen entsprechen NICHT den Vorschriften Der Errichter Standard Abbrechen The list of check variables cannot be edited The following check variables are available German translation Original o AutoNetzPruefungErfolgreich AutoNetCheckSuccessful
171. EMVPruefungErgebnis LeakageCheckResult EMVPruefungUeberschrift LeakageCheckTitle FeldpruefungErforderlich SystempruefungErforderlich As soon as one of these variables is used in a report template it is possible to define alternative texts for it AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 436 of 452 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer Inserting formula fields Select the pai icon from the toolbar and create a frame at the position where the formula field is to appear The Data Field window will open a Select the Formulas tab 2 Double click the formula that you want to insert 3 Enter the data field name in the Name field 4 Click OK to finish Inserting the replace empty field formula The Report Designer offers a new formula for replacing empty fields This means that when an empty field is generated by the resolution of a variable this field can be replaced by the content of another Example For data field dfMaterial enter the formula LeerdfeldErsetzen dfLangText dfKurzText If the content of data field dfLangText is empty it is replaced by the content of data field dfKurzText df aterial LeerfeldErsetzen dfLangT ext diKurzText dfbang Test dtu Test AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 437 of 452 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer Formatting report ojects You can design the various objects of a report with the functio
172. F entries outside of the worksheet borders will be deleted The AND objects will be moved and rescaled to reflect the changes made in the background and to retain their relative positions AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 192 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps Editing background layers Vector background maps can be changed to accommodate changes made in reality If a new building has been built on a plot of land the old building floor plan has to be changed into the new floor plan Do this by selecting the FILE gt Background gt Convert Background for Editing command The Background Conversion window will open Here you can prepare one or more layers for editing f Background conversion annan This option creates a copy of the layer Bent yi to be edited and hides the Original prota apers Convert from layers a This option transfers the vectors of the Bahn cewaessen gt a available layer to the converted layer Sen CHE CEOL x z The option makes it difficult to transfer HAUSANBAD o ae KULTURGRENZE the changes back into the original layer MAUER RENE 5 This option enables you to determine Aa Ses A i all Dyf layers emove all Dxf Layers the area to be edited Add all Gis layers Remove all Gis Layers 5 t D Options 2 Create Netlist layers from Dxf Gis layers for objects 5 2 Put all objects in this layer tacos 3 Select area i 4 Cancel
173. ITAP O H E ENDDOSEN i a pr O H A DURCHGANGSDOSEN SBX 272 SBX 474 MULTIMEDIADOSEN O B E ABSCHLUB 75 OHM ED ABZW F 4 FACH ED PAD STECKER F Ea jiii o E E PAD STECKER IEC SBX 478 SBX 484 B A EQ STECKER F H A BK FILTER eo VERBINDER F BU m SBX 615 Cables H Neutdbky lib Object section window in the list view left and tree view right There is one such window per document window and each displays the components available in the libraries for that particular document To plot a component into the network plan drag it from the object selection window and position it on the worksheet Depending on the setting the window shows the objects and components of a single library of all libraries or of a user defined selection of objects and components Using the Show as List Show as Tree or Find Symbol tabs you can switch between the list tree and quick search views You will find more information in the Loading Libraries for Object Selection section see Page 38 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 13 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 1 The AND program window and its elements Selecting groups Objects in the object selection window are divided into groups in the tree view to provide a clear overview of the library All objects in the same group are interchangeable Show as List Show as Tree Find Sud 3 J i NeutSyrt lib gt B E Symbols BA VERT F Groups are shown as folders E i a
174. IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 432 of 452 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer 3 Choose EDIT gt Options to make your settings for the new report Specify the language for the report here Options i E In AND users can specify whether only pak EN 2a E 0 reports in certain languages will be i ee of one section but several pages displayed T AND Server pans With dynamic sorting users can select Language Engish 7 Ores 3 the sort criteria when creating a report Layout Type infomation With static sorting you specify the Ws cee ig ppa Pae Pats PF sort criteria here che cain alia Select report type here E akee Oma Doo A filter is a selection criterion that limits Variables T Include Dynamic Objects the data in a report to only the type of WR oii aiii data you specify niece The raster is a drawing aid and is not printed in the finished reports The margins are also just an aid for designing reports The object filter evaluates the planning status see Page 414 This enables you to filter objects by their planning status To allow you to transfer data from a network plan to a report you require variables with which you can make references to the necessary data You can compile variables for your report in two different ways a Load an entire list of variables b Enter the required variables manually a To load a variables list Select VARIABLES gt Load
175. LS 6F 140 3 MH2PAL BGR 0 0 dB in dB PALC 10F 210 3 MHz2PAL B 5 Print only measured ro Always print measured row M Round values Save settings Load Settings Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 418 of 452 11 Output options 11 1 Printing 11 1 2 Printing network structures To create a network structure choose PROJECT DATA gt Generate Project Structure and print it out using the printer icon 0 T AND FibreCoax 4 3 261_2 hk O nis File Edit Settings View Winda D Sag Raoa H laS Layer lt no active layer gt Layer Template User defined Color Width mm Auto Laying Ty Project Sheet gt Scale Planning Type NL EJER h EP i x apul References Projects Name un jOJJUOD Yeas 11 1 3 Printing connector lists First create a connectors list with MATERIALS gt Find Connectors and Adapters AND creates a list of all the connectors and their connector references and connections This list can be printed out with the printer icon 0 T AND FibreCoax 4 3 Connectors and Adgptor 7 B File Edit ProjectData Calculatign Material Tools View Manage hotspots Windows Deag R amp EHCAINS A Layer lt no active layer gt Layer Template User defined A Color Width mm Auto Laying Type Earth Project Sheet gt gt Scale v Planning Type NL3 risk kx Barbus x8 PU Nh jOJUOD Yeas 7 al ks ks ks
176. Level Non Regulated Input Power oO dBm OMI Level dB p pes pa po o o po o s ps fpa e pa pa C e E Sort p gt per Opt Receive A Level Terminating device The values of the list refer to the reference input power Piip marked in red If the list is not empty the output level of the receiver is obtained by output level 2 Panp Pin LevelOfListatOMI If the list in the library is empty the level at receiver output is not calculable and testpoints behind show Reverse amplifier adjustment ANDs reverse amplifier adjustment ALT V is adjusting the reverse amplifiers in the headends too For normal amplifiers before the optical path the cable modems or child amplifiers guarantee a unique input level and so the task of the amplifiers is only to adjust the necessary amplifica tion The first headend amplifier after the optical path has the additional task to align the different levels of the receivers before amplifying altogether AND can handle this if the amplifier is designed 2 staged like the following example Amplifier Technical Data Frequency from Eu MHz to 860 00 MHz Amplification 0 0 dB Gain control Range 0 0 dB Fixed Equalizer Slope control Range 10 0 dB Noise 0 0 dB Turning Point 0 MHz Recom Level 0 0 dByly RetumPath Att dB Rec Preemph 0 0 dB Distortion Data All Values measured at 0 0 dB CTE Output Level 0 0 dB 0 0 dB cso C Preemphas
177. Mark optical line Locate fiber breakage J Show Signalpath Colored Insert OLE Object Ctrl V K Load block Load sheet Print active View Properties Enter Fig 32 You then select the function New Trench Cross Section Area from the toolbar Fig 33 New Trench Cross Section Fig 33 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 397 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts The mouse is now in selection mode You draw a line diagonally across the duct package Fig 34 You place the trench label next to the trench cross section and drag it to enlarge it T Fig 34 Clicking on the trench cross section line Fig 35 opens the trench cross section menu i Fig 35 Under cable and cable conduit list you can now assign the duct package to a conduit Fig 36 Duct color bY Uwner j Lalor selec Cables and Conduits List N Cableld Cable Name Belongs to Duct 37 2401 M Fig 36 If the duct package has been assigned to a conduit it will now appear in the sectional view of the trench Fig 37 Fig 37 Blue square is the assigned duct package AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 398 of 452 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering 9 14 Calculating remote powering From the perspective of remote powering a network consists of the following three components e Consumers amplifier converter optical receiver e Power suppl
178. NIS structures node display 279 NIS structures opening the linked projects Socio EEE A I E atts canara Seal 282 NIS structures remote powering view 281 NIS structures service VIEWS s es 280 NIS structures ZOOMING cceeeeeeee ees 282 Not using powerline s ssssssssssssssrrsrens 309 ODIECE GrOUDS riara 35 Object status status value 0 eeeee 409 Object automatic labeling of 115 Objects automatic numbering oOf 122 Page 448 of 452 Objects immediate editing of objects when DI OUCIING CEEE aunianbeaneianouses canes 124 Objects plotting Other ccceeeeeeeeeeees 52 OLE ODJECU enrere aa aaa 65 Operating modes in AND sssssssesessssrssrssns 25 Optical amplifiers output calculation 67 Optical CONNECCOSS cccccseeueeueeenseeneenns 136 Optical disturbance calculation 367 Optical receivers output calculation 67 Optical terminal devices output calculation 69 Optical transmitters output calculation 66 Optimization Options window 152 ODUIONS Cab uvicatdacivauicosaveniienesia Maes 148 Order Data tab cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeenees 218 Orthogonal MOdEe ccceeeseeueeenseunenneeens 27 Output options in AND cc ccecee eee 412 OUUU WING OW oireena an e a 15 Pade SEUD aaae 417 Parent project organization s s sss ss 193 PacCM S aae a O EES 368 Pin Information WINGOW sssssssssssss
179. ONOOOO MO MMM OOOO oO nono SS ee ee E SS Se eee ae se Se ee eS a ee ee eS ee All 2630 37 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status K a a PRR ro PROMO Fig 9 Bill of materials with the order column marked red AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH I Task xy Task xy Task sy Task sy Task sy Task sy Task xy Task xy Task sy Task xy Task sy Task sy Task sy Task sy Task sy O x Cancel W Calculate Fackane l lots e Refresh List id horwaticallee Filter Objects by Ste All bd Filter by Task Edit Task Filter ew trom Drawing Load Save Excel Esport i All Sheets Add Merge Get Difference Completion Language Frint Edit Form Properties Layer Jart Ord No g Page 245 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status For different orders of the same component type separate lines are displayed e g 10 items for Order 1 and 20 items for Order 2 This can be avoided by activating the Group Orders option under Settings 4 To tia Properties Fiter Layers Dynamic Object Attributes Geman Germany Round prices sums to Rebate 7 Surcharge for Material 30 ar one hundreth 0 01 five hundreths 0 05 vec one tenth 0 1 five tenths 0 5 Overide Layers Use in material list settings full 7 0 Both pins must be in a layer marked as co
180. Ohm Enter the ohmic resistance here Max Frg 1862 MHz V Return path possible Frequency MHz2 Attenuation dB Validity Range This Package No i Available Outputs gt from Input one to Outputs ee Ea Page 403 of 452 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering 9 14 5 Activating Blocking connections for remote powering Every connection small red square of a component or the end of a cable can let remote power pass or block it You can see and change the remote powering status of a connection by clicking the connection and then clicking Connection Information in the tree in the Edit Object window Use the Remote Powering option to determine whether the connection Should block remote power or let it pass If according to the library the connection is not suitable for remote powering the control box will be grayed out and inactive Object Data Fin info E Symbol FepwA 450MHz Fe Pin G Component information l Base data Mr 1 Mo 2 Attenuation 0 0 dE Symbol Data Mr 2 i Filter Mr 3 l Fiter Nr 4 Fin Type M i Frequency Respons Fis direction Cut off reverse path 5 Owner Data E o b Owner Data m Database i Location Inst No Mr Connector Reference Type Female plug Reference z IEC Cancel An even faster method is to right click the connection and choose the Remote Power Active comman
181. Page 158 of 452 4 Civil works planning LocalArea Coax FibreCoax 4 Civil works planning The civil works planning mode for drawing provides you with intelligent functionality for civil works documentation calculation and routing trenches The dimensioning functions save you significant amounts of time due to their Simple operability AND uses the following terms in connnection with civil works planning Trench In this document the term trench is synonymous with the term trench section Trench section A trench section is used to hold cables and conduits You can plot as many cables and conduits into a trench section as you wish Trench line Sequentially connected to one another trench section form a trench line A trench line made up of three trench segments Trench cross section A trench cross section object is drawn across a trench section making the cables and conduits contained in the trench visible Trench cross section label A trench cross section label graphically displays how the cables are placed in the trench that is in which conduits they are located and what kind of cables they are K20 9005 SS oe 2248 Oun se iy val AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 159 of 452 4 Civil works planning Trench point frame A trench point frame is a linear section of a building Trassenpunkt Rahmen Building With the building icon you can draw any number of polygo
182. Regt O Tasktable Oo o Save All Settings Save settings for other users Factory Settings Insert Task Delete Task Rename Task Set As Current Task Update State Fig 4 Dialog box for editing the order AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 239 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status The order drawn in boldface type is the current active order Data of an order e Order name Name of the order Must be unique No distinction is made between upper case and lower case e Status Selection value The list of the possible values is defined in the State xml file e Date Creation date of the order Cannot be edited e Selected If this checkbox is selected all bundles of this order will be marked with different splice symbols The set of symbols can change in the Fiber and Bundle Settings dialog box Fiber Bundlesettings Bundle Colorcode Bundle Settings 1 O Presettings 2 as Type cut open 3 E State notin use sts Priority Mid Type dependent Settings Symbol filled Circle spliced marked patched 0 00 filled Square patched marked Square not cut 0 00 l hone culopen 0 00 Circle with truc 4 j Apply to all Bundles Auto Splicebos Direction arrows W Draw space saving Scale 100 a Add Bundle Splice labels Remove Bundle Scale 100 W Use fixed linewidth 0 25 mm Load Settings Save Settings Cancel o
183. S servers and to display them as a background in AND Gis projects AND 3 2 supports the importing of elliptical elements such as ellipses or elliptical arches from DXF files These elements were previously displayed as polylines and not as real ellipses or arches In close up zoom settings this could no longer render the curves smoothly AND 3 3 and later now displays these curves as real curves and when zoomed in on they appear smooth Ellipse Circle Elliptical arc Circular arc AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 176 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps 5 1 1 Loading a background map For DXF maps the element attributes are included in the import which means labels cable length specifications and object numbering are all imported and displayed This is how to load a map into the background 1 Select the FILE gt Background command Then depending on the type of map you wish to load select the Load Bitmap Background or Load DXF Background function 2 The Open window will open Select a folder and a file that contains the desired map and click Open 3 When creating a raster file some GIS systems will generate a help file with the associated coordinate information AND supports the tab and tfw formats and adopts the coordinate system In the case of vector types in the DXF format an analysis of the DXF header and the vector coordinates is performed before the import The Set Sc
184. Socket To do this simply choose Rotate Cable Direction from the context menu e a a ae ap asp ae Cable AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 49 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Handling of cable chains Implemented from Build 1458 on Cable segments connected by sheet connectors conduits link objects or microducts are one cable in reality but different cable instances in AND If the edit dialog for one segment is closed with OK the data of that segment are automatical ly transferred to cable segments of the chain The following data are excepted from the trans fer Length cable end information attenuation of dark fibers laying type layer color The transfer will be applied to all types of cables fibre coax twisted pair hybrid In the moment when a cable is connected to a sheetconnector the data of the outer cable will be transferred automatically to the cables inside the sheet It doesn t matter whether the cable is connected to the sheet or the sheet is connected to the cable The automatic transfer for blocks isn t implemented If a cable is created new the cable automatically inherits the data from the cable it is connect ed to When loading old projects the consistency of the cable chains is checked and corrected auto matically if possible In case of conflicts a message is displayed in the output window and the conflict must be resolved by user Cable chains Cable pie
185. TOR MAD S rosia E 171 Vectorizing a site plan cc ceeeeeeeeeeeee 126 Vectorizing background plans 6 126 VIEWTOGO Manual ccceeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseaes 9 Warning return path amplifiers tolerances Oana a suena 317 Warning SetUngS aerario anr 310 WebInfo Manual cccccccseeeeeeeeeeneeeseeens 9 Window Edit Object sssssssnosesnesesses 16 WmsClient PIUGIN ccssseeeeereeeeeesees 174 Working with the MOUSEC ccceeeseeeeeees 21 Worksheet tab uirririrrisririiii dirci ria 204 Page 450 of 452 Index Worksheet preview SettingS 085 30 Worksheets cccccceseeeeeeeseueuensauens 56 197 Worksheets settings fOr sseeeeeeee 203 ZOOMING saci sistant Meee ens eae eset aves 28 31 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 451 of 452 Glossary see Separate Manual Glossary see Separate Manual The glossary and a list of the available shortcut keys and key combinations are summarized in a separate manual that is part of the NDS documentation see section 1 2 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 452 of 452
186. Template Tle wiwscisecwierinewa r a 215 Test point lists settings for 292 Test DOING Settings arrenda ne eae 291 Test point setting frequency displays 357 TESt DOWAUS events ese ar 58 Test points actual target comparison 321 Test points correcting level values for FOGUCTIONS soiteliwacsten Vents tate EN 291 Test points setting frequencies for multiple test POINTS inrait iinan eai aA 357 Test points updating addition distortion DroOdUCS iieii E 291 Text in the standard font 0cceees 53 Text that can be formatted 005 54 VOOUUWIDS raean a 16 TOONANE oraire iorra 13 Transmission level MAX sssssssssssssssssssss 316 TENCI vianant 166 Trench Cross Section tab 0088 164 Trench Cross Section tab 8 167 Trench cross section labeling 167 Trench CrOSS SECtIONS cccceeeeeseeeneeees 163 Trench sections isi dceiinstecacinaivectinwieiaats 166 Trenches layers fOr ccccecuecsseeuseuneeens 156 Truck Structure tab ccceccccssseeeeeneee 146 Twisting conduits in trenches 005 165 Updating test POints ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeees 59 Ri WING OW cuscatesatianiacanuaetcoeipadinorues 18 User defined libraries cccceee cece ees 41 USING power line sssssssssssssssssssessese 309 Using text objects ssssessssersrrsrsrrsrns 53 Using the location rectangle for searches 62 Variables in AND reiri i 434 VEC
187. The settings for displaying the window can be specified with the toolbar symbols Print spectrum Enlarge image key Reduce image key E o 2 8 9 O 9 Snap cursor to image and audio carrier frequencies Ea Tie iA Show hide CTB Show hide CSO Use eye correction Switch between Ratio Level mode Calculates BER and MER in digital channels O00000 00 You can also use the cursor to measure in the spectrum window The cursor consists of two red lines vertical to each other The horizontal line represents the frequency and the vertical line represents the distortion ratio distortion output Click the spectrum to position the cursor The values of the current cursor position are displayed top left You can move the cursor in very small increments by moving the arrow keys while keeping the Ctrl key pressed and thus read off the values very precisely If the Snap Cursor to the Picture and Audio Carrier Frequency option is activated the cursor position snaps to the vision and sound carrier frequencies AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 354 of 452 9 Calculations 9 8 Information about the distortion product calculation 9 8 Information about the distortion product calculation Discrete Distortion CSO CTB The type of calculation depends on which distortion data are available in the library There is one precise calculation option
188. There are three ways of influencing the display performance in various situations Bitmap buffered drawing OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Line Styles and Display If this this option is activated all contents are plotted into a buffer that is then plotted into the window There is no generally applicable rule stating when this option should be activated and when it should not Whether this option improves or impairs the display performance largely depends on the working environment local or Citrix and the hardware used We recommend testing both settings and choosing that with which plotting is performed faster Automatic background update OPTIONS gt Program Settings Line Styles and Display This option causes the background of a moved object to be replotted only when editing for example when moving existing objects This prevents graphical errors from being visible when objects are drawn away However activating this option slows down the performance when editing objects especially for large drawings Do not draw raster tiles during panning PROJECT DATA gt GisArea gt Project Settings This option controls whether or not the raster tiles will be shown in panning mode dragging the mouse with the middle button held down Activating this option is recommended for work in a Citrix environment in particular AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 303 of 452 9 Calculations
189. To create the link from this object to a new independent hotspots right click the object choose Add attach hotspot to this object this operation can be done just once an only hotspot can be created for this object e To see the results right click on object and choose Search jump targets gt in Jump Targets References you will find the new hotspot created for this object e Open it double click on it gt the new hotspot will appear blinking red in overview at the same position This hotspot can be moved you are able to reset the reference and or create a new one AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 277 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Services rights file rights Each user can have rights to manipulate hotspots The administrator can set the rights from DbAdmin tab Services Rights The rights can be added per group or per person by using button Add choose the item for which you want to assign rights then check the services rights for person group To create xml files as consequence of creating a new hotspot type the user group must have also rights on folder ROOT System in the DbAdmin tab File Rights Set the user s rights to Admin if he has to be able to create edit and delete hotspot types Example Give Import rights to user cDiana int Administrator bbAdmin Server Selection view Help jf ax w El Administrators AS Administrator E F
190. Trunks per House esse Number Changing 1 stands for the number of apa Locations Adresses apartments on each floor ee For each individual house you can define the number of sockets per apartment Depending on the type of network in a house the following can be specified House structure Apartment e O or 1 socket for loop system and home loop 2 e O to 8 sockets Applay for all other types Simply select the Floor and the Apartment for which you 2 whish to change a number of Cancel sockets and enter the desired Ta number of Socket s Loop system amp Home loop 0 lt Socket s lt 1 Else 0 lt Sockets lt 8 Reset Reset set Socket s 1 for each Floor Flat To change the number of sockets in all apartments to 1 simply click Reset Note The number of the first basement apartment is C001 C stands for basement cellar O for the first floor and 01 for the first apartment The number of the first attic apartment is R001 R stands for attic roof O for the the first floor and 01 for the first apartment AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 150 of 452 3 Automatic Drawing Mode 3 3 Distribution level 3 3 Distribution level On the Distribution Level tab select the distribution systems for the house and for between the houses If you active the No Superior Distribution Level option no additional distribution will be performed Only distr
191. Unknown v Date Serial number T ype Supplier T ype Serialnumber f ee at Use as partname Drum number Cancel Fig 2 The combo box with the order is marked red All objects in existing old drawings have the empty text as the order All newly created objects with a library object are automatically assigned the current order as an object attribute If an existing object is moved in such a way that the connected pins change the current order is written into the moved object For objects without a library object texts selection lines there is no automatic assignment AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 238 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status Order table The table of all orders applies to the entire program that is an order can be used in multiple projects The list is user specific and is stored in the user directory under task xml You can reach the dialog box for editing the order table through the menu View Windows Inhouse Automatic Alt U Program Settings d Auto Save Function Program Paths Drawingmode Adjust view Line Styles Display options Dimensioning Styles Background editor Dimensioning Styles Testpoint Settings Layer templates Exitpoint Defaults Target Level Settings User Select language Additional Settings Thematic colouring Fiber Bundle Settings NIS M aan
192. With the Maximum Transmission Level adjusting method the target amplification is the result of the analysis of the entire network and is therefore no longer so easy to trace Click the arrow button to set the target values AND varies all unfixed control options in order the set the target values To better understand the control result In the return path equalization almost always also causes attenuation of the upper signal frequency AND always sets according to the following formula Amplification sum of all attenuations at upper frequency target amplification Equalization is only set by AND if the target pre emphasis is greater than the threshold value Setting individual return path amplifiers in the Edit Object window is not normal procedure It is much more efficient to set all return path amplifiers in the network simultaneously with the CALCULATION gt Return Path Amplifier Setup command during the network check Tip In larger networks calculation of the return path target amplification and attenuation behind the return path amplifier will take longer If you do not need these values press the ALT key while clicking the amplifier The window will open much more quickly because the two return path values are not calculated AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 338 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Line extenders in AND s reverse amplifier adjustment The following support for line ext
193. a Click the sign to show the contents of the J E ABZW F3 FACH group O BA MULTITAF A sign indicates that the contents of this i HA ENDDOSEN roU o E E DURCHGANGSDOSEN group ED MULTIMEDIADOSEN are visible iE ABSCHLUB 75 OHM aA ABZW F 4 FACH B E PAD STECKER F fl PAD STECKER IEC al EG STECKER F EJ BK FILTER B Cables This is to exchange an object in a drawing with another object from the same group 1 Selection an object 2 Press the G key for Replace Group The following window opens Select object from group Group Ne group 1 0 5 3 13 dE 042 5 32 dB 16 82 8d Cancel 3 Click the object in the drawing that you wish to exchange and then click OK AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 14 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 1 The AND program window and its elements 2 1 2 Output window The output window displays notifications warnings and error messages It can be docked on the left right top or bottom of the program window or freely positioned Use VIEW gt Messages to switch the output window on and off Output x Warning Calculation Error creating crosstext due to missing data formatstring tN tt tH In this picture you see a list of warnings that occurred during a network check If you click an entry in the output window the associated component will appear red and blinking in the document window If you simultaneously press the Shift but
194. a library have been modified during the processing time the change will only be applied after the corresponding tile has been checked in Deleating component prices and assembly times Delete component prices assembly time button Activate the Delete Prices and Assembly Times for Embedded Libraries option if you wish to delete all prices and assembly times and not pass them on with the linked drawing file AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 43 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 2 14 Network planning mode In Network planning mode everything related to the network is displayed that is everything with an electrical function Cables can also be shown in civil works mode You need a library to be able to create a drawing Please read how to open a library and search for components in the Selecting Libraries for Object Selection section Page 38 2 14 1 Plotting a component Proceed as follows to plot a component 1 he In the object selection window double click the component you wish to plot The mouse pointer will automatically be placed in the middle of the drawing window Move the mouse pointer to the desired position in the worksheet for the component The component will be attached to the mouse pointer which now takes the form of crosshairs because it is in positioning mode If you wish to rotate the component press the R key to rotate it in 90 increments Click with the left mouse
195. a new hotspot in overview Overview project s context menu contains a new entry Add hotspot here which allows adding a new geo referenced hotspot The Add hotspot entry will also be available in the main menu which allow us to add a new hotspot but without having a valid geo position Such hotspot can be geo referenced later via Set Hotspot Geo pos menu entry part of overview project s context menu Independent hotspots are also available in the Symbol selection dialog as any other metadot AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 269 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Example Supose an hotspot type is already created 1 When you select such a menu entry from context menu Add hotspot here a new submenu opens that allows you to choose which type of hotspots you want to add at the position specified by your mouse pointer 2 Select the type of the hotspot to be added to database and confirm with Ok 3 Inthe new Dot Properties dlg write the dot name variables etc An example is shown in the picture attached DOT Properties h_diana DOT Name Hp_nane varl Stin varz jz o yard 2 Test Size 000 Text Angle po Text Justification Base algn Let x Geopos POINT 3395919 971061 5577078172714 Reset geopos OF Cancel Two buttons are available Ok and Cancel the second one is used if you no longer want to create the hotspot
196. a sheet legend is given below Antenna instalation Network Cinerator AND Solution GmbH Munchen Karl Schmid Str 14 Version Fated Dy Date dominic pittroff 10 12 2010 Sire File Sheet AND Version 43 enal No 11000 for Sheet name AND Solution GmbH Karl Schmid Str 14 81879 M nchen You can generate and adapt dynamic legends individually using report templates You can generate these templates with the Report Designer see Report Designer Locations manual Please note that only the data in the header section is used for the sheet legend The contents of other sections are ignored To make the settings for the sheet legend click the worksheet legend of the worksheet The Edit Object window will open at Objet ac Object Data Sheet legend Choose this option to switch to Toor Legend sye o dynamic legends i 6 If you have selected dynamic legends S oyan See Le it you can select a report template rae ee from a list and even edit it with the Report De _ S g n e r oe AND Solution GmbH Munchen Karl Schmid S Edited by dominic pittroff Date 10 12 2010 Size File Sheet 1 of 1 Maximum Frequency 0 a Minimum Frequency 0 E Apply Settings to all Sheets Edit project data These settings also apply to the currently displayed worksheet AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 231 of 452
197. aDleS cienia 113 Editing objects immediately 005 124 Editing objects in blocks ceeeeeee eee 133 Editing plug CONNECTIONS cceeeeeeee eens 46 Editing the bill of materials buttons and options in the WiINdOW ssseeeeeee 411 Editing the libraries liSt ceceeeeee 39 Editing upstream ServiCeS 00 eeeee 323 Entering cable resistance 0000eeee 398 Entering the Signal SOUISE 0seeeeeeees 144 Entry exit pointoo irarria a 193 Equalization for return path amplifiers 317 Evaluating trench sections ss sesessessss 423 EXPOLHN Gu 2256 seacteaisedtinau eect hendtnest aaa 418 Exporting a drawing as a D F 421 Exporting a drawing as TIFF 420 Exporting the background 085 192 Exporting the drawing as a TIFF 192 Exporting to EXCel ccccccecceeeeseeeeeeees 418 Exporting lO PDP wiveseinansencsean veokiecwsentse 419 Exporting to Wordissa aaa 418 Extending Cables cccceeeeeessseeeeenees 113 Factory Settings tcsiscctiswiecediaanwcatieatecattes 288 Factory settings checking additional 289 Fiber optic cables output calculation 72 Fibers calculating optical output for all 110 Formattable text sirra en aniani 54 Page 447 of 452 Formatting report objects cce eee 433 Forward path performance distortion DOG UGE aid iid mee saatin sa auua Taa 346 Frame waived snare sec
198. ab and change the signal direction The connection types are always seen from the perspective of the parent sheet in relation to the worksheet symbol An entry means that the signal goes in at the worksheet symbol an exit means that the signal flows out at the worksheet symbol e Optical cables cannot be connected to coaxial entries exits and vice versa For optical cables the fiber bundle quantities on the sheet pin have to match those in the interior of the worksheet connection symbol If the cable types coaxial and fiber on each side do not match a warning is issued during the network check e A worksheet connection can be deleted in the Connection Information tab Another possibility is to navigate in the sheet for example click the worksheet symbol and select the worksheet connection symbol and delete it using the Del key e If you need additional worksheet connections place a cable end coaxial or fiber in the worksheet symbol After asking for confirmation entry or exit a new connection will be created The worksheet connection symbol is then located in the interior of the sheet where it was created in the symbol There you can move the connection to the desired position using drag and drop e In addition to coaxial and optical connections conduit sheaths are also an option Place the end point of a conduit sheath within the worksheet symbol to generate a sheath e If it is unclear which worksheet connection corresponds to which work
199. ables without specified cable length Reports all open pins other than tap outputs Reports all tap outputs including tap outputs Set up warnings for Net Check 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check Checks whether mounted objects were connected via the correct assembly groups This can only result in a warning if components were manually combined or if the assembly pins have changed in the library Reports transponder numbers that have been assigned more than once Setting amplifiers Here you change the permissible tolerances for deviations between the actual values and target values and set the priorities of the interstage amplifier settings Reports all amplifiers whose level deviates by more than this tolerance Reports all amplifiers whose slope deviates by more than this tolerance Here you define how AND interprets the concepts Level at highest frequency and Pre emphasis in the default settings See also Power Lines o I I it m Warnings Check net structure Setup amplifiers Temperature drift Check remote supply C Check socket levels Check bridge points C Check open tap pin levels C Check distortion Check connectors C Setup Return Amplifiers C Check upstream C Test point CURRENT TARGET com C Check leakage limit 1 AND generates warnings if an amplifier cannot be adjusted as desired Here you can specify tolerances that regulate the a
200. ack Position instead of emitting as installation number m Rack Position Jv Show Rack Position Mounting Pin Name Rack Position Attribute J Replace Installation Number by Rack Position instead of appending Jv Type replaces Empty Installation No Rack Position instead of replacing empty Installation No only r Splice Name Jv Reverse Right C1 B1 F1 F2 B2 C2 Empty Cable No replacement if empty _ Omit side if no Cable No C B F Set Defaults More Cancel Hierarchy Path Address Hierarchy paths can be calculated for all pins of the network For dynamic labels and splice patch report variables there are even two relevant connection points e Start point Pin Splice to which the label report variable refers e Destination Pin Slice in the net for which data is displayed For destinations which are not the same as the starting point relative hierarchy paths can be displayed to save space and enhance readability i e e if the address of start point and destination are identical nothing or a fixed replacement e g is displayed e the hierarchy path is displayed starting with the first differing hierarchy level of the start point and the destination point or starting with the minimum number of levels required by the settings e g o Start point hierarchy path KS80 RO18 PFO4 P07 o Destination hierarchy path KS80 RO18 PFO3 P07 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 119 of
201. activate checking of the worksheet outputs and connection points on NL3 drawings Enter the limit values here Examination NES NE4 m O Warn if the distortion ratio at a bridge point is out of the following limits Terrestrial analog CTE modulated 62 9 dB CTB 57 9 dB C N 43 7 dB CSO modulated 62 9 dB CSO 61 4 dE e Terrestrial digital CAN 32 7 dB C max CSO CTB 40 0 dB On the NE4 tab you can activate or deactivate checking at subscribers and additionally set limit values for them AND then checks the distortions at the house amplifier outputs Set up warnings for Net Check Warnings Check net structure Setup amplifiers Temperature drift Check remote supply Check socket levels Check bridge points Check open tap pin levels Check distortion Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream Test point CURRENT TARGET com C Check leakage limit 4 Activate or deactivate checking of subscribers on NL4 drawings Enter the limit values here K K K K K O KRIK AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Examination NE3 NE4 o Warm if the distortion ratio at a subscriber is out of the following limits Terrestrial analog CTE modulated 60 0 dB CTB 55 0 dB C N 43 0 dB CSO modulated 62 5 dB CSO 60 0 dB Terrestrial digital a CN 132 0 dB C max CSO CTB 40 0 dB MER QAM 128 0
202. al clickable list of the report rows allows to quickly navigate to the connection points of the report The meaning of the lines is NTH Name This path of the reference connection point Example KS80 E0120 C01 KO0004 B01 F01 FO1 B01 _ NON Name Out Next path of the next point away from the symbol Example KS80 RO120 PFO1 P0O1 NOF Name Out Final path of the final point away from the symbol Example KS80 RO120 PFO1 P0O1 NIN Name In Next path of the next point through the symbol Example E0119 C01 KO006 B01 F0O1 F01 B01 K0004 NIF Name In Final path of the final point though the symbol Example H20 RO019 PFO1 PO1 For increasing readability of the report the final value may be left empty if s the same as the next value In some reports when removing the next values this option should be deselected to always see the values AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 375 of 452 9 Calculations 9 12 Calculation for optical Networks Display options When generating the report a separate set of hierarchy path display settings is used see al SO program settings Variables for Splice Report and Splice Patch List The variable names for splice report and splice patch list are the same These report templates only differ by layout and used variables The variables are separated in three types as opposed to other reports e Report e Group only for splice patch reports e Data Variabl
203. al source are displayed in the frequency list You can also select test points and object to which their pins are connected all test points cable test points etc Now activate the Convert Test Points to Small Shown Channels Selection mM Display Test Points option Signal Sources Source Name MP 208a oO MP 208b o MP 208c Live Test Points TP Name TPName Source Name __ 950 00 MP 208a 2000 00 MP 208a 2150 00 MP 208a a4 25 MP 208a 655 25 MP 208a Select Test Points All Test Points Amplifier Test Points Socket Test Points Selected Frequencies Copy to Settings Copy from Settings Convert the TPs to Small Live TPs Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 362 of 452 9 Calculations 9 10 Frequency plans 9 10 Frequency plans All calculation functions that refer to levels or distortion products determine the frequency plan for the object to be calculated This achieved by routing in the direction of the signal source s until one is found If components with multiple inputs that is reverse installed exist in the signal path alternate routes are also calculated until the entire possible frequency spectrum secondary frequencies from all signal sources is determined This is how AND always knows which frequencies run through which components As a user all you have to do is to enter the adjacent frequencies in the signal source symbols These are the input p
204. alculation Settings sieiisecscaccascanaavarsectucascariecarsacdeveccenaasansensseessessscarseciccaess 366 Calculation for optical Networks sssssuss2222 22u2 2222220u2020220202202022022 20 nn 371 Calculating optical oUtPUtT nermai aE Aa A AO A ANAA 371 Optcaldist urpance CalCulaUlONwsitaiscntscad scons itanncatstatocasatuwstadstaticanitoxssateter vendiien 372 Splice Report and Splice Patch LISt cece ceeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeenseeeeegseanaannegs 373 MICFOGUCUS asrni raa aAa aaa aN 379 DUCERICKI GE eira E N N a aai 379 INOU Se MING FOGU GES ans a a T T T TT scene 389 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 6 of 452 KRW ARAAAAAAAAA DP WW WW WOODODDODO0O0OH OO PEEP PPP eee PP KFODNAUAWNEH k 10 1 10 2 10 3 Index Contents Mannole SCHaCit arenan a a parame a aaa aaae a 392 PRCA CICS eien aA A E AA A a a a a a aai 397 Calculating remote powering ss 2 2 2222u2220u222u2020u20u022uunnnunnnnnnnnn 399 Starting the remote powering calculation ssssssssrsrsnrnrsenrnrrnnsrrnrsrrnrerenrenenn 399 Remote powering calculation results ssnssssssnssssnesnsnrsnsnsnnssrnnssrenesrenesnrnne 400 Remote powering basics in the libraries ccc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeee sense eee ee eeeeeeeeeaaaanes 400 Specifying remote power data in component editor ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 401 Activating Blocking connections for remote powering cccceee cece cece eeeeeeeee
205. alculations 9 4 Return path calculation Ww Ww In versions AND LocalArea and AND Coax the following window will open You can activate or deactivate services here Deactivated services are completely ignored in the network check If multiple services exist select the master service here Minimum maximum and target level of the receiver Required noise ratio Limit between forward and return path for the entire system This value applies independently of the individual services Delete existing service Generate new service Q The Number and bandwidth of the subchannels Bandwidth within which the modem can transmit AND Client Manual IV C m Edit Upstream Services Upstream Services 01 30 00 50 00MHz Telephone Global diplex filter frequency MHz 165 00 Remove All oO Save Settings Load Settings 0 following window will open in the FibreCoax version Upstream Service Name of Service Telephone V Master Service Modem Upstream Center Frequency 40 00 MHz Bandwidth 20 00 MHz Number of Subchannels 10 Bandwidth 10 20 MHz Level Range of Modem 180 0 to f 15 0 dByp up to 107 0 dByl Target Level 177 0 dBu dBy Receiver Upstream Level Range from 60 0 dByy Required CINA 138 0 dB Add Remove Cancel Ww Edit Upstream Services i E Sia ii Upstream Services 01 30 00 50 00MHz2 Telephone Global
206. aling window automatically opens Dxf Import Options Scale selection Scale types Metric cale 1 DF unit 20m 1 2000 New scale 1 2000 Cancel Reset all object colors to ByLayer 4 By switching the Type selection you can test the existing coordinate system in advance Activate the Coordinates from DXF Vectors option to identify the coordinates system in the existing vectors If you deactivate this option the coordinates system will be taken from the DXF header 5 If you select Metric Scaling you can also edit the scaling units using the Change and Delete buttons r _ p Da inpor Ot Scale selection Scale types Gis coordinates V Layer printing color defaults to layer color Reset all object colors to ByLayer Source Coordinates Destination Coordinates Left 3409748 67 Right 3410049 78058671 Left 3409748 67 Right 3410049 78058671 Top 5318556 89 Bottom 5318302 48 Bottom F Switch to max coords Coordinate System Coordinate System Coordinate System Gauss Krueger 3 degree wide strips Coordinate System Refference System DHON PD DE 1995 lt 5m Rauenber v Refference System DHDN PD DE 1995 lt 5m Rauenber v Zone Native Meridian Stip v Cancel Please note that the New Scale option will display the standard AutoCad format 6 Finally confirm with OK to load the background map and set the coordinate system AND Client Manual IV C
207. ame the cassette frame provides the Inherit cassette number function in the context menu Kass 45 1 e Building without Insti e Building without Insts Zoom all Zoom into Zoom detail Zoom last Select all objects E Mowe object N Copy object E Delete object F Color Layer O Edit location T Label A Take Lock object Leave sheet K Load block Load sheet Print active View Properties Ctrl PgDown CTRL 6 7 Enter This function deletes the data for all bundles located inside the rectangle that was entered in the dialog box depicted above AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 88 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Automatic adaptation of cables and test points when auto splice boxes are expanded and collapsed When bundles in an auto splice box are expanded or collapsed connected cables and test points are automatically adjusted to retain the connection configuration The two diagrams below show the example of a bundle B1 that is expanded out in the left auto splice box Before bundle B1 was expanded Bip 61 io D Su A a a D aG S After bundle B1 was expanded pa Bundles of an auto splice box to which cables bundles or test points are connected cannot be expanded or collapsed In such a case a message appears AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 89 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network
208. ample a coaxial cluster contains more than one of these connection points as exit points These are verified in the network check to make sure they comply with NL3 threshold values Simultaneously the worst possible values are taken for each connection point to perform the return path calculation and are then verified in the network check The various NL4 projects each have an entry point as a connection point in their network plans This network check veri fies whether the NL4 threshold values are being met These measures allow NL4 and NL3 planners to work independently of one another That way the NL4 planner for example is not dependent on the NL3 element being already planned If the entry point of an NL4 project is linked with its exit point in an NL3 project the actual values calculated will replace the previously accepted worst case scenario values AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 198 of 452 Linking projects when no AND Smart Server is available 6 Project organization 6 1 Parent project organization Ww yY This is how to proceed if you want to link projects with one another but have no AND Smart Server at your disposal 1 First plot the entry and exit points in the drawing Use one of the predefined signal connection point components from the library for the points that lead out of the drawing exit points Or plot an RF signal exit or an alternative RF signal exit You will find both objects o
209. an also set the target reception level individually for each individual laser see Setting the Return Path Amplifiers Page 336 Tolerances for all warnings Enter a value in the Tolerance for all Warnings input field A warning is only issued for the return path amplifier setting if the actual and target values exceed this tolerance House amplifier PADs compensate for low house attenuation The House Amplifier PADs Compensate for Low House Attenuation only has an effect if your house amplifier has both an attenuation controller and a slot for attenuators If your amplifiers have this feature and this option is activated the slot will be used to compensate for low attenuation when setting up the house amplifier while the controller depending on the output window see Page 15 either compensates for the attenuation before that point or provides unity gain Example Your drawing has two passive house networks House network A has 32 dB maximum attenuation up to the house amplifier and house network B has 38 GB If the option is activated the amplifier setting will apply a 6 dB PAD in the house amplifier of house A and the house B amplifier will not be attenuated With these house amplifiers the input level in the output window refers to point between the slot and the controller For level adjustment the technician must remove the PAD adjust the level and finally reinstall the PAD Equalization Equalization Adjust to target
210. and its assignment to a layer URL You cannot open this sub window directly You have to call the associated tab once the Edit Object window has already been opened Here you can enter a link to the object The link can refer to a file in the file system or to a site on the in the intranet or on the Internet Note If you activate the Open with Mouse Click option the link will automatically open when the object is clicked After that you can only access the editing window by clicking the Properties item in the context menu 2 1 6 Changing the window design You can change the design of the program window to suit your taste The program provides a number of designs among which you can choose the design you like best At the time of writing this manual the following designs are available AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 18 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 1 The AND program window and its elements FQ Tere festeten Prijectreten Tarenna Meterol Perec forte Ferom 5 D h aA ASBGA VERS be A Lytt CEN Mache hbnrare Layer Vorlage Rerarrerrieficies D Paic MORE Dotimeristior LAP31137 Ure gt Abbe i Urnever Flat simple ins E FR Datei Teorhetter Sabihin feertnons Noleriw Fret Areri Fenter D bhg a ASGAPRRBYTY bba a 9 Layee CEN Niirhs j hbnrare Layer Yoragt Rerarrerrieficier r a v tate Moet Ootirettation LAPITIII Ure ADOD Ucnever Flat oe Ze Sparen Mapito Reectans Moles frr decea
211. arnung Metzcheck Signal an einer als defekt markierten Faser B ndel amp Ader i Warnung Metzcheck Auflagepunkt ohne Glastagser TT ee re ee Di 1 l l 2 l TT Tiss l 1 1 sl AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 108 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Splice Report The splice report can be generated for location rectangles of type optical fiber point fibernode The splice box is depicted in this location rectangle The edges of the location rectangle must intersect the FO cable for which the report is to be generated The report determines the splicing for the cut cables and lists them Double entries can be ignored and the report sorted according to number of fibers as an option To trigger this function right click the location rectangle of type optical fiber point Operating length plan The operating length plan outputs the route between two selected points in the network It lists the locations meterage data cable type and number of fibers First select a point in the network then select a pin and in the context menu Operating Length Plan click Set 1st Position If this is a pin with several contact points you must select a contact point When you have done this the route of the fiber or signal is marked Now you must select a second position on the marked route If necess
212. art of a label GUI In the Edit Dialog for cables there is an additional tab named Attenuation In this subdialog you can set the attenuation to manual If it is manual a list control becomes visible in which the points of the wavelength attenuation list can be inserted edited deleted Edit Object Object Data Cable data Nr 1 Cable End Nr 2 Cable End Nr 3 Attenuation Nr 4 J Cable Dark Fiber Aenean EI Component informat Base data Mr 1 From Library Fiber Nr 2 Color cade Mr 2 Wavelength Attenuation dB ial Coney informati 1310 Color layer infor Owner Data 1470 1430 1510 t Owner Data LayingT ype Laying Type 1530 Dynamic data 1550 Cable data Nr 1 1570 t 1590 1610 Cancel Edit Value Left click on a value and type Insert Right click into the list and select in the context menu the command Insert Row A new line will be added at the end of the list After you have entered wavelength and attenuation you can resort the list by clicking on the header of the wavelength column Delete The command Delete Row is available in the context menu or as shortcut if at least one row is selected In order to select a row click on the left edge of a row left of the wavelength column Multiselection using shift and control key is implemented AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 80 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mo
213. ary you can abort the Operating Length Plan dialog box and then start again by setting a 1st position Once you have set both positions the program determines the locations that the route passes through and stored lengths meterage A warning output opens if any information is missing Clicking the warning indicates the object to which the warning refers If a splice box splicing is passed through which has no location a message to that effect opens If the program encounters another location for which no meterage data is available another warning is output and the entry is skipped if necessary Length information is stored in the cable pins It may only be stored on real cable ends for example not on worksheet connections The report is output as an Operating Length Plan report Such a report can be exported or printed out AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 109 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Coloring optical sections It is possible to color given sections of selected optical or mechanical connections Select the connection and press the Q key for Colour Optical Section If there is a point with multiple fibers you will be requested to select a fiber You will see the optical section colored in both directions from one end point to the other You can specify the color under OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Thematic Colouring gt Signal Path Colouring The default color is yel
214. ata synchronization Any time when the link is edited the hotspot is linked to another dot or the data of the linked dot is changed the hotspot data is adjusted automatically This synchronization can be done through the same metadaavar names in hotspot s daas and dot s daas we will have daavar s with the same metaname AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 280 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 NIS Network Information System The AND Network Information System NIS is designed to maintain an overview of the logical structure of the network network topography at all times This is particularly practical if a project is very large and takes up large amounts of space in the topographical map or if you are using multiple worksheets The information system provides an analysis of the associations of an overall network from the headend to the splitters and subscriber connection points This system is thus ideal as an information system for service situations For example sometimes there is a need to ascertain quickly where a signal is originating from if a network node is affected by a disruption Ideally NIS is operated with an AND Smart Server In the NIS schematic plan a point is generated for every component in an AND drawing see figure below item 0 f i ji NIS nodes are always created for the following components signal sources amplifiers optical transmitters optical ampli
215. ath l This can also be a CD ROM drive con Temporary User Files 510 0 0 11550USERSADOMINIC PITTF taining cards replicated from the server User Directo 10 0 0 11850USERSSOOMINIC FPITTF Project Settings 510 0 0 118SETTINGSSSTANDARD W Always use initial directories This directory should actually exist 7 Standard Settirgs on your computer It can be specified with SET TMP path Save Settings in the operating system entry request AND stores temporary files here with the name cdsnet User specific settings are stored here Files checked out from the server remain here in their most recent edited state until they are checked in again The directory should be on your computer not on the network Only delete files in this directory if you are sure you have not checked anything else out Load Settings O AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 300 of 452 8 3 3 8 Settings 8 3 Program settings Setting line styles and display options If you want to change the graphical display of AND for example for a fax printout choose the OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Line Styles Display function The following window will open Dark corresponds roughly to the AutoCAD color scheme light objects on a black background Representation Options Line representation Screen C Geometric representation faster Setocensscccesecccsessaceceracnsesccecsccsecsncsecssccss
216. ations and always has one coaxial entry and one exit e Headend This worksheet has a predefined coaxial exit and is intended for headends e NL4 Network 4 installations can be drawin in this type of worksheet with a coaxial entry e Library This is the most commonly used type and allows you to derive its form one of the symbols in the libraries Click this entry to open the Libraries View window Here you select the symbol on which the appearance of the new worksheet is to be based The connections in the symbol are created on the worksheet e Optical node Notes e You can always distinguish a worksheet from a symbol by its dashed line border e A new worksheet that is generated via the dropdown menu function has no data class properties This means that the legend cannot be filled with data version splitter amplifer point etc However this effect only occurs when the worksheet is taken from the meta objects Please note Worksheets only contain meta data if they are inserted via Symbol Selection Meta Objects AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 203 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets e It is not usually necessary to set the worksheet connection type entry or exit because AND usually sets the signal direction automatically However you can change the worksheet type by marking the connection in the worksheet symbol and pressing the Enter key In the Properties window select the Connection Information t
217. atives and documentation projects are derived from the work process and replicates the most important process steps The status is set by the user when creating and storing alternatives and projects and can be change subsequently The user can make selections from a list stored in NDS The object states define the operability of each individual object The processing dialog box of an object contains a Status field Here the user can select the status from a list There is also a date field for entering a date for a particular status The field can be preassigned with today s date It is possible to set and change the status of several objects that can be selected via a block in the Common Properties dialog box The status of objects can be set in the main branch within each design alternative and within all documentation projects Object status 1 1 is applied when a branch is added to a main branch or when a documentation project is checked in The states and status terms are organized using XML files Status terms for design alternatives and documentation projects are Costing Planning Planned Built Inventory A design alternative can only be transferred to the main branch in the Built or Inventory states Status terms for objects are Planning new Planning aborted Planning corrected Planning changed during red corrections Inventory in operation Inventory not in operation Inventory corrected Invento
218. ave as factory settings The administrator or technical support manager creates a profile in which all settings are specified He or she then calls this function The factory settings are stored This function is only available if the administrator has authorized it in the registry This is done by setting the value for Save Allowed to 1 in the registry under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE CDS AND 4 0 OEM and entering a path under PathFactorySettings that must be accessible for all other computers that are to use these settings a ao 33 a ZE ee te a amp x amp RS SEAFz 8 Y 4 223 ae TE 7 g DODOCLLLD g g Py ope 35 e Load factory settings Call this function if you want to check a project for factory settings Select the settings and click the Load button Then conduct the required checks Load Factory Standards Settings for F Calculation V Reversepath Symbolselection Layers Material List Optical Services NIS Generation Legend Dimensioning Autotext and numbering l Connectors Temperature Table Print Settings Test point list Gis Area Project Settings f Bundle Fiber Settings f Thematic Coloring e Load all factory settings This function loads all settings from the factory settings without first showing Current Path 4410 0 0 118 settings S tandard the dialog box stated above AND Client Manual IV C
219. bH Page 180 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps Opacity Set the opacity Sets the opacity with which the map will be displayed in the background In this way for example it is possible to set the display such that AND objects such as trenches or cables are easily visible in the case of very dark or high contrast maps Below the tool bar the WMS data sources used are displayed in a tree view each with the available WMS layers showing their visibility settings The following icons are displayed depending on the type of entry Symbol WMS data source fe f A layer whose visibility is set to Auto A layer whose visibility is set to On A layer whose visibility is set to Off The name of the WMS layer appears red if the layer is not used in the WMS query because of the current visibility settings However that does not mean that a WMS layer displayed black will also really be visible in the resulting map Which layers will be visible at which resolution depends on the WMS server WMS Documents dialog box In the WMS Documents dialog box you can create edit and delete WMS documents E WMS Documents Documents Document Fath Create E Bayern mit Grabungsatlas 710 0 0 237 USERE S Bayern 10 0 0 237 USERS Bebauungspl ne Starnberg 10 0 0 237 USERE Grabungsatlas 1110 0 0 237 USERE Set as default Reload documents Cancel OK WMS Documents dialog box Create Creates a new WMS document
220. be specified in the test point list AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 417 of 452 11 Output options 11 1 Printing Calculating and editing test point lists First calculate the test points in your worksheet by selecting CALCULATION gt Calculate Test Points Then open the test point list to edit it by selecting CALCULATION gt Edit Test Point List The Materials List opens List of Test Points RTTTTIE D ee LS e No Name Location U2 U70 F 113 0 MHz F 121 0 MHz Entry F 87 5 MHz F 108 0 MHz QAM 64 QAM 64 ead aes ee TS Ses Shows the graphical display of calculation indBai n dBiV 1 85 8 86 0 80 0 80 1 result for the selected line 2 8 80 s0 e List Calculate jj Print Export Excel Expott Excel Impott actual sheet only Settings Button functions e Fdit is only possible if the selected line represents a signal source If this is the case the window for specifying frequency plans opens for this signal source e Record Measured Values creates a new line for the measured values which are to be added to the test point of the selected line This point is only active if not yet a line for measured values e Localize closes the window and jumps to the associated test point in the drawing e Calculate updates the entire list by recalculating every test point e Print opens the print preview with which
221. button to place the component in the worksheet If automatic labeling is active the Create Data for Drawing Object window will open Enter the appropriate data and click OK Now the label text will be attached to the mouse pointer The component related to the text is displayed red and will blink Move the mouse pointer to the desired position for the text in the worksheet The text is attached to the mouse pointer If you want to rotate the text press the R key to rotate it in 90 increments If you want to resize the text press the 2 key for larger 1 key for smaller and 3 to 9 for predefined sizes For how to preview and change the preset sizes see the Other Settings section 10 Click with the left mouse button to place the text in the worksheet 11 If you wish to plot additional components of the same type begin again with step 2 12 If you do not wish to add any more components press the Esc key to finish When plotting components AND offers you a variety of supporting functions See Design Drawing and Positioning Assistance section Page 130 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 44 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Entering the installation number and location It is recommended that you carefully enter the installation number from the beginning of the project because it is required for interaction with other administration programs In addition these keys can be searched for acr
222. by d CoordX and dCoordY in WGS84 in the scale passed as IScale This scale must be specified as the reciprocal value of the scale that can be selected in AND that is 2000 for the desired scale 1 2000 boolean AutoGPSLocateNoWGS84 double dCoordX double dCoordyY long Scale Generates an overview if none exists yet and locates the point that is specified by d CoordX and dCoordy in the GIS coordinate system preset in the NDS in the scale passed as IScale This scale must be specified as the reciprocal value of the scale that can be selected in AND that is 2000 for the desired scale 1 2000 boolean AutoGPSLocateRect double dCoordLeftX double dCoordTopyY double dCoordRightX double dCoordBottomyY Generates an overview if none exists yet and locates the rectangle by which dCoord LeftX dCoordTopyY dCoordRightX and dCoordBottomy is defined in WGS84 boolean AutoGPSLocateRectNoWGS84 double dCoordLeftX double dCoordTopy double dCoordRightX double dCoordBottomyY Generates an overview if none exists yet and locates the rectangle by which dCoord LeftX dCoordTopY dCoordRightX and dCoordBottomy is defined in the GIS coordinate system preset in the NDS boolean AutoShowOverview Shows the overview If no overview exists the function returns FALSE Example Sequence of commands for displaying a GPS position set AndApp CreateObject And Application AndApp AutoLog
223. calCache or Batch FillLocalCache operations an extra geo query is initiated fetching all hotspots inside of the requested area The hotspots will be stored in separated XML files based on the tile they belong to and also based on hotspot type XML file s will be generated in server and will be sent back to client along with the files projects overlapping the requested area s File naming convention For the files to be generated in server side the name generation is based on coordinates The name to be generated begins with a prefix related to the meta type Then an underscore followed by the upper left corner also separated by an underscore plus an underscore followed by the tile dimension Example NDS_ADDRESSES_3535933_5990979_1000 XML Indexing of XML files in SyncService SyncService is adjusted to be able to read and index data from a XML files Retrieve hotspots through db query Currently with any zoom scroll an asynchronous command is sent to get all topo files overlapping the requested area and visible within current zoom range The hotspots are retrieved also directly from DB through a DB geo query get all hotspots inside of requested area and visible within current zoom layer Any metadot has an xml node that specifies associated global layer When ask for hotspots visible at a certain zoom we obtain all visible layers like is already the case and we check which hotspot metadots have one of these visible layers Auto d
224. can jump back and forth between two pin points In Fig 25 the addresses of the microducts indicate the object to which they are connected Fig 26 shows the connection between two duct packages in which the microducts are connect ed by cable bundles There are four different connection types Fig 27 a pe Se fduseumsst 6 CS Miuse umsstr F a hil use umesstr Miuse umsstr Miuse umsstr bh E Fig 26 Type Rack Slot number ira er patge Cassette number s TENENTE DE S 1 CE Fig 27 Connection types Fig 28 Selecting the connection types The connection types in Fig 27 correspond to the sequence shown in Fig 28 The types are selected by clicking on the bundle AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 393 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Example of a manhole worksheet MDO Closure 1422 M nchnerstr aR E E hii TE EFTTA Fig 29 i C LALALE T ed ae alr ae i le A PF Fig 29 Example of a manhole worksheet The five incoming duct packages are fanned out by their microduct expander The connection of the microducts is implemented either with a duct connection object or with fiber optic cables The fibers are fanned out and then split Different line thicknesses are used for easier differentiation between cables AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 394 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts La
225. can no longer be supplied that is powered AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 405 of 452 Example 2 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering The network in DemoFernspeisung1 net has the following equivalent circuit dia gram 3 5 Ohm 2 Ohm O U 60V O and the associated system of equations is as follows P 1 U RJ 5 I B P R P 25m gt j R 0Q 2 Rt T R 3Q s i P R R 35Q 3 ia E a O R 2Q i W r J J Defining dependencies in I U function individually In the Component Editor you can define the dependencies for the formula I U yourself This allows non constant consumer outputs to also be defined T A LibEdit TestRemSup lib Ermy E File Edit View Window psal e alal KIETEN X alele 7 al al Ee Symbol Group E OnePowerValue E TestlofU E TestlofUExactHyperbc E Stromversorgung60V Power consumtion Power Unit Data Minimum Voltage 24 Y TestIofU Maximum Current 400 mA I mA Fix power consumption 10 0 Ww Type Remote Supply C Locale Supply IV Use a list of values for power consumption Nr Voltage V Current mA 1 Ripple Power Consum tion 4f _Basic Data Symbol Data 4 1 d Cable JN Conn JN Calc Obj Press F1 to obtain help Attributes PINS Power 4 NUM To specify the I U
226. ce is supported both by AND clients and by the readers Three interface classes are available e AND Application AND Always starts the AND client e AND Application ANDReader Always starts the AND reader e AND Application Starts the application AND client or AND reader that was executed successfully on the last call The automation interface is automatically registred in the software installation and can then be addressed for example by other applications It can also be addressed directly via a script AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 444 of 452 12 Automation interface of the client Functions The following functions and parameters can be passed to the interface on calling boolean AutoIsLoggedIn Returns TRUE if a user is logged on to the server in the instance boolean AutoIsLoggedInAs BSTR user Returns TRUE if the user user is logged on to the server in the instance boolean AutoLogin BSTR user BSTR pwd Is used to log on to the server The arguments user and pwd define the user name and the password If at least one of these values is null or if log on fails the normal log on dialog box will open If this is exited with Cancel the function returns FALSE void AutoLogout Logs the currently logged on user off the server boolean AutoGPSLocate double dCoordX double dCoordY long Scale Generates an overview if none exists yet and locates the point that is specified
227. ces connected through sheet connectors conduits microducts or link objects build a cable chain Example Cablel microduct Cable2 sheetconnector Cable3 conduit Cable4 link Cable5 All 5 cables build a cable chain Simultaneous editing If a cable has been edited in the cable edit dialog and the dialog is left with OK the cable s data will be propagated automatically to all chain members except the following data e cable length data end information data attenuation data layer and color the cable type is only propagated if it was changed by user e the customer specific dot data are only propagated if the dot type is equal Besides this exceptions all data editable in any tab of the cable dialog are propagated i e location data defect wires owner individual wire owners wire states Automatic propagation after positioning After positioning a sheet If a sheet is moved or created the cables inside the sheet inherit the data from the cables connected to the sheet connectors from outside the sheet After creating a new cable If a single new cable is connected to other cables viasheet connectors conduits microducts or link objects the new cable is automatically inheriting the data fromthe cable it is connected to The inherited cable numberis already displayedin the semi auto dialog If you change the number here it will be propagated back to all memebers of the chain After moving an existing cable If an ex
228. ci suciaanveund cece A E A 423 EXPONO TOWO Gaia seat inaa E A A A A A a 423 EXPONO TO RDF oesie a a NA 424 EXPONO a draw aS EIF F siaa A E A a vaniin 425 Exp rtinga draWwNg aS a DXF arsina anaa A A NA a 426 ReDOrtS sisca a R ERRANS 427 Report designet isorinis 432 Creatina TEDOrt templates aniria a eataeadientstasstotivadiias 432 Varnables IMMAN D Arari rana a A aad T Sed a A Mineo eas 439 Automation interface of the client sussnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 444 446 Glossary see Separate Manual ssssssusununnnnnsnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn D2 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 7 of 452 1 General information 1 1 Target group of this manual required skills 1 General information Advanced Network Design AND for short is a software package for the planning documentation and calculation of antenna CATV SAT und HFC systems You can create a complete network plan from the headend to the subscriber outlet using simple drag and drop plotting of symbols taken from comprehensive component libraries The drawing can be executed directly within the site plan or topographical map in schematic or geo schematic form You can set all system parameters manually or automatically using user friendly functionality and clearly laid out windows AND can also interpret your drawing calculate amplification levels subscriber and connection point levels return paths and network performance CTB CSO C N MER
229. coteccaccsecnecd A Colorscheme Colors Windows system colors Selection C Light black on white Mak C Dark white on black Color Palette Edit Color Palette Settings Mousewheel C Scroll vertical Zoom 25 Z Zoomsteps Without Scale With Scale 1x x 1 50 1 Bx 1 100 10 New 1 250 New 20 x 1 500 50x 1 1000 1 2000 1 5000 1 10000 1 25000 1 50000 Show Trenches as single line Test grid reduction I In site plan sheets V Use scale factor V In schematic sheets Factor fo Here you adjust the color of e selected objects under the Scale according to symbol coordinates S0 Z mouse pointer and O Fen aleis caes andes o x marked objects picin ior secon hin ine darn for cables p x defined by block selection ites el herien ane Here you determine Tea Doin the zoom factor A Scale Independent Line Width Cursor Options Snapbox size specifies the width of all pean aT Poel E Pie non cable objects such as Minimal linewidths in mm symbols or marking lines reise 04s oo inn for conduits 0 00 mm Save settings Loadsettings With Optional Shift Factor in Relation to Cable s Line Width for Second Thin Line Drawn for Cables you can change the spacing of individual cable lines for a dual line cable If the previous factor was increased this factor should also be increased so that the line remains visible Line Width According to Symbol Coordinates indicate
230. cted Orders checkbox is selected Only one line now appears for the address at which the splice connection is part of a selected order AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 247 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status Embedded orders Auttrag Auftrag xy eingebettet Fig 12 Order xy is embedded If you open a drawing created by another user orders used in the drawing may be unknown that is not in the order list of the current user In this case the unknown orders are added temporarily to the order list as embedded and are removed again automatically when the pro ject is closed Temporary orders are displayed with the suffix embedded Otherwise embedded orders behave just like normal orders You can set them actively filter them in the bill of materials etc The combo box for the current order and the dialog box for the order table show the global orders and the orders embedded in the currently active project If multiple projects are open changing the project may change the displayed embedded orders AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 248 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots 6 8 Independent Hotspots 6 8 1 General information The basic idea of this project Independent hotspots is to let the user to import some data and see it in overview as independent hotspots and let him manipulate edit move delete search them
231. ction labeling sssnssssssssssnnssrnnsssrnssnsnrnnssennssrnnssrnnssnenrsnsnrne 172 4 4 4 Changing the direction VIEW rmriecminieiniamiiei mania a a a Aa a Selanne 173 4 5 CIVI WOFKS DUNGING eiric EEA 174 5 Editing background files Ee a a a em LAO 5 1 M ADS orisii a a A a a A ia 176 oven bal Lo ading a DACKOFOUING Ma eoS stat vind areca a A Gsdaina amen E a e 177 5 1 2 WMSCHENEPIUO III ainiye rnt Ean AE auntie aang oul ane acetate E aan aa eco a 179 5 1 3 Scale and GIS coordinate system ssssssssssssssssssrenssrnnesnsnesnsnesnsneenrsennesenne 184 5 1 4 Calculating Cable Tengt Serinin RA AN AEA aa 189 524155 GIS and cluster planning xceiscastawasaaie aceikciahaa wx calee aa ane neensuin nicaeaiun ecole neeiemawanee 191 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 4 of 452 5 1 6 KR WN BE aaa OV OV Oy A 0 0 0 ONO Ne COM NNN aA NuU ga B amp B WN ee N e N e 2 M E A E S LEN N Ne RAR WWW NNNNNN FER N e NNN DDP ul e W AND Client Manual IV C Contents Background editor wvereniicessensieaisenidtneianaaedaseniainisaanarnateadacnesen Se hasaedaenaneresenanen 192 Project OFGaniZAviONny serisinin erun EEE 198 Parent project organization ss s 2 22 2222222220u222002 20u2020u2unnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 198 Organizing WIDE ALICS sepicis a 201 WOTKSNEEUS inordinar A a 202 Creating WOrKSNECES rriirosininsatir aira aaa aa aaa 203 SELLINGS TO WOKSNIGEES irinse T 208 Labeling of worksheet connections wit
232. ctivate a short beep and an unsuccessful connection will activate a longer beep from AND If you temporarily wish to work without the snap function hold down the SHIFT key while positioning a component or cable You can make the snap function default settings see figure below Items and with the OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Additional Settings command F LD Additional Settings E X m Standard for catching symbols onto cables Sizes of Text Size 1 Key 3 Size 2 Key 4 Blocks Layers Size 3 Key 5 Duplicate layers with the same names during Insert Block Size 4 Key 6 V During Creation Copying Fix format strings of default labels in loaded pasted blocks Size 5 Key 7 Size 6 Key 8 V Snap with beep Size 7 Key 9 ize 7 Key 9 Create texts as Overlapping background V Copy the properties to the cables connected through sheet connector Show line length cables markerlines near cursor while editing IY Close text edit dialogs with ENTER Shift Ctrl ENTER for new line Use multi line text field for new texts AND 3 2 compatible mouse and keyboardhandling Change selection SHIFT TAB Zoom in steps SHIFT left right mouse button Zoom window SHIFT blockselection Save Settings Load Settings Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 132 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Snapping components to cables I
233. ctivation of this warnings f 2 The smiley in the amplifier dialog also uses this tolerances to compare targe value and current value Level Tolerance 0 20 dB Equalization Tolerance 0 50 dB 3 Priorities for interstage amplifiers Attenuation before 1st Stage minimal Interstage flat before the last stage swap Use powerlinie for adjusting amplifiers Interpretation of Preemphasis Preemphasis Level in highest channel level in lowest channel Preemphasis Level in highest channel virtual level z 47 00 MHz Preemphasis Level a 860 00 MHz virtual level at 47 00 MHz For multiple stage amplifiers there are often several options for achieving both target values at the output Of these the program attempts to select those that fulfill both of the following criteria e Attenuation before 1st stage minimal As far as possible attenuation is first performed behind the first amplifier stage optimizes the signal to noise ratio e Interstage flat before the last stage The program selects the controller positions connector components such that the signal is as flat as possible before the last amplifier stage If it is not possible to fulfill both criteria the criteria higher up on the list have priority AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 316 of 452 Temperature drift The temperature limits themselves are identified by the assignment of the indi
234. currently transmitting are located behind this point even if only a small part of the overall network is located behind this point Permanent cable modem noise This portion is described in the Set Up Return Path Transmitter window see Page 330 in the Modem always creates noise section Like for ingress it is assumed that the specified value is taken from every user output It is converted into a noise density with the value from Measured by bandwidth All this permanent noise is attenuated by the attenuations to the receiver and summated If you have activated the Check Using Various Acceptances option in the window for Check Return Channel see Page 325 it is assumed that only the specified percentage of cable modems produces the permanent noise In the network check in the return path disturbance check all forms of disturbance ingress permanent noise noise during transmission for all active services is added together for all active services and the ratio to the signal determined If the ratio for a service is less than the Required CINR specified in the service a warning is output during the network check If no warning is output either during the level check or during the disturbance check the Return Path OK message is output AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 346 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Return path signals and disturbances The Return Path Signals and Disturbances window is
235. d direction by moving the mouse very close to the most recently plotted point and then moving it from there in the preferred direction In geo schematic drawings you can create curves by placing very short cable lengths close to one another Note Loops are not allowed in cables and are automatically removed by AND AND offers a variety of supporting functions when drawing cables The snap function links cable ends to nearest connections see the Snapping section Page 132 If you would like to make changes to a cable that has already been plotted for example to move it lengthen it remove part of it etc please read the Editing and Changing Cables Page 113 section for details of how to proceed AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 48 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Asymmetrically converted cables Cables can be asymmetrically converted That is the two ends of a cable may have differing connector references in the component editor To make the location of each end of such an asymmetrically converted cable visible in AND to the planner it is displayed with icons that show whether each end has a connector a socket and a cable or if it is free undefined 2 a ae ae ae ap as undefined Because the orientation of an asymmetrically e aw am m ae oe ae pug converted cable is relevant when searching for the connector you have the option of rotating a cable D a a a as lt gt
236. d from the context menu AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 404 of 452 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering 9 14 6 Remote powering calculation details The calculation uses a default fixed output of P for every consumer P U It is assumed that inductances capacitances are negligible and that the phase difference between voltage and current is 0 The calculation takes the following values from the library e The source voltages e The consumer outputs P U I e The ohmic resistance of the cables and passive components Using these values and the Kirchhoff rules a system of non linear equations can be created for the unknown J currents of any consumer k 1 2 3 n The precise form of this system of equations depends on the network structure AND solves the equations numerically If the equation has no solution you receive the following message Component can no longer be supplied Example 1 Consider a source voltage U and a consumer voltage P that are connected to each other with a resistance R The system of equations is then only one line and we are looking for a solution for the current Bis P U R J J The solution is P U JU 4PR 12 7 aR The second solution U U 4PR J 2R is neglected because AND always selects the solution with minimal current If U2 4PR lt O there is no solution The following message is then output Component
237. d from the context menu Project Data Calculation Material Tools View Project and Sheet Data Alt Alt Gis Area Settings Generate project structure Layer Table Manage AND object Layers Planning Types Table Fault List Trench defaults Locations Customers Project lists Numbering and Labeling Update labels Update labels and adjust size Reset All Counters Unlock all locked objects Save Project Settings Adopt Settings from Template Export Project Structure to Custbase This setting is not accepted in the following situations The project is write protected The name of the template file is empty Positioning mode is active You are working with a reader Once the settings have been applied successfully the message Settings applied from template will appear in the output window If an error occurs Template file lt name gt not found or Template file lt name gt cannot be opened will be displayed The name of the template is not set for project files that are stored with a software version older than Build 637 If you have assigned a project template to a project the name of the template is automatically saved when you save the project Note A template must always be used in a GisArea environment when a new project is generated from the tree If AND is used without a GisArea environment the use of a template is not obligatory
238. d here the network cannot be generated Note This entry is only taken into consideration if no headend has been selected If you wish to save these values as the standard setting click Save Settings These values will be not only saved temporarily or saved with the drawing but rather they will always be loaded when creating a new drawing AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 152 of 452 3 Automatic Drawing Mode 3 3 Distribution level 3 3 3 Components On the Components tab you define which components and groups must be used for each network type Automatic net generation Here you select whether your component and Type Structure Distribution Trunks Levels Components Options group settings are to be Appartment Level Distribution Level used for the in house Networkype Home Run oor z Type Description Gp distribution level or for the superordinate level If there are groups in your Cable between Taps library for individual components it is recommended that you use these to make full use of the automatic q system creation Load Settings Save Settings Select a component and click the Change Component button to select a component type from the library 3 3 4 Options On the Options tab you can make settings for the network types eames net generation Type Structure Distribution Tinks Levels Components Options Select here the net
239. d once only in the Library editor If required the installation number may be replaced by the rack position if it is not empty i e a non empty rack position overrides the installation number If the installation number is empty it may be replaced as described above e g by the library type in brackets e g RackInst01 Shelf s1 Unit u2 Patch p3 Pin01 Assumption the installation numbers of Shelf Unit Patch are empty and type replacement is active Optionally the type replacement can happen only if both installation number and rack position are empty In that case the above output again becomes RackInst02 s1 u2 p3 Pin01 The pin name usually is treated like an installation number on the lowest level and will be displayed accordingly For special cases e g connection information where there are two configurable display values the pin name can be treated as a rack position It can then be displayed in a rack path instead of a numbers path This only makes sense for special documentation styles AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 120 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Splice Name Splices are displayed using splice names with the syntax lt Cable No gt B lt BundleNo gt F lt FibreNo gt F lt FibreNo gt B lt Bundle No gt lt Cable No gt Optionally the right side of the name can be displayed like the left one Also the prefixes for the bundle and the fibre can be changed Example
240. dB gt 5 dB Pad AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 339 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Reverse amplifier Amplification 21 dE Amplifier 5 65 MHz Signal 63 65 MHz Regulators fixed Target Values Curent Values Amplification 13 3 de Amplification 13 3 dB gt Amplification 133 dB Equalization o o dE Freemphasis U 0 dB Preemphasis 0 0 dB Plugged Components Atbenuatiors s o dE Fad 771 40 09 9dB fixed Equalization 0 0 dE Equalizer 77140 00 0 048 I mo Attenuation to nest amplifier e s 5 9 dE Total atten to cable modem 3 2 43 8 dE Input pad of nest amplifier 5 0 dE Passive distribution network 28 2 34 6 dB This picture shows the data of Amp C Attenuation to next amplifier shows the attenuation to the parent amplifier without count ing the parent s pad same as in AND 3 3 Input pad of next amplifier shows the attenuation of the parent amplifier s pad if the par ent amplifier provides a pure passive network Passive distribution network shows the attenuation of the passive distribution network without the own pad This information is mainly important for Amp B Total atten to Cable modem shows the attenuation of the whole network behind including the own pad The adjustment of Amp C considers the 5dB Pad of the parent Amp B too and so adjusts to 8 9 5 0 13 9 dB amplification AND Client Manual IV C AND Solutio
241. de Use Case Creation of a dark fiber in library In one of your standard libraries you create a fiber cable named Dark Fiber If you want you can assign a special color or line style to the dark fiber so that it can be easily distinct from normal cables in AND As Order No and Article No you enter nothing to avoid that it is counted in the bill of material The attenuation in library is irrelevant because you will overwrite it in AND If you need dark fibers with more than one wire you have to create extra library objects for the various wire counts I e one with one wire one with two wires and one with four Using a dark fiber in AND You insert the dark fiber as any other cable In the tab Cable data Nr 1 you switch to manual length if you are in a Geo Project and enter the length In the tab Attenuation Nr 4 you switch to manual optionally add remove wavelengths and enter the attenuations AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 81 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Bundle objects Bundle objects represent the virtual connection within splices that is between two auto splice boxes They inserted via the toolbar eo They have the following properties e Connection type spliced open connected e Attenuation Depends on connection type open bundles have no attenuation as no connection exists unspliced bundles have no attenuation because the cable is extended w
242. designs may lead to very poor Hint Some of the as i l performance when used in a remote session performanti look blue 3 D look silver blue Modern black The design you choose does not affect the functions of the program it only concerns the appearance of the program window exception remote sessions In this case some designs may result in performance prob lems For this reason you can change the window design again at any time AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 19 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 2 Dual Monitor optimization 2 2 Dual Monitor optimization NDS features full dual monitor capability in a local installation To enable the best possible use of a second monitor you can move all toolbars and other docked window onto a second monitor This enlarges the pure worksheet space on the NDS and provides clear separation between the worksheet and tools Under Citrix this dual monitor capability is only possible to a limited extent If NDS is executed in a Seamless Window both the main window and all toolbars can be positioned on the primary monitor only You can also start NDS in a surrounding window whose maximum absolute size depends on settings and the available resources of the Citrix server In this way depending on the settings it is possible to create a window that can be enlarged beyond the primary monitor of the Citrix client The NDS main window and the toolbars can be positioned
243. diples filter frequency MHz 165 00 Delete All Save Settings Load Settings Upstream Service Name of Service Telephone V Master Service Modem Upstream Center Frequency 40 0 MHz Bandwidth 20 00 MHz Number of Subchannels fo Level Range Modem 80 00 dBy MHz Bandwidth 0 20 MHz Modem Bandwidth from 15 0 to 165 0 MHz Modem produces always noise Noise Level 35 By measured at Bandwidth of 0 160 MHz Noise while sending Signal Noise Ratio 50 0 dB Neighbourchan Decrease 13 0 dB EAT Last ee 10 0 dB C Continuous Signal C FSK C Frequency Multiplex AM QAM C QPSK Time Multiplex Time Frequencymultiplex Receiver Upstream Level Range from 60 00 dBy to 07 00 dByV Required CINA 38 00 dB Level Target Value 77 00 dByV Add Delete Cancel AND Solution GmbH Page 328 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Master service The Master Service option is important for setting the return path amplifier AND refers all values for the amplifier setting to this service Only one service can be the master The following fields only exist in the AND FIBRECOAX version They are only relevant to the noise calculation Modem noise can be separated into two components One permanent noise component irrespective of whether the modem is currently transmitting or not and one noise component tha
244. direction from which the trench cross section data is displayed in the corresponding trench cross section label You can change the direction of viewing by right clicking the trench cross section and choosing the Trench cross section command from the context menu Conduit 1 Conduit 2 Trench cross section Trench cross section before the direction of view is changed The same trench cross section after the direction of view has been changed 0000 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 173 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 5 Civil works building 4 5 Civil works building If you wish to display buildings draw them using the Buildings icon When drawing proceed by clicking consecutively on the corners of the building in the worksheet This way you can create a polygonal object as in the examples below AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 174 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps LocalArea Coax FibreCoax 5 Editing background files As of Version AND COAX it is now possible to load maps into the background of a worksheet and thus plot your network plan precisely according to the site plan or create a geo referenced drawing A background map can be a site plan a topographic map or an individual story floor plan of a building If an AND Smart Server is connected to a GIS the maps can be made available via the server The background maps mentioned here are AND projects tha
245. displayed work area Choose EDIT gt Find from the menu This is faster with the Ctr F shortcut Enter the installation number and click OK If a node with the specified installation number is found it will blink red Network searches Using a certain node as a starting point you can use the network search to find parent or Subordinate nodes in the entire network Right click the original node for your search and choose the Network Search function The Network Search window will open Search conditions f Childrens C Parents Mode type jalltypes Search depth T Start search Exit search Specify your search and click Start Search R Network search nut Number of found nodes 27 _ Type __ Source Level Instal Proje County Zip Street_ Hous Appe Source Start Tap Local Bridg Local Bridg Local Bridg Local Splitter Local Tap Local Tap Local Bridg Local Bridg Local Tap Local Tap Local Bridg Local Bridg Local pap lc cfc cl k Rrida oral mW Export Excel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 288 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 4 Editing the NIS network structure 7 4 Editing the NIS network structure You can organize the nodes in an NIS structure and thus the links create new network nodes and links or delete existing ones 7 4 1 Selecting nodes If you want to edit the net
246. dow will open Dano LA Name _ Deseo ___ 8 Ut Pas Man A Me Me T 2800001 519 Inks Bambus A OK Js 2 2ra SKL 00 l l 2800002085 KESH Kabelendstecker 4 2066 ee Wks ace ee Ma e Cancel El VIShyiP Ausgang Signalquelle WrStA BAT 0 m or Nes Sass exe as T EJ 2800002083 KHE 4 20 Kontakthulsenkupplung 4 0 EJ 2800007 993 UP 32 UP 32 Anschaltung an C l Calculate Package Units Refresh List Automatically All o Objects by State Filter by Task Edit T ask Filter New from Drawing Load Save Excel Export fv All Sheets Add Merge Get Difference Completion BOM x Language Pririt Edit Form Properties Time h fo Hardware fo Ready 5 Entries 5 objects passed filter Layer Art 0rd No 4 You will find detailed information about handling bills of materials in the Bills of Materials section see Page 411 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 137 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Editing objects in blocks You can change objects in a block in one step For example you can change layer affiliation and color for all objects contained in a block at the same time Select a block and click it The Edit Object window will open r 3 Edit Object Object Data Common Properties Nr 1 Operations over Block Nr 2 Specific Properties Nr 3 E Block 4 Objects Objects E Objects
247. dress of the headend or power insertion point This information enables you to see which document it is and search for it see also the GIS Area Manual Choose the PROJECT DATA gt Project and Sheet Data command The data entered will appear in the legend and in the reports see also the Project Organization section Page 198 Import a topographical map into the background If you want to create a plan that shows the correct positional arrangement based on a topographical map import a raster or vector map Choose the FILE gt Background gt Load Bitmap Background command or Load DXF Background see also the Editing Background Files section Page 175 Set the scale If the scale is not set automatically after loading the background draw in a ruler and set the scale see the Ruler and GIS Scaling section see Page 175 Set automatic labeling You can set defaults for labeling objects in drawings so that information such as type length unit etc is inserted automatically This simplifies your work and ensures consistent labeling For a detailed procedure read Automatic Labeling of Objects see Page 115 and Automatic Numbering of Objects see Page 122 Create a layer Layers are placed one on top of the other in your worksheet Choose the PROJECT DATA gt Layer Table command In the layer list on the left click Standard click the New button and enter the layer name and color See the Layer section Page 216
248. e 25 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 5 Operating and drawing modes You must actively change the drawing mode by opening the drop down list box on the toolbar next to Drawing mode and selecting the desired mode Material Tools View Windows Controlbar i ai x a ica i Inhouse Automatic Alt U 2 free FE N avigation R nplate Us Program Settings gt Dr from library gt Width mm Auto gt La m T i oaingo Piz ERE gt Planning Project ANDI Unknown ba Adjust view Civil works a z7 9 Sheet 1 Unnamed Background editor Show Netlist Layer templates gt v Show Civil works Y Sca le 1 2x ee a Drawingmode Normal hi Lock Civil works J E Layer and Color a trolsat v3 1 lib 7 n AA Layer Standard Color Color from libra Navigation a Project ANDI Unknown Layer template User defined Sheet 1 Unnamed sak 1 El Object presettings Drawingmode Normal P my Layer and Color 1 pren ea Planning type Default Color Color from libra P an ni rit state U ri k nown Layer template User defined g i gi A detailed description of plotting network plans in Network planning mode is provided in the Network Planning Drawing Mode chapter see Page 44 A detailed description of civil works mode is provided in the Civil Works Planning chapter see Page 159 A detailed description of how to edit background files is provided in the Editing Background fi
249. e 74 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Sheet B3 GT a a a a A There is one path from B4 to End with at least 2 free wires Path 0 Length 1372 6 m free wires 48 Elements B4 gt B3 gt End Can t connect pins with different wire count Target pin Can t connect pins with different wire count Target pin Automatic connection aborted The automatic connection function wanted to connect the 12 wired pin of Bundle 1 on the right side with 2 single wired pins of Bundle 1 on the left side The function was aborted and the conflicting pins are displayed in the output window Enough usable wires AND is never changing already existing connections in the sheets it only creates new connec tions Existing connections lead to constraints Wires can be free but not usable because of two rea sons e an existing connection is leading a free wire out of the route e an existing connection is leading a free wire to a not free one reserved planned in use a B6 a ee ee LETETT eee ee eee 4 Ausgabe Es gibt genau eine Route von BS nach B3 mit mindestens 12 freien Fasern Route 0 Lange 44 8 m Anzahl freie Fasern 46 Stationen B5 gt B4 gt B3 Es gibt zu wenig nutzbare Fasern in diesem Kabel Ben tigt 12 Nutzbar 10 Automatisches Verbinden abgebrochen The cable from B5 to B4 has formally 46 free wires But in Sheet B4 we have already existing connections which lead 36
250. e CALCULATION gt Edit Test Point List gt Settings from the menu The following window will open stings TTT Specify the titles of the individual col Pat acta eaerare umns Select at least one option be cause the width of the column is calcu lated based on the length of the title Define the level unit The conversion is always performed aN for 75 ohm Printing If you do not want to show all of the coumns V Channel description IY Modulation type V Frequency V Channel name l Reduction V Units in header Unit of measurement frequencies in your test point lists you can switch off individual columns here AND always prints one row for measured values even if no measured value is available This allows you to fill out the rows manually later Only test points with measured values are output A measurement log is created Here all level values are rounded to O 5dB Print only measured rows No PALS 7F 147 3 MHz2PAL BG Name PALS 8F 154 3 MHzPAL BG Location PALS 9F 161 3 MHzPAL BG UKWU 2F 87 5 MH2FM RadioR 4 0 dB in dByy PA4LS10F 168 3 MHzPAL BE UK WU 7OF 108 0 MH2FM RadioR 4 0 dBfin dByy PALC 5F 175 3 MHzPAL BG DIGF 113 0 MH2Q4M 64F 10 0 dB in dByy PALC 6F 182 3 MHzPAL BG DIG PilotF 121 0 MH2Q4M 64F 10 0 dB in dByy PALC 7F 189 3 MHz2PAL BG PALS 4F 126 3 MHz2PAL BGR 0 0 dB in dB PALC 8F 196 3 MHzPAL BG PALS 5F 133 3 MH2PAL BGR 0 0 dB in dByy PALC 9F 203 3 MHzPAL BG PALS 6F 140 3 MHzP
251. e PDF file which you must give a name Organize New folder Sr Favorites ml Date modified E Desktop ip Downloads E Recent Places No items match your search Libraries E5 Documents a Music E Pictures E Videos jE Computer Ey Local Disk C og Filename LAP pdf Hide Folders 4F Patch Hatched areas are not output in the PDF export file AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 424 of 452 11 Output options 11 2 Exporting 11 2 4 Exporting a drawing as TIFF Select FILE gt Background gt Export Drawing as TIFF to export the currently displayed worksheet to a file in TIFF format Set the desired size and enter a file name f Actual view Pixels width 1024 Height 768 Format 1 bit pixel 6 bit pixel W Export legend and sheet frame rea AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 425 of 452 11 2 5 Exporting a drawing as a DXF 11 Output options 11 2 Exporting Ww Ww When exporting the current worksheet to a file in a DXF vector format all layers except the raster maps or bitmap can be exported Select FILE gt Background gt Export Drawing as DXF Enter a file name and confirm with OK The Export Options window will open You can choose between options oriented and layer oriented export i Export Options Layer for different cable types C All types use one layer Different layers for differe
252. e Status of All Objects This command causes the status of the order to be propagated to all objects of the select ed order Example If Order xy is Existing in operation this command will cause the Status Existing in operation to be set for all objects with Order xy As for deletion this is performed for all open projects and acknowledged with a message AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 241 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status Block editing function Block editing is also possible for orders t Edit Object Eo ioj xi Object Data Common Properties Mr 1 Operations over Block Mr 2 Specific Properties Mr 3 E Block 31 Objects Ubjects Objects Properties IY All Objects Sheets T Symbols Common Properties Gables Source Splitter Operations over Blc T Trench Lines F Arnplifier P Socket i Specific Properties I Bundles Tap tulkita F Signal Paint T Conduits Location Layer Color Mr 1 Color layer information Mr 2 General Properties Planning Type Defaut Task MENS f Modify objects in sheets Modify sheets recursively Location type Jno location record Installation type Junknown Location zip city Street No Reference Information I Location verified Seral number T ype Supplier Type Commecope USA RGSS n a CO mri nhi enhe Cancel Fig 6 Dialog box for
253. e Zoom Factor field Z00m Factor 3 00 if you wish to specify a different zoom or rescaling factor The value represents the percentage by which the background will be zoomed or rescaled in relation to its current size AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 196 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps Exporting the background It is also possible export a bitmap that has been loaded as a background image To do this use the FILE gt Background gt Export Bitmap Background command If GIS coordinates are defined for the worksheet whose bitmap background is to be exported a tfw file with the same name will automatically be created that contains the GIS information for the exported bitmap In this way you have the simple but important option in AND of creating geo references for bitmaps Proceed as follows 21 Create a new drawing 22 Import a bitmap as the background 23 Plot Reference type GIS insertion points in two known positions in the bitmap and specify the coordinates see also Defining GIS Insertion Points Page 186 24 Have the GIS insertion points identify the GIS coordinates system by going to Project and Worksheet Data opening the Sca e GIS tab and selecting the Worksheet Coordinates option 25 Export the background bitmap A tfw file containing the geo coordinates will be created for the bitmap Exporting the drawing as a TIFF You can save the current worksheet or the currently visible s
254. e the number ing dialog show only the settings for the chosen type 7 Types list this is the list of object for which the numbering can be edited this list is ed itable via buttons Add and Delete 8 Settings source this combo contains the list of format numbering sources mentioned in previous section Force numbering rules settings Global numbering rules settings Pro ject rules settings The Applicable rules shows the numbering settings calculated based on the rules of precedence mentioned above Any editing made when Applicable rules is selected will go to Project rules 9 Format rule edit this edit allows one to edit the rule for the object type selected in the list Types list 10 Applies for this multi selection combo allows one to apply the current format to multiple planning types To apply the format to the planning types selected in this combo one must press the button 11 from the image The planning types selected in this combo are those for which the Add and Delete buttons act 11 Apply automatic format to when a format rule is changed it is not applied automati cally to the matching objects in the current project to apply the changed format one must choose where to apply it current sheet current project current selection block The rule is applied to the planning type selected in the combo 1 from the image Pease notice that the automatic numbering format
255. e this z p 2 PER 4 5 gt E E a Se E E z ES 1 i a Ny TEF VE EE i des all SS pE E Ja ay B2 HZ an i TAE ay is 1 ito _ P U ZA z Er ae i tn ai Ae F B4 cs 1 1 GN l i Ey EN I T b D D D pE In order to look well the distance between the boxes must be at least their height I e for the situation shown in the above picture we want to connect 28 bundles The height of the Autospliceboxes is 28 pin grids so we need at around 28 pin grids horizontal distance AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 76 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Such a minimum distance is also needed if at the moment there are fewer bundles This is because AND reserves space for bundles which may be created later Swapping In order to avoid unnecessary bundle crossings it is in most cases recommended to have one Autosplicebox swapped and the other not Out of beam If the Autospliceboxes are not face to face a splicebox shouldn t be in the beam of the other q Beam of A sua 5333 ipii satis Autosplicebox B is in the beam of Autosplicebox A the found courses have unnecessary cross ings AREE eee ee e IS HATTTTTTTTTT Both spliceboxes aren t in the beam of the other one and so the resulting courses look
256. e to delete the numbering settings for the current object type from the current planning types 15 Apply this button allows one to apply the current settings and changes without closing the numbering dialog the effects are equivalent to clicking OK 16 Apply format this button applies the current rule from Format edit box to the current ly selected planning types from combo applies for 17 Placeholders menu when the button with the magenta arrow is clicked a menu is pre sented which allows one to select from the placeholders that are replaced with values when the installation number formatting is done Only the placeholders that can still be added to the format string rule are shown e g if sheet counter c is already present in the rule it will no longer be available in the menu as project counter or location rectan gle counter because only one internal sheet counter project counter location rectangle counter counter can be present in format When the dialog changes are applied by clicking Apply or closing the dialog with OK AND checks the validity of the formats The things that are checked are these 18 There can be only one internal counter see above and one external counter a counter that takes its values from external sources currently it takes the value from database se quence per format rule 19 The formats in all planning types for a given object type must have the same counters e g itis not allowed
257. e transmitter in the library you can enter value pairs which define how the OMI at output depends on the input level Channel modulation index vs Input Level Pack Nr lt Alllevel values refer to 1 MHz bandwidth Level dB p OMI 80 00 5 00 2 85 00 9 00 pi For input levels not contained the list the OMI is found by linear interpolation of the logarithm of the neighbor OMIs I e if OMI 80dBuV 5 and OMI 85dBuV 9 we get OMI 82 5 dBuV 10 log 5 log 9 2 6 7 Laser data Nr 1 Termination Device Nr 2 Transponder I Required values As input level the Target Receiving Level is taken Depending on the state of the checkbox Take target receiving level from settings that level is manually entered or read from the pro ject settings If that list of value pairs in the library is not empty the editbox for the OMI is readonly and the OMI is given as value of the list at input level If the list is empty the OMI can be entered manually Default is the value Channel modulation in the library Optical Receiver The receivers input power Panp is given as result of ANDs power calculation and the input OMI is the one of the transmitter In the library the output level for different OMI can be entered as list AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 333 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation C Qutput Level Regulated Output Level dB f Output
258. e was added which allows setting of an external global counter at this moment database sequence to an object 2 14 7 1 Setting the numbering format LibEdit Numbering settings can be now set for symbols and cable objects in LibEdit Language independent D ata Mounting Time 0 0 min Specific Type Numbering format Hybrid AL Network Hierarchy Specifier Value 0 In the Basic Data section the new field Numbering format allows one to set a numbering format for the objects made from this library object Please see the section with the numbering in AND for the list of possible placeholders that can be used here Metadata xml A new XML node lt NumberingInfos gt can be added to those metadots for which a specific num bering is wanted This is a sample node lt NumberingInfos gt lt NumberingInfo planningTypes gt lt FormatString gt P 3S 3c lt FormatString gt lt NumberingInfo gt lt NumberingInfo planningTypes Headend gt lt FormatString gt 3S 3c lt FormatString gt lt NumberingInfo gt lt NumberingInfos gt planningTypes attribute can contain one or more comma separated planning types for which the current NumberingInfo applies The possible planning types are Headend ALine BLine CLine DLine ABLine CDLine NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5 If planningTypes is empty than that NumberingInfo is the default numbering format AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 122 of 452
259. ea such that existing objects are included Note Only the distribution network without amplifiers and signal sources will be constructed with the target area block AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 149 of 452 3 Automatic Drawing Mode 3 2 House structure 3 2 House structure On the House Structure tab you define how the houses are structured and what distances there are between the house floors etc These specifications are important for calculating the cable lengths 1 4 Automatic net generation Define here how many houses there will be in your Type Structure Distribution Trunks Levels components Options n etwo rk p an Structure Cable Lengths The distance between the Number of Houses 1 Distance between Houses 20 0 m trunks corresponds to the EET mi E Distance between Poors 30 distance between the splitters Edt yp pp Detance between Trunks 100 m Number of Floors 2 Dist to Distribution Level 20m This corresponds to the length d E pay f th b b th an a dal Leceloged a tac E Distance between Sockets 10 m PrE a ee ee EEE Number of Cellars 0 distribution level in the Nunberof Atics 0 4 basement attic and the fi rst socket el eer ee Indicates the pe rcentag e of the Paes 100 s Description of Locations Installation numbers residential units that are to Reserve 0 receive programming 1st House s Number 0 Number of
260. each labeling element that can be taken from the library You can also enter any text you wish in the format string line Example Entering N A as the format string structure for Amplifiers will give you the following label O 001 002 40 The number sequence 0 001 002 is generated from the wildcard N for the installation numbers The slash was typed with a space before and after it in the Format String entry field The number 40 was generated by the A wildcard for amplifiers Activate the Update All Labels upon Exiting option to ensure that changes in the label structure are applied in the worksheet If you close the Automatic Labeling and Numbering window with OK the settings are only applied to the active document If you close it with the Save Settings option the settings will be applied to the entire program AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 116 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 2 14 6 Dynamic Labels and Hierarchy Path Dynamic Labels In the library editor pins of symbols can be assigned calculated labels These labels may display not only individual data from the respective symbol in AND pin port name from the library symbol or installation number of the AND symbol instance but also informations calculated from the network routing destinations e g the mechanical connection end of the connection of the pin i e considering only the fibres if Known b
261. ecify the appearance of a series here Specifying the section height 00 AND Client Manual IV C You can change the height of a section using the slide control Upper part footer of previous sheet Lower part header of subsequent sheet You can also use the slide control to change the height of the upper and lower feed section 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer Data F 1 F AND Solution GmbH Page 434 of 452 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer Designing report templates Design the report template by setting up the page format plotting graphical elements like lines rectangles and heading texts and specifying the variables for the data to be printed Setting the page format and margins Select FILE gt Page Setup r Page Setup Specify the paper size and format here Set the page margins here Set the default printer for printing out reports here Margins millimeters Left 5 5 Right i Top 5 5 Bottom 5 5 ors Plotting graphical elements and headings File Edit Jol Vari If you want to change an element T TORA ses ST pal after it has been plotted first select BM eee it with the selection tool oo Select the line rectangle or text tool on the toolbar and draw the elements in the desired component areas The results can be viewed immediately in the worksheet preview AN
262. eck in of the project this is substituted with the actual value of the external counter It is not allowed to combine two external counters in the same time for a particular object it is however allowed to combine one external counter and one internal counter project based counters AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 128 of 452 2 14 8 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Immediate editing of objects when plotting It is advisable to enter object data immediately after plotting an object see figure below Item This is done by switching on the Display Ediging Dialog option with the PROJECT DATA gt Numbering and Labeling command and the Automatic Labeling tab Make sure that you make the settings for each object type separately Automatic Labeling and Numbering Automatic Numbering Automatic Text Automatic Filename Dynamic Objects A4 gt planning type Automatic Numbering Automatic Text Automatic Filename Dynamic Objects A4 gt Automatic Labeling and a Apply for Default v planning type Apply for Default Automatic numbering for Amplifiers Format string P S c ia Start value for counter 1 Minimal number of digits Sheetno 3 Counter Sheet 3 Counter Project 3 Disable Automatic numbering for selected object type P Project Number S Sheet Number c Sheet Counter C Project Counter a
263. ection Attentuation of splice points In the calculation of the optical power a fixed splice attenuation is assigned to each point at which a connection without a connector is conneced to a cable end without a connector You can edit the value of the fixed splice attenuation in the calculation settings r Calculation settings for current project Additional Warning Warn when channels are outside of an amplifier s Distortion Calculation m Calculate CSO CTB with modulated carriers The values in the source are always unmodulated Level reduction for modulation 3 0 dB Calculate intermodulation noise also slow I CSO CTB with FM Radio Channels slow Logical multiplier CTB at b Oo MN ofl o Default Logical multiplier CSO Opticals 5 _ i oo Splicingloss of a splicepoint o SL a Optical power reserve AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 143 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 15 Optical connectors optical connections Attenuation of bundles The bundle objects between two auto splice boxes are abstract representations of optical connections and are therefore a special case If the bundles status is p ugged or spliced the attentuation will be directly entered in the bundle A bundle with cut status interrupts the signal flow without warning a bundle with uncut status has an attenuation of 0 0 dB Bundle data Mr 1 Fiber Information Nr 2
264. ection of the current worksheet as a TIFF bitmap Do this by choosing the FILE gt Background gt Export Drawing as TIFF command A window will open in which you can specify the settings for the export Here you specify whether the entire open TIFF Export b x Iip worksheet or the currently visible section a i should be exported Here you set the pixel resolution of the bitmap to be generated Pixels Here you select the color depth of the asictth moa Leat j bitmap to be created i gt 1 bit pixel creates a purely black and white bitmap 8 bit pixel creates a bitmap with a maximum of 256 different colors Here you specify whether the worksheet legend and the worksheet edge will be Caneel i visible in the TIFF file Format f 1 bit pixel W Export legend and sheet frame OF AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 197 of 452 6 Project organization 6 1 Parent project organization 6 Project organization Smooth organization is essential to maintaining a clear overview and being able to access the necessary information quickly particularly for large projects involving many people AND provides a comprehensive project organization function for planning calculating and documenting antenna broadband CATV networks SAT and HFC system projects 6 1 Parent project organization For large projects for example city networks we recommend using the AND Version AND FIBRECOAX and the AND Smart S
265. ects the connection is only tested if the bundle status is spliced A warning is displayed for this bundle if one of the two cables connecting the bundle is fitted with a connector or the cables have different cable references AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 142 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 15 Optical connectors optical connections 2 15 3 Attenuation of the optical connections Attenuation of the plug connections All connector attenuations are described by values of icons in AND AND assumes that the attentuation of the plug connections is already contained in icon values such as attenuation output power Examples Transmitter If the output power of a laser is 6 0 dBm according to the library AND assumes that the output power is 6 0 dBm including the connector attenuation The same applies to passive components For example the library attentuation value of a splitter fitted with a connector describes the entire attenuation pure splitter attenuation entry and exit connector attenuation Receiver AND takes the power before the connector to be the input power This is the power that you would measure if you disconnected the patch cable from the receiver and routed the signal to a photodiode instead Consequently pure connection elements such as patch cables are also described as icons The icon type is Optical Adapter Each optical standard package of an optical adapter describes the attentuation of a conn
266. editing the block If an order is set with the Order label in the comb box it is applied to all objects of the block If the All Objects checkbox is cleared and the checkbox for cables and bundles selected instead the order is only be set for cables and bundles AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 242 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status Order filter in the bill of materials It is possible to set a filter in the bill of material such that only those objects will appear in the bill of materials whose order is contained in a list Order No Ar Name Description Sit Pr m a m L T s Jui T 942389 Duct Package 8 Microduct Package 6 eee 2l om Oh oT Bo i 942566 Duct Package 10 Mictroduct Package 10 719 om Qh 94 50684 Duct Package 4 Microduct Package 4 fe 615 m De Bundle Splice Costs 1 u o 1 T 0 Seg Wha ee Je Uee Ta 3 0 0 i Calculate Package Units M Refresh List Automatically Filter Objects by State All Filter by T ask seta sein bravig Load Save Excel Export W All Sheets Add Merge Get Difference Completion BOM g Language Engish l Pririt Edit Form Properties Sum Time h 237 Hardware 0 All 18537 5 4 objects passed filter Layer Art Drd No SS Fig 7 Edit Bill of Materials dialog box The elements that are relevant for the ord
267. eeees 404 Remote powering Calculation detailS c cc eeccceceeeeeeesscceesseneneneeeeeeesseeeeeanaes 405 Remote powering Outputs and error MESSAGES cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteegeeeeeeeneeags 407 Displaying remote power current in live test points cc cece cece eeeeeeeeeeees 409 Checking for remote power incompatibility and maximum current in components410 Coloring remote powering ALAS ccc cee ee cece eee eecesseeeeeseenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegnennaantegs 410 Bills of Materials sannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ee Creating a Bill of Materials usssnsnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 411 Editing DINS OF materi lis wisscicsvscecieccawedianvecwcncssewsdnentecssuanvenstiaewenstneesnuscrens 413 Costing objects in bills Of materials ssnsnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 415 OUTDUE ODLIONS viitevencienewerctenererccariseretinesserenetenenmaneenmn LZ PHD Garin teavevensneceuunicrens unio rewuneenrssunencabuueeenvesuvenumuens 417 Printing test DONE IISUS renra AT AA T 417 Printing network SUFUCEUTES 46 2 ssauiidaias winiad AEA A A A EA mentees 419 PAMEN COnMECLOR SES urraiiin na E NA ANN TATO A A A E 419 Printing drawings drawing sections or DIOCKS sssssssssssnrsrsnrsrrnnsrrnrenrsrenrenne 420 PRIAtING SPICE DOXCS cacire nate a eras E A A A E NR RO eS 421 Page SetuP aariaa oE au E NE T TO A TE E E E E 422 EX DOFCING oirinn aa 423 EXPONO tO EXCO s
268. eians anes ehh a 133 Frequency PIANS ssssssssssssssenssrnnesrene 358 FUNCTIONS IN AND camiine 438 Fundamentals airera aiin aTa TO 11 General information s sesesessrssrerererrrrnns 8 Generating a CrawinG cccccceeeeeeeeeees 149 Generating bills of materials for blocks 132 Generating trenches for existing cables 160 Geo schematic operating mode 27 GIS and cluster planning sssssssssessssssss 186 GIS Ared Manual earmiise ra 9 GIS coordinate system s sssssssrsrrssss 179 GIS Insertion Point tab s ssssssessssssn 182 GOSS ALY aniren a e 9 447 Headend frame sssssssssssssssrnnssssnssssrens 61 House attenuation return path amplifier low COMPENSATION s ssssssesssssrssrnn 317 House Structure tab c cece cece es 145 Influencing remote powering paths with group NUMDESS erae 397 Insert Object WINGOW ccceeeseeeeeeeeeees 65 INSEFEIMNG DIOCKSisatagessterevessditaninotaares 129 Installation Manual ccc cece cece eeeeeees 9 Installation Number window 18 Installation numbers ccc cece ees 221 Keyboard design assistance eeeeeeee 162 Keyboard working with the 005 23 Keys and shortcuts ccccsecsseeueeeueeeneeane 23 Labeling tests points subsequently 59 Layer Information WiINdOW 00ceeee 18 AV Glo E E EE E E E cascode 211 Layers for trenches s sesssssssserensssrenss 156 Layers Ups
269. eld Pin with partner pin replacement The partner pin replacement is displayed according to the settings of the respective function dynamic labels splice patch report R function only with relativization and no minimum number of levels If a symbol rectangle pin should not be shown at all if the installation number is empty no replacement just turn off replacement by type and provide an empty fixed replacement In this case the separators or are not displayed too Rack Position In addition to the installation number the rack position or mounting pin name may be displayed The rack position is determined from the attribute of the object However if the symbol e g patch field is mounted and the pin name of the mounting pin of parent symbol e g unit is present in the library then this mounting rack position overrides the given attribute That way in mounted hierarchies you may work with installation number only on the topmost mounting level e g RackInst02 and the objects in between Shelf on mounting position s1 of the rack Unit on mounting position u2 of the shelf Patch field on mounting position p3 of the unit still have a unique hierarchy path e g RackInst0O2 si u2 p3 P01 Assumption the installation numbers of Shelf Unit Patch are empty and no replacement option is active This documentation style may be used to save data entry work the name of the mounting pin and the assembly unit level is entere
270. elected fibers and lists the addresses passed through in the output window This function is also available for a selected pin shortcut Q The dialog box for selecting fibers is omitted from the connection dialog box c Context menu update command If the project from which the start pin originates is edited in a way that will affect pricing for example deleting cable changing cable length moving auto splice box etc the editing options in the Connection Information window are deactivated and the content can only be read but not changed With the Update command the window for the start pin is filled again At the same time the editing options are reactivated d Context menu switch to start switch to end command Jumps to the end of a particular route This can also be done by double clicking an entry in the Start or End column e Context menu exce l export command Exports the window content to MS Excel f Interconnect Plan The function has been completely revised in AND 4 0 and is implemented as from Build 777 This function is only enabled in the FiberCoax version The function lists all splice boxes of a route and displays for each splice patch cable bundle and fiber number from the beginning to the target Output has been reduced to the essentials The function is now called using the context menu of the Connection dialog box A Print All Sheets button has been added to the result dialog
271. elow no using the arrow buttons they will be applied in the Current Values section until the permissible tolerances correspond to the target values The smiley smiles Target Values Current Values wn Level at Target Level 104 abp max Fr 104 db ab Preemphasis 8 0 ap Preemphasis 8 dB l As soon as the tolerances are exceeded the values in Current Values no longer change and the smiley frowns 0 Target Values Current Values Level at Target Level 116 5 Bu 3 max Frg 114 7 dB yi Preemphasis 8 0 8 Preemphasis 8 dE AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 312 of 452 Manually inserting connector components 9 Calculations 9 2 Amplifier settings Using the attenuation and equalization settings options it is possible to manually insert connector components You can also fix certain connector components This means AND will not select components for this slot If a slot defined as a slot for attenuators or equalizers in the library all connection options are listed in the Attenuators selection list see figure below no and the selection for equalizers is empty The base attenuation of the connectable equalizers is taken into account Amplifier data Nr 1 Amplifier data Nr 2 Transponder Nr 3 Power Consumption Nr 4 C Settings You select the return path amplifier here Built In Regulators Amplification 20 0 dE Equalization 10 0 aa dB Plu
272. ence E Component information Signalquellennr Base data Nr 1 Symbol Data Nr 2 L UR gt URL Object Type Color layer information Location type Jnolocationrecord gt Color layer informatic 5 Owner Data Installation type unknown 7 Owner Data Dynamic data Signal source Nr 1 Owner Return Path Target L Entry exit point Nr 3 Installation year Database Production year Location Inst No N Installation Company Installation Technician r General Properties Planning Type Default Task 7 Status Unknown Date f 10 12 2010 Serial number T ype Supplier T ype Serialnumber oe Yv M Use as partname Drum number To search for an existing address click the icon The Addresses window will then open H DOT Properties Address Country Zip I City I City supplement Oooo City district YI Street YI House number J House number to House no supplement J House no supplement to Me Floor a Door oOo Part of the building ans Field part no E E Geo origin Manually Entered Address type Postal Address Change type Manually Changed Origin Description J DwellingUnits lee Geopos POINT 3411654 715035 5317326687220 Reset geopos Search in DB OK Cancel You can choose whether the address is searched for in the current drawing select AND Net or in
273. enders is implemented in AND 4 0 from Build 770 on Passive Distribution network behind Amp B 29 0 38 3 dB Passive Distribution network behind Amp C 28 2 34 6 dB jH afr I T PAD Sd i PEREA a ee ets ye te Wie eee iki i Amp Line Extender FTE Reverse armiplifiers successfully adjusted Bending level ofcable modems behind 104 7 dBy 114 0 dEpY bending level ofcable modems behind 107 4 dBy 114 0 dEpY nput 70 7 dEV Amplification 19 3dE Output 90 0 dEp Y nput 70 7 dBp Amplification 9 6 dE Output 40 3 dE Y nput 70 2 dEu Amphfication 13 9 dE Output 4 1 dEu Y The passive distribution network behind Amp B is too big and so a line extender named Amp C is necessary Amp C provides the right part of the passive distribution network Amp B the left part In AND 3 3 Amp B is regarded as line amplifier because it has a with Amp C a child amplifier As consequence the option Pads compensate missing house attenuation was not applied AND 4 0 recognizes that Amp B also provides a pure passive network and therefore inserts compensating pads for it In the above example the maximum modem sending level is 114 dBuV and the target input level at each amplifier is 70 dBuV For each houseamplifier the reverse amplifier adjustment must plug pads to reach a target passive attenuation of 114 70 44 cB Amp C Pad attenuation 44 34 8 9 2 dB gt 9 dB Pad Amp B Pad attenuation 44 38 3 5 7
274. enlarge or reduce the number of elements in a block that has already been created Hold down the Ctrl key and click an object in the block to remove it from the selection You can enlarge the block by pressing the Ctrl key and dragging open a new marker rec tangle The objects within the border will expand the already existing block Using a menu command Choose EDIT gt Select All to select all non locked objects in the worksheet TO move position or rotate a block proceed as with individual objects You will find a description of the block copying function in the GIS Area Manual see Section 1 2 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 33 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 9 Locking objects 2 9 Locking objects If you wish to avoid moving and editing objects unintentionally lock them This is particularly helpful for bitmaps OLE objects lists etc To lock an object select it Then choose the Lock Object command from the context menu The objects can no longer be selected or edited If you wish to unlock an object choose PROJECT DATA gt Unlock All Locked Objects Objects can also be unlocked individually using the context menu AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 34 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 10 Moving objects 2 10 Moving objects To move an object to another location on the worksheet use the mouse or the keyboard Object groups Objects components form a group with their label text By
275. ent of the label is taken over from the settings Labeling and Numbering for the Microduct type on the Automatic labeling tab card Dragging the mouse pointer onto a label selects it The label can be moved by holding down the left mouse button and dragging it with the mouse The label always follows the route of the microduct and is automatically positioned in such a way that it does not overlap anything if possible Deleting labels Labels of microducts can be deleted individually for each microduct or for each duct package This is done with the Remove Label menu item in the context menu Depending on what is selected one of the following delete functions is offered and will be executed after confirmation Duct package selected Delete all labels of all microducts Microduct selected Delete all labels of the selected microduct Label selected Delete the selected label Editing a duct package Moving the duct package or parts of the duct package If the duct package is moved as part of a block the microduct and duct package will be moved at the same time If the duct package is moved normally all microducts will remain in the same place Only the end point will move with the duct package AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 388 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts 9 13 2 Inhouse Microducts Implemented from Build 4 5 1357 on It is possible to assign a manual length to segments of duct packa
276. ents with an order number will be included in the list Please also note the Will be Added to the Materials List layer attribute in the individual worksheets 10 1 Creating a Bill of Materials To create a bill of materials proceed as follows 1 Choose MATERIAL gt Find Connectors and Adapters To create bills of materials for a specific block select a block in the drawing and then choose Create Material from the context menu 2 In the Connector Selection Priorities window specify your priorities for the bill of materials In the following example first all connections with Schwaiger manufacturer connectors are created Connections that could not be made using the available Schwaiger connectors are based on this setting created with other connectors using the least possible number of components Select actual manufacturers for manufacturers 1 2 and 3 Connector Search Options Select priority You can save their priority settings Supplier 1 and reload them the next time you Boled oaii open the bill of materials Increase priority Supplier 2 Decrease priority Supplier 3 Manually set connections are indicated in the drawing by an x These are overwritten If this option is deactivated the connector search is only eee ert ee elena cea Save Load performed for the current All sheets cancel worksheet 3 Click OK to create the bill of materials An information window shows
277. epends on the component type selected In the special case of taps of loop through sockets the direction of the tap or user output is dependent on the throughput direction which means these components can be installed reversed This avoids unnecessary crossing of cables The possibilities of automatic path search are soon exhausted when applied to taps with several standard packets It may therefore be necessary to define the connection direction manually as described above see the DemoSwapTap net example calculation on the installation CD The following component types must not be installed reversed e Amplifiers e Converters e Optical receivers transmitters AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 307 of 452 9 Calculations 9 2 Amplifier settings 9 2 Amplifier settings You can either set all amplifiers at once or individually We recommend setting all amplifiers at once This not only saves you the tiresome task of opening the amplifier window of each individual amplifier but also avoids errors like for instance omitting an amplifier or setting them in the wrong sequence 9 2 1 Setting all amplifiers at once To set all amplifiers automatically at once select CALCULATION gt Amplifiers Setup An output window will open with the relevant information It is also advisable to activate automatic setting of all amplifiers for the network check too A level or distortion calculation is rarely of any use if the a
278. er with 3 logical conditions e if var lt 100 take appearance Red Circle e if var 100 take appearance Yelow Circle e if var gt 100 take appearance Blue Circle fe Condition name Appearance Minimum size Label color Show label Mess Circle hi 5 eg Circle 15 D hold both TE aad Sibel greater Circle 15 E show both label and symbol egual with greater than greater or egual tha less or equal than different From Add hotspots in overview gt they will have the color and fixed appearance according to defined conditions d AE A You can combine the conditions if you have for example 2 variables and want to write only one condition for both of them AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 257 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Special Hotspot related methods Auto generation of independent hotspot with link to it Any dot has the possibility to generate an independent hotspot linked to it For this a new flag lt AutoHotspotGeneration gt was added to the meta definition Metadata xml If a metadot has this attribute at check in time the hotspots that are linked to it are created inserted to DB too and linked automatically OSet link to other dot Example 1 Add the new tag lt AutoHotspotGeneration gt 1 lt AutoHotspotGeneration gt to an metadot for example to Phase_Symbol lt DrwObjMeta gt lt MetaObj gt lt Name gt KDG_Abschni
279. er filter have a red border With the Order Filter checkbox filtering of the bill of materials according to orders is activated deactivated With the Modify Order Filter button the existing filter can be changed AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 243 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status If you press the button or select the checkbox the list of orders will open All orders with a checkmark are permitted orders Fig 8 Define Order filter dialog box With this filter only objects where order Order xy or order Umbau Bahnhofstrasse will open in the bill of materials AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 244 of 452 There is a separate column for the order e Edit Component List or ar n o A T m MMR S tote re ooD cD NAMM aos oreo hi OOS a Coe ee ee ee ee eee a Pree im omn n on on ae ae a Sum Time h 2s 29 objects passed filter 5 a uni PPPPEPPPPE POON ree P Pe Perr ou co 369 e 2 CEC C E eee eee ee ee eee ef 3s 8 ee a ee ee ae ee ee ee ee ee Ro PO Bo Boob a d e A St tc i ss i st i St ci ss i si st i St St si st Me mS RR SSR a Se SRS ge RR a A SE SE Hardware E D4 5 D Se eS Se a SS ee ee ee ee ee ee Ye eS eS eet 0 ee ee a ee A E B a A a S a S a B E B E DI Wd Di dd dd Dd od d Dd DJ Ad ad Dd Dd Dd Ad Ad ad od Dd ad Ad Dd o d Dd Dd Dd PPP PPrPO
280. er fold Settings for Project History Regeln from State to State Description Engineering Phase Engineering Phase Planning Revision Planning Revision Stock Construction Stock without management Unknown Controlled Sort options Sety Cancel Load AND Solution GmbH Page 235 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status Color for network status You can also display your network plans in a color to indicate the planning status Objects are displayed according to the current planning status that they have The color setting for network status is combined with warning message and Signal path marking colors That means that the network status color display is only activated if the color display for warning messages and signal path marking is also activated The color settings for warning message and signal path marking have precedence You can adapt the settings for the planning status color to your individual needs The Warnings toolbar contains the display planning status in color icon This activates deactivates the color display for the network status An example of how a network status is displayed in a color is given below In Construction In Design In Operation f of ESZ yellow blue green Setting colors for network status Choose OPTIONS gt
281. ere is also a network check In the warning settings you can define exactly how your network should perform and then use the network check button to examine everything at once The network check can carry out the following tests network structure amplifier settings level situation at connection points and sockets performance CTB CSO C N MER BER remote powering return path level return path C N and return path ingress temperature drift and plug connections The network check makes it easy to screen for changes in the network quickly that is to see whether any drawbacks have resulted from changes in other parts of the network This allows you to constantly optimize the network using a sort of trial and error method You can even use the performance calculations to track down weak links in the network plan the location with the weakest CTB CSO and C N are always shown By changing the system level of the affected lines you can then further optimize the network All warnings that occur during the calculations are displayed in the output window Clicking an entry causes the locations in the network to blink You then know exactly where to make corrections to restore network functionality 8 Once you have created the network to your liking you can print out the test point list the bill of materials the drawing or any other reports A variety of standard reports will be provided such as the proposal order performance catalo
282. erver This combination enables you to divide large scale plans into multiple projects drawing files The advantages are that e Multiple planners can work simultaneously e The projects can be grouped according to network levels and the privileges then specified according to groups e Only one part of the entire network is stored in the working memory which increases processing speeds and improves reliability The following is a recommended way of dividing up a project e Optical ring in one project AND file e Every coaxial cluster into one project each e Every NL4 into one project each If you have access to one of the versions mentioned above you can link individual projects using these entry and exit points This type of linking has the advantage that the frequency raster can be downloaded together with all calculated levels and distortion products In addition you can easily navigate in both directions We recommend using the defined network level transitions as entry and exit points The house connection point for example is a good choice for this because a virtual interface can be defined for forward and return paths This interface describes the worst case scenario on both sides of the connection point The respective threshold values are specified once as a minimum value and once as a target value for each of the two sides of the connection point for network levels 3 and 4 A project for network level 3 for ex
283. es of type Group are regular data variables with a new value for each line However the values are filled only for group lines for regular data lines the group values are empty Con versely the variables of type Data are filled only for non group lines In the report template the fields containing variables of type Group and Data have to be drawn on top of each other via the changing filling of the variables there will be or a group line with variables of type Group or a data line with variables of type Data The variables of type Data also comprise the variables which can be used for dynamic labels while replacing with as prefix e g NON instead of NON These variables are sys tematically built from three characters lt What 1character gt lt Where 2 characters gt Example NON NameOutNext AIF AdressInFinal The following components of the variables are available Note The dynamic label placeholders are also the arguments for the report DynLabel function e g DynLabel NON the DynLabel function is not available for all reports currently only SignalPoint report type What Description context hierarchy context hierarchy without lowest level splice pin Object Id Installation No Pin name of lowest hierarchy level without replacement by type or replacement string I J ObJect No of object containing the pin incl replacement M Mounting Object No Rack Pos of object containing the pin inc
284. esenne 330 Setting the return path recive unien E AAA A 335 Setting the return path amplifier sssssnssssssssssnnsssnnssrnnesnnnsnnsnesnsneenesennesenne 336 Calculating the return path level at one point sssssesessnsrsnrersnnnerrnrerenrnerrnrerne 342 Blocking return paths for particular connectionS ssssssssssssrsrrnnsrrnrsrrsrenrenes 343 Return Path calculation as part of the network cheCckKk s ssssesssssrsrrsrsrrsrsnrenns 344 SEttING CONVERGES vcrir a 348 Determining Signal pathS iisissiiiisi a a aaa 349 Signal path from connection to signal SOUFCE s s ssssssssrsrerrsrenrsrenrsrrnrerenrerenn 349 Marking signal paths with disturbance SOUrCeS sssssssssnrsrsnrsrrnrrrrnrerrsrrnrenes 350 Performance Distortion product in forward path sssssussss2222222 351 Distortion checking in the network check sssssssssssesssnesnsnsssssrnnesennssrnnessense 351 Calculating network performance worst values in netWworkK s s ssssssesessrsrrereres 352 Distortion products at a selected point sssssssssssssnesssnssnsnssnssrnnesrnnesrenessrnne 353 THE GISCOMION spectrum WINGOW sarcinis A SA eecates 354 Information about the distortion product calculation sssssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnn 355 Calc lating test points ia cineniccrsiincascdanecectveecunctsensanreewesuerecenstarsdusstncencnenees 360 Freguency DIANS icesverisiesstrnesustaricsnnturcdweiniecdenskuedinersvaninsiredesewentidnetnnniteta 363 C
285. eturn path transmitter type The return path transmitter is the user output of a socket The ingress in the apartment is usually the main portion as shielding inside apartments is poor AND assumes that the ingress in the apartment enters the network from every user Output of a socket The level of apartment ingress is calculated from the values in the Adjusting Method window see Page 323 as follows The value for Assumed Ingress is converted to density with the value Ingress Measured for Bandwidth and attenuated with the Assumed Screening in the Apartment and Assumed Building Screening The return path transmitter is a worksheet output The value for ingress is taken directly from the ratio in the Ingress Ratio field see Checking the Return Channel Page 325 e The second portion is the ingress into the objects of the drawing This is the Assumed Ingress value in the window for Target Reception Level see Page 322 attenuated with the return path shielding factor of the portion from the library All ingress is now attenuated and added to the attenuation of the point where it occurs so that an overall ingress can be determined at the receiver If you press the Ctrl I shortcut on a connection point of the return path signals or a receiver you will see the ratio between signal and ingress in the Setting the Return Path Amplifier see Page 336 The dependency on frequency of the ingress is derived from the factor 20 log 2x f c
286. etwork plans Saving sheets You save a worksheet with PROJECT DATA gt Project and Worksheet Data In the Worksheet tab click the Save Sheet and enter a file name A net file is generated All information including layer libraries used sheet attributes all the elements they contain even additional worksheets and test points are saved Unlike saving a document the symbols are also stored with their connections in the file This ensures that the subsequently loaded worksheet is identical to the one originally stored Note Please make sure that the worksheets whose symbols are located and saved without a site plan type worksheet can only be loaded again in worksheets of this type The reason for this is that connections for that symbol do not necessarily fit onto the raster grid of an orthogonal schematic worksheet Loading sheets In the worksheet for which you want to load another sheet choose load sheet from the context menu Enter the file name and location of the worksheet to be loaded Position the sheet by clicking the desired location Also position the description text for the sheet Note If you are working in standard worksheet type you cannot load any site plan worksheet types Any layers not previously in the project will be newly created Any libraries not previously in the project will be loaded Any test points in the sheet to be loaded will be renumbered If a file c
287. ew Properties Enter 4dd Hotspot Here Set hotspot geo position here i a Fig 20 Extending a microduct Fig 21 Selection modeof the microduct AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 387 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Moving microducts Existing microducts can be moved by clicking the end pin of the microducts and holding the left mouse button down This selects the microducts which you can now freely move Editing properties In addition to this status it is possible to set whether microducts will be counted in the bill of materials These properties can be changed for individual microducts or for all the microducts of a duct package in one operation To change the status or the bill of materials option of an individual microduct you first open the Edit Object dialog box by clicking on the microduct There you can make the relevant settings To change the status or the bill of materials option of all microducts you first open the Edit Object dialog box of the duct package You can make the relevant settings there which are applied to all microducts once you have confirmed them with OK Labeling microducts One label can be created per microduct This is done with the Insert Label item in the context menu If the microduct is selected a label is created for this otherwise a new label will be created for each microduct of the selected duct package The template for the cont
288. ex Distortion product calculation without transmission fUNCTION c cece 350 Distortion product calculation comparing the two calculation types 0008 351 Distortion product calculation information SD OUL auinar ea see etianie 350 Distortion spectrum window 349 Distribution Level tab ccseeeeeeeeee 146 Double clicking an Object ccceeeeee 21 Drawing network plan ccseseeeeeeeee 141 Drawing ASSISTANCE cece eee eee seen eens 125 Drawing mode AUtOMATIC ccceeeees 143 Drawing modes in AND cceeeeeeeeeeeee 25 Drawing bitmap buffered 85 298 Dual monitor optimization 085 20 Duplicate Cable Window 00088 159 Duplicating CableS cccceeeeessseeeeeeeee 159 Dynamic Data WINdOW ceeeeeeeeeeee 18 Edit Layers WINdOW sseeeeees 211 213 Edit Object WiINdOW 0008 46 47 226 Edit Object window Amplifier Data tab A abe E ade antes sana A neta eoumanea 331 Edit Object Amplifier window 55 305 Edit Object SUD WINGKOW cceeeeeeeeeeees 18 Editing amplifier lists with blocks 131 Editing background files ceeeeeeeeees 170 Editing background layerS 0 0008 188 Editing backgroundS ssssssssssssrrsrens 189 Editing bills of materials 085 408 Editing cable points ccccccsssseeeenees 113 EGIUING C
289. ext The Enter Text window will open again You can enter another text if desired Press the Esc key to finish AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 53 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode e Text that can be formatted This type of text can be flexibly formatted Click the New Rich Text a icon and create a border in the worksheet where the text is to appear Click in the box to open the editing window The Rich Text Object tab looks like a simple window in a word processing program Enter the desired text in the white field and format it in the same way as you would in a word processing program like Microsoft Word Rich text objects cannot be rotated RichT est object Olea Times New Roman wese x fo B z u 2 E Ra gp aa Bere E Sete Gere o a aa Aao 1 1B Make text background transparent on sheet f Keep format while resizing Re format while resizing AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 54 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Sometimes the legibility of text is insufficient especially when it is on a prominent background You can define settings for text objects to make sure the text is visible against the background Text overwrites background Text is transparent Overwriting background while plotting o Switch on the Create Text in Overwrite Background Mode icon Ae and create text with the icon T as described above Ove
290. f 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets Labeling The labeling rule set is automatically applied to the first label text of a worksheet connection 4A LARGE Fig 2 Worksheet connection in the worksheet green with labeling text of the target address blue The small 1 below the worksheet connection is an automatically generated non editable additional text that is not influenced by the labeling rule As in all labels the rule for further labels of the same worksheet connection must be entered manually F Adda tor this D ol Total Cable Length Over Channel ae lesen eae F Max Frequency In Cable Format Test 24m 40 OE Street Mame 2a T i ike Mame Fig 3 Enter dialog box for the second label text of the worksheet connection AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 213 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets Conditions for success If the path search is not successful after the next address appears as the label is the substitute character for a blank text The following are recognized as the next address e Addresses entered in the component e Addresses entered in the worksheet symbol e Addresses inherited from a location rectangle Labeling succeeds if no path forks occur on the path to the next address Forks in the path exist if there are multiple possible connections with opposite directions leading to the connection at which the component is entered For tap offs a
291. f the items in the list causes the associated position in the drawing to flash Another way of performing a network check and displaying the results of the analysis Select CALCULATION gt Display Warnings through Colors or CALCULATION gt Display Warning through Flashing This allows you to display faulty locations in red or make them flash in the drawing Warning settings You can use the warning settings to configure the network check and specify which tests will be performed in the current project Select CALCULATION gt Warning Settings to open the Network Check Warnings window dt up warnings for Net Check Check the box to activate or deactivate Setup amplifiers a n O pti O n z vV Temperature drift Check remote supply A ere ce ca ase anal j i j Check socket levels v Check cable lengths no zero length cables Click a text to open the settings window for E ENES AE RE H i Check open tap pin levels gh pls the associated option on the right i Check distortion vV Open tap pins have to be closed V Check connec tors Setup Return Amplifiers Check mount pins Check upstream Check transponders Test point CURRENT TARGET com q Check leakage limit i For check of level and distortion Check redundant optical line too Savo Settings Load Settings Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 315 of 452 Checking the network structure Reports all c
292. f they have geopos Set hotspot geo pos Function access Overview topographic project context menu contains a new entry Set hotspot geo position here which allows setting a geo position to an already existing hotspot Set geo pos function A geo position can be set for e an already existing hotspot that doesn t have a geo position Such hotspots with no geo position are the result of imported hotspots where no position is specified for them These hotspots are searchable but of course they cannot be located e an already existing hotspot that have a geo pos and the user wants to change it AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 271 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots To set a geo position the user follows the next steps 1 Opens an overview or a plan project 2 Sets the cursor position as hotspot geo position Right click select the entry Set hotspot geo position here and choose the hotspot A new dlg Search opens where you can search for hotspots of type you previously selected W Search HpTypeDH DOT Marne L M Only with invalid geometry i p 3 4 OK Cancel The Search can return 3 different results depending on user chosen filtering data to search for hotspots with no geo position let field DOT name empty and check Only with invalid geometry press Search button LE ony Suet seo er to search for all hotspots with without geo
293. f this type cannot be searched using Search dialog e Keep on delete If this option is checked and the user will delete some hotspots from AND Client then the hotspots will be marked as deleted in server but not deleted They will just disappear from AND Client overview So if someone deletes by mistake some hotspots the hotspots can be brought back in database e If this option is not checked and the user will delete some hotspots then the hotspots will be deleted from AND Client and server too AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 250 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Hotspot properties Type name Po Type name id a Searchable Iv Keep on delete V Display properties Minimum size Color Folor from layer gt Show label Nolabel Fixed appearance Circle Global Layer Select Layer 2 Order 1 Label format gt Label height 1 0 Label position on X relative to symbol 0 0 Label position on relative to symbol 1 0 Variable display name Specific Data May be empty Eondon name Appearance Minimum size Label color Show label Edit logical condition Link to object metadot Link to Link by cma The main display properties are as follows e Minimum Size is optional and fixed default value is 5 if the user forgets to write it e Color fixed or attribute dependent default color is White if the use
294. f you wish to snap a component to an already plotted cable and automatically have it disconnected from the insertion point and connected to the component connection proceed as follows Select the component When positioning the component press the F key for Snap Object Now drag the icon directly to the cable and it will be automatically linked A window will open in which you can enter the length of the cable Click OK So Disconnecting components from cables The Disconnect from Cable function is the opposite of Snap to Cable You use it to remove components from cables and simultaneously reconnect the cable This function is only available if a component is selected that has two opposing connections on the margins with cables attached to the connections at the same angle and the opposing connections have differing directions that is entry and exit To disconnect a cable from a component proceed as follows 1 Select the component and press the H key for Disconnect 2 The component is now attached to the mouse pointer 3 Position it at the desired location in the worksheet Blocks Blocks are an easy way to speed up work with networks A block is a way to select several objects at once A block can be given a name and saved so it can be called up later under that name and inserted in another drawing You will find a description of the block copying function in the GIS Area Manual see Section 1 2 This help
295. fFirstDraw Creation date AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Status TimeOflInstallation Installation date AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Zustandigkeiten Acceptanc on TimeOfLastChange Date of last change AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Status UepNew New connection AND PROJECT DATA Auftragsdaten point Auftragsdaten Connection point new UepOld Old connection AND PROJECT DATA Auftragsdaten point Auftragsdaten Connection point new VersionOfDrawing Version of drawing AND PROJECT DATA Projektkopf Status Version T Wahrung AND Material Einstellungen Allgemein Currency WorkOrder Order number AND PROJECT DATA Auftrags Daten Auftragsdaten Order number Functions Please make sure that for functions with you must place the values in the brackets Example Sum 2 9 in the template is interpreted by AND in the report as 11 DataRef Datum Differenz Division Produkt Ref RefSeiteMinusEins SeiteAnzahl SeitenNummer SeitenSumme Summe AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 443 of 452 12 Automation interface of the client 12 Automation interface of the client Using the automation interface you can automatically jump to a geographical position in the NDS overview on starting the program The automation interface is an OLE automation interface in which the NDS client works as an automation server This interfa
296. fiers optical receivers optical connection points power supplies signal points HUB type location rectangles sub headends headends and fiber optic points AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 281 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System For other object types you can specify whether or not an associated NIS node will be created Do this by choosing OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt NIS from the menu NIS Settings Node Generation From AND Networks Processed types Available node types Amp Pt a Cable Bridge point Connector Fiber node Location rect Fibre point S PowerSrc Headend Splitter Hub Tap Inhouse Network Inhouse Network Inhouse with amp Inhouse with amp Laser Opt4mp Optical EEP Route redundant paths too slower Load Settings Save Settings Cancel The FS Source only controls whether a proprietary NIS node should be created for the remote powering source Coloring the remote powering area in the NIS always functions regardless of this Connection points refer to NL3 entry points not the signal sources of an NL4 drawing Passive Splitter Points are tap and splitter type components NIS nodes are only created for passive splitter points if there are active components behind them and if they are not mounted on the entry point of an active component Amplifier entry maps are created as independent NIS nodes because otherwise the amplifier cascade would be incorrectly disp
297. fiers from Amplifier List to delete them All amplifiers in that block will then be removed from the amplifier list see also the Amplifier List section Page 63 Counting residential units in blocks AND allows you to count the number of residential units using a block that is to make collective changes for these residential units Select a block and open the context menu Choose the Count user Sockets MDUs option The following window will open Subscriber socket count MDU count Total number of sockets m In tree structure o In star structure E Curent number of 0 in 0 Entry E sit Sigral Points including MEU 0 in tied EEPSSPT Total number of MOUs to E In adjustable EEP SPT All residential units within the block will be identified including possible sub worksheets The Change Residential Units option allows you to accept changed specifications for signal transmission points These are important for the return path setup calculation among other things because a signal transmission point represents a missing NL4 plan at this location AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 136 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Generating bills of materials for blocks If you need a bill of materials materials list for a partial section in a larger plan select a block over the partial section and open the context menu Choose the Generate Materials function The Edit Materials List win
298. fo Project type El Projects E empty project Project type i Unnamed down Sort options Set numbers Cancel ox AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 224 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options Project manager menu item You can search for addresses beyond file limits with the AND project manager Note If you are using the AND Smart Servers you only need the project manager when you are offline that is out and about with your laptop Instead of the Open command you can also use the Background Editor see Page 192 to load documents To do that select any directory ann Project Manager directory may have Projects subdirectories and assign any name to your selection To sort a column click the relevant title bar The project manager examines the selected directory structure and shows all net and drw P files in the list together with the New Project Path Edit Drawing New Drawing Search MDU data address and user name Delete Poet Pah Corcel Double click an entry to open the associated drawing o If you are looking for the drawing of a particular apartment click the Search MDU button 0 The following window opens Search MDU Stark indir C4 Change Setti Project Mr pO Etting Cancel MDU PO __Sancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 225 of 452 6
299. for every channel 42 Kan le 42 CW Analogkanale Std rabstand am selektierten Punkt CTB Abstand 54 8 dBc Frq 742 456 MHz Cursor auf beliebige Frq CNR 30 0 60 0 HE EL AOTT AOE HH OTON Aa ooN CATANIA MNAI o LUA 90 0 0 260 4 150 370 480 590 700 810 CTB spectrum calculated with the transmission function from the library The worst value of 54 8 dB only occurs for 743 25 MHz For other frequencies in particular lower frequencies the ratio is clearly better With a flat output as above the worst CTB ratio is still the same for both methods AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 356 of 452 9 Calculations 9 8 Information about the distortion product calculation If a pre emphasis is applied to the output the value of the worst CTB ratio also changes as the following figures show 42 Kan le 42 CW Analogkanale St rabstand am selektierten Punkt CTB Abstand 58 8 dBc Frq 41 000 MHz Cursor auf beliebige Frq CNR 30 0 ll a I 40 150 260 370 480 590 700 810 CTB spectrum for 8 dB pre emphasis calculated without transmission function The worst value of 58 8 dB was achieved from the estimate 58 8 54 8 0 5 8 4
300. from cable KOO0O1 to KOOO2 Note the splice name is shown only if this is configured in the settings Display Cache The values of the dynamic labels are cached by AND for performance reasons Recalculation occurs e g when an installation number in the project has been changed For regenerating all dynamic labels you can also use the shortcut Shift Ctri Alt H H hierarchy if no object is selected then all program settings for the hierarchy paths are reloaded and the dynamic labels are recalculated If a pin is selected the physically no signal routing in and outgoing label values NIF NIN NON NOF are displayed in the message window click jumps to destination pin AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 118 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Display Options for Dynamic Labels Splice PatchReports Interconnect Plan Connection information R function and optical line Q function Each of the functions displaying dynamic labels or hierarchy paths has a separate set of project settings which is accessible through the menu Project Data sub menu Dynamic Labels Hier archy paths Hiearchy Path Dynamic Label Settings Edit Project Settings Hierarchy Path Dynamic Label Settings Edit m Project Options Use R function compatibility mode for this project connection info window Load Settings Save Settings Cancel For the connection information
301. g manipulating objects loading libraries for object selection network planning drawing mode creating a new document AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 11 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 1 The AND program window and its elements 2 1 The AND program window and its elements The AND program window provides you with tools and objects on toolbars so you can quickly and easily plot and edit your network plans Multiple documents can be open at the same time in the AND program window Each document project is shown in a separate document window Some toolbars are relating to the program window and are only available there Other toolbars relate to the document window and are therefore available in each open document window The toolbars can be docked at a specified location or they can be freely positioned as a small individual window on your screen iz AND FibreCoax 4 3 AND ES File Edit ProjectData Calculation Material Tools View Windows xX Dc bel Gi Q4aae SH4 ts amn a ree YE M 4I RN Jp QE Layer Standard v LayerTemplate User defined LD Color Colorfrom library Width mm Auto v Laying Type Earth X Temperature Project AND1 Unknown y Sheet 1 Unnamed x gt Scale 1 00x A Planning Type Default y Status Unknown y Task a T A Re nur u 0 0 a amp je TA OD Qt Y 5 Show as List Show as Tree al gt yo Navigation a Project AND1 Chast 1B lan zl a
302. g 3 and Fig 4 Setting the line style AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Page 380 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Microducts as taps The special feature of duct packages is that they can be created with up to 2n colored taps where n is the number of microducts in the LibDuctPackage The taps represent the real or virtual microduct connections to the houses Fig 5 shows the taps of the duct package with four microducts with the colors yellow red blue and green The sequence of the colors of the taps of the duct package is determined by the priority defined in the library Display of the three different statuses It is possible to change the status by left clicking the tap to open the window for object editing Another possibility is to right click the tap to open the context menu and then to open the window for object editing under Properties The following statuses are possible a i f 1 Fig 6 Virtual Fig 7 Planned Fig 8 Built AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 381 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Display of the direction of transportation The direction of transportation is indicated by a small diagonal line at the base of the tap Fig 9 Direction of transportation from right to left In total there are four display options for the direction transportation from right to left from left to right from top to bottom f
303. g and the acceptance protocol Use the report designer to create individual reports 9 To use test point or materials data in other programs there is an export option for Excel To send reports via letter or fax use the export to Word or bitmap function AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 147 of 452 3 Automatic drawing modee 3 1 Selecting a network type 3 Automatic drawing mode Using this automatic function it is possible to have AND independently create nearly an entire NL4 broadband CATV system or portions of such a system The goal was to make the function as flexible as possible but to make it as simple as possible to operate Only the most essential specifications must be made everything else is performed for you by AND This function really does make your work easier when developing systems Start the automatic function by selecting OPTIONS gt NE4 Automatic The Automatic Network Generation window will open Here you select the type of network define the structure of the buildings splitter levels and the components to be used and determine levels at the connection point 3 1 Selecting a network type When you call the automatic function or click the Network Type tab in an already open Automatic Network Generation dialog box the following image will appear Automatic net generation 0 Type Structure Distribution Trunks Levels Components Options Selection of Types of Ne
304. ges For a duct package there is an option that all microduct legs are connected to the same segment Length Markers A length marker is a point label bound to the duct package line It holds a length value which is added to all microduct routes passing that point The length markers are optional Length Markers are created via context menu of the duct package line item Insert Length Marker roU Layer O Edit location T Label P Pin information A Take Block Deployment Deploy Microaduct lt Insert Length Marker Delete All Length Markers Add test lahelisi Length markers are possible in schematic sheets only If a duct package has no length markers you can enter the total length of all segments togetherin the duct package If a duct package has at least one length marker the length of all routes through it is given by sum of lengths of all passed markers Typical use case is schematic inhouse planning as shown below When a new length marker is created a dialog for entering the length is appearing automatically If you want to change the length you can reach that dialog by clicking on the marker or pressing return if the mouse is over the marker The text of the marker is bound to the last segment The text orientation is given by the orientation of the last segment To change the line s geometry move the mouse over the endpoint of the marker and press a The number of digits of the text is
305. get Values Current Values Sh Frequency range of the sig Amplification 20 0 dE Amplification 11 0 dB Amplification 15 0 dB nal that is of the master Equalization 0 0 dE Preemphasis 40 dB Preemphasis 0 0 dB service Plugged Components These fields are for infor Attenuation 9 0 dB Pad Pad 19E fined Banen Gee cole Equalization oo dE Equalizer none T fixed as l capa a is the nie Attenuation to next amplifier 11 0 dE Total atten to cable moder 20 0 dB attenuation to e caDie Input pad of nest amplifier 5 0 dE Passive distribution network 11 0 dB modems beyond Smallest attenuation to a cable modem 20 1 dB at 30 MHz Largest attenuation to a cable modem 24 6 dB at 50 MHz The main portion of the difference here 24 6 20 1 4 5 dB does not usually result from the differing frequencies 30 50 MHz but from the attenuation differences of different cable modems at the same frequency In the example above the smallest attenuation for a cable modem with 50 MHz is 20 5 dB Attenuation to the next amplifier in the return path signal direction The smaller value refers to the attenuation at the lower signal frequency the larger value refers to the higher signal frequency Attenuation to next amplifier at 30 MHz 9 7 dB Attenuation to the next amplifier at 50 MHz 10 0 dB You can set up a return path amplifier in two ways Manually Using AND AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution
306. gged Components Attenuation 0 0 a dB Equalization 0 0 rad dB Frequency Range 4 862 MHz Target Values Current Values Level at max Frq 1113 dB Preemphasis et Pad finon T fixed s none 6 Equalizer PETAN T fixed Return Path Amplifier Return23dB 23 18dB v Pilot none Target Level 113 dbp Preemphasis 8 0 Plugged Tip In larger networks calculation of the return path amplification and the attenuation behind the return path amplifier will take some time If you do not require these values press the ALT key while at the same time clicking the amplifier You can also insert cable simulation modules Cable simulation modules are defined in the library as fixed equalizers with negative equalization For example cable simulation for 100mQKX is defined as follows in the component editor Amplifier component type EQU equalizer Residual attenuation 1 3 dB Equalization 4 6dB Min frequency 47MHz Max frequency 862MHz Base 862MHz Calculating power lines The meaning of the words Level and Pre emphasis see figure below no 0 is dependent on a particular setting whether the power line is to be used or not Amplifier data Nr 1 Amplifier data Nr 2 Transponder Mr 3 Power Consumption Mr 4 C Settings f Target Values Current Values Built In Regulators Amplification 20 0 dB Equalization 0 0 dB Plugged Components Level at Target Level i 05
307. gt Program Settings gt Additional Settings gt AND 3 2 Compatible Keyboard and Mouse Inputs activated checkmark visible AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 22 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 4 Working with the keyboard 2 4 Working with the keyboard You will work significantly faster in AND if you familiarize yourself with the keyboard functions Keys and shortcuts The keys and shortcuts for the commands and actions are listed next to the commands in the menus and context menus The shortcuts are shown next to the command in the menus Cut Copy Paste Select All Insert New Insert Bitr The shortcuts are shown directly in front of the command in the context menus The shortcuts are key combinations involving the Ctrl or Alt key AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Project Data Calculation Delete Contents of Sheet Search AND Objects Ctrl F Search and Replace Material Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctrl 6 Alt C Alt Q Zoom all Zoom into Zoom detail Select all objects CTRL 6 B Move object N Copy object E Delete object F Color Layer T Label A Take Lock object Insert OLE Link Ctrl Shift V Insert OLE Object Ctrl V K Load block Load sheet Print active View Properties Enter Page 23 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 4 Working with the keyboard Arrow buttons The arrow buttons on the keyboard simula
308. gt Result first var AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 253 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Rotate Hotspots Hotspots can be rotated in Overview Text Angle Original appearance in Overview WS New Var To rotate the hotspots in clockwise in 1 degree increments click on it like you want to move it New The user should see the hotspot like this New Var then press S gt the hotspot should rotate in clockwise and look at one moment like this E Z Te i N tp a Var en gt To rotate the hotspots in clockwise in increments of 90 degrees repeat the same steps but press R Original Size WS New Var Result JB A Mah E W New Var EA MeN J AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 254 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Variables o Variable display name Specific Data May be empty Variable 1 VORTOBLE 1 String var 2 option VaRZOPTION Option opt lropt 2 apt 3 opt 4 wv The attributes that describe a variable are Variable display name describes the display name of the variable If variable display name contains spaces or special characters they are converted in next column Variable name and this value will be used by server Ex for import When adding a hotspot of this type the variables display names will be shown like in picture bellow with the specific field in which the user will write the value of the
309. h address of the route If there are multiple splice patch connections within one address multiple lines will appear The first and last lines contain additionally information about the terminal The following five columns are shown Installation number of the object of the surrounding loca tion rectangle or the worksheet symbol For terminals first and last line the rack position and purpose additionally appears From cable bundle fiber 1 End of the connection lt installation number of the ca ble gt B lt bundle number gt A lt number of cores gt To cable bundle fiber 1 End of the connection lt installation number of the ca ble gt B lt bundle number gt A lt number of cores gt If the installation number of the cable is empty the name the cable has in the library will be output instead The Excel Export button exports the interconnect plan to MS Excel The Report button exports the interconnect plan to the report template OptDurchschaltplan rep German or OptInterconnectPlan rep English These two templates have been modified accordingly in AND 4 0 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 97 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Example of a completed report e gt Bhanna Durchschaltplan 29 4 2 009 Route 23 114 Obje ktname e l won Kaba Bondel Faser nach Kabel B ndel Faser OptischerSender MWeyerbeerstr 21 hutfe 56 Offenbachstr 2 FO 72 81 Ad 33 B41 Ad
310. h raster maps the scale may be automatically generated from an existing ASCII coordinate file in a GIS system format or it must be manually entered by drawing in a scale ruler and specifying its length Next you select the necessary libraries These are then displayed in the object selection window The libraries contain all component information for items such as cables amplifiers splitters connectors etc The object selection window can be configured such that only frequently used components are visible Enter the project data This is essential for clear documentation and you can use the data to perform searches at a later date Now draw your network plan To do this simply drag the components from the object selection window into the drawing sheet If you place a tap on a cable it will rotate automatically and disconnects the cable If you position a cable or another component near a component connection while positioning mode see Page 25 is active the nearest connection will be drawn to it like a magnet In AND this is called snapping This simplifies your work and ensures that a correct network list can be created The network list assists with the calculation and requires traceable connections between the components AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 146 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 16 Creating a new document 5 The overview of a network plan particularly a geo schematic network plan is improved
311. h shaft amaan ane te Underground installation Trench defautts Depth Height 100 0 Locations Geometrical Width 200 0 Z Customers Project lists Owner v Numbering and Labeling Update labels Reserved for ind Update labels and adjust size Surface Ed Reset All Counters Cost 0 00 EURO m Unlock all locked objects Mounting Time 0 00 _y hours m Save Project Settings Cancel Adopt Settings from Template Export Project Structure to Custbase AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 160 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 1 Layers for trenches 4 1 Layers for trenches As soon as you have switched to civi works planning the program automatically generates the new civil works planning layer group and underneath that the trench objects and surveying objects layers Layer Standard 7 Layer Template User defined ki A Color Color from library i Hf n g Standard Civil Works v Measurement objects a E fae See Irencn oO HELL Read the layers section see page 216 for the meaning of layers and how to use them AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 161 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 2 Plotting trench sections 4 2 Plotting trench sections This is how to plot a trench section 1 Click the New Trench Element icon on the toolbar The mouse pointer takes the shape of crosshairs Click the
312. h the target address ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 212 Saving and loading wWorksSheets cccscccceeeceeeeeeesscceeesennneeneeeeeeesseeeeegnnnnaannees 215 Layer Seia caaeteiecscereetinacusiaaaseusisenceuaisasseuannseienedaseseuestaesendss 216 DEANE AVEFS GIODAIIY sarren aeaa a a a s 216 Defining layers for worksheetS sssssssnsrrnnsrrsrrnrerrnrrrrnrrrrnrrrrnnrnrnnenrerenrenne 217 Selecting and switching layers on and Off ssssssssssssnrsnenrsrrnrsrrnrrrrnnerrnnenenn 217 Deleng AY CFS sninen na aa a a 218 Layer tips and usage optionS ssssssssssssssssenesrnnessenessrnesnenssnssrnnssrenensnnesrnnee 218 Specifying key data for search Options ssss2us2 2 2 2 22222202222022 20 219 PEOVCCE AACA e nouns A A AAA Aa 219 Installation NUMDE Sarriren in a a EAA AAA 226 OCA LOIS aeara a aa 228 Sheet IEgEendS tieira aA AT ANA E A A A A 231 Status siaaa ERa EEEa Erene aE RE 233 Planning type and network status ssssss2 2 22 2222 22u22202202u222022002 20 n 234 Setting planning types for the project ss sssssssrsrrsrsnrsrenrsrrnrerrnrrrrnrerenrerenn 234 Setting a status for the Project mieiraniai ne A A A AG 239 Ind pendent HOUS DOES sitinscevicivecrnitieseesicieerinieesseminevnendisieen remiceriivenneniees 249 General MORTAU O aisinn AA E A AA 249 Application functional detailing ssssssssssssnssnsnnssssssnssennssrnnessnnssnnnssnnnrenenene 250 NIS Network Information SyStemM sss2
313. he Object Status Filter dropdown menu Filter Objects by State All To apply changes you make to the filter you must first update the bill of materials by clicking New from Drawing Any changes you make are applied automatically if the Automatic Update checkbox is activated If connectors are included in the bill of materials conflicts may arise if you filter using the object status This can happen for example if part of the connector is already in operation and the other part is still being planned The connector belongs to both sides its status is unclear To avoid this problem every object status is assigned its status value unknown Stock in use Stock corrected Stock not in use Planning New Planning Corrected Planning Canceled This status value is taken into account when the bill of materrials is updated If a status conflict arises such as in the case of the connector described above the higher status value applies A connector one side of which is in operation and the other side is at the planning stage is assigned the status planned as this status value is higher AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 414 of 452 10 Bills of Materials 10 3 Costing objects in bills of materials 10 3 Costing objects in bills of materials Costing components are used to complete the component lists with non electrical materials They are assigned other drawing objects
314. he cable type and number of fibers and bundles are monitored by notifications when generated in version FIBRECOAX only e Cable channel duct The connection icons in the worksheet can be moved or deleted within the sheet They cannot be copied especially as part of a block Use the P key to edit the connections AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 57 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Test points The purpose of test points is to show the minimum and maximum level of any connections in the drawing and can be displayed in test point list summary Test points each consist of 3 objects o x e the test point icon 9 cross or level display e the point small square on the connection o O e and the label o MP UQZ You plot a test point as follows 1 Open the list of test points on the toolbar and select the type of test point you want p Large Cross Test Point Ctrl F9 Large Level Test Point F9 Small Cross Test Point Ctrl Shift F9 Small Level Test Point Shift F9 RF Signal Source Shift F10 RF Signal Exit Shift F11 Alternative RF Signal Source Ctrl Shitt F10 Alternative RF Signal Exit Ctrl Shift FL1 Leakage Test Point Opt Signal EntryExit Alternative Optical Sheet ExitEntry is E E Ly H H T A 2 Move the mouse pointer to a component connection or cable the point will be shown red Click with the left mouse button The tes
315. he calculation for a network as follows 1 Select a connection The connection is displayed red 2 Press the R key for Calculate Level 3 The Calculation Result window will open E Calculation result No Freg MHz Channel cale dBu meas dE Name oF al od LRA 108 00 a LIK 113 00 ais DIG Dig 121 00 eas DIG Pilot Dig 126 25 ea PAL 133 25 140 25 147 25 154 25 161 25 168 25 175 25 162 25 INAIMHO Mow ow ISON SS wooo oo e Level range 69 4 102 2 10 dbp AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 305 of 452 9 Calculations 9 1 Calculating levels 9 1 1 Possible reasons for level calculation failure e No connection to the signal source because for example one cable end is not placed ex actly at the input of a symbol The error message open connection appears in the output window e The channel frequency is below the set return path frequency For example if you want to calculate channel K2 48 25 MHz but the return path has to go to 65 MHz See also the Editing Upstream Services section Page 328 e The channel is filtered out Either directly by filter type component or indirectly by a com ponent whose frequency range does not cover the channel e When searching for a path AND found conflicting information from the connections about Signal direction and the level calculation was interrupted Such conflicts might be You defined a worksheet connection as an input b
316. he return path level at a specific reference point directly in the drawing Choose OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Testpoint Settings from the menu The following window will open Setup for Testpoints Here you specify how AND should round off the ial levels display for live test points This setting will not appear on test point lists Here you specify whether live test points will be 4 Ce E bees e displayed with the unit Precision of shown TP values The test point symbol will need more space f round to 1 dBu in this case We recommend specifying this setting from the beginning of the project W Actualize Live Test Points Automatically Update Distorsion Data Too C round to 0 1 dbp Here you select the distortion product to be Units shown when the levels are shown in the window Show units f for displaying and editing test points 2 Here you specify which entries a new display test ja TeRi Bel Cika ee Eee point will have according to the presettings R CTE 7 MEF Please note that the space required for these test cso V BER points can be changed later which can result in CNA unattractive appearances 3 Test Point Label Settings Cancel Automatic test point updates If you activate the Update Test Points Automatically option all test points will be recalculated and redisplayed after every change in the network This is a very practical feature but it can require a certain amount of time
317. he signal source for the first sheet but no frequencies are specified for the feed point in the Levels dialog box In this case no network can be generated e The automatic function is supposed to generate a network in a sheet with an entry point but no signal has been placed at this entry point In this case a network will be generated but the selection of components to be used that is the amplifier setting will be significantly different from the expected values AND Information The file from which the automatic function Headendsheet D AND 3 3 FILES HEADENDS KABEL net not found is supposed to load the headend sheet A Net will be generated with a BP could not be found AND is telling you that a network with a feed point as a signal source will be generated instead AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 155 of 452 3 Automatic Drawing Mode 3 4 Generating a drawing Automatic function drawing with a headend Automatic net generation 4 Type Structure Distribution Trunks Levels Components Options Selection of Types of Networks If you have defined a headend file as the signal source type i Ir oe see ir the automatic distribution network System Home Deeemed DAOP En will be enhanced with this headend Signal Source Working Area Worksheet After the automatic function has been carried out an additional worksheet will be loaded in the background
318. hed shes Selection box 0 Selection line You can also use selection lines to plot lines with free angles This makes it possible to draw polygons You can have the program automatically close a polygon line by pressing the S key which stands for Close Line You can also plot buildings and houses in civil works mode by using the building Icon See the Civil Works Buildings section see Page 174 for how to proceed AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 52 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Using text objects Use text objects if you wish to insert additional texts 0 into the worksheet Ca HF OUT d HF OUT g from VP a to Obert hringer Str g Freisch tzstr z MPO WP OZ 0 Use the text icon in the tools list to insert text objects Text in standard font IFR Text that can be formatted FS New Rich Text We distinguish between e Text in the standard font For this font you can only change the letter size but you cannot change the font itself or make other formatting changes Click the New Text T icon The Enter Text window will open Enter the desired text and click OK The text is now attached to the mouse pointer Position the text in the worksheet You can use the R key to rotate the text in 90 increments or enlarge or reduce the font size using the 1 and 2 keys respectively Simply click once to release and place the t
319. how many connections were found Possible causes for missing connections or connections that were not created could be impermissible connections or connectors missing in the libraries 4 Display List will create a list of all the connections found AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 411 of 452 Settings for bills of materials 10 Bills of Materials 10 1 Creating a Bill of Materials Select MATERIAL gt Setup to open the Properties window On the Layer tab you can select which layers will be included in the creation of the bill of materials On the Dynamic Object Attributes tab you can define DOTs from meta data to be included in reports r Properties _ Properties Fitter Layers Dynamic Object Attributes Country German Germany v Currency Word EUR Rounding Round prices sums to one hundreth 0 01 five hundreths 0 05 C one tenth 0 1 five tenths 0 5 full 1 0 C tens 10 0 C hundrets 100 0 V Always round up Example 12345 678 equals 12345 68 V Round up meter lengths Longtext Number of rows to print in report 5 z Include in Excel Export VAT Material 0 z4 Labour 0 Word Mwst Cost Calculation Labour 40 Rebate Surcharge for Material 130 x Include in part list V Connectors Ovenide Layer s Use in material list settings Both pins must be in a layer marked as cost iv calculatable Th
320. ibution level 1 will be taken into con sideration distribution between the feed point and the individual houses that is the distribution will be optimized for all houses The feed point position then no longer refers to each individual house 3 3 1 Trunk structure e Automatic net generation Type Structure Distribution Trunks Levels Components Options Selection of Types of Networks in the House Distribution Level ew Splitter System Tap System Tap System Thpt Tap System ON ete of Types of Networks between Houses Rececnences sussteccssesscase cosccscasescedsscnecatnsesenassnecseasesce Splitter System Split Tap System thd On the Trunk Structure tab you define how the sockets will be handled and how the trunk distribution will be performed Depending on whether the distribution takes place in the basement or the attic activate either the Succession from Bottom to Top or Succession from Top to Bottom option button If the antenna sockets are to be interconnected directly you can only globally change the length of the cables between the sockets after having created the drawing However the drawing will take up less space e Automatic net generation Type Structure Distribution Trunks Levels Components Options Sockets Succession from Bottom to Top Connect Sockets Directly C Connect Sockets Over Cable Succession f
321. iers supplied and whether the voltage power is sufficient V Temperature drift Check socket levels pz Check if remote power enters objects that do not have remote v Check bridge points suppling enabled Check open tap pin levels C Check distortion M Check max curent trough pins vV Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream Test point CURRENT TARGET com C Check leakage limit m AEE ETS s Save Settings Load Settings Cancel 9 14 10 Coloring remote powering areas If you have multiple power supplies in your network it is helpful to identify the Supply areas of the individual sources with different colors To color the areas select the Remote Powering Areas Colour On Off icon on the Warnings toolbar If the Color Remote Powering Areas option in the Calculation Settings window is active the areas will automatically be marked after every remote powering calculation AIt F Demo drawings The following demo drawings are supplied on the installation CD DemoFernspeisung1 net AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 410 of 452 10 Bills of Materials 10 1 Creating a Bill of Materials 10 Bills of Materials AND can create comprehensive bills of material and labor time sheets for a project of parts of a project All the objects used in a particular area are combined to create a bill of materials The necessary information is stored in the libraries Depending on the setting only compon
322. if they have been marked as Patch pin in the library editor A splice point is recognized as being inside the rec tangle if it is of type spliced or uncut in cassette and if its graphical point symbol on the cable or bundle is inside the rectangle This allows to draw cables bundles in through multiple cassettes for layout reasons without having them appear more than once in the report AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 373 of 452 9 Calculations 9 12 Calculation for optical Networks eles 2 lellelelsie wt 04 Splice point symbol circle in cassette the symbol may be moved with the mouse Filter For filtering the selected connection points by task numbers the task number of the symbol e g patch field containing the patch pin or the task number of the cable bundle of the splice is considered Optionally task numbers from the hierarchy of parent symbols and rectangles containing the patch pin or splice can be considered When this option is selected e g the task number of a rack symbol or rectangle containing the patch field of the patch pin will be considered too and all selected patch pins of the rack will be displayed in the report even if some patch fields contained in the rack do not match the filter task number Sorting Splice patch reports allow for an additional sorting not available in the usual report sorting options they can be sorted by hierarchy Sorting by hierarchy is level wise
323. ill blink in red Now the description text for the new sheet is attached to the mouse pointer Click the location where you wish to place the text and press the Esc key if you do not wish to plot any further sheets You can generate a worksheet subsequently for an already plotted component from the library as follows Select the component and press the A key for Generate Worksheet The component will automatically contain worksheet connections The worksheet no longer represents a component but rather the sub worksheet Note If you wish to make multiple copies of the structure of a drawing especially in the NL4 area because you need the same or similar structure for other residential units for example duplicate the worksheet by first saving it and loading it to the appropriate location Save and load worksheets with the PROJECT DATA gt Project and Sheet Data command AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 56 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Sheet transitions Sheet transitions are two part objects for connections between worksheets One part is the worksheet component connection pin see Item of the worksheet icon The other part is the connection icon see Item in the corresponding sub worksheet 3 G aero ea j The following types of sheet transitions are available e Coaxial connection the cable type is monitored by notifications when generated e Optical connection t
324. imit AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 326 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation 9 4 Return path calculation There are two calculation blocks in the return path area e Level calculation level check return path amplifier setup e Disruption check noise calculation and ingress calculation Consider the following for the return path calculation e How is the network structured Here you clarify with the operator NL4 how the network is to be structured for example how amplifiers are to be integrated e For which are is the calculation to be performed e Which frequency and bandwidth frequencies must be kept The following general procedures are recommended for the return path calculation 1 First define the upstream service Power Lines section Page 358 2 Make the settings for the return path transmitter Return Path Laser section Seite 341 3 Set the return path receiver Setup Method Page 323 4 Set the return path amplifier Ingress section Seite 345 5 Calculate return patnh level at one point Editing Upstream Services section Seite 328 6 Calculate return path level as part of the network check Setting the Return Path Transmitter section Page 330 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 327 of 452 9 4 1 Editing upstream services Select CALCULATION gt Edit Upstream Services Depending on your version of AND different windows will now open 9 C
325. in strUser strPwd AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 445 of 452 Index Activating the Context Menu with right MOUSE GICK airinn irio EE cei ieee 21 Address searching for existing addresses A EA AAE A E E A EL I 224 Adjusting methods for return path I T sre E 318 AMDINEF ISS riina 63 Amplifier setting default setting 309 Amplifier settings ccccssssceessseennenees 303 Amplifiers setting individually 305 AND BUNCUONS ctasterivacatieoostoavuceteere 438 and Maximum current in components 405 AND program window and its elements 12 AND VanlaDleS s citstorweotstatiast civcentseees 434 Answering the query window 006 22 Apartment numbering automatic 222 Applying a project template 215 Arranging NIS network structure objects285 AOW DUWONS riisun 24 Assembly componentsS s sssssssrrsrsrrnns 63 Assembly object Ma CroO cce cece 134 Assigning assembly components 64 Automatic function drawing with a headend sinc cote ical AAE EAA A aemen 151 Automatic labeling 0ceeeeee 113 124 Automatic Labeling window 115 Automatic Labeling and Numbering WINGOW I arire Bue Orci slantansth tate Gate ay ean 195 Automatic Net Generation window 145 Automatic Numbering window 122 Automatic test point updates 291 Automatic updating of the background 298 Automat
326. individual test points this test may indicate differences between the calculated value target and the measured value actual Set up warnings for Net Check a I i Wi amingE Check net structure Setup amplifiers The check compares the measured values with the calculated values from the drawn test points Temperature drift Check remote supply Level difermce between current and target Check socket levels value that should cause a warning dE Check bridge points Check open tap pin levels Check distortion Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream Test point CURRENT STAR GET com Check leakage limit Enter the value for the maximum difference between the measured and the calculated level value here 0 Checking EMC test points If you have entered measured EMC leakage values for the individual EMC test points this test can show which of these test points has exceeded the test limits Set up warnings for Net Check W arning Check net structure a t ifi In the leakage level check tests all levels for each frequency at all leakages and A ee en compares them with the limit given below w Temperature dri Check remote supply Check socket levels Check bridge points C Check open tap pin levels Limit 32 0 dB piw Check distortion Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream W Test point CORRENT TARGET com Check leakage l
327. information ke Colorlaver informat F Owner Data r P Unner Cats Type Duct Package 20 Change Type re If the option is on all microduct legs will be automatically connected to the same segment The target segment is the one for which the sum of all distances from all endpoints is minimal Picture 2 is made for the same situation but this option switched on By default the option is off in site plans and older projects If you create a duct package in a schematic plan the option is on by default AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 390 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts If you want to connect microducts to different segments in a schematic plan you must switch off the option AND is using the last line point of the microduct when it is searching for the nearest segment In rare cases neither connecting to the nearest segment nor connecting to a common segment are wanted You can enforcea connection to a certain segment by moving the most inner line point close to the segment you want to connect to D a f Ee tela a Most inner linepoint marked in red If the microduct leg has only one line point the last point you can create an additional line point the following way Press a on the last point and make the microduct leg longer Now you have 2 line points move the inner point inwards press a on the last point again to cut the leg to the initial length again AND Client Manual IV C AND Solu
328. ing Options Selection mode After completion of the dialog with OK AND switches to the selection mode for the target point In the selection mode the output object flashes and the mouse point is a cross Except for zooming and scrolling all program functions are deactivated Pressing the right mouse button cancels selection mode Clicking with the left mouse button selects the target object If the target object is of the wrong type a message to this effect will appear in the output window and the selection mode is continued AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 106 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Output If a correct second object is selected the search for all routes starts and the result will appear in the output window K T amp A e G O et OU M B O S B aj q 800 a 6 J J oj a g 2 3 T ae sf a Fy i G 15 0 40 m Zee Oana E A bol Is IS l Es wurden 8 Routen von 3 nach 8 mit mindestens 2 freien Fasern gefunden Route 0 Lange 150 0 m Stationen 3 gt 4 gt 6 gt 7 gt 8 L nge Stationen 3 165 0 m Stationen i i i i i ee i a a ae Stationen 10 gt 11 gt 12 gt 7 gt 8 gt 5 gt 10 gt 11 gt 12 gt 7 gt 8 4 gt 5 gt 10 gt 11 gt 12 gt 7 gt 4 gt 5 gt 10 gt 11 gt 12 gt 7 gt 10 gt 5 gt 4 gt 6 gt 7 gt
329. ings 8 3 Program settings 8 3 6 Additional settings Other settings such as presettings for snap functions layer behavior for blocks and text size can be specified in OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Additional Setting Here you specify the text size Additional Settings Standard for catching symbols onto cables Sizes of Text Size 1 Key 3 for th e 3 to 9 keys i During Creation Copying Size 2 Key 4 When positioning text you can use these Blocks Layers Size 3 Key 5 i i Duplicate layers with the same names during Insert Block Size 4 Key 6 keys to specify the size of the text f Fix format strings of default labels in loaded pasted blocks Size 5 Key 7 you are moving 5 Sine Ken Sit Here you can specify how AND should A Nat oa Sayre Create texts as Overlapping background i be h ave if a b OC k Is inse rted IN an oth er lv Copy the properties to the cables connected through sheet connector p roj ect u Si n g t h e cl p b oa rd or t h e Show line length cables markerlines near cursor while editing i i i V Close text edit dialogs with ENTER Shift Ctr ENTER for new line Loa d B OC k fu n ctl on Use multi line text field for new texts AND 3 2 compatible mouse and keyboardhandling Change selection SHIFT TAB Zoom in steps SHIFT left right mouse button Zoom window SHIFT blockselection Save Settings Load Settings Cancel Display performance
330. ion interface of the client 439 AutoNet Info WiINdOW ccee eee 149 Background Conversion window 188 Background editor cccccssseeeesseeneeenees 187 Background Me riarann a aa 170 Background map sssssssssessrrnrsrenrsrenn 170 Backspace key ssnsssssssesssnsssenssrrnssssrens 24 Bill of materials ccccccsseeeeeseeeneeenees 406 Bill of materials printout sessssesssss 411 Bill of materials costing objects in 410 Bill of materials planning status in 409 Bill of materials Settings for 407 BlOCK MOGC iria 25 Blocking return paths for particular CONMCCUOING eset one Agta ea neared ate 338 BIOCKSiscatereus es ieaureeniaan deh cennrenisaan renee 128 CAD ICCA wiciaccieveranteaveeuvianiniar eater 50 Cable Chains Handling of 0000 50 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Index Cables asymmetrically converted 49 Calculating network plan 00ee 141 Calculating and editing test point lists 413 Calculating cable lengths 0008 184 Calculating CSO CT Baviero 367 Calculating levels cccccsssceeesseeenenenees 300 Calculating network performance 347 Calculating NOISE cccccccsseeeeeeeeneeennees 367 Calculating optical output 000 366 Calculating power IiIN S ccc eee 308 Calculating remote powering 05 394 Calculating test POINtS
331. ions that are linked to an optical transmitter On optical returns paths only the optical section is marked If it is not possible to calculate a level at a particular point no marking is made This coloring is automatically deactivated if anything changes or if you click the Remote Power ing Area Colour On Off icon on the Warnings toolbar AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 349 of 452 9 Determining signal paths 9 6 Determining signal paths 9 6 2 Marking signal paths with disturbance sources Select PROJECT DATA gt Disturbances Table and click the Mark Signal Path button The Edit Disturbance Messages window will open Edit fault reports All Fault reports Fault report W01 Error 1 Mr 7634 Installation No 88123457011 Type Fault Ho 3842 jan Steckdose Descriptions eG O2 Error 2 Nr 9842 Exits since 071972010 Delete all Hew Cancel Mark trench Delete The signal paths for all specified or active disturbances are marked with a color the portion of the path through which the most faults flow will be marked red AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 350 of 452 9 Calculations 9 7 Performance Distortion product in forward path 9 7 Performance Distortion product in forward path The forward path distortion calculation is available both in the network check as well as in separate functions AND always calculates the overall distortion which consists of the por
332. is 0 00 dB Equalization 0 00 dp 0 0 dB KMA R aster 0 0 dB IMA E Values at different levels Insertable Components Component Group 18 Standalone v new Socket for Pad or Equ Pilot regulation built in Socket for Pad Pilot plugable l Socket for Equ V Socket for return path module Validity Range This Package No 4 from Input 7 z T r to Outputs 4i Z Ripple Picture Power Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier The first amplifier pack is from pin 1 to the separator pin 7 Into this pack the 2 stage re verse amplifier is plugged Into the other 5 packs from 7 to 2 6 5 the 5 1 stage reverse am plifiers are plugged which adjust a unique level at pin 7 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 334 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation 9 4 3 Setting the return path receiver There are two type of points that the program detects as return path receivers e Signal sources worksheet symbols or signal source symbols e Return path receiver symbols return path receiver symbol type in the library There may be more than one return path receiver in a drawing The return path lasers are not return path receivers for the purposes of a network check but in many ways they are handled similarly see also Setting the Return Path Amplifiers Page 336 Level specifications All level specifications in the window refer to the same bandwidth If the number of ente
333. is a registered trademark AND Solution GmbH Karl Schmid StraBe 14 81829 Munchen Germany Tel 49 89 743533 0 Fax 49 89 760 6020 Contents Contents CONTENTS sistiiesiwincdiwi ia tdawiwiwcdinisinidiwsnie ddewiedvniiwerivniiwesiidiwiw i cdiwaivesiwiwinidews 3 1 General INFOFMatlON sirrrirprstir kaaa 8 1 1 Target group of this manual required skillS ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 8 1 2 Components of the NDS documentation sss2 222 25 222 22222220u222022 20 5 9 1 3 CONVENTIONS sirrien Ei 10 2 FUNGAMCIUANIS ainra 11 2 1 The AND program window and its elements sssssuss222252 12 2 Aol TOON Dial S L E E aa wee Nee Sowa ea Nuun ease ee eae ee Sa Mae Gee ae E aoe AT 13 2 122 QUEDUE WINCOW scrsscnssetesisioannanetasenstetangan A EANA AE E 15 2 13 SES De caren AE A accretion ae nasi ra aes inten tela nates tae eon 15 2 1 4 POO TADS acetates Sagat aap nace seen eaten E San ata a a aaa Nong Sea TA A A 16 215 EMC OD CU WINGO W irarri tonera EE a aN 16 2 1 6 Changing the window GeSIGM saiicwicaalseccerinsiotersalawa tai eeoetecsnavadrrnaaateasnesedansNeaetiuas 18 2 2 Dual Monitor optimization s s 2 22 252522222u2220u2020u20u0unuusnnnnnnnnnnnnn 20 2 3 WorKino With the MOUSE iricscsariccesaincsseretecsriaiscatssalestnnaesertmatssnneereeninenes 21 2 4 Working with the keyboard s s 2 2 22 2222222222222022220222200222002222 2 20 sn nnn 23 2 5 Operating and d
334. is applied to the objects of the selected type and not necessarily the project or global rules format e g if an amplifier has num bering defined in its library object that numbering format will be applied and not the pro ject or force or global rule this is because the library object numbering has precedence over project of global rules please see above Rules of precedence 12 Create counter for objects with no counter in this combo allows one to allocate counter values for those objects that do not have a counter value either the counter val ue is O per individual objects or the objects of that type did not have numbering format before one can choose to which objects this counter creation should apply project sheet or block also like for the Apply automatic format the planning type for which the counters are created is the one selected in the combo 1 from the image AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 124 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 13 Add this button allows one to add a new object type for which numbering can be as signed The planning types for which the new type will be created are those selected in applies for combo When the button is clicked a new dialog shows which allows one to select one of the existing object types Select AND Type il s text ONT Optical Network Termination Optical Adapter Ings Optical Attenuator 14 Delete this button allows on
335. is setting is not for normal symbol cable connections here counts always the layer of the cable Disregard Objects without Order No and Art No V Calculation objects Trench objects l only trench objects Sums Sum up Objects with identical Art No l Order No Sum up splice costs Sum up tasks Specify what is to be included in the bills of materials how the program should round and what value added tax rates are to be applied AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 412 of 452 10 Bills of Materials 10 2 Editing bills of materials 10 2 Editing bills of materials You can modifiy completed bills of material shown on your monitor with the symbols on the toolbar Component 1 Reference 1 Component 2 Reference 24 Connection 1 Connection 2 Connection 3 Kess fT t16 6 A ws T ws fT H H H H H H H H inky ARamh hus litahle 779 KES 7 K K K K K K K y Show edges in CM Change font for entire list 0e8 688698 Printer setup TA VA Z Show side view EPICE Print list Close window AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 413 of 452 10 Bills of Materials 10 2 Editing bills of materials Planning status in bill of materials The bill of materials entries can be differentiated according to planning status for example being planned in use etc and displayed separately filtered You can make your selection in t
336. isplayed in the tooltip of the link object Attenuation and Length The attenuation of a link s cable is considered as you would have drawn it I e if the cable is a pigtail with no attenuation value in library the splice attenuation from the bundle settings is taken If there is value in the library this value will be taken as for patch cables If the cable has no fix length the attenuation is calculated from the length and the attenuation per meter from the library The length is counted in the Q function the NIS generation and the location of the fiber break age Bill of Material The cable behind a link pair is counted in the bill of material Connector Check The cables attached to a link are considered by ANDs connector check If the cable is a pigtail both orientations are tried and you get a warning only if both mis match For RF cables behind links AND is searching for a connector too AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 370 of 452 9 Calculations 9 12 Calculation for optical Networks 9 12 Calculation for optical Networks Optical networks can only be created and changed in the AND FIBRECOAX version If you wish to load an optical drawing in another version of AND you can only edit the RF components The optical components cannot be edited but they can be deleted 9 12 1 Calculating optical output To calculate optical output at a connection select the desired connection and press the R ke
337. ist and the 2 1 rule Like for amplifiers you can also define attenuation regulators for optical receiver and slots for attenuators Unlike amplifiers the control options are behind the actual receivers Optical amplifiers Optical amplifiers EDFA are treated as objects with fixed output ratings If the input ratios for an EDFA are not within the permissible range a warning is output If n wavelengths exist at the input to the EDFA the output power of the amplifier is reduced by 10 log10 n Constant Gain Mode For Optical Amplifiers Implemented from Build 1205 on In AND you can set an optical Amplifier to constant gain mode In this mode the amplifier has fix amplification Amplification and power are editable for a given amplifier in AND Details If you click on an optical amplifier you see by default the following subdialog 2 Edit Object n fom Ex Object Data Optical Amplifier Nr 1 Power Consumption Nr 2 3 Symbol EDFA G14 Component informat Constant power mode Base data Nr 1 Symbol Data Nr Total power of all signals together 21 dBm Power supply N Optical Amplifier on Constant gain mode Color layer informati Color layer infor Owner Data Owner Data Dynamic data Optical Amplifier Power Consume Database Amplification 17 0 dB Cancel In this dialog you can switch between the modes AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 67 of 452
338. isting cable is connected to a sheet by moving an end pin or the whole cable the cable s data will be propagated automatically to the continuation segment inside the sheet AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 50 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode If the cable types are different and no pigtail the inheritation after positioning is also made but you get a warning in the output window Situations without automatic propagation There is no automatic propagation after positioning links microducts or blocks Reason is that if your action connected 2 cables it is unclear which of both is the leading cable transfer the data from cablel to cable2 or reverse Propagation can be switched off The automatic propagation is a project setting which is on by default It can be switched on off in the dialog Additional Settings or in the dialog for editing the cable length Layer templates Select language Additional Settings L Thematic ralnurina 4 a Dialog additional settings LT ype KEET Cable type SAS 3 COAX 3 Dynamic data Temperature group Hew Cable data Nr 1 ee L Attenuation Mr Allow Trench Cross Section to Change the Color Database 4 Copy the properties to the cables connected through logical objects He aratinadlnst Ain Subdialog for editing the cable length Post load correction When an old project is loaded the types of the cables
339. ith no geoposition Then create the new metadot with 3 variables E Import options X File to import C Documents and Settings server tester Desktopitest dhiExample2_csy file to import Browse Column separator Text is enclosed by Import file has header Tab character Decimal separator f Space character Create new metadot Other character e Hotspot Find matching metadot m Position x Column No position C WKT Column Two columns Column C te hot t Source reference system Destination refere EE reae hopa E m Hotspot properties Type name Typet Type name id H_TYPE Searchable V Keep on delete V Yariable1_1 Variables1_2 Yariables1_3 a 5 k Yariable2_1 Variables2_2 Yariables2_3 Minimu sza Show label Show both label and symb Z Fixed appearance Circe Global Layer Bereich ONB Ss Select Layer Z Order 1 Label format gt Label height 1 0 Label position on X relative to symbol 0 0 Label position on relative to symbol 1 9 Variable display name Specific Data May be empty String String String Eondon name Appearance Minimum size Label color Show label Edit logical condition m Link to object metadot Link to Linkby Cancel When finished click ok Because number of variables is equal with number of columns a new dlg opens Ma
340. ithout interruption Costs Individual costs entered by the user or costs that were stated in the settings Length Always 0 m Graphical symbol Depends on the connection type Priority high medium low Description Comments entered by the user The connection type is indicated by a graphical symbol at the center of the bundle You can edit the graphical symbol in the bundle settings Bundles connect individual fibers or closed bundles The number of connections always corresponds to the minimum number of fibers at both ends Bundles that only contain individual fibers are represented by a thin line and a small symbol bundles that contain more than one fiber are represented by a thicker line and a large symbol Previously the distance between closed bundles was always as large as an expanded bundle so that the large symbols could be used without any problem Notice The auto splice box can be drawn in a space saving manner so that bundles are only one pin grid apart and the large splice symbols do not overlap Bundle objects adopt the color s of the fibers bundles of both sides as far as to the center in each case White bundles on the splice box are given a black border Bundles that would actually be white are shown light gray f j 25 N i a H i i i f i l Ad ae Example Splicing between auto splice boxes Bundles have a material value and are included in the bill of materials materials list There a
341. ive worksheet If the active worksheet is not empty a question will appear asking you whether the entire active worksheet should be used to draw the system The existing drawing on the sheet will be deleted Caution If you answer the question with Yes the previous contents of the active worksheet will be deleted and irretrievably lost If the worksheet is too small you will be asked whether it should be enlarged If the connection point is selected as the signal source and the active sheet already contains signal sources you will be asked whether to delete these or keep them If you wish to reuse an existing signal source and multiple signal sources exist a dialog box will open after this question in which you select the signal source to be used Note If you wish to plot your system in a worksheet other than the one with number 1 and there is an entry point in this worksheet the default levels will be transferred to the signal source and the values calculated at the entry point will be taken into consideration for this location The signal source icon will of course not be plotted If you select the Block work area the network will be inserted into the active worksheet as a block To do this open a block frame by dragging with the mouse Caution The system will be drawn directly into the area you specified and cannot be subsequently moved as an independent unit Therefore please make sure that you do not define the block ar
342. iver output level The channel modulation also influences the distortion products In the library you can specify the connection between the input level and the channel modulation Using the list the channel modulation can then be determined from the input level and you no longer need to specify the modulation in AND However this is currently not implemented in the program You also have the option of specifying a target reception level in AND for the return path transmitters AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 66 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Optical receivers Optical receivers are often also called transceivers There are regulated and unregulated optical receivers For regulated optical receivers the output rating is fixed by internal regulatory electronics as long as the input rating is within the permissible range The output rating is also independent of the channel modulation For unregulated receivers the output level is dependent on the input rating and the channel modulation The dependency on the channel modulation is described for a particular input rating in the library as a list of value pairs channel modulation output level For the dependency on the input rating a 2 1 rule is used An increase in the input rating of 1 dB increases the output rating by 2 dB For unregulated amplifiers the output level for any input level and channel modulations can be calculated using the l
343. l replacement Rack Position of object containing the pin incl replacement CitYof object AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 376 of 452 P_ Path whole hierarchy path not relativized 9 Calculations 9 12 Calculation for optical Networks Zip code of object Innermost Location rectangle with non empty installation number Only for DynLabel report function path part of the object 1 O Where Stands for Description Start reference point list in the report label start ree partner Pin Partner pin of starting point used for mounting pins TP TraverseP Partner pin of traversed symbol for future implementation of dynamic labels for links There are 13 9 7 154 combinations e g NON 1TH AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 377 of 452 9 Calculations 9 12 Calculation for optical Networks Moreover the splice patch reports may contain the following variables Description OO S r pata _ Pin info description of pin in brary symb The Rgb color codes have to be used as follows e Create an invisible data field named e g FTHLeftBundleColRgb containing the color code variable e g THLeftBundleColRgb e Display the color circle using Color DataRef THLeftBundleColRgb this references the contents of the data field FTHLeftBundleColRgb AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 378 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts 9 13 Microducts Microduc
344. l sockets and compares them with the limits given below Terrestrial Level min 60 2 dB Pa Level max f4 a dB Level difference max 6 0 a dB SAT ZF Level mink 50 H dew Level max e5 dBy Level difference max 5 0 dB Here you specify the desired level limits at the signal connection points calculation targets in NL 3 for example Connection points are symbols of type Worksheet output or library objects of type Signal point Here you set the desired level limits at the connection points calculation targets in NL 3 for example Signal connection points are symbols of type Worksheet output or library objects of type Signal point Check net structure Setup amplifiers Temperature drift Check remote supply Check socket levels Check bridge points Check open tap pin levels Check distortion Y Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream Test point CURRENT TARGET com C Check leakage limit Here you set the level limits as a function of the residential units to be supplied AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Set up warnings for Net Check le Warnings The bridge points level check discovers all levels for each frequency at all bridge points and compares them with the limits given below o Level min H abp Level max 76 a dB Level difference max 6 0 at dB Minimal level depending on MDU co
345. layed in the NIS editor You can bundle more than one of these objects into one point by enclosing an associated group of the following component types in a location rectangle Amplifiers Nodes Feeds Building objects Below is an example of an amplifier point enclosed by an amplifier type location rectangle Only one node is created in the NIS diagram for each one of these groups of components T T NT Opt AB Amplifier C Amplifier Return OTR ale o g 3 89 5 95 5 MP 003 I AIB m 1 C eah 5 l HF OUT HE OUT i 1m 1m from HUB 1 to VP 2 to Engelschalkinger Str 89 5 95 0 MP 007 MP 008 am To obtain a sensible network topology the locations should be defined with location rectangles All objects within a rectangle belong to the J 4 same location and can be bundled ae into an NIS node in NIS l Patchfeld To correctly display this in the NIS editor Location Inst No Nr 1 you have to assign an address and Reference a type to the rectangle Installation Humber Belongs to object Object Type Location type rao Io z assembly unit lz power insertion point EL Installation type AND Client Manual IV C
346. lculates the distortion spectrum at this point and the following window will open Schlechteste Werte am selektierten Punkt E E In analogen Kanalen CN 441 dB bei 483 MHz CTE BUS dB bei 775 3 MHz CS0 61 3 dB bei 48 0 MHz In digitalen Kanalen C N 323 dB bet 378 0 MHz CS0 CTE 51 5 dB ber 583 3 MHz BER Fe 9 dE bei MHz MER dE bei MHz The worst values for the various distortion types are now displayed Press the Show button to view the distortion spectrum at the selected point This button is only provided in the AND FIBRECOAX versions AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 353 of 452 9 Calculations 9 7 Performance Distortion product in forward path 9 7 4 The distortion spectrum window EE olx This window displays the distortion spectrum at a particular point The frequency in MHz is shown along the x axis OfThe channels are indicated in light gray The digital channels are yellow The unit along the Y axis is dependent on the display mode In ratio mode you can see the distortion ratio in dB In Level mode you can see the distortion output in dBuV The different colors mean CNR black line CTB blue CSO magenta In Level mode the signal is additionally shown green In the case of analog channels this is merely a thin line on the vision carrier frequency in the case of digital channels the channel is indicated in green
347. les chapter see Page 175 A detailed description of how to divide a plan into multiple tiles and thus into multiple files is provided in the Editing Tiles section in the GIS Area Manual AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 26 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 6 Schematic and geo schematic operating mode 2 6 Schematic and geo schematic operating mode In schematic operating mode also known as orthogonal mode only vertical and horizontal cables are shown and compoents can only be rotated through 90 angles You will automatically be in schematic operating mode when you create a new document and do not load a map or graphic as the background As from version AND COAX background maps see Chapter 5 can be edited The purpose of this feature is to plot the network plan according to the site plan that is geo referenced A background map can be a site plan or a topographic map or a story floor plan of a building If an AND Smart Server is connected with GIS maps can be provided through this server As soon as you have loaded a back ground map using FILE gt Background with Load Bitmap Background or Load DXF Background you will automatically be in geo schematic operating mode Now you will be plotting the network plan based on a topographical map You will thus be able freely to rotate components cables and trenches in a non orthogonal way that is according to the site plan The advantage here is in addition to
348. list is laborious It is easier to first select all of the channels to be changed and then click the Edit button In the window that now opens enter the values for level signal type level reduction and distortion all at once AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 364 of 452 9 Calculations 9 10 Frequency plans Assigning multiple programs to one channel First switch the channel in the Mux column to time or data multiplexing Signal source Nr 1 Return Path Target Level Nr 2 Entry exit point Nr 3 1 I Cha Progam FiqjMHz dBpv Type Ban Red CN Mux CTB cso E s3 le en 93 0 PAL BG 5 00 OO 46 0 x 63 1 65 1 tuzu 839 00 93 0 PAL BG 5 00 OO 46 0 Bi Bl ARD AR 860 75 83 0 QAM 64 7 60 10 0 36 0 Data MUX Nathina Time MUX In the Program column then click the program name to edit the program list of this channel signal source Mr 1 Return Path Target Level Nr 2 Entent pont Mr 3 L Cha Progam Frq MHz dBpv Type Ban Red C N E 33 114 25 43 0 PAL BG 5 00 OO 46 0 _ tuzu 039 00 43 0 PAL BG 5 00 O00 46 0 SRD ARTE oO WAM b4 r60 10 0 360 The K69 shown here can be converted by up to five converters Then Frequency Already Converted warning will no longer appear Editing channel abbreviations You can adjust the assignment of channel frequencies to channel abbreviations for example K2 S5 etc yourself Do this by editing the
349. location in the worksheet where the trench section begins Move the mouse pointer to where the trench section ends and click again If you would like to add another section to the already plotted section move the mouse pointer to the end of the second section and click again 5 If the trench section is finished press the Esc key 6 The mouse pointer retains the trench section plotting form If you wish to begin a new trench section start again at step 2 If you do not wish to add any more trenches press the Esc key sae The trenches will be automatically plotted in the form of a double line The lines are separated by the distance defined in the presettings If the trenches intersect the lines automatically separate A If you switch to the Network Planning drawing mode the trench sections are automatically displayed gray but they can still be selected AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 162 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 3 Laying cables in trenches 4 3 Laying cables in trenches Double click in the object selection window on the desired cable 2 Click consecutively on two points in the trench Press the Esc key The cable lengths will be ascertained automatically Close the window by clicking OK 3 Write the label text for the cable and finish drawing by pressing the Esc key a If the cable pathway is complex a function is provided to assist you 1 Place the start and end points for the cable 2
350. lordef h now contains the table AndExtColors for 255 colors with 255 color values whereas AndColors only has 128 entries CCustomColors in CdsClassLib administers these color tables In order to access the Ext color table the index is shifted to the two higher bytes and rounded with OLIDX_FROM_SPEC_PAL OxFF This tells the program to read from the Ext table The controls that display the colors are dynamically generated in the dialog box for color code management They are dependent on the number of bundles and fiber colors Previously color codes only contained single color entries without patterns AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 78 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Coloring free fibers Coloring is implemented in version AND 4 0 Build 710 and higher To color free fibers click the following button on the toolbar ge mji Aut Marking of Free Wires on off mmi oe m Clicking this button again deactivates the coloring function again When you click this button the following dialog box with coloring options opens Color of free Wires Minimum count of free wires 2 Don t show this dialog in future Here you can set the color and the minimum number of free fibers to which that coloring is to be applied This dialog box can be suppressed by setting a checkmark in the dialog box To reactivate the dialog box again open OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt The
351. low orange Coloring also works for sections without signals but for sections without signals it ends at splitter points such as optical splitters or DWDMs The locations passed along the section are then listed in the output window When you click an entry AND goes to the corresponding location This allows you to quickly find the associated terminal device For sections with signals the optical attenuation between the locations is displayed The listed attenuations are the attenuations between the input point of the location and the input point of the next location The attenuation consists of the attenuation within the location and the attenuation to the next location The optical output calculation is now also possible when the transmitter contains no RF signal Calculating optical output for all fibers When calculating optical output at a given point R key the results will appear for all fibers In addition to the optical output and the wavelength the calculation result contains a range of other information fiber and bundle color fiber and bundle number start location end location status priority and the customer for the terminal device O Berechnungsergebnis xi Bidet Fad Faser_ Faibwelerl rodDntsc S Zea Staus Pioti Bestaer Schochenmiihle Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch ww on Schochenmiihle Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Schochenmiihle Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Schochenmiihle
352. lt values for the level drop of individual signal types If for example you switch the signal type in a signal source from PAL_BG to QAM64 the current level will automatically be decreased by the reduced QAM amount and this value will be entered in the in the Reduction column Mark remote supply areas colored option If this option is activated the remote powering areas are automatically colored when you calculate the remote powering ALT F Default raster group box In old library editors it was not possible to enter the frequency spacing raster on which the distortion values are based Because the distortion calculation requires the frequency spacing specification a default spacing must be used here In this group box you specify which default spacing should be used as a function of the frequency range of the amplifier If no spacing is specified here and only an empty list appears when the Change button is clicked this is usually because the path to the TP_RASTER directory is incorrect To set up the correct path open the Program Path dialog box AND reads the spacing information from spacing files with the rst file extension The list that appears when Change is clicked is simply the list of rst files that are in the TP_RASTER directory rst files can be created changed in the Component Editor Cable between floors option AND allows you to plot loop through sockets directly together and avoid having to plot the cable
353. mart Server with a geographical information system based on the open GIS standard Data warehouse addresses can now be spatially localized In AND you can now plot directly in the map background Geographical inquiries like Show me all signal sources in this map section are now possible Vector based map information as well as raster maps are both supported The following additional functions are available in AND with GisArea e Definition of the current work section in the Arrange Background seamless plotting mode e Creation of a new NL3 drawing using an address automatically defines a section around the geo referenced address and loads the GIS layer as the background map e Display of geo referenced datasets in the drawing as point objects e Display of database attributes of this dataset e New geo referencing of a dataset by moving it to the new position in the map e New creation of geo referenced datasets e Conversion of dataset point objects from signal sources or building objects to an AND object entry exit point or a worksheet that adopts the attributes Cluster planning When you use the Create New GIS Cluster Sheath icon to draw a cluster sheath by setting individual points and then place the sheath around the dataset point objects the number of residential units within the enclosed objects will be counted and displayed After you have adjusted the cluster sheath to meet your spatial needs as well as the number of residential unit
354. matic Colouring and set the Input Dialog Box checkmark Thematic colouring Options State Colouring Uptions State Unknown State color Object color Line width Normal o Draw Crosses over the objects Signal Path Colouring Signal Path Color Free Wires Colouring Free Wires Color yt Free wires limit 2 iM Show Dialog for entering the free wire lirit Save Settings Load Settings Cancel OK AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 79 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Dark Fiber Dark fibers are described in AND by cables for which the attenuation is entered by user Manually entered Attenuation For every fiber or coax cable the attenuation from library can be optionally overwritten by manually entered values The attenuation can be entered as list of wavelength attenuation pairs AND uses as attenuation at a given wavelength the value determined by linear interpolation between the neighbour frequencies The number of pairs in this list is dynamic User can insert as much pairs he wants The entered values are absolute attenuations not per km and do not change if the length of the cable is changed later If a cable with manual attenuations is copied the manual attenuations will be copied too If the cable has more than one wire the attenuation applies to all wires Crosstext labels functionality is not changed This manual edited attenuation could not be p
355. mbH Page 351 of 452 9 Calculations 9 7 Performance Distortion product in forward path 9 7 2 Calculating network performance worst values in network To calculate network performance select CALCULATION gt Calculate network performance function AND calculates the disturbances at the outputs of all active components and determines the worst values in the network When calculation is complete the following window will open Lowest worst values in system k Analogue Channels C N 44 4 dB at S03 MHz Ghor CTE 56 2 dB at 93 MHz Ghor CSO 59 6 dE at 506 5 WiHz Ghor Digital Channels LN 34 5 dE oat 346 0 MHz Show CSOSCTE dE at MHz EER lt 5e9 de at MHz MER d at MHz cle eek The worst values in the network will be displayed for the various distortion types Press the Show button to locate the point with the worst value for each distortion type When you press the Show button in the AND FIBRECOAX version an additional window showing the distortion spectrum and the affected point in the network plan flash AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 352 of 452 9 Calculations 9 7 Performance Distortion product in forward path 9 7 3 Distortion products at a selected point You can calculate the distortion at a connection by selecting the connection and choosing CSO CTB CNR Calculation from the context menu When you have marked a symbol a listbox for selecting a connection opens AND then ca
356. mbering Fd Automatic Numbering Automatic Text Automatic Filename Dynamic Objects A4 gt Apply for All Types planning type Automatic filename for Exit points export v Format string 4f4T f Filename ya P Project Number Min number of digits for sheetnumbers 10 S Sheet Number X Exitpoint number T Testpoint Number Location Search Don tsearch Searchinsheet Search in whole project recursivly Default font Arial Wester Select in Dine Update all labels when dialog is closed rc Save Settings Load Settings Cancel OK 4 Choose CALCULATION gt Export all exit points Confirm your selection i Export exitpoints from entire document Yes if you want to export all exitpoints No if you want to export only the exitpoints of the current sheet Cancel if you want to cancel the export 5 The link files are created 6 Now switch to the subordinate project for example NL4 click the network termination point icon and select Entry Exit Points 7 You can now select the src file that belongs to the corresponding exit point in the NL3 project with the Link with Point button The frequency plan and calculated values are applied Complete with OK When you next open this drawing and values have changed you will automatically be asked whether those values should be applied You can open the other project by selecting an NTU and then pressing the S key
357. me size is determined and subtracted from the position of the fixed point The new position top left is then determined with RotateOffset If the number of pins is even the center cannot be located directly on the pin grid in which case the center will be positioned on the next pin below that Where bundles are expanded a handle is displayed in selection mode at the position where the bundle would be located If the mouse pointer is positioned over such a handle you can close the bundle with the lt key Deleting the cable also deletes the auto splice boxes However any attached bundles are maintained e Generate an auto splice box Mouse pointer on FO cable end pin selected pin and key or context menu e Close open bundle Mouse pointer on grid or bundle fiber pin lt e Drawing mode change direction Object properties The object properties features a SpliceBoxCtrl which represents the connections and the splicing sometimes with a colored background in the splice box SpleiBBoxCtrl is also used in LibEdit to implement predefined splicing AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 84 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Display of the free fibers on the autosplice box If a route is selected the cable sections in the worksheets are also colored and the autosplice boxes of the route indicate with an F the connections to which the remaining free fibers lead Detailed description E
358. ments called handles will appear at the ends of the section touched by the mouse x Drag one of the handles with the mouse to change the length of the cable section You can also add new handles to change the path of the cable for example by adding a new corner Hold down the Ctrl key drag this handle to the desired position o and then release it AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 113 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode to obtain this result By holding down the Ctrl key while positioning you can add a new cable point handle Conduits Conduits save you the effort of drawing each entire cable in AND by allowing you to insert a cable at any location in a cable conduit and feed it out at another location The length of the sections between the two points occupied in the cable conduit is simply added to the length of the two cable sections This way the change in length of a cable conduit section also called a conduit segment affects the length of all cables running through that segment In addition conduits can also assign user cable ends automatically to cable ends that provide signals greatest attenuation at the highest level Conduits like cables can be easily plotted using points through which the cable conduit will lead However unlike cables every conduit segment every individual straight cable conduit section is its own object and can be deleted moved copied
359. mer ISt TE Edit the list with Add and 125 SSK Welzburg SKK Welzburg meyerbeerst 6 9998 Welz Delete 4 m S hea Cancel Service is an entry from the global project list of optical services which you can edit under CALCULATION gt Edit Optical Services The services are also used for generating a network structure Terminals can now also be entered in optical input output points Implemented as from 4 x 869 t Edit Object O x Object Data Optical Source Nr 1 Termination Device Nr 2 Entry exit point Nr 3 Entryexit point Opt entry e gt Component information Purpose Of Use Rack 213 URL Color layer information Service Tv Edit El EntryE xitPoint M Customer s 0 Dat iz Diane ase Nof Company Name Strest No ZIP City Comment Report Optical Source Nr 1 ree Termination Device N Entry exit point Nr 3 Remove H Database Cancel Dialog box for entering the terminal data of an optical input output point The rack position and the purpose are only displayed in the optical calculation result if the input output point is not connected to any partner point In the case of connected input output points the data of the terminal from the partner project are displayed AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 69 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Semiautomatic dialog box for bundles Implemented
360. mouse pointer Position the block and click with the left mouse button ASD N AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 134 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Changing the apartment numbering in blocks AND allows you to quickly and automatically allocated new installation numbers for all outlets and cables contained in a selected block Select a block and open the context menu Choose the Change Numbers function and the following window will open Change Cable Numbering Object Ha W Number MODU Fositior Ascending numbering for floors f downstairs to upstairs C upstairs to downstairs C left to right m right to left Startvalue n Ascending numbering for MOUs on floor Jett to right C right to left Starkyvalue i First sockets only Delete numbers of sockets behind first cael If you require a standardized prefix for all generated numbers enter this prefix in the Object Number field normally the object number of the building If you wish to define additional settings select the Number Residential Location option Otherwise all the remaining options will be deactivated and all cable and outlet numbers will precede the numbers entered under Object Number If you select an option under Ascending Numbers for Floors or under Ascending Numbers for Apartments on Floor you can specify that each socket and each cable is given an ascending number in the selected direction The
361. mple you want to copy a block into another worksheet you can access the desired sheet using these buttons If you cannot switch sheets an audible notification signal will sound For example if you want to copy a non orthogonal object from a site plan into a schematic plan you cannot switch from the worksheet with the site plan to the worksheet with the schematic plan On the Projects and Sheets toolbar choose the desired worksheet from the list next to Worksheet Project Main Alternative HK Region 7 testONI Sheet 1 40 607 1 Blatt 1 gt Scale 1 00x r 1 40 607 1 Blatt 1 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 29 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 Navigating and zooming Settings for the worksheet preview You can make display settings for worksheets that appear in a drawing and that reference a sub worksheet To open the settings window choose the Properties item from the context menu for the worksheet icon or click the worksheet icon while holding down the Alt key The Edit Object window will open Here you will find the Display box where you can choose a preview type from the various types available Visibility Preview Full previews z Show pin numbers J Show symbol Example of various preview types Worksheet preview No preview 0 low medium and high quality Note The work
362. mplifiers have not previously been set Activate the amplifier setting for the network check as follows 1 Select CALCULATION gt Setup Warning Settings The Warnings Setup window will open 2 Switch on the Amplifiers Setup option For multi level amplifiers the target values are only set for the output levels The target level is always related to the point directly behind the amplifier level that is before any mounted output cards diplex filters etc When setting the output level target values the controllers and connector options of the levels located before that point are also be taken into consideration or changed To ensure that the amplifier settings function as intended the setpoints must have been entered in all amplifier output stages LocalArea Coax _ FibreCoax Procedure for setting the setpoints of multiple amplifiers Ww Ww Ww in a single step 1 Select CALCULATION gt Specify Amplifier Target Values 2 The Target Value Settings window will open The All Amplifiers option is automatically activated Click OK to apply the settings Setting amplifiers with five or more controllers slots can be time consuming because of the many options available You can save time by doing the following e Increase the level tolerance value in the warning settings If your amplifier has a total of three controllers for example doubling the level tolerance results in a speed increase of approximately a factor of 8 243
363. multiple fibers The attenuation values in the library refer to 1 km You can specify attenuation for various wavelengths in the Component Editor When drawing AND checks both fiber type optical RF and quantity For example only singlefiber optical cables can be connected at the output of optical transmitters If the type is incorrect you will hear a beep You can connect optical cables with any number of bundles and fibers to Mechanical Cable Connection type connections You can also connect fiber optic cables via conduits Automatic Route Connection Implemented from Build 4 5 1408 on If a fiber route between 2 sheets is selected AND offers a function to create the required in sheet connections automatically How to call the automatic creation If a fiber path is selected in the output window the command Connect route automatically is offered in the context menu of the selected route The Route from Sheet A to Sheet E is selected and if you right click on the blue line the command for automatic connection is offered in the context menu What automatic connecting is doing If the automatic connection is called AND searches in each inner sheet here sheets B and C for already existing connections between free wires The missing connections are created If there are several possibilities existing coherent blocks and existing connections are preferred Each created object and each existing connection is logged by a line
364. n GmbH Page 340 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation LocalArea Coax FibreCoax Return path lasers The return path lasers are not return path receivers in the context of the network check but they are handled similarly during return path amplifier setting The return path amplifiers behind a return path laser are set in such a way that the Signals reach the laser with the target reception level You can either use the same target reception level as is used for the receivers that is Take Target Reception Level from Settings or set it individually for the return path laser Do this by clicking the return path laser and then select Dynamic Data gt Laser Data in the Edit Object window Enter a value in the Target Reception Level field OPUScner ENGEN IT UAL M Sollempfangspegel aus Einstellungen entnehmen URL Fawb Layer linfo Farb Layer nto yiamische Daten Sollempfangspeget 85 bei 0 30 MHz Bandbreite Mm m e pn This level corresponds to the bandwidth of the master service AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 341 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation 9 4 5 Calculating the return path level at one point You can have the return path level calculated at any point with a return path signal Do this by selecting a connection and then the Calculate Return Path command from the context menu If the calculation is successful the Return Path Level at Selected C
365. n Variable name and Columns is done already so Match columns dlg is not displayed The metadot name is displayed in Hotspot field e Start the Import e Result Search for the hotspots The two hotspots imported appear in search result list and they can be located Search result list Mr Mame Attributes Type 7 li Hp address Borgergade Denmark 9630 Baandrup 6 E 2 Hp_address Borgergade Denmark 9630 Baandrup 6z Open dress E You will find each of them at the specified position Street Borgergade House na Street Borgergade House no b AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 264 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots B Second example is about importing from a CSV file hotspots with no geoposition with no header by creating a new metadot from Import option dlg CSV file contains Variable1_1 Variables1_2 Variables1 3 Variable2_1 Variables2_ 2 Variables2_ 3 Where separator is This means the user wants to import two hotspots each having 3 variables each line represents the hotspot s variables values Step 1 Go to Manage hotspots Import hotspot In Import option dlg choose the CSV file to import 1 You can see that Import file content was filled with the content of CSV file Choose the column separator Deselect Import file has header option and check No position because the hotspots will be imported w
366. n the toolbar Large Cross Test Point Large Level Test Point Small Cross Test Point Small Level Test Point RF Signal Source RF Signal Exit Alternative RF Signal Source Alternative RF Signal Exit Leakage Test Point Opt Signal EntryExit Alternative Optical Sheet ExitEntry 5 E E Ly H P T Ea Ctrl F9 FS Ctrl Shift F9 Shift F9 Shift F10 Shift F11 Ctrl Shift FL0 Ctrl Shift Fi1 Use one of the predefined signal source components from the library for the points that lead into the drawing entry points Or plot an RF signal entry or alternative RF signal exit You will find both objects on the toolbar EK B Large Cross Test Point Large Level Test Point Small Cross Test Point O Small Level Test Point RF Signal Source RF Signal Exit Alternative RF Signal Source Alternative RF Signal Exit Leakage Test Point Opt Signal EntryExit Alternative Optical Sheet ExitEntry cy H P Z Ctrl F9 FS Ctrl Shift F3 Shift F9 Shift F10 Shift F11 Ctrl Shift FL0 Ctrl Shift Fi1 2 Switch to the parent project for example NL 3 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 199 of 452 6 Project organization 6 1 Parent project organization 3 Specify the names for the src files required for the link in non server mode Do this by choosing PROJECT DATA gt Numbering and Labeling gt Automatic File Name a Automatic Labeling and Nu
367. nal buildings Every line on a building polygon is a trench point frame The civil works mode allows you to plan the cable routes trenches You are not dealing with the cables and components here but rather the conduits and pathways in which the cables lie These trenches typically run underground In the civil works mode you can draw the trench elements with the aid of a background topographical map in order to lay cable in these trenches later All trench objects are displayed to scale in plan sheets In schematic worksheets the sizes of trench objects are adjusted to the size of the worksheet connection symbol To switch to trench mode go to the Control Bar gt Navigation window using the mouse Choose the Civil Works Planning item from the drop down list box next to Drawing Mode El Navigation Project ANDI Unknown Sheet 1 Unnamed Scale 5 35K Drawingmode Normal E Layer and Color Layer Civil works Color Color from libra Layertemplate User defined El Object presettings Planning type Default Planning state Unknown If you have already loaded a background DXF drawing or a bitmap graphic this will now be shown gray The following figure shows the most frequently used settings Project Data Project and Sheet Data Alt Y Alt A Laying Type Earth Generate project structure S oO Width of the trench Shaft RA Trench defaults Manage AND object Layers Depth of the trenc
368. nation point AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 383 of 452 Assignment of microduct taps to network termination points 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Right clicking the duct package opens a context menu in which you can select Assign Microducts Automatically acticin F Color Layer O Edit location T Label P Pin information G Substitute group A Take Create Trench Envelope Block Deployment Deploy Micreduct lt Lock object I Component information Insert OLE Object Ctrl V K Load block Load sheet Print active View Properties Enter Fig 12 Context menu for the purple duct package After the assignment has been made as shown in Fig 12 we have an assignment of all selected network termination points with the duct package Fig 13 The result If the number of target points exceeds the number of free microducts no error message is output for the missing assignment An assignment can be repeated AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 384 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts fh i Mee unset f Miseimset g Maseamset 10 seman t Fig 14 The network termination points of the houses with numbers 2 4 6 8 10 and 12 are part of the block If we now call the Assign Microducts Automatically command we obtain the following result Fi Maxeamsst 7 Mizemsst S Maize mest 10 6 aze m t 6 ee ae it Pan i rr ie
369. ndard Cable for Length Calculation Type x min Level 0 00 Fibre Cable between links Type Length Coax cable between links Type Length F Twisted pair cable between links Type Length dB m AND Solution GmbH Page 298 of 452 8 Settings 8 3 Program settings 8 3 Program settings The program settings are used to configure AND but will not have any effect on an open project 8 3 1 Auto save This function allows you to specify that all open projects be automatically saved at set intervals In the case of a disruption for example a power outage or a program crash you can then restore the last automatically saved status Choose OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Auto Save from the menu The following window will open Automatic Saving Please note that auto save at intervals takes time W Activate Automatic Saving Do not make the intervals too short Time Interval 300 4 Seconds Permanently saves the settings for future program starts Save Setting In Info File Load Setting From Info File canes _ If a disruption has occurred and the program has been ended after restart AND will display a window with the projects affected by the disruption Resave these projects immediately once they have been reopened AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 299 of 452 8 Settings 8 3 Program settings 8 3 2 Setting program paths Use the OPTIONS gt Program
370. ndicated in the figure below so muajit t t Ere gt LD Color Color from hran FT Update Wire WS gt Scale 4 76x hi Planning T i El ka If there is no signal on the fiber the direction arrows are not shown The arrow can be moved manually A red circle on the arrow tip is provided as a handle for this To move the arrow click this circle and drag it to the desired position 2 3 Update of direction arrows is now optional Implemented from Build 4 5 1402 on By default the direction arrows are updated automatically after cable editing actions In huge projects this can lead to performance problems which can be solved by switching off the automatic update Toolbar button for toggling ON OFF The toolbar button for updating the direction arrows has 2 states checked and not checked By clicking on the button you toggle between that 2 states If it is checked the direction arrows of mono fibers are updated automatically after every cable editing action Creating a cable connecting a cable to a pin moving a cable leaving the edit dialog of a cable with OK If it is not checked the automatic update is switched off and the direction arrows can be wrong Whether automatic arrow update is on or off is stored within each project AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 91 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Setting the size of splice symbols and direction ar
371. necidisauuaincenaraed EE T 179 Scale GIS tab iid ssaiwidasndawidtiaante 182 205 Scaling for length calculations 206 Schematic operating mode 000088 27 Seamless WINKOW cccccceeeeeceseeeeesees 20 Select Assembly Object window 134 Select Location WINdOW ceeeeeeeeeeee 62 Select Pin WINGOW cece cece cece ee eees 134 Selecting a network tyPe ccceeeeeeeeees 143 Selecting DIOCKS wisicseucseec irois 33 Selecting QroupS sscccccceeeeeceseeeeesees 14 Selecting objects cccccceeeeeeeseeeeenees 32 Setting a return path amplifier manually 333 Setting all amplifiers at once 5 303 Setting amplifiers ccceeeeeeeeeeenees 311 Setting amplifiers automatically 306 Setting converters iissiidseiiidiniieviiaedinn 343 Setting display Options ccccceeeeeeees 296 Setting line Styles icc eeeeeeeeeeeeenees 296 Setting program Paths cccceeeeeeeeeees 295 Setting the amplifier successively 307 Setting the program language 297 Setting the return path amplifier 331 Setting the return path receiver einstellen A E E canna eco A E AT 330 Setting the return path Transmitter 325 Setting the scale manually 005 179 Setting USEF NaMeS sissrersiisrrarurarsnans 297 Settings WINdCOW ccc cece cence eee eeeees 292 Settings for Colouring Options window 231 Settings
372. ng Color layer informatic E Owner Data Owner Data Dynamic data fee Splice box Database i Location Inst No Nr Description Cancel You will find detailed information on working with optical cables in the Optical Networks manual AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 112 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 2 14 4 Editing and changing cables You can change any plotted cable subsequently Moving cables If you wish to move an entire cable click it anywhere except the end points also called the move handles and move it The cursor will automatically jump to one of the two cable ends to snap it to another connection see the Snapping section Page 132 Extending cables Select a cable end point and press the A key for Pick Up You are now once again in cable positioning mode as with plotting a new cable You can now extend the cable as you please Deleting cables or cable sections Select the cable or the section and press the Del key to delete The selected cable or section will blink red The Delete Object query window will also open If you wish to delete the blinking cable section click Yes If you wish to delete the entire cable click Next If a cable section is in the middle of the cable the cable will be separated Editing cable points What is meant here is how to change an already plotted cable When you select a cable ele
373. ng assistants to trace that is vectorize the site plan Proceed as follows to vectorized the site plan 1 Load the drawing you wish to vectorize in the background 2 Do this using the FILE gt Background gt Load Bitmap Background command if you are dealing with a bitmap graphic or FILE gt Background gt Load DXF Background if you are dealing with a file in dxf format The graphic is visible but cannot be edited because you are automatically in Network Plan Drawing Mode see Page 44 3 Using the Marker Rectangles and Marker Lines see Page 52 to trace the parts of the graphic that you need To make drawing and design easier a number of snap functions are available to you Activate these as follows e Before drawing Click the corresponding icon on the toolbar for design assistance e While drawing in positioning mode Press the corresponding Function key for example F1 Snap to end point F1 Snap to middle F2 Snap to intersection point F3 Snap to joining point F4 Snap to nearest point F5 Activate orthogonal mode F8 Snap to background F11 SQOOQOO00080 Note After you have traced vectorized a drawing it is best to delete the background graphic to save storage space To do this switch to the Arrange Background drawing mode Select the graphic by clicking it and then press the Del key AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 131 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode
374. ngs Saving Private Collection Settings Select Language Filter visible libraries Private Collection Oo All Libraries a Select Library Edit List of Libraries Component Availability Released objects only Set release number Mount symbols always Select group always To create your own selection of libraries and objects proceed as follows 1 Activate the User Setting option in the context menu of the object selection window No libraries and objects will now be shown 2 Now choose the Add Object s item from the context menu The following window will open Here you select the li brary whose objects you wish to display in the list below Here you select the ob ject you wish to place in your use defined library and click OK he the library setting AND Client Manual IV C Contents of Library Library All Libraries r Selection Filter W Sort List Kabelkanal 5x30 Kabelkanal 5x50 Kabelkanals0x30 Kabelkanal40n25 Kabelkanal40x40 Kabelkanal40x60 Rohr PG 36 Edit Library List AND Solution GmbH Calculation Objects ie Meter Object Meter Obje Aeter Object Meter Object Meter Object Meter Object Meter Object Meter Object Meter Object Meter Object Meter Object Show Details Cancel The selected object will then be shown in the object selection window Select other objects by repeating step 2 Choose Save User Setting from the context me
375. nit C Frequency After Show Selected fequencies C Frequency Before Shoy t st Point Settings Frequencies Advanced Settings Canos nepe se Apply to All Test Points Worksheet 7Y t 4 Gnauesestate 17 19 1x 1548 oc 2 Disconnection of the remote supply sses Co ni iai f Peg 88 9 91 9 FS 459 3 mA 46 8 V HFA 802 L 22dB 001 001 IMP 102 j 400x600x450 Page 409 of 452 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering 9 14 9 Checking for remote power incompatibility and maximum current in components When calculating remote power you have the option of checking whether remote power incompatible components were mistakenly installed in the network You can also check whether the maximum current through a connection is being exceeded You can activate this warning by choosing CALCULATION gt Warning Settings gt Check Remote Powering from the menu Activate the Check if remote power enters objects that do not have remote supplying enabled option If this option is active the message Component not remote power compatible will be output for every component that receives remote power but is not compatible with remote power Activate these options if you want to carry out these checks a hg a T T Set up warnings for Net Check ae om Warnings MI Check net ee The Remote Supply Check checks whether all remotely supplied consumers are v Setup amplif
376. nk to an object for example link to Tap and add a hotspot within a geo project Link to object metadat Link to Tap ny ii Open DOT Properties of the object Tap by right clicking on it and choosing Dot Properties option and let the dialog Object Data opened Right click on hotspot and choose Set reference to current Tap Result the link between hotspot and object Tap is created Dee Menai x Bhari 123 Representations _ zoom all Zoom inka zoom detail zoom last Ctrl PgDown Select all objects CLTRL 6 Dok properties Search Jump Targets Set reference to current Tap B Move object E Delete object F Color Layver Data p DOT Mame f Mame TAF L Number E Line 1 Lack object Insert OLE Object Eckel K Load block Load sheet Back to Gis Area project Print active view Evaluation b Properties Enter Add Hotspot Here Set hotspot geo position here AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 273 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Example 2 Set Reference In modal properties dialog or dockable dot properties bar the buttons for link creation update Set reference and delete Reset reference are added When Set reference button is pressed a search modal dialog with the controls of the linked metadot appears which allows the user to enter a search
377. nnot be changed only the display name Specific Data that is used just for variables of type Option To specify the options for a variable of type Option insert the options separated by in the Specific Data column May be empty Default this option is checked and means that when the user adds a hotspot he can let empty the value of that variable a Variable display name Specific Data May be Eene Variable 1 VORIABLE1 String var 2 option VORZOPTION Option ope 1apt 2 opt s oapt 4 If May be empty is unchecked writing that value is mandatory If the user is not writing the variable s value a message appears The data for Variable x is not valid The value may not be empty Please modify it AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 256 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Display rules Addresses and Faults Visualization will be defined in Metadata xml as system metadots The other types can be set by user and may depend on attributes The intended display rules which can be applied onto display properties are e condition variables dependency on a single attribute dependency on a fixed value e condition operators lt gt comparison Boolean logic and or not e string operators for labels only add strings Format Examples If attribute gt 10 then take color green else take color red Create an hotspot with one variable VAR type integ
378. ns Patch Splice Report Options Filter Filter by task numbers Edit Task List Show if tasks of hierarchy parents match Hierarchical sorting Sort by address then by hierarchy path Sort by hierarchy path only Specified in report template e By Hierarchy By Position in Drawing Grouping Show group line grouping occurs for the path and works best with alphabetic sorting Display order of splice sides Comparison value OTH NIN SAIN PONIN The comparison values of both bundle cable ends are compared Use 0TH splice name to put the smaller cable name string text to the left NIN Numbers In Next to put the smaller next destination hierarchy path to the left Other Emit clickable report rows to output window Display options Empty final values if same as next Selection Using the selection options the connection points to be listed in the report can be selected Select Show Splice points and or Show Patch points The chosen connection points in the rectangle are filtered sorted and listed in the report For micro splitters which are physically contained in cassettes you may want to see patch points even in the splice report which shows more data specific to the splices than the splice patch list which shows more general data valid for both splices and patch points Pins in the report rectangle are included as patch point pin in the report
379. ns Max Sending Level C Only attenuation compensation C Use value set in service 114 dB yy The amplifier directly after the receiver is set in such a way that the T receiver receives its target level All other amplifiers only compensate f Max Sending Level 112 dB the attenuation to the following amplifier in the return path This adjusting method is local A change in the network in a given place will only affect the required value for a single amplifier Tolerance for all warnings 0 5 dB Advantage The adjustment of the amplifiers is easier to follow simple zs a ffset f h lifier V Pads of house amplifier compensate missing house attenuation zero offset TOt Sachi Ampia TE Disadvantage The planner must concern himself with the functioning Target level of each line amplifier input of the return path a4 The attenuation of all the houses must be similar e g through dB Caliste introduction of special return path attenuators The attenuation between amplifiers must always comply with the range of the Equalization proceeding amplifiers Adjust to target only if deviation to target is greater than 12 0 dB E Warn if target cannot be reached i Reset Fixings Cancel 3 Here you make settings that can deviate from the return path service Here you make settings according to the network operator specifications If you click the Reset Fixings button the manual placement of controllers Slots of all return
380. ns 2 and 4 of the DemoSchleife amplifier in the library re mote power incompatible b Assign the group number 1 to connections 2 and 4 in the library while connections 1 and 3 remain to group number O Component can Too much output is Use a more powerfu no longer be being consumed or the power source Supply fewer amplifiers per source supplied voltage drop in the lines is too high AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 407 of 452 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering If no power can be identified for a consumer the consumer is automatically assumed to be locally powered Current too high Target 570 mA Max allowed 500 mA Voltage too low Target 41 6 V Minimum 45 V Total consumption 72 W of which 0 W remotely powered AND Client Manual IV C The maximum current of 500 mA specified in the library has been exceeded The minimum voltage of 45 V specified in the library has not been reached Your amplifiers are defined as locally pow ered in the library AND Solution GmbH Possible Cause Possible Reasons Remedy If the warning occurs for the source Supply fewer consumers with this source or reduce the used current some other Way If the warning occurs for a consumer Use a source with higher output voltage or reduce the current to the consumer some other way Use a source with higher output voltage or increase the voltage to the consumer some
381. ns of the format toolbar Arial Unicode MS Westem q Be 7 U Z Pease aa Font Font language code Font size WALL Peas aa Font formats bold italics underscored Font color Alignment left justified centered right justified Line color and fill color for linear and rectangular objects Line thickness for linear and rectangular objects Apply do not apply fill color for rectangular objects Set one drawing plane up or down for superimposed objects Select an object and then apply a tool icon from the toolbar AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 438 of 452 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer 11 4 2 Variables in AND You can use the following variables in your report template for use in AND Variable Meaning Program reference AdministrationLocation House manage AND Projektdaten ProjektFir ment address men Hausverwaltung Street Postal code City Anbieter Supplier of a com Libedit ponent AnbieterAdresse Component suppli Libedit er address AnbieterName Supplier company Libedit name Anzahl Number of compo nents in drawing Arbeitslohn Hourly wage AND Materi al Einstellungen Allgemein Kalkulation Wage Artikelnummer Item number ofa Libedit component AutoNetCheckSuccessful Auto network check successful Bemerkung Component re Bauteilbemerkung LibEdit marks Bestellnummer BetreiberAdres
382. ns on the Projects and Sheets toolbar to change the scale Seale 1675599 91x mi The drawing will then be scaled to your desired setting enlarged or reduced AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 31 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 8 Selecting objects 2 8 Selecting objects To edit an object in a worksheet move delete rotate etc you must first select it Select objects components cables texts marker lines trench elements by moving the mouse pointer over them Selected objects will change color e A selected object will be shown in purple e A selected worksheet connection is shown in red e Objects linked to the currently selected object e g associated texts test point windows are shown in blue Only one object can be selected at a time together with those objects that are linked to the selected object When multiple objects overlap each other and you move the mouse over them the topmost object is selected If you wish to select an object on a lower layer press the Shift key to switch to the next object The colors stated are standard colors and can be defined in the Line Styles and Display Options menu see Page 301 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 32 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 8 Selecting objects Selecting blocks If more than one object is selected at once that is called a block The objects in a block are contained within a marker rectangle bordered by a dashed line When you
383. ns stand for LocalArea AND LOCAL Version COAX AND COAX Version FibreCoax AND HFC Version In addition to the above in this manual the following typographical conventions also apply Menu commands These are printed in bold and italic type The menu name is additionally written in upper case laters The Toolbars command in the View menu is show as follows for example VIEW gt Toolbars Window names The names of windows and their contents tab names and are printed in italics window contents Window System data Buttons A button is a visual element in a dialog box used to trigger a function Examples Lr C TAN Put Use font Select E In Dialogs Updat all labels When diaais closed Save Settings Load Settings Cancel Shift key This is the key for switching between upper and lower case letters Examples The examples given in the individual sections are based on fictional data AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 10 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 Fundamentals This chapter will familiarize you with the basic functions and methods used to plot a network plan and work in AND The chapter provides information about the AND program window and its elements working with two monitors dual monitor optimization working with the mouse and keyboard the operating and drawing modes in AND the schematic and geo schematic operating modes the navigating and zoomin
384. nseeeeesnees 52 Master service Set return path amplifier Sateen acta ape A A tees Mae orate ET 324 MOVING Cables seinir ni tees aa 113 MOVING ODJOCUS sstivevinscienviniaaaineeientiieas 35 Multimedia outlets setting up the return path amplifierS cccssseeeeeeeeeeeeesees 326 Navigating sicusevesicutneeieteriaeteveioaseteke 28 Navigating between documents 55 28 Navigating between worksheets 29 Navigating beyond document boundaries 31 Navigating in worksSheets ccseeeeeeeeeees 30 Network check sik iiiidint dicen addhweatenianiiaae 310 Network check checking distortion 346 Network planning MOdE ccseeeeeeeeee 44 Network Search WiINdOW ss00000eee 283 Network Status ccccccseesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeees 229 Network status displayed in a color 231 Network status Setting colors for 231 Network Type tabD cccceeeeecssseeeesnees 143 NIS Network Information System 2 6 NIS network structure deleting nodes and INKS areia a oaoa 286 NIS network structure editing project data E EET E A EEEN TE TOE 286 NIS network structure editing the 284 NIS network structure selecting nodes 284 NIS Settings windOW s ssssessssssssrsrsns 277 NIS structures compressing location rectangles irpta n 281 NIS structures horizontal vertical display P A eT Ter A A ET N 279 NIS structures moving image sections 282 NIS structures navigating in 282
385. nsert in Amplifier List The amplifier will blick red Click the amplifier list in which you wish to place it You can also select multiple amplifiers rock together and place them in the list e Deleting an amplifier from an amplifier list Select the amplifier and press the U key for Delete from Amplifier List The amplifier will be removed from the list Assembly components The purpose of assembly components is to complete the component list with non electronic materials They are assigned to the drawing objects Each object can possess multiple assembly components and each assembly components can have multiple entries Assembly components are defined in the library using the component editor There are two types e Length objects can only refer to cables and converts the length of the referenced object will be seen as a quantification of the assembly component e Part objects can only refer to icons Assembly components store the following information e Assembly component entries e Reference object for quantification AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 63 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Assigning assembly components 1 Select the object to which you wish to assign an assembly component 2 Press the X key for Assembly component The Library View window will open 3 Here you will find all objects that you can assign Select the desired object 4 You will now see a line O and a text
386. nsmitter noise The RIN value in the library is the decisive value e Noise in the receiver diode due to fiber optic dispersion Length and fiber dispersion and diode photosensitivity are the decisive parameters of this noise component e Noise from the photodiode itself Important data Diode type dark current and equivalent background noise The noise calculation for the EDFA is not yet date of issue of this manual implemented Calculating CSO CTB The CSO CTB calculation is implemented for internally modulated DFB lasers Calculating the laser uses a physical model via the internal structure of the DFB laser Important parameters are the chirp value and the fiber optic dispersion The receiver is characterized by a black box model The black box is defined by measured values specified in the Component Editor AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 372 of 452 9 Calculations 9 12 Calculation for optical Networks 9 12 3 Splice Report and Splice Patch List The splice report and the splice patch list can be generated for location and cassette rectangles by using the function Splice Patch Report Open the context menu of the rectangle using the right mouse button to choose and start this function You then may choose the report the splice report is focused on splice data the splice patch list displays data common to all connection points splices patch pins The output of the report may be controlled using the report optio
387. nt Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 399 of 452 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering 9 14 2 Remote powering calculation results When calculating the remote powering separately AIt F the sources and consumers are displayed in the output window with the associated voltages and currents Warning Remote supply No remote supply source found Remote supply source I 4496 m U 48 V Consumer I 250 m U 48 0 Consumer I 456 m U 47 1 Consumer I 455 mA U 47 3 V Consumer I 250 m U 48 0 Consumer I 451 m U 47 6 V Consumer I 459 mA U 46 9 Consumer I 259 mA U 46 3 Consumer I 465 m U 46 2 Consumer I 468 mA U 45 9 Consumer I 262 m U 45 7 V Consumer I 470 mA U 45 7 Consumer I 250 m U 48 0 Remote supply source I 1750 m U 48 Consumer I 326 m U 47 6 V When you click a row in the output window the corresponding object flashes The consumers listed below the source are supplied by this source When calculating as a part of the network check the focus is placed more on the verification of limits This is why there is no detailed listing You only see the total consumption and any potential warnings 9 14 3 Remote powering basics in the libraries The library will indicate whether a connection is remote power compatible or not Only compatible connections can be supplied by remote powering AND
388. nt types Layer for cable length labels C Use default text layer Use layer of assigned cable i Layer for symbol descriptions C Use default text layer Use default symbol layer Additional Options IV Include plan DXF I7 C One drf layer F Include GIS All def layers General export Options Export text styles Cancel Jade Aq podx3 suoydo Aq podx3 AND Client Manual IV C r Export Options Layer Selection tt Microducts LANES LANES tt Standard tet Standard it Trassenobjekte i Vermessungsobjekte 1 FLURSTUECKSGRENZE GEBAEUDE_OEKOLOGISCH GEBAEUDE_WOHNEN HAUSANBAU KULTURGRENZE FD MAIER 4 m General export Options Export text styles Cancel AND Solution GmbH lt BAHN_GEWAESSER_WALD_ Add All gt gt Add all Dxf Add all visible layers Add all others Jake Aq podxg suogdo Aq podxy Page 426 of 452 11 Output options 11 3 Reports 11 3 Reports Reports are generated when project and material information is output These are print lists that are created based on standard or user defined report templates You can create and change report templates using ReportDesigner see Page 432 Here you specify the type and format of the desired information The ready made standard reports are stored in the Report directory when AND is installed Caution Report templates created with ReportDesigner 3 3 are not com
389. nts After setup enter the actual manufacturer ID for each relevant component usually only active components directly in AND as part of the red corrections To do that simply click the icon open the Edit Object window select the Location Inst No tab and then enter the data in the Seria Number and Manufacturer Category fields Seral number T ype Supplier T ppe Sernaliumber Kathrein WGF 36 x SN 984223943 iw Use as partname Drum number AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 201 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets 6 3 Worksheets In AND you can use multiple worksheets in a single project The first worksheet is always the main sheet and can if necessary take on an NL3 One or more headends amplifier stations and NL4 partial networks are usually integrated into sub worksheets A sub worksheet can take the form of any icon in the sub sheet This way you can create a clear network plan and in the case of a topographical map complex stations can still be designed in schematic form For example V Station 17 Klausenweg 3 7 0dB ___ 14m en an bIMP 106 6 MP 200 This excerpt shows a section of the B line red and a section of the C line blue The amplifier station 17 is shown in actual size as the worksheet When you click this amplifier station the content of the worksheet opens O Verst rkerstation 17 GMG 52 TVK 04 Klausenweg 3 TE 3333 f y Mh
390. nu and enter a file name to save Page 41 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 13 Loading libraries for object selection Linking libraries Linking means that the library information actually saved in the library files is also deposited in the drawing file This is only done for components that are in use one exception are all connectors and all amplifier assembly components This guarantees the integrity of the drawing even without library files if for example they are to be archived or sent via e mail Use the Link Status button to switch the link status of an individual library in relation to the active drawing project The requirement for changing the link status from linked connected to external normal is the existence of the library in the defined library directory Replacing missing objects in the library If one or more libraries have been changed such that components are completely missing or have become incompatible you can correct this on the component level Click the Missing Objects button and the following window will open Replace Missing Objects Missing Objects ID 11 lib stand200 lib Replace by objects with same IO of library CSN DSSLIBAstand200 lib Replace Selected Objects Replace All Objects Delete Selected Objects Delete All Close AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 42 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 13 Loading libraries for object selection If icon graphics of
391. o 1 Amplifier Data No 2 etc 2 7 Edit Object ike o ems Object Data Amplifier data Nr 1 Amplifier data Nr 2 Transponder Nr 3 Power Consumption Nr 4 El Symbol 862 35dB GA fem isama Ohne EEn UAIS Componentinomaton You define the forward path here Base data Nr 1 Built In Regulators Symbol Data Nr 2 aa Level at Power supply Nr 3 Amplification E dB Target Level 104 E dBypy 5 max Frq 104 dBp ae Equalization 10 0 dB Preemphasis 8 0 ja Preemphasis 8 dB Pr Respons Plugged Components Plugged p URL Attenuation 7 0 dB Pad 7db Pad 7dB I fixed Color l inf ti D E AAA Equalization 10 0 A dB Equalizer none v fixed F iaia Frequency Range Return Path Amplifier Retum23dB 23 18dB v Dynamic data TAR lot hn Ys Amplifier data Nr 1 sal ig las Amplifier data Nr 2 Transponder Nr 3 Reverse amplifier Power Consumption You define the retu rn path here Database Amplification 23 dB Amplifier 5 65 MHz Signal 29 31 MHz Location Inst No N For more information please see the Regulators fixed Target Values Current Values NY Amplification 18 6 ie dB Amplification 18 6 dB l Amplification 18 6 dB Setti n g th e Retu rn Pat h Am pl ifi e r Equalization 0 0 a dB Preemphasis 0 0 dB Preemphasis 0 0 dB se cti O n Plugged Components Attenua
392. o different layers for example network levels 3 4 and 5 This will allow you to assign different colors to make them visible and create selective bills of material materials lists later on e If you intend to show the objects with layer colors set the color Layer Color in the Objects toolbar and change objects that already exist as described below e If you want to change the layer associations for a set of components at a later stage select the relevant objects as a block Now you can change the layer and possibly the color of the Layer Color for all objects in the block AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 218 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options 6 5 Specifying key data for search options Your investment in planning and documentation for your network plans Should always bring longterm benefits Therefore we recommend providing AND documents with information that can be used as key terms for finding the documents again making it possible to work with other software like a Subscription management program What is more completed project relevant fields are included in various reports and used by the disruption search functions of AND 6 5 1 Project data You enter the data for a project in various tabs in the System Data window This window is opened with PROJECT DATA gt Project and Worksheet Data in the menu
393. o g ur Shoots to pater s d T Grid lines if set fi t a DIN A 4 page i Split ii if bigger than jaka size z OLE ae According to scale 1 100 Calculation Items If for example a worksheet has T Measure Points E the logical width of 2000 m and Size Aa zo a the scale is 1 10 000 Te S E 1 cm on paper equals 100 m EEEE ITA T Cable Number i n th e d rawi n g Left 500mm Right 5 93mm Print Modes the printout will be 20 cm wide o E o i ee Set th e ma rg In In mm h ere Print Background Refresh Before Printing Refresh Preview O Select here what IS not to be F Use gray tones to print DXF background z Amplifier Lists p ri n ted P Print Bitmap Background Darker i oe ie 5 When the preview is refreshed Always V Only for Postscript Printers er ac see how the pri ntout Save Settings Load Settings Printer Cancel You can use the Print Bitmap Background Darker option to improve the visibility of lower contrast background images for example for fax transmission The settings apply to all worksheets AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 422 of 452 11 Output options 11 2 Exporting 11 2 Exporting AND offers users the option of exporting lists into different file formats for example Excel Word PDF and or to text files Notice A detailed description of export options is also given in the GisArea manual see Section 1 2 11 2 1 Exporting to Excel e Bill
394. o o o hours per meter Trench Identifier New Street Propagate All the Properties to the Neighbouring Trenches l Depth 60 0 cm Geometrical Width 100 0 of the Sheet Con Properties AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 171 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 4 Trench cross sections 4 4 3 Trench cross section labeling The cross section label for a specified trench cross section provides visual and textual information about trenches conduits and their cables in the drawing Here is an example of a trench cross section label K20 9005 OHO OO 0 6 3 3 22 dB 1 6 8 2 sup 1 5 7 9 9 dB You can change the visual display of the label Click the label in the worksheet The Edit Object window then opens with the trench cross section tab You can give the label a name title With these options you define which elements will be drawn The preview shows how the label will be displayed in the 7 Tach VW worksheet a ao Sonu If the cable legends are to be displayed define here how many columns will be used to display the information Here you can define the font size for the label text AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 172 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 4 Trench cross sections 4 4 4 Changing the direction of view The arrow on one of the two ends of a trench cross section shows the
395. object When this dialog is closed with OK AND validates the counter set in the dialog checks to see if the value is already used If the value is already used a new dialog shows which gives the user a few options to fix the counter conflict AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 127 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Counter conflict There s already an object with this counter Dio You want to Suncrement the number of the object with this counter and following objects if neccesary sivap the counters of thie object and the objects with this counter use the next free counter 2 14 7 5 External counters External counters are now available in AND in order to ensure system wide unique values The formatter for the external counters is Q followed by the counter name enclose in square brackets Current implementation of the external counter is based on database sequences and they can be defined from DBAdmin There is a new TAB named Numbering Sequences where a new sequence can be defined Server Selection Yew Settings Help After defining it with DBAdmin this is automatically available in the Placeholder Menu but ton 12 in the figure on page 124 The value of an external counter is resolved during the checkin of the project Any label based on an external counter will be formatted like Q lt externalcounter name gt lt AND Object Handle gt and during the first ch
396. och Gaswerkareal 6 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch Gaswerkareal 6 Chollerstrasse 6 offen Hoch E mannna C A Oe m mon Liebe won n Oo oon nnfkwon a o IOOOMMMMDMDMMAaAaaa ajnwa a rtrt fe fF eee He eWwW WW SoM ON OO fFwWN WOONMNO kWh Excel Export It is also possible to calculate the optical output if the associated downstream laser has no valid RF input signal AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 110 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode LocalArea Coax FibreCoax Splice Box makea Splice boces can be defined in the library or automatically generated If your drawing contains an optical cable that conists of more than one fiber you can automatically insert splice boxes on its ends Click a cable end and press the key for Generate Splice Box AND generates a splice box irrespective of the number of bundles in the cable and the number of fibers in the bundle If for example your cable has 2 bundles with 5 fibers each the following splice box will be created You can always recognize the first pin in your drawing by the 1 0 The bundles are each marked on their fibers and display the total bundle and fiber number in brackets The colors of the bundles and fibers are determined in the library editor with the help of color codes If the fiber optic cable has not been assigned a color the bundle color settings of the color and bundle setting
397. odes with the same XMTS port as the selected node o0 O O 8 8 Selecting with the edit menu The following functions for selecting nodes are available in the EDIT menu e The fastest way to select all nodes is to use the Select All function e The Invert Selection function reverses the current selection that is selected nodes are no longer selected and unselected nodes are now selected e The Remove Selection function removes the selection of nodes that is no nodes are selected now AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 289 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 4 Editing the NIS network structure 7 4 2 Arranging network structure objects You can arrange parts of the network structure either manually or automatically When manually arranging them you move the selected network nodes to new positions If you want to return to the program s automatic network structure arrangement choose EDIT gt Reset Positions from the menu More settings for arranging nodes It is possible to have even more influence over the arrangement of nodes Choose SETTINGS gt Raster Settings from the menu 79m 2fm Grid settings i Show Grid iM Snap to Grid Horizontal Grid 8 0000 Vertical Grid 8 0000 rea Select the Show Raster option to display the raster grid 0 Select the Snap to Raster function to arrange the nodes on the raster grid Enter a number for the mesh width of the grid in the fields
398. odrea oa a a 45 Creating worksheets ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 198 Defining dependencies in I U function 401 Defining layers for worksheets 212 Defining layers globally 0cee eee 211 Defining remote power compatible CONNECTIONS orsoni iara ora a 396 Defining the GIS coordinate system 180 Defining the work area cccceee eee e ees 144 Deleting assemby times ccc cece 43 Deleting cable SECtIONS ccceceeeeeeeeee 113 Deleting component PFiCeS ccceeeeeeeee 43 Deleting layers euwiisroisnretoveredivegertiieres 213 Deleting NIS projects ccce cece eens 286 Deleting objects ccccecccssseeeesnennennnnees 37 Design assistance s ssssssssssssrrrrsrenns 125 Designing report templates 006 430 Disconnecting components from cables 128 Discrete distortion CSO CTB 05 350 Display performance cccceeee eee e eens 298 Display test points cccccsceeeesseeeeeenees 291 Displaying and editing the pin information A ek pl AE ra nte wk A ata eeatoc recat acetate race 47 Displaying libraries ccccecceeee cece eens 41 Displaying NIS structures 00cee ee 279 Displaying remote power current in live test POINTS iii seat te ela ein 404 Distortion product at a selection point 348 Distortion product calculation with transmission FUNCTION cccceeeeeeeeee 351 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Ind
399. of materials see Reports Page 427 e Test point lists see Calculating and Editing Test Points Page 418 11 2 2 Exporting to Word Select MATERIAL gt Word Export Batch Print The following window will open Word PDF Export Batch Print JAcceptance a Language AmpList English JBOM BOMnoPrices CabelList ChanList LeakageReport T MatOrder Start Word Export Offer OfferShort Start PDF Export Orderln 2 OrderOut Print OrdersListOut 3 ProjectlnfoNet Options N Here you select the list you want to export and then click Start Export If you select Display a Word window will open If you select Save a save window will open Enter a file name Show Store exported reports Use stored partlist if available V Use sorting options AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 423 of 452 11 Output options 11 2 Exporting 11 2 3 Exporting to PDF Any list that can be printed can also be exported to PDF format as PDF is a pure output format Exporting to PDF format works in the same way as the print function see Printing on Page 417 ff with the only difference that you select PDF as the printer name however the actual name depends on your PDF printer driver Also a button called PDF Export is displayed in the print preview With this button you can output the current display in a separat
400. of those wires to B6 Those 36 wires are unusable for the automatic function The automatic function would have to remove the existing connections in order to AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 75 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode use them but modification of existing user drawn stuff is forbidden So we have only 46 36 10 usable wires in that cable Existing connections can reduce the usable wires even if they stay in the route Imagine a connection in a sheet which connects a free wire with a reserved wire The formally free wire isn t usable because we would automatically use the reserved wire too Requirement Correct Arrangement of Autospliceboxes Enough space between the Autospliceboxes AND uses for each bundle a specific course which avoids unnecessary bundle crossings In the following picture all 72 wires are 1 1 connected using 28 bundles DEES I1 II li li 11 ee T k a 2 gt Sate o EENS a SEIN 6 Sel I I I III I l e 45 ee E j oh 13 41 _ L EF mer B4 JE os Tit I z V 7 HB2 i L OO O m C h a we eee eee CH if O aa gt 2 a Gua D BS qe a G05 qa EE an EEE ap 6 If we would decrease the distance we would get something lik
401. oints connection points antennas or LNCs Specifying data for signal sources Click on a signal source component types such as Signal source worksheet input feed system LNC antenna to display the Edit Object window with the Signal Source tab where you specify the frequencies for your network 5 i Edit Object Object Data Signal source Nr 1 Return Path Target Level Nr 2 Entry exit point Nr 3 Symbol Signalquelle aon eae I Cha Program Frq MHz dbp Type Ban Red C N Mux CTB CSO Base data Nr 1 ml 528 Premier 3 359 25 55 0 SatlFDig 27 00 100 Symbol Data Nr 2 Ej 529 ZDF Vision 367 25 Sat IF Dig 27 00 10 0 3 URL z URL Color layer information Color layer informatic Owner Data Owner Data Dynamic data Signal source Nr 1 Return Path Target l Entry exit point Nr 3 Database Location Inst No Nr 5 N AL 2 Channels UEP31 UEP40 Set Level Edit ae Hal ar Cancel Initializes the values for level and distortion ratios for all channels according to Telekom standard UEP31 Initializes the values for level and distortion ratios for al channels according to Telekom standard UEP40 Initializes the level values with a linear slope between minimum level frequency and maximum level frequency takes into account any reductions that may have been entered AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 363 of 452 9
402. onent editor defining remote power compatible CONNECTIONS ceeeeeeeees 396 Component Information window 18 Components taD cccceeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 148 Components reversed cseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 302 CONGUIES wat cvaserredisawisninancae E 114 Connections Optical cccceeeeeee eens 136 Page 446 of 452 Connectors Optical irensketa 136 Context MENU WINCGOW s ssssssssssssssssss 23 CONVENTIONS saaria T AA 10 Converters determining signal paths 344 Converters marking signal paths with disturbance SOUICES ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 345 Converters signal path from connection to signal SOUFCE sassssssesenrrerrnrersnrrrnrerne 344 COPVING ODJECtS enca wus 36 Copying using the keyboOard seceeeee 36 Copying using the MOUSE s ssssesesessrsrrerns 36 Counting residential units in blocks 131 Create Drawing Object Data Fenster 66 Create Drawing Object Data window 61 124 Creating a bill of materials 406 Creating a network plan general 141 Creating a NEW GOCUMENL cceeeeeeeeees 140 Creating NIS Structures cceeeeeee ees 278 Creating NIS structures from AND drawings AAEE A E EAE eg eda T 278 Creating NIS structures without drawings EE E E nena 278 Creating report templates cseeeeeees 427 Creating FEDO rrira 426 Creating SUITACES cee eeceeeeeeetseeeeeneee 52 Creating the installation number and LOCALO
403. only available at the return path receiver at the return path amplifier output and at connections where return path signals converge for example at a splitter input Open the window via one of the context menu options Return Path Noise Return Path Ingress or Return Path Disturbances or use the Ctrl I Ctri R or Ctrl D shortcuts There are a variety of different bandwidths particularly if more than one service is running or frequency multiplexing is being used For that reason it is necessary to calculate with signal densities dBuV Hz if disturbances are to be added up or signals are to be compared with disturbances For that reason signal densities are depicted in the Y axis in the window and not levels The level measured in the bandwidth between FreqMin and FreqMax would be the flat part of the blue curve s between FreqMin and FreqMax The left figure shows the ingress red and the signal blue The horizontal yellow line marks the required CINR ratio for this service The figure on the right shows the same for noise dBu H2 Ingress S pektrum dBy Hz Rausch Spektrum AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 347 of 452 9 Calculations 9 5 Setting converters 9 5 Setting converters If a drawing with at least one converter is open you have the option of specifying settings for the input and output frequency of this converter Select CALCULATIONS gt Set Converter Frequencies This window
404. onnection window will open All specified levels correspond to the master service and its bandwidth All values apply to the higher master service frequency Riickwegpegel am selektierten Anschlufi l f x Masterdienst Telefonie Ruckweg Fegel era doy bei 50 0 MHz D mpfung zum Receiver F j 2 6 dB bei 50 0 MHz dE bei 50 0 MHz D mpfung zu Kablemodems fi 9 5 23 7 Pegel am Receiver P f 00 0 doy bei 50 0 MHz Maz Sendepegel dahinter fai doy bei 50 0 MHz Alle Pegelwerte beziehen sich auf 0 20 MHz Subkanal B andbrette The level is calculated by AND as follows AND calculates the attenuation from the selected point to the return path receiver and the attenuation to all return path transmitters behind it All values apply to the higher master service frequency The level is calculated from the attenuations at the selected point by the following formula Level Reception level Attenuation at the selected point AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 342 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation 9 4 6 Blocking return paths for particular connections You can control the direction of flow of the return path signal with reverse installation of taps and splitters by blocking the return path for certain connections Do this by clicking the connection select the Pin info item in the tree on the left and then activate the Cut off reverse path option t Objekt bearbeiten Objektdaten Anschluss Info
405. or Default planning type ell Types aa planning ype T D Object handle Headend able rules ee Format 12 Q Server sequence B Level nnd O beiei 4 gt L Dynamic label i 9 Test Point C Level BI Amciifier List 2 applies for D Level pane US E s 4 B Level E Channel List Default 5 y vil Default DLevel x C D Level tJ Fibre Cable All NLI 63 Coax Cable Apply automatic format to V Default Location rectangle encosur do not apply Gz Headend NL 4 B Termination Device Create counter for objects A tevel NLS B Trench point with no counter in Bevel Building do not create 7 C evel Applicable rules ooo o ov B Trench Object ee V Devel Global force rules B Rack 7 ga A B evel Project rules 4 1 3 C D4evel Global default rules eoo M N1 8 ada osete 9 ap 10 Eip Rules source legend T N3 2 Force J Project Global T NL4 NLS Location Search SS Don t search Search in sheet Search in whole project recursivly Default font do se x gt current shee Arial Western Select Use font entire project in Dialogs 9 current selection block Update all labels when dialog is closed Reset label s textsize do not create 7 z SSS current sheet Save Settings Load Settings Cancel entire project current selection block The elements numbered there are 6 Planning type combo the planning type chosen from this combo will mak
406. or down in the order and Move Down Saves the current WMS document with a new filename If a WMS document with the specified filename already exists you will be prompted to assign a different filename WMS Data Source dialog box In the WMS Data Source dialog box you can create or edit a WMS Data Source You can also edit the availability and the default visibility settings AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 182 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps a WMS Data Source Name Digitales Orthophoto 2m BVV URL http geodaten bayern de ogc ogc_dop200_oa cgi Query capabilities Layer Options Digitales Orthophoto 2m BVV Aufnahmedatum Visible Auto z FJ DOP 200 Farbe Tke F DOP 200 Graustufen From 1250000 To 1 500 r Ingore bounding box Transparent Color Transparency in 0 Cancel OK WMS Data Source dialog box Query capabilities Sends a WMS query GetCapabilities to the WMS server at the entered URL If the query is successful the name of the data source will be taken over and the tree view filled with WMS layers In the tree view you can define for each layer by setting clearing the checkmarks whether it will be displayed on the WmsClient Plugin tool bar option for ignoring the bounding box for each layer Transparent Color Define the display options for the complete WMS data source and These display options are applied when the ma
407. ording to the following priorities Target levels reached Unity gain i e the same attenuation on all parallel branches Max cable modem sending level This adjusting method is global if the network i modified at a particular position this could possibly have an effect on the value of all the amplifiers in the network Advantage The planner has little to concen himself with The adjustment is flexible and is successful under various conditions f Only attenuation compensation The amplifier directly after the receiver is set in such a way that the receiver receives ite target level All other amplifiers only compensate the attenuation to the following amplitier in the return path This adjusting method is local 4 change in the network in a given place will only affect the required value for a single amplifier Advantage The adjustment of the amplifiers i easier to follow simple zero offset for each amplifier Disadvantage The planner must concern himself with the functioning of the return path The attenuation of all the houses must be similar e g through Introduction of special return path attenuators The attenuation between amplifiers must always comply with the range of the proceeding amplifiers AND sets up all return path amplifiers with the exception of the amplifier directly behind the receiver according to the following simple rule Every amplifier should be able to compensate for the atten
408. orkstation for this user if header then detect if a fitting hotspot type already exists and propose it Find matching metadot 6 if the header is clear then the columns must be filled by it as default e let the user select the hotspot type as proposed default if detection positive from existing Find matching metadot 6 as new type Create new metadot 6 let the user select the columns to be imported let the user map a column to be imported to a hotspot attribute DAA e allows the user to choose to import hotspots with geo position or not 4 e allows the user to start the import A new meta type will be made public to server DB and clients if anew meta type was created when import is completed the overview is updated if hotspots have geo position and layer is visible AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 261 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Examples A First example is about importing from a csv file hotspots with geoposition using Import file has header option and Find matching metadot The variables defined in hotspot type properties dlg will be used like header I chose to show the hotspot with label in format Street House No E Edit hotspot properties E4 Hotspot properties Type name Hp_address Type name id H_HP_ADDRESS Searchable w Keep on delete w Display properties Minimum size 5 Color yi
409. oss all projects when connected with the AND Smart Server Cables are a special case You should allocate meaningful cable numbers for example to identify the apartment at the tap output when working with star distribution systems AND provides functions for automatically numbering cables see Automatic Numbering of Objects Page 122 If the Location Type is set to current location you can create an address in the Location area If you have already created the address data for the project the postal code city and street are then already preset Also see the Project Organization section Page 198 It is also recommended that you allow the installation numbers to be automatically generated This is done based on the automatic numbering and labeling settings See the Automatic Object Numbering Page 122 and Automatic Object Labeling Page 122 sections AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 45 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Editing plug connections Plug connections are automatically generated by AND However if you wish to create a connection manually select the component and press the C key for Edit Connector The first connection for the component will now blink red in the drawing and the Select Pin window will open Here click Next Connection if you want to edit a different connection and then click OK The Edit Object window with the Plug Connector tab will appear If you point to
410. ot these measured points in the map using the GIS insertion points Specify the GPS coordinates for at least two points and let the program recalculate them into projection coordinates This method is not very exact and cannot carry out any equalization but it helps in cases where there are no preliminary plans and more exact data is not available Here is how you add GIS insertion points e Select the New GIS Insertion Point icon and set to points on the map by clicking the appropriate locations After the first point has been set the Enter Data for Drawing Object menu opens GIS insertion point GIS Insertion Point ae 10613 1074451 Longitude 7 90119437 Y 15318527 140796 Latitude 4799855152 Gauss Krueger 3 degree wide strips JDHON PD DE 2001 lt 3m Ravenberg Bessel Meridian stip 1 3 degree E Type f Auto f Manual O GIS Reference IPS Position Longitude Get GPS position Latitude Height m W Add a Crozstest for thie Data Format T ext 2G Auto Installation Mo Installation Type Unknown Cancel Enter the approprate data under GIS Insertion Point and finish with OK Then set the second point Press the Esc key to finish AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 186 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps e Click the first GIS insertion point The Edit Object window opens with the GIS InsertPoint tab LE Edit Objet Object Data
411. ou wish When plotting cables place them in the middle of the worksheet connection symbols AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 205 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets Calculating to the sheet centre When a cable enters the sheet AND calculates an extension from the sheet border to the sheet centre The dotted line shows the extension calculated by AND This method provides acceptable results for most cases AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 206 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets Function jump to the next worksheet connection This function is implemented in AND 4 0 as from Build 788 The function can be called using the context menu and the short cut W Example Zoom all oom inka zoom detail zoom last Ctrl PgDown Select all objects CTRL 6 B Move object E Delete object F ColorfLayer T Label F Pin information 5 Open sheet Inherit wire data Lock object Leave sheet R Calculate optical power G Mark optical line Locate fiber breakage WW Jump to next sheet connector 1 Show Signalpath Colored Insert OLE Object Ctrl V K Load block Load sheet Back to Gis 4rea project Print active View Properties Enter The figure shows the context menu for the green selected worksheet connection that leads to Feldherrnallee 7 After the function has been called AND jumps to the worksheet connection in Feldherrnallee 7 to which the r
412. oute leads and causes the worksheet connection to flash As with the Label with Target Address function the path search is purely mechanical i e without a signal The path search fails if there is no next worksheet connection or a fork in the path e g splitter is found Taps are not considered to be forks in the path because the con tinuing path is always taken see documentation on Label with Target Address AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 207 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets 6 3 2 Settings for worksheets You will find the settings for worksheets under PROJECT DATA gt Project and Worksheet Data You are automatically taken to the Worksheet tab You can switch between the different worksheets in the tree list on the left AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 208 of 452 Worksheet tab 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets User definable number that will appear in the worksheet legend important information on printed paper and that will determine the sequence when printing Do not assign the same number more Sheet Basics Sheet View Settings GIS Scale Identification ID ic Noa 4 Object No Sheet Name NE3 Comment Logical Size fix DIN A4 160x114 C free Width 150 Type and Form C variable 160 _ Orientation Setup New _ Clear Sheet 60 Print Sheet Load Sheet
413. p to the middle of the component This way no cable lengths are lost even if the symbol has no actual geographical dimensions 30 00m GIS scaling rul T scaling ruler i Cable with a tap a Cable with two taps aud 30 00m COAX 3 Dimensioning 30 00m ei AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 189 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps The length calculation is always automatically called if any relevant changes have been made to the cable and if the automatic length calculation was not deactivated when the length was overwritten Object Data Cable data El Cable CUAx4 Coan r Lengths l Component information Calculated 20 20 m b Base data Nr 1 H Attributes Nr 2 Manual mE m Cable Mr 3 Frequency Respons URL e UAL Color layer information i Color layer informatic Owner Data i Owner Data Cable type coax Edit type LayingT ype Laying Type Temperature group pew G Dynamic data o ha Cable data Allow Trench Cross Section to Change the Color Ey Database W Copy the properties to the cables connected through sheet connector ie Location l rst Mo Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 190 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps 5 1 5 GIS and cluster planning If AND Smart Server is installed on your system GisArea is also available This GIS enhancement provides the AND S
414. path amplifiers are undone All levels refer to the service identified as the master service and its bandwidth Max transmission level You can choose between two different ways of setting the max transmission level for the amplifier setting Max Sending Level C Use value set in service Mis dB pi f Max Sending Level 12 ddw ___ __ The target level is read from the master service Set the maximum level independently of the master service This is used integrate safety reserves for example 3 dB below the maximum transmission level in the service AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 321 of 452 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check Target reception level You can choose one of three different ways of setting the target reception level for the amplifier setting The target level is read from the master service This option is advisable if the return path receiver is not at the signal source f Use value set in service 73 dE p a typical feature of NL4 plans You enter a fixed level at the connection point Target Level at Receiver Source The first amplifier willber djusted that the reverse signals reach the receler bri aint with that target level C Calculate from the FM Level at the bridge point targetlevel 57 FM Pegel mas sending level of cable modem 0 Take level entered in bridgepoint If zero take 107 dB In the case of return path lasers you c
415. patible with the AND 3 2 and earlier product range because of a new file format Report types Standard templates exist for the following report types Bill of materials remote powering amplifier lists cable lists location lists legends project data MyTask products signal points splice reports TD customers reports optical circuit diagrams and channel tables Reports from earlier versions of AND are re categorized The following reports and categories are available e Technical reports in the CALCULATION gt Technical Reports menu Channel table Cable list Amplifier list e Project lists in the PROJECT DATA gt Project Lists menu Acceptance Address list Outgoing order Incoming order Outgoing order list Cable list Conformity declaration Object list ProjectInfo network Signal point Location sketch Cable route plan Cable route plan section e Material MATERIAL gt Report menu Bill of materials Bill of materials without prices Order Offer Short offer Amplifier list Amplifier list 1 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 427 of 452 11 Output options 11 3 Reports Evaluating trench sections You can define specific information for trench sections which is then displayed in the evaluations This information appears in the worksheet indicated by a flag Phase DOT Name Place 3 Number no 3 Phase pla Geopos gi V Add
416. pecifying the benchmark value the signal therein is not described at all An imaginary straight line or a cable flexed curve is drawn between the benchmark values with the hope that the real frequency response curve does not deviate too much from this imaginary line Definition B A cable flexed compensation curve power line is laid through all level frequency points and the values for level and pre emphasis are defined as follows Level Level value of the curve in the highest channel Pre emphasis Value of the curve in the highest channel value of the curve in the lowest channel This definition is more difficult to understand and communicate because it is rarer The advantage of this definition is that the approximate frequency response curve is definable for the entire signal Unlike Definition A the values generated by Definition B for level and pre emphasis are hardly susceptible to outlying values at the benchmark frequencies The following figures show the differences between both definitions The frequency is plotted along the x axis and the level is plotted along the y axis The peaks of the vertical green lines are the level values of the individual channels The blue curve is the power line Pegel Pegel 86 0dBuV_ _Frg 55 000 MHz 00 0 ___Cursor auf beliebige Frg 100 0 mt t et A E B an dan Gaan tem aan Bana Hema na 40 150 260 370 480 590 700 8
417. pen end points of the trench system with one operation proceed as follows Li 2 3 Double click the cable in the object selection window Left click a point in the trench Right click a second point in the trench Choose the Cable for All Directions command from the context menu The cable will be routed from the start point in the trench to every individual open end point AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 164 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 3 Laying cables in trenches 4 3 3 Generating cables in all directions If cables are already plotted and you wish to plot a trench along its path add a trench sheath to this cable Do this by selecting the cable and right clicking it Then choose the Generate Trench Sheath command 4 3 4 Plotting dimensioning arrows If you wish to precisely measure a trench section and provide it with a dimensioning arrow create a length measurement for the section in question Click the Length Dimension icon on the toolbar 2 Now click the control points to be dimensioned in any sequence After the last point press the Esc key 3 Move the mouse upward to specify the height of the boundary lines for the dimensioning line and left click it 4 Finish by pressing the Esc key LJ is the start point 25 46m is the end point is the distance you move a described in step 3 The dimensioning looks like this for example Click the control point
418. plied maps is controlled by using a number of GUI elements which are described below WmsClient Plugin tool bar The WmsClient Plugin tool bar is the central GUI element of the AND WmsClient plugin It enables the user to select WMS documents for display to control the visibility of available WMS layers to influence the display of maps and to manage WMS documents AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 179 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps oes a EKE Grabungsatias 3 D SirisMap ie Leerrohre Q TiefbaumaBnahme j Geol Is Bebauungsplaene des Landkreises Starnberg B Bauleitplanung DJ Bebauungsplaene GeoLIS LRA Starnberg Q Bebauungsplaene J Sonstige Institutionen in Bayern Y Sonstige Institutionen in Bayern Industrie und Handelskammern Fl che Q Industrie und Handelskammern Standort Q Industrie und Handelskammern Texte 2 Handwerkskammern Fl che Handwerkskammern Standort Q Handwerkskammern Texte j Verwaltungsgrenzen Bayern v Verwaltungsgrenzen Bayern Y Gemeinden Verwaltungsgemeinschaften gemeinde Q Gemeinden Verwaltungsgemeinschaften gemeinde Q Gemeinden Verwaltungsgemeinschaften gemeinde Q Landkreise und kreisfreie St dte Fl che Q Landkreise und kreisfreie St dte Standort Q Landkreise und kreisfreie St dte Texte Q Bezirke Fl che WmsClient Plugin tool bar ce individual ae elements have the following tasks Function Description Element
419. points see the Component Editor Manual This option is designed to simplify the combination of various equipment versions for example entry and exit splitters in complex amplifiers Another application is the mechanical connection between SAT LNC and the parabolic dish AND needs this connection to calculate noise and levels from SAT signals This is how to create an assembly object 1 Draw an object that is suitable for assembly into the worksheet 2 Select the object and press the M key for Assemble Object The Select Assembly Object window will open Choose mounting object Group Power supply AC500 Verstarker Remote powering 65 WAC Local powering euro plug 230 WAC Local powering UK plug 230 VAC Here all objects will appear that can be assembled and interchanged Only objects that are suitable for assembly will appear in this window Select an object from the list and confirm with OK The two objects are now connected to each other and will be treated as a single object If you wish to mount further objects to this select the assembly object and confirm with the M key once again 6 The Select Pin window will now open ae Select pin Pin No 1 Assembly Pin Assembly PinSymbol AC500 Verstarker kompakter Breitbandverstarker optionell umrustbar zu einem Fibre Hode Edit Next Cancel 7 You can switch back and forth between the still unoccupied pints by clicking Next
420. ports supplied with the software package in German and English with the associated report type German English Type KundenReport TD Customer report TD MaterialListe BOM Bill of materials MaterialListeOhnePreise Bill of materials ObjektListe Location list OptDurchschaltPlan Opt circuit diagram ProjektInfoNetz Project data SignalPunkte Signal points SpleissReport Splice report StandardLegende Legend VerstaerkerListe AmpList Remote powering amplifier list AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 430 of 452 11 Output options 11 3 Reports Creating reports When you generate a report with CALCULATION gt Technical Reports PROJECT DATA gt Project Lists or MATERIALS gt Report a selection list opens see examples below a r Technical Reports Project Lists English OfferS hort Here you select the report and list that you wish to generate When you choose a different language the list of available reports changes If no suitable report is available in the selected language in the standard report directory a message will appear on your screen You can set the available languages in the program settings OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Select Language You should then make sure that there is a report template available for the language in question AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 431 of 452 11 Output options 11
421. position let field DOT name empty and check again Only with invalid geometry press Search button Only with invalid geometry to search for all hotspots with geo position let field DOT name empty and check again Only with invalid geometry press Search button Only with invalid geometry If you want to search a certain hotspot write the DOT name and search for it 3 Choose from the results list the hotspot for which you want to set the geo position and press Ok button As result the hotspot will appear in the overview or in the plan project make sure the Layer is visible AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 272 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Set link to other dot Setting or editing a link can be done for independent hotspots After the link creation the hotspot data updated daavar link key in database is updated immediately 1 Creation of link can be done in 4 ways Add Attach hotspot to a dot Example B from point 0O Search Jump targets links 2 lt AutoHotspotGeneration gt the hotspots is automatically created on check in of the pro ject containing dots that have this flag set to 1 O Auto generation of independent hotspot with link to it 3 Creating link using JumpRefs method described in Example 1 below 4 Set Reference described in Example 2 Set Reference below Example 1 Edit a hotspot type and create a li
422. printer icon to reactivate printability AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 217 of 452 6 Project organization 6 4 Layers 6 4 4 Deleting layers You can delete any layers that you do not need Choose PROJECT DATA gt Layer Table from the menu to open the Edit Layers dialog box Edit Layers All layers a f Standard Layers Layers fl Bereiche Name Standard Layers Freie Grafik p TER Standard Layers f Grenzen Description fl Lokalitaten f Netzplan Color Pl Freie Grafik Nzpl Kabel Printing Color Pv e Kabel GF Layer type Kabel GF Text Visible Yes wy Kabelbeschriftung gt Me punkte Printable Yes l ee Objekte se Objekte Text fee eS se in material lis es v amp Objekte GF se Objekte GF Text fl Plane fl Test Layers Standard ri fl Trassenobjekte F Dn Rl Rn Apply to Curent Sheet AllSheets Use as default in the future New Load Settings Cleanup unused layers Save Settings Cancel OK Click the Delete unneeded layers button to remove all empty and unneeded layers from the list above it You can also delete used layers that were generated from the DXF import and layers that only contain marking lines Do that by marking the layer you wish to remove from the list and clicking Delete 6 4 5 Layer tips and usage options e Use layers to group elements int
423. proximately the same CSO CTB distortions as a laboratory amplifier with flat input a level of 102 7 dBuV and a pre emphasis of 11 dB The disadvantages of Definition B are obvious The fact that in Definition B the level and the actual level in the highest channel are different leads to a variety of misunderstandings in particular because the live test points always exhibit the levels at the benchmark frequencies The amplifier dialog box thus always shows a different maximum level than the test points AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 359 of 452 9 Calculations 9 9 Calculating test points 9 9 Calculating test points The test points are recalculated in the following situations e If the CALCULATION gt Test Points option is selected e If the the Automatically Update Test Points option is activated in the test point settings see Return Path Signals and Disturbances section Page 347 the test points are recalculated after every modification to the drawing This is a very practical function but causes delay times if drawings are large We therefore recommend only activating this option in small and medium sized drawings e Clicking the Ca culate button in the Test Point List window also recalculates the test points What is calculated depends on which level values are specified in the Edit Object window under Data to Be Displayed see Editing Return Path Data Page 328 For example if the Calculated Level and
424. ps of all WMS data Transparency in o sources of the current WMS document are joined AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 183 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps 5 1 3 Scale and GIS coordinate system In addition to the coordinates system AND also has a scale for calculating lengths This allows you to calculate cable lengths independent of the originally imported coordinates system This is helpful if you would like to plot freely directly in the topographical map and not work in an orthogonal structure Typically the scale is automatically set when importing a background map Using the PROJECT DATA gt Project and Worksheet Data option and the Scale GIS tab you can display the settings and for example change how the program calculates from coordinates to lengths or how large the network symbols should be in relation to the length scale If you wish to use this setting for all of your projects the symbols will always be the same size proportionally speaking in scaled printouts or in relation to topographical objects such as a house Setting the scale manually If you have imported a map with an invalid coordinates system we recommend setting the scale before plotting in the network elements _ The best way to do this is to use the New GIS Scale icon Plot in a ruler and establish its length This will set the scale For more information see the Ruler and GIS Scaling section see Page 66
425. ptic cable zoom all zoom into zoom detail zoom last fCtr PgDown Select all objects CTRL 0 B Move object M Copy object E Delete object F Color Layer Edit location T Label P Pin information A Take Create Trench Envelope s Calculation object M Multiply Cables Insert Splitpaint Lock object I Component information Set counter manually Add direction arrow Delete direction arrows Add breakage symbol R Calculate optical power g Mark optical line Locate Fiber breakage J Show Signalpath Colored Insert GLE Object Ctrl v4 E Load block Load sheet PrintiExport Schematic Plans Prink active View Properties Enter Add Hotspot Here a Set hotspot gea position here AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 99 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode or from the context menu of the Connection Information dialog box for the pin previously calculated with R Connection Information Rosenstr 26 Bundle Col Fiber Col Wave Optic C Stat Rack Start Start Na End Rack End End Name ustomer Us i E _ 1 R 4 F 5 T g q Jom m m e ee ee m mi me S n p Lat m pt Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Ro 5 eB r str T Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Rosenstr Bearcoancte VWattinger Str VWettinge
426. r Str Wattinger Str E Teas Edit Route Mark Optical Line Refresh Jump bo Start Jump to End Jump to Initial Pin Excel Export Interconnect Plan Locate Fiber Breakage Create NIS For this Route Wettinger Str Watinogar Ste 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 36 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H 1000 H In a direct call a dialog box appears for multi core cables for selecting the fiber When calling from the connection information dialog box the fiber is defined by the selected line Dialog box for entering the distance The following dialog box appears Distance to fiber break 3 x Distance to fiber breakage 2562 5 mi za Here the distance to the break location is entered The search direction is always into the cable AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 100 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Result of the search Case A The break location is located in the current project AND generates a break location symbol automatically at the break location zooms to the break location and causes the cable to flash The message Location of the break location appears in the output window By clicking this line you can later return to the break location cs oe al N Ort der Bruchstelle Fig 1 The red double wavy line is the break symbol that has been inserted by AND The break location
427. r forgets to select one e Fixed appearance default symbol is Circle Another symbols that can be chosen are square triangle top down triangle down top cross Fixed appearance Circle Square Triangle ftop down Triangle down bop Cross e Global Layer the user can select the layer in which the hotspots will be visible If hotspot global layer is not visible within current zoom level then the hotspots are not visible in current zoom level Writing global layer is mandatory If is not written a message appear Please choose a global layer e Z order this instructs AND how will hotspots of this type be displayed relative to other hotspots when they occupy the same or close positions below or above The greater this value is the higher the hotspot appears in overview Default value is 1 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 251 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots e Label the user has the possibility to choose what he wants to be displayed within the geo project only the symbol only the label or both Example Suppose you have an metadot with fixed appearance square color green one variable named variable 1 Add a hotspot of this type in overview with variable 1 named first var e Label format click on and choose the variables you want to see in overview in this case variable 1 Order f 1 Label Format gt Variable 1
428. r object selection The object selection window is available to you for selecting objects you wish to plot in a network plan show as List Show as Tree Find Sy i d Show as List show as ree Find Sps d FE Symbols GD VERT F HE ABZ Ww 1 FACH ED ABZw F 2 FACH EQ ABFW F 3 FACH A E MULTITAP H E ENDDOSEN H E DURCHGANGSDOSEN H E MULTIMEDIADOSEN A E ABSCHLUB 75 OHM EQ ABZ wt F 4 RACH HE PAD STECKER F H E PAD STECKER IEC H E EG STECKER F H E EK FILTER I Cables w 105 3 13 dB 0 4 2 5 32 dB 0 6 3 3 22 dB a To display objects you must load one or more libraries AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 38 of 452 Editing the libraries list 2 Fundamentals 2 13 Loading libraries for object selection Before you begin plotting objects create a list of all the libraries from which you would like to select objects Click with the right mouse button in the object selection window and choose the Edit Library List command The libraries window will open Click here to select the li braries that you wish to use in your network plan and load into the local memory Load braries Only ever use the preset path Only the library name will be saved in the drawing files not the path If you wish to load a library from a path other than the pre sent path AND many not find it once you have re loaded the drawing Select the libraries and load them in this way
429. ramD ata ahD LIBSOLD Options Setup Paths Refresh File Name kathyrt lib of3 2001 4 02 02 Kathrein tbky V3 1 4 18 2005 538 2 Kathreintet_ V3 Vib 7 21 2005 8 540 MNEUTZBEY LIB MEUT2GGA4 LIE MEUTZHY LIB NEUTZ25AT LIB MEUT25TR LIE NEUTAVAT LIE Meutsbky lib Neutdgga lib Meutshy lib Neutdopt lib Neutdsat lib Neutdstr lib Meutavrt lib Meut4bk w lib Neutgwrt lib a 12 20 1999 2 25 12 20 1999 2 26 12 20 1999 2 26 12 20 1999 2 27 12 20 1959 2 27 12 20 1999 2 28 6 18 2000 5 15 2 12 20 1333 218 12 20 1999 2 22 12 20 1999 2 22 12 20 1999 2 23 12 20 1999 2 23 12 20 1999 2 24 10 27 2003 9 54 10 27 2003 9 54 t Standard Additional Quick find neut3 Page 39 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 13 Loading libraries for object selection Extensions of the library functions Implemented as from 4 0 765 61 and 4 2 847 0 Before replacing a library ask whether to link the library C On ever change f Only on essential changes component type pin position Only if objects are missing M Update crosstests automatically after loading a library Load Settings Library dialog box with the new options with a red border Save Sethngs 1 You can set for what type of library changes a query dialog box will appear for example TAND Information Fress Yes to replace the old library by the new version The library WHELMUTVACAAND SS LIB
430. ratorManagerName Contact person at AND PROJECT DATA Projektfirmen operator Betreiber Contact OrderDate Order date AND PROJECT DATA Auftrags Daten Auftragsdaten Order date OrderDeadLine Order deadline AND PROJECT DATA Auftrags Daten Auftragsdaten Order deadline Planning company AND PROJECT DATA Auftragsdaten Planungsfirma Name AND PROJECT DATA Auftragsdaten PlanerCompany PlanerLocation City Planungsfirma Street Postal code City PlanerManager Contact person at AND PROJECT DATA Auftragsdaten planning company Planungsfirma Contact Telephone AND PROJECT DATA Auftragsdaten Planungsfirma Phone PlanerPhone Position Item in the list Preis Component price Project number AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Identifikation Project No AND PROJECT DATA Auftragsdaten Historie EDIT AND PROJECT DATA Auftragsdaten Historie EDIT ProjectNumber RevDatum Change date RevDesc Description of change RevisionsNR Change number RevName Changed by RevPosition Serial change number AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH v jab 4 AK A _ O r AK O1 NO 11 Output options 11 4 Report designer Variable Meaning Program reference ReverseActive Return path active AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Technik Netzinformationen Return path active ReverseFilter Return path filter AND PROJECT D
431. rawing Modes s ss 52222222u2220u2222u2 20u2020u2uunnnnnnnn 25 2 6 Schematic and geo schematic operating Mode s ssss22222 22222222222 22 20 27 2 7 Navigating and ZOOMING ssss 5222222u2222u2u20u20u0u2uunnnnnnnnnnnnnn 28 ie fee Navigating between documents cc ccccccccceeeeee eee e eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeeeee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeaaaaanes 28 2 7 2 Navigating between worksheetS s ssssssssssnssssnssnssrnnssennssennessnnesnsnennsnrnnenenne 29 2 73 Navigating IN Worksheets arseron eean 30 2 7 4 Navigating beyond document boundaries ssssssssssssnrsrrnrsrrsrrnrerrnrerenrsrrnnerrnns 31 2 7 5 ZOOMING aoe a hued deeere ih ene ot ett a eh aisha iste anatase 31 2 8 Selecting ODICCES siririn AEREE 32 2 9 LOCKING ODJECUS isinisisi raaa raai 34 2 10 MOVING OD CCUS iinan AAAA 35 2 11 CODVING ODJECES ivorian aO 36 2 12 Deleting ODICCUS rroia aa N 37 2 13 Loading libraries for Object selection sssssunsnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 38 2 14 Network planning MOG eiccin aaa aa 44 2 14 1 PIONO a COMPONE ME iair E A aol aa TA 44 2 14 2 PIOLUING a caD Otre ne a a aea 48 2 14 3 Piloting other OBJEC S irinn na AEA AAE AAA ai 52 2 14 4 Editing and changing Caples oenas aa a a a 113 2 14 5 Automanc ADEIING Of ODI CCU renen aa aaea 115 2 14 6 Dynamic Labels and Hierarchy Path cc ccc cc cece eee eeeeeeeeeee seen eeeeeeeeeeeeaanaaaes 117 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution
432. rdinates Destination coordinates Upper Left 6wer Fi Upper Left Lower Right Easting 0 Easting 0 Easting C Easting 0 Northing 0 Northing Northing 0 Northing f0 Gauss Krueger 3 degree wide strips v Gauss Krueger 3 degree wide strips DHDN PD DE 1995 lt 5m Rauenberg Bessel v DHDN FD DE 1995 lt 5m Rauenberg Bessel Native Meridian Strip v Native Meridian Strip OK Cancel In the Target Coordinates area select the target reference system and click Transform Now the data under Current Coordinates are recalculated and displayed under Target Coordinates Finally click OK and the target coordinates will become the current worksheet coordinates Once you are connected again to the server using AND a corresponding server projection will automatically be sought for the current reference system enabling you to continue working online with the current GIS data immediately The opposite direction is also possible if you have called up a drawing while online and wish to log AND off of the server in the meantime a corresponding reference system is automatically sought so that you can continue working offline with the current GIS data AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 185 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps Defining GIS insertion points If you have no coordinates for the imported map but can measure out distinctive points in the map using GPS you can pl
433. re emphasis is then also interpreted as the difference between the values of the smoothing function for the highest and lowest channel It makes sense to use power lines if ripple data for amplifiers and passive components are entered in the library If these data are missing using power lines is more confusing than helpful If you are using an 860 MHz amplifier for a 606 MHz channel spacing for example you should bear in mind that each equalization also causes attenuation in the highest channel An 860 MHz equalizer of 10 dB then causes an attenuation of 2 4 dB and pre emphasis of 7 6 dB in the highest channel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 314 of 452 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check 9 3 Network check The network check is a very powerful feature of AND It can be used to check the functionality of the loaded network very quickly The following items are verified by the network check Network structure Amplifier settings Temperature drift Remote powering Signal connection points Open tap output levels Distortion products Plug connections The entire return path including unity gain amplifier settings reception level ingress Test point actual target comparison EMC test point limits Start the network check function by calling CALCULATION gt Network Check The results of the network check are shown in the Setting the Return Path Amplifier see Page 336 All results are listed here Clicking one o
434. re groups Edit temperature groups Temperature groups Description Erdverleat Minimal temperature 15 0 T Typical temperature 110 0 E Maximal temperature 5 0 E New Save settings Load settings Delete Cancel The Remote Supply Check checks whether all remotely supplied consumers are sUpplied and whether the voltage power i sufficient Check mas current trough pins Save Settings Load Sethngs Cancel The program checks whether all remotely powered loads are receiving power and whether the applied voltage is sufficient AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 317 of 452 Checking socket levels Here you set the desired level limits for the subscriber outlets The subscriber socket level check ascertains all levels for every fre quency at all sockets and checks them against the limit values speci fied below Checking bridge points 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check n Set up warnings for Net Check Warnings Check net structure Setup amplifiers Temperature drift Check remote supply KEIKI KI KK IK Check bridge points i C Check distortion Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Check upstream BiS Check leakage limit Check socket levels Check open tap pin levels Test point CURRENT TARGET com The subscriber level check discovers all levels for each frequency at al
435. reated with the Save Sheet option is loaded using the FILE gt Open command any existing worksheet connections will be converted to entry or exit points lf you edit such a document and update it using the FILE gt Save option and then later load it into another project the entry and exit points will be converted back to worksheet connections AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 215 of 452 6 Project organization 6 4 Layers 6 4 Layers Layers refer to the levels or layers of a worksheet that can be placed on top of each other rather like overhead projection slides You can assign attributes to a layer for instance color visibility and printability All objects assigned to a layer network elements vectors of a topographical map plan etc that are assigned to a layer inherit these attributes In AND you can create as many layers as you wish and administer them in groups A group has the advantage that for example all layers in a group can be switched together from visible not visible this is naturally also possible for an individual layer When you import DXF maps their layers are created in and applied to AND When accessing the AND Smart Server all GIS layer in the GIS_1 are bundled together 6 4 1 Defining layers globally To specify general settings for layers choose PROJECT DATA gt Layer Table from the menu The Edit Layers window will open r Edit Layers AO All layers Layer
436. red subchannels O then the levels refer to the overall bandwidth field next to Center Frequency However if the number of entered subchannels gt O the levels refer to the bandwidth of the subchannels AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 335 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation 9 4 4 Setting the return path amplifier To set up the return path amplifier in your network select CALCULATION gt Preset Amplifier s Target Values Setup Alternatively you can set up the return path amplifier in the network check When completed your setup is output in a window Enter the options for the amplifier setting and the target values in the Return Path Amplifier Setup window You will find a description for this in the Ca culating the Return Path Level at One Point section see Page 342 Return path amplifiers are defined as connector components of forward path amplifiers You must select the return path amplifier yourself in the Edit Object window on the Amplifier Data tab Open the window by clicking the amplifier on the network plan Amplifier data Nr 1 Transponder Nr 2 Power Consumption Nr 3 C Settings Target Values Current Values Both active and passive return path modules can be defined Built In Regulators Level at Amplification 335 dB Target Level 90 5 deyv max Frq 90 5 dBpV according te an beeen ia mere ne defined for a particular amplifier T ON enaaca
437. revious section is present in the metadot definition Library object if that object has a library object for which a numbering format is defined see the previous section about LibEdit Force numbering settings this is an XML containing numbering formats for one or more object types that has priority over the project numbering settings Its purpose is to be able to override current numbering settings in a project on project load Project numbering settings the numbering settings that apply on this project Global numbering settings this is an XML containing numbering formats for a set of de fault object types 2 14 7 2 Rules of precedence Force numbering settings and Global numbering settings are kept in the global settings path and can be edited from AND only by users with write rights on the global settings folder The precedence of the numbering formats is the one from the list above first the numbering is searched in object s metadot then in its library object and so one defaulting to the Global numbering settings AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 123 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode 2 14 7 3 Editing of the numbering settings from dialog Automatic Labeling and Numbering em t3 E ie E z lt 4 P Project b Automatic Numbering Automatic Text Automatic Filename Dynamic Objects Ar 4 iv A al ill S Sheet number i Apply f
438. rint Block The print preview window will open TAND FibreCoax 4 3 Main Alternative 261 2 Bick POFExpat __Info_ Zoomin Start printing from here 0 Projekt Main Alternative 261_2 HK_Onet lt HK 261 2 01 gt Datum 10 13 2010 9 43 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 420 of 452 11 Output options 11 1 Printing 11 1 5 Printing splice boxes Call up the object properties for a splice box in your network drawing The Splice Box tab in the Edit Object window will be displayed 2 Edit Object a LU Object Data Splice box Allocation of fibres Splice box Splicebox_pete Component information Click here to print Base data Nr 1 Reset out the splice box gt Symbol Data Nt 2 URL Color layer information a Color layer informatic Owner Data Automatic Splice Owner Data Direction g a oe Splice box Ox ee Database x right Location Inst No Nr te opposite 4 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 421 of 452 11 Output options 11 1 Printing 11 1 6 Page setup Select FILE gt Page Setup to preset the output options The Page Setup window will open J 2 3 4 The worksheets are adjusted tOo Gaps fit the size of the printed page Scaling A A Supress Printirig OF Preview A DIN A3 drawing is scaled t
439. rmining Reception and Transmission Levels If the target values that you want to set for the return path amplifier see Page 321 are compatibile with the existing network attenuations to the transmitters and their transmssion level window the target reception level will be used as the reception level Otherwise the reception level closest to the target value will be used For example if the reception level is 85 dBuV and the attenuation between the transmitter and receiver is 25 dB AND assumes that this transmitter will transmit at 85 25 110 dBuV AND therefore assumes there will be communication between the transmitter and receiver The receiver tells the transmitter to transmit at 110 dBuvV The network check outputs the receive level for every service as well as the minimum and maximum transmission level of the transmitters If your master service has a larger bandwidth for example 15 to 65 MHz and if the slopes in the return path range are not compensated by equalizers the minimum transmission level output in the network check may deviate slightly from that output by the amplifier setup 0 to 1 dB This is due to the following The Frame function calculates all attenuations between the amplifiers at the highest frequency of the master service for example 65 MHz The minimum and maximum transmission levels output by the amplifier setup reflect the attenuation differences between the transmitters at 65 MHz The minimum a
440. rntueccsnrisenssstieeedenctasnsunveanseseveenneenne 148 3 2 House Structure orarie aE a EOE a ENEA 150 3 3 DISCHIDUTION ICV Cl cs caviscernnmictersatiedencateedarssceriensnes cdescensianneciatenceessnescanncuases 151 3 3 1 PUNK SUCUT aayon a a E A OIEA 151 J32 POVO E T T autor eee 152 3 323 COMMDOMCMILS marrara A EAO E E E EEEE 153 3 3 4 ODUOMS c2sctasssstceesensseeasecasetnenensctesauetonescaetneeasetasaanecesaeunsceqeeeenneesisetesanase 153 3 4 GENnerating a GrAWING wiceriicssetnrrnecsensveccniinecrnenreestnesevwnsiwrerusnaeenseniecn nannies 154 3 5 Tap OPtlimiZatlOny sisri A 157 4 Civil works planning EEA A A A A A A A E A A A E Lo 4 1 Layers TOF CFONCMeS neisiet 161 4 2 PIOCEING trench SECCELONS wii ccdiacniccvenereceicnsvacaluravenedteewensiunerasaaneenunesieenumnes 162 4 3 Laying cables in trenches eiciia veccsesereunnineys 163 4 3 1 DUPCIA CADES a a E 164 4 3 2 Plotting cables m a directions irmsrrnarn a a a aaa 164 4 3 3 Generating cables in all directionS ssssssssssssssnsssnnssrnnesnnnesnsnennsnrnnsnennesren 165 4 3 4 Plotting dimensioning attr OWS cenieni T T A E 165 4 3 5 Keyboard design assistance sssssssssssssssronessnnssronessrnssnsnssnsnrenssrenesrenesnnnne 167 4 4 Trench crossS s ctoNS caracateniiictieninaceeveiveetevninaedieaineedivedeeetemnduertiicecnieeeces 168 4 4 1 TWISEING CONGUITS IM TREN CMES fanran A A peaaaiaaaua ered omae 170 4 4 2 Tenc SECU ONS mirren ae ena a a a a aa a a aa 171 4 4 3 Trench cross se
441. rom Top to Botton Trunk Distribution Position Feed Point inthe 2 Trunk or Centralize the Feed Point 1 Home run center Network Summarize 2 Trunks After Position 1 x Indicates the trunk at which the feed point will be located in your system seen from the left Entering O or activating the Centralize the Feed Point option positions the feed point centrally AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 151 of 452 3 Automatic Drawing Mode 3 3 Distribution level 3 3 2 Levels On the Levels tab you edit the test points and set the levels r Automatic net generation Type Structure Distribution Trunks Levels Components Options Click Change to edit the test points at the feed point For how to proceed see the Editing Test Points section 0 0 0 0 dBuV Change Necessary Subscriber Levels 60 0 384 0 6 0 dBuV Change Limit settings The subscriber level check discovers all levels for each frequency at all sockets and compares them with the limits given below Click Change and the arte Limit Settings window will Level min E0 dByly open Level max s dV Level difference max E0 dB Level min 50 2 dew Level mas 65 S dB Level difference max 5 0 dB Save settings Caution If you wish to use a feed point as the signal source and no data is entere
442. rom bottom to top Fig 10 The three microducts are brought into the SAI from the right Assigning microducts automatically In normal status the duct package has no taps The taps are inserted via optical network termination units to the target point Optical network termination points and open cables The automatic assignment function requires target points in the houses The target points are optical network termination points or cables with one free pin The network termination points have the following symbols i AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 382 of 452 Selecting the target points using the block function 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts The list of the target points is determined by the network termination units within the block if i e e SS SS ST I E GBE paa A SAOS a t a GamE 1p 0 E a noon Te a r i 2 nl es i a M Pi e San ee SSS w Tes Te e a _ ne a Tem I 1 l j i i f A e F l if i ee l l aai l i F a r fi I fh Fi l f 7 i i i I i f j f T Fi Pi I Buni H d fg a r i i 5 m i i i f Fig 11 A block with three network termination points All elements of the block are drawn in blue ma a It is immaterial whether other object types are present in the block in this case an MD split It is possible to add or remove network termination points from the block by pressing the CTRL key and clicking a network termi
443. rows You can set the size of splice symbols and direction arrows via the menu Do this by choosing OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Fibers Bundle Settings You can enter the values in the dialog box that then opens spliced marked Lircle a patched 0 00 0 00 Connector 7 x patched marked Square es riot cut U 00 0 00 hone ne cut oper 0 00 Circle with twice 7 4 TW H aaa Auto Splicebox Direction annoys W Draw space saving Scale 100 me Add Bundle Splice sels emove Bundle Scale 100 A We Use fised linewidth 0 25 mm ethings Save Settings Cancel oox The size of the splice symbols in AND 3 3 corresponds to a value of 200 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 92 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode The connection information window All information and editing options of optical routes are listed in the connection information window New ma WMuseumsstr KVZ 1235 Museursstr uUseumsstr KVZ 1233 useumsstr useumsstr KVZ 1233 useuUmEstr useumsstr KVZ 1233 useumsstr useumsstr KVZ 1233 useumsstr useumsstr EV 1233 USeurmisstr useurmsstr KVZ 1233 USEUMES T useurnsstr KVZ 1233 useurmsstr useurnsstr KVZ 1233 USeurmsstr uUseumsstr KVZ 1233 USeurmsstr uSseumsstr KVZ 1233 USeurmsstr uUseumsstr KVZ 1233 USEUmMmEStT 4 u ho SSS 555555555 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SS5553555
444. rs the cables and sockets simply EA nude J by combining the number entered under l Object Number a nd Ascending numbering for MOUs on floor l i A Sb raareraias number entered in the cable or Boer a If this option is switched on you can specify the se i i T First sockets onl quence in which the floors are numbered To e Delete numbers of sockets behind first cael If the Do Not Number Subsequent Connections option is switched on only end sockets will be numbered Otherwise all even loop through sockets will be numbered If the Delete Other Cable Numbers option is switched on the numbers of all cables that are not connected to sockets whose numbers were changed will be deleted otherwise the cable numbers are not changed Note The following general standard is recommended Cables should contain an object number apartment location Sockets should only contain the apartment location This way the cables on the multitap can also be distinguished when the cables lead to a single point from more than one house To find the sockets that only have the apartment location we recommend enclosing them in a location rectangle with the object number as well as the installation number AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 227 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options 6 5 3 Locations Addresses are usually the most important keys for accessing information AND allow
445. rwriting the background subsequently Select the text and click with the left mouse button The Edit Object window will appear Activate the Overwrite Background option Overwriting the background general setting Choose the OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Additional Settings command Switch on the Create New Text in Overwrite Background Mode option AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 55 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Worksheets AND provides you with the option of using more than one worksheet at once The first worksheet is always the main sheet that can if necessary take on an NL3 One or more headends amplifier stations and NL4 partial networks are usually integrated into sub worksheets A sub worksheet can take on the form of any icon in the sub sheet This way you can create a clear network plan and in the case of a topographical map complex stations can still be designed in schematic form If you wish to plot a new worksheet use the New Sheet icon on the toolbar Use the list arrow to open the list of possible worksheets and select the type of worksheet you wish to draw New Sheet Standard F3 New Sheet Amplifier Shift F3 New Sheet Headend Ctrl Shift F3 New Sheet NL4 Installation Ctri F3 New Sheet Optical Node New Sheet variable from Lib Alt F3 Click the location in the drawing where you wish to plot the worksheet The icon for the worksheet w
446. ry changed during red corrections Graphical display of status of objects You can assign a color to any status e g Planning corrected or Inventory corrected This allows you to identify the staus of an object directly from its color Standard function see also Page 235 f AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 233 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status 6 7 Planning type and network status Planning type and Status are attributes for defining the status of a drawing in order to be able to show a change history The planning type and network status can be specified at different points when editing objects for example in the automatic numbering and labeling when editing the location of an object or when editing the properties of the objects of a selected block In these locations you select the plan type or network status from the list that you predefined for your project You then use the Planning type and network Status to search for selectively display objects Examples In the AND Smart Server you can start a query such as Overall cable length of network level 3 Or you can select which objects are to be displayed using the Planning Type and Status toolbars Planning Type Default a Status Unknown Unknown Headend Planning New A Level Planning cancel B Level Planning corrected C Level Stock in operation Stock inoperative Stock corrected 6
447. s have AND automatically convert the datasets into connection points or NL4 worksheets Other options such as inquiries thematic maps etc can be carried out using the additional tools For more information on this see the AND Smart Server User Manual AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 191 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps 5 1 6 Background editor You can change the map section displayed in the background using the Background Editor You can enter the background by switching to the Arrange Background plotting mode L New Network Plan NET Ctrl N t Open File ctrl 0 Clase Ee Save File Ctrl lt 5 Save File as Gl Save All Server Project Manager Background d Load Bitmap Background Open from Template Load DXF DW O Background Save Template Export Drawing as DXF Convert background for edit Load and convert GIS objects Delete unused libraries Edit List of Libraries Export Drawing as TIFF Setup Page Export Bitmap Background E Print Preview Background editor 8 Print Ctrl P Print Active View f Print all open Projects Edit GIS Area Recent NDS projects 1 C Users Desktop AND1 net 2 CAND net Exit After switching only the background objects will be visible and a different toolbar will be displayed e j a H S l Zoom Factor 5 00 If you would like to return to the Network Planning plotting mode all GIS or DX
448. s gibt genau eine Route von Node 5 nach Kopfstelle mit mindestens 4 freien Fasern Route 0 Lange 3591 6 m Anzahl freie Fasern 19 Stationen Node 5S gt Muffe 2 gt Node 3 gt S Fig 1 Route O has been selected in the output window and appears colored green 18 PICA CISeNe A FT Z Beethovenstr 2 T C db D ZZ Tee LL a 3 Fig 2 Excerpt from a worksheet of the route AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 85 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode The worksheet connection leading to Beethovenstr is part of the route The cable section has the selection color light green and the following autosplice boxes A and B indicate free fibers with the letter F The autosplice box A fans out in 12 core bundles The labeling rule is F lt quantity gt e g F8 means that eight fibers are free The autosplice box B fans out in 1 core fibers The labeling rule is F for free and lt fiber number gt for not free The worksheet connection 3 is not part of the route The incoming cable is not colored and the splice boxes C and D do not have any free fibers The following figure shows the whole worksheet WW 1 Z e N F CF 81 Fra iat Fy F E The two green cables clearly indicate from where and to where connections are needed and the F and the splice boxes clearly show which pins can be used for the new connections AND Client Manual IV C
449. s is e CSO 1 x value of Level Reduction with Modulation e CTB 2 x value of Level Reduction with Modulation If for example you have entered a value of 2 5 dB in the Level Reduction with Modulation field the CTB ratio will differ by 5 dB for both calculation methods and the CSO will differ by 2 5 dB Using modulated carriers is realistic but the disadvantage is that the distortion ratios for modulated carriers are difficult to measure large measurement errors In addition all library specifications for distortion ratios correspond to unmodulated carriers Calculate intermediation noise slow option This option is deactivated by default If it is activated the intermodulation noise is calculated and added to the thermal noise which is always calculated Intermodulation noise is really only relevant for large networks with high levels As calculation is time consuming we recommend activating the option only temporarily in order to check whether the intermodulation noise in your network presents a problem CSO CTB with FM Radio channels slow option The contribution of FM radio channels to CSO CTB distortion is minimal As this calculation is time consuming you are recommended to only switch this option on temporarily in order to check once whether the radio channels are contributing to the deterioration of your network distortion ratio Splice loss of a splice point field This value is used to calculate the optical output
450. s of fibers select the relevant fibers and choose Set status from the context menu right mouse button O x Besta Cable data Nr 1 Cable End Nr 2 Cable End Nr 3 E Cable Fiber 1x1 Lengths gt Component information Calculated 37 59 m Base data Nr 1 c Fiber Nr 2 Manual 0 00 m Color code Nr 3 Wires a7 FA E L URL Color layer information Color layer informat Owner Data Owner Data LayingT ype Laying Type Cable type Fiber 1x1 Edit type Dynamic data Cable data Nr 1 Cable End Nr 2 F Allow Trench Cross Section to Change the Color Cable End Nr 3 V Copy the properties to the cables connected through sheet connector Database l Backbone Location Inst No r Connection Info Description Defect wires gt gt Emde Wie 1 1 OK Cancel For multiple selection you must use the CTRL and SHIFT key as usual Defective fibers are shown in the autosplice boxes by a large X In the figure fibers 1 and 3 of the 2nd bundle are defective If the Check network structure option is activated for the network check you will receive a warning for each defective fiber to which a signal is applied Warnungen fiir den Netzcheck einstellen Wy anger Netzstruktur uberpruten Verst rker einstellen 1 T aa Pana P mF b 1ririFk WarHnUnG NELCECHEeCRE AuUtla agepunkt Ohne Flastaser W
451. s the line thickness factor for cables Conduits are always four times wider than cables 7 spacing is calculated The symbol coordinates serve as a basis four fold minimal pin spacing in the components editor The recommended value is 100 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Scale According to Symbol Coordinates determines the factor with which the point line Page 301 of 452 8 Settings 8 3 Program settings 8 3 4 Setting user names The name of the person who logged into the Windows operating system will appear in the sheet legend and in the project history login name If you do not want this login name to appear on the printout set another name using the OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt User command 8 3 5 Setting the program language AND can be switched to another language even during operation Do this by choosing OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Select Language All available installed languages will be offered here AND will automatically switch to the selected language The LibEdit and ReportDesign programs will also reset themselves to the new language after a new program start Note A setting can also be specified in the registry The Automatic option value 0 is also available there AND will then automatically set itself up for the language specified as the standard language in the operating system control panel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 302 of 452 8 Sett
452. s to be Punkt l dimensioned 2 This iS the Pyfkt AP Q final result cunt gt 3 O a 3 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 165 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 3 Laying cables in trenches Define the appearance of the length measurement with OPTIONS gt Program Settings gt Dimensioning Styles i Dimensioning Styles axe Dimensioning Styles General Aasi Style name Standard Lines You can choose between Main line style Solid line 25 Show help lines Complete x d l ffe ren t ty p es of Help line style Solid line r i a q om measurement arrows ae Text size 40 000000 fo r exa m p e I Draw text opaque Active a filled arrow a circle Daaa 7 Display type calculated measured length a diagonal line etc Appearance Text Arrows Left anrow Filled Arrow z Right arrow g Filed Arrow Arrow size 10 00000 Arrow inversion auto Units Precision Diagits 1 Show unit Active _y Misc Data Add New Add Copy J 4 r Save settings Load settings Cancel AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 166 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 3 Laying cables in trenches 4 3 5 Keyboard design assistance If you wish to plot a cable with a certain length you can do this in two ways e Plot the cable as precisely as you can into the drawing Then drag the end point such that you achieve
453. s will be used If the auto splice box option is selected appropriately colored circles will light up at the bundle locations a i At these colored locations you can close the branched out bundles _ for example to create one bundle with one pin and ai a five fibers from five individual fibers each with one pin e To do this place the mouse pointer over a colored point or Th fe an individual fiber and hold the lt key or pe choose the Close Bundle command from the context menu At the bundle location there is now a circle that is the colour of the bundle ce a ie The digits next to the pin correspond to the number of bundles in the cable IN f_ gO Branching out a closed bundle works just like closing a branched bundle go se If the entry to the splice box is not on top and not on the left the splice box will be automatically mirrored If the allocation of fibers in the automatically generated splice box in your drawing is mirror inverted you can mirror the pin allocation AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 111 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Click the splice box and the Edit Object window will open Click the Mirror Pins button n i Edit Object Object Data Splice box Allocation of fibres E Splice box Auto Splicebox Component information Base data Nr 1 Symbol Data Nr 2 X URL Swap Pins URL Color layer information WV Draw space savi
454. s you to complete your network plan more quickly for example if you need to create multiple identical subscriber connections in an NL4 plan Read the Block Selection section see Page 33 for how to define a block Uses for working with blocks include e You have duplicated a cable but forgotten to enter the length Select all the identical cables and open the Edit Object window by clicking the block Then enter the cable lengths on the Special Properties tab e A plan contains a large number of stock cables that now need to be replaced by a new cable type Select the stock cable and replace it with the new cable e Cables are subject to different temperature fluctuations for example overhead lines or buried cables Here you can define temperature groups in FIBRECOAX only You will find more information in the Temperature Drift section see Page 317 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 133 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Saving blocks Proceed as follows to save a block 1 Select the objects that belong to the block 2 Press the S key for Save 3 Enter the file name for the block in the Save As window and select a suitable folder Inserting blocks Proceed as follows to insert a block into the drawing Press the K key for Load Block in the AND drawing The Open window will open Select a folder where the block is saved Double click the block file name The block is now attached to the
455. s you to store an address either for an entire project or for each component separately You can use the location rectangle to enclose parts of a drawing and assign an address to the rectangle For example you could define a location rectangle for a house Location triangles offer the following advantages over normal address entries All objects contained in a location rectangle inherit the address of the location rectangle The sockets contained in a location rectangle of type Object from the Management System can store subscriber data An apartment antenna can be created Object from Management System type Building objects and addresses are written and indexed for every location rectangle with a corresponding label type no and the database of the AND Smart Server The NIS schematic plan generator in AND FIBRECOAX combines the individual modules of a location rectangle For instructions on how to plot a location rectangle a location see Section Automatic Numbering of Objects Page 122 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 228 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options Searching for existing addresses You enter addresses in the Edit Objects window in the Location section In this window you can search for existing addresses in order to use them so that you do not have to enter them again Object Data Location Inst No Nr 1 Symbol rSt ViP Ausgang Refer
456. s2 2 2 2 2 281 Creating NIS SCRUCEUS ES riicecenewsntvcasndneewerdkaaenineasawaswesenueewcununrvasuaieenenenes 283 Creating NIS structures from AND drawings ccceeeeeeee eee e eens eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeennees 283 Creating NIS structures without drawings cccccseeeeeee esse eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 283 Displaying NIS StlructUre wiissiisecineiivesrisnrsvstveserrrniwerririeceriinererwtree ries 284 Displaying NOGES svicniesnssettenere athe a a nial sect a A a aaa 284 Horizontal verital display prir inna aar E TEE E AT E A 284 SPICO VIEW oaran or rE E aanaeeeter as saatereoeaneete yavecssemard 285 Remote DOWEHING VIEW siscpsiosissioidei anaa a aa aa A 286 COMPFESSING location rectangles oniran an a a a a a Geis 286 Navigating in NIS Structures cccccccccsscnnnneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneneeeeeeeeesseeeeeananas 287 ZOOMING NIS Structure Simonena a aE Ea ator a A E 287 MOVING image SSCUOMNS irena nana a a E T 287 Editing the NIS network structure ssssssssssus2us220u2220u222022220u2uunusunnnnnnnnn 289 DS CCUG NOAE Sarie aa aa a a a a aa aa pa a a a a a ae 289 Arranging network structure ODjJeCCtS ccccc cece cece eeeeeeeeeee eee e eee eeeeeeeenaaaaaes 290 Deleting NOGES GN NKSicstaiscig iad ante tees teten a taut oaae a A A 291 Editing DFO CCE Cala sescinsapsscessenmattannmcansecsns taseb mn annnanate AAO An 291 Deleting NIS DrojJ CtS dintswecsaudavintasinricamntatincatarmsantatison wr esmemntinsondmeeieemetias
457. se Network operator AND ProjektDate Projekt address Firmen Betreiber CablelengthA Cable lengths A line CablelengthB Cable lengths on AND Project Data Projekt Technik level B Kabellangen B Line CablelengthC Cable lengths on AND Project Data Projekt Technik level C Kabellangen C Line CablelengthD Cable lengths auf AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Technik Ebene D NE4 Kabellangen NL4 ClientNumber Client number AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Identifikation Client DataRef Einheitspreis Price of assembly materials for individual item AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 439 of 452 Variable Meaning Program reference ElectricalConsumption Total power con sumption FrequencyRange Frequency range Number of houses Installer Installer name AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Zustandigkeiten Installer InstallerNumber Installer number AND PROJECT DATA Projekt Kopf Zustandigkeiten No Langtext Detailed compo Libedit nent description lmdu Graphic for apart ment mirror num ber of residential units in structure gt 9 large multiple dwelling units Menge Component quanti ty Montagezeit Component as Libedit sembly time MustDoSystemCheck System check still AND PROJECT DATA Projekt required Kopf Status System check still reuired MvObjktWE Number of residen tial units in the location object MVPosition Location object serial number
458. se PROJECT DATA gt Project and Sheet Data from the menu Then select a worksheet from the tree view on the left of the System Data window and select the Sheet Settings tab Sheet Basics Sheet View Settings Gis Scale Layer Settings Edit Layer List for Layer METGE EA E W Components of this layer are visible W Components of this laper will be printed W Components of this layer will added to the material table Set the attributes 0 6 4 3 Selecting and switching layers on and off ASB Text Layer Template User defined Standard Layers Bereiche 5 Lokalitaten Pl ne i Freie Grafik Verkehrswege 4 Punkte Text i Gab Texte 26 Fl chen a aa g m 29 Verkehrswege Text 2 Fl chen Text 6 Oberflachenmerkmale Text 6 Punkte i Grenzen Netzplan oi Test Layers Standard n ee Using the Layers list box in the tool bar you can select layers and switch layers on and off This is how you work with the layers list e Double click the layer name to switch to this layer e Left click the icon in front of the layer name to deactivate the visibility and printability of this layer right click the crossed out icon to reactivate visibility and printability The screen is regenerated and you can see the changes immediately e Left click the printer icon in front of the layer name to switch off the printability of this layer click the crossed out
459. sections between them This option must be activated for this The level calculation and the materials list will then automatically assume that at each point where two sockets are plotted directly together there is a standard cable of standard length between them Standard cables for length calculation option The standard cable length is entered here For the level enter the minimum level at each connection point behind the tap The program already shows the maximum possible length of the set standard cable in the planning stage in a tooltip AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 368 of 452 9 Calculations 9 11 Calculation settings Assign cables to link objects Implemented from Build 4 5 1350 on It is possible to assign a cable and a length to a link object pair The main purpose is clearness and room saving in patch field documentation That cable will be considered by all AND Functionality Calculation BOM Connector Check You can define a default cable for fibre coax and twisted pair connections Default Cable for Links In the dialog for the calculation settings you can edit that default cable for fibre coax and twisted pair connections AND is recognizing the physical type fibre coax TwistedPair auto matically by looking to the type of the pins the link is connecting If the link is connected to no pins no cable is considered Calculation settings for current project xs Additional Warning
460. sheet connection symbol this can be clarified in a variety of ways If you move the mouse over a worksheet connection symbol in the interior of the sheet you will see the type and number of the connection in the pop up tool tip window It is easier however to click the worksheet symbol in the interior This will open the parent sheet and the mouse pointer will be above the associated worksheet symbol pin This is how you create a new worksheet 8 From the toolbar select the desired worksheet symbol 9 The worksheet symbol is now attached to the mouse pointer 10 Position the symbol in the desired location by left clicking this location Complete the action by pressing the Esc key 11 The following symbol now appears on the screen for example Worksheet symbol connection pin input Worksheet symbol connection pin output AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 204 of 452 6 Project organization 6 3 Worksheets If a cable end point is now placed in the sheet symbol to create another connection the following window opens Create entry exit Select the desired signal direction nt to create a new connection entry or New connection ee Tes open sheet Mo faa When you click the worksheet it opens See next page for an example Worksheet connection symbol input Worksheet connection symbol outputs o e You can move the connections to any position y
461. sheet preview functions recursively when set to high quality that is the preview of a worksheet also appears in the preview of the parent worksheet Depending on the nesting level this can result in slower loading times 2 3 Navigating in worksheets Navigating within a worksheet is called scrolling You have the following scroll options e Use the horizontal and vertical scrollbars e Use the mouse wheel for vertical scrolling e Use the pan function Hold the middle mouse button or the mouse wheel down and move the mouse over the edge of the worksheet The worksheet will move If you additionally hold the Alt key down the movement will be speeded up enabling you to move further with fewer mouse movements e Use the right mouse button Hold the right mouse button down and move the mouse over the edge of the visible worksheet The worksheet section moves about half of the width or height of the window The mouse pointer is then in the middle of the window AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 30 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 7 Navigating and zooming 2 4 Navigating beyond document boundaries For very large projects the drawings are often divided into multiple documents In this case the individual projects can be saved using the PROJECT DATA gt Project and Sheet Data gt Save Worksheet command and linked with the Load Worksheet command from the context menu The program thus automatically generates entry and exit
462. ssrsns 47 Planning Status wiiwids Mater aenn 135 PIAMMING YPO easaees 229 Plotting a cable innin 48 Plotting a component s ssssssesssrsrrrrsrens 44 PIOttING DUNdINGS cccccnscscssaneeesnunens 169 Plotting cables all directions 159 Plotting dimensioning arrows 005 160 Plotting trench S CtION cceeeeeeeeeeeee 157 Pointing to an ODjJECt ccceee cece eee eens 21 POSITIONING ASSISTANCE ec cece eee eens 125 POSITIONING mode sssssssssssssesssssnssssrens 25 POWEr lINCS aeiio a 353 Power lines Definition A sssssssssssssrssns 353 Power lines Definition B ssssssssssssssssss 353 Power Supply entering data 397 Presettings for Sheets window 227 Preview LY DGS rimasi otoit ni onein ated 30 Price calculation for materials and labor 410 PRCI T iorossa aa ea 412 PANUNG DIOCKS sisaiciettouiasteetseniioaieeaiid 415 Printing connector liStS sssssesessssrsens 414 Printing drawing sectionS ssssessssss 415 Printing drawingS ssssesrsssenrsneenrsnsesnne 415 Printing network StructUreS cceeeeeeee 414 Printing Splice DOXES ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 416 Printing test point liSts cc cece 412 Printing the bill of materials 411 Program SCEUINGS serere noice nud anette eects 294 Project Companies tab 00ccee eee 218 PFOIGCE Catdinsiariscutuaceddvisnseecubienadacenans 214 Project manager menu i
463. st tens 10 0 calculatable This setting is not for normal symbol C hundrets 100 0 of the cable M Always round up Disregard Objects without Order No and Art No 12345 a als n dai Dig _ Trench objects only trench objects Longtext Number of rows to print in report hoo x Include in Excel Export M Sum up splice costs Sum up tasks If grouping is activated the column for the order will be empty AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 246 of 452 6 Project organization 6 7 Planning type and network status Order filter in the interconnect plan It is possible to display only those addresses in the interconnect plan for which the splice or patch connection is part of a selected order The order of a splice patch connection is the order of the bundle into which the connection type is entered t Interconnect Plan O x Connection From Cable Bu To Cable Bund Opt entry esitpoint Rosenstr 26 not cut 1322 VWottinger Str 2b rot cut Fiber 24x12 B1 Fiber 24e12 B13 Excel Export Report Print All Sheets Swap Order F Splice Patch order only Marked tasks E only Fig 10 Interconnect plan of a route Filtering is activated with the Only Selected Orders checkbox t Interconnect Plan Connection From Cable Bu To Cable Bund Print All Sheets Swap Order Splice Patch order only iv Marked tasks Fig 11 Only Sele
464. supply C Check socket levels Level Tolerance dB V Check bridge points C Check open tap pin levels C Check distortion Priorities for interstage amplifiers MV Check connectors C Setup Return Amplifiers CI Check upstream C Test point CURRENT TSAGET com C Check leakage limit ral Equalization Tolerance 0 50 dB Attenuation before 1st Stage minimal Interstage flat before the last stage Use powerlinie for adjusting amplifiers Interpretation of Preemphasis Preemphasis Level in highest channel level in lowest channel C Preemphasis Level in highest channel virtual level 47 00 MHz MHz virtual level at 47 00 MHz C Preemphasis Level a For check of level and distortion r z C o ee EE A Save Settings Load Settings Cancel OK Not using power line If the Use powerline for adjusting amplifiers checkbox is not selected default settings the target and actual levels simply refer to the level value in the highest channel and the pre emphasis value is the difference in level between the highest and lowest channel Using power line If the option Use powerline for adjusting amplifiers checkbox is selected AND calculates a linear smoothing function power line through all points in the level frequency diagram Target and actual values are then interpreted as the smoothing function value for the highest frequency The p
465. switching the group function on or off or selecting a certain group object you can determine whether the whole group will be moved or just an individual object Switch the group function on or off using the Move Copy Object Groups icon lt G gt im Positioning Mode on the standard toolbar You can also use the G key to switch the group function on or off while moving the object After starting AND the group function is typically on The objects in a group have a specific hierarchical relationship to one another 10 048 For components the component has priority 1 and the accompanying text priorty 2 or Fa For test points the test point itself has priority 1 a the test point window 8 priority 2 and N the accompanying text priority 3 MP 002 24 If you select a priority 1 element to move and the group function is active all elements in that group will be moved If you select a low priority element 2 or 3 only that element will move and possibly any subordinate elements irrespective of whether the group function is active or not AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 35 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 11 Copying objects 2 11 Copying objects You can copy objects by selecting them holding down the Ctrl key and dragging them to the desired position When working with the keyboard select the object you wish to copy and press the N key for Copy Object Now you can position the copied object
466. t If your connection points 7 Scho aiea a MV Check Levels of Upstream ERE ou tp u ts are t ransm itte rs Temperature drift Check Noise and Ingress of Upstream S peci fy th e va ues fo r th e vI mas ara V Throw a warning for objects which are not fit for return path eck socket levels d sto rti on ra ti Os h ere cae alse A Assumed ingress 70 0 dBy m _ Check distortion Ingress measured at bandwith 0 009 MHz If your return path transmitters are the user outputs of the 4 Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers Assumed screening in the appartment 150 0 dB T heck upstream su bscri ber sockets th ese d ata A Test point CURRENT TARGET com Assumed screening of the building 10 0 dB C Check leakage limit Use forward shielding if library contains no values Component screening are relevant for calculating the d isto rti on i n g ress see b e ow 1 Check with different acceptances min Acceptance 10 pA max Acceptance IU me e Upstream Ingress and Noise Ratios at Bridge Point eo Here you specify which values are applied by default for the distortion ratio values for return path transmitters of minimal ingress ratio 50 0 dB type Signal connection point end of a NL3 plan These data are only relevant if you want to calculate return path disturbances and your drawing contains such outputs Enter the ingress and the noise fora connection point as the ratio to the signal The ingress
467. t Fonte F a Siti bps a4 eb C i L Urb Abb atl iUsnawer OS i ernest tice ae iLe iLe ed Ot len RP ce SP he oe e PEAR 3D design blue FY Patel Ceerhetter Sayvitdeen Nimaning Neleriw Piece Arceot Fenter La LASSATRBISTM bEe 9 Hi Lar ORT Mache p nbnrarce gt Layer Yotlage Rerarrerivficiet DP suze AORA Ooturectatior LAPTTIII Line gt Aiboletl i U never 3D design silver z Rotel Fearheter Sabttiees Reectapng Nolen fitim Areeat Fenter O hg R ASSAVER Sobre d id bast CEN Marches hbnrare Layer Yorbage Rerarrerrioficine a Se Month Dotimertstior LAP31137 Uni AbSNDJIN 1 Uenewer Modern blue IND 6 0 Dutemerision LAPI Teartetter Modern black FR Cole Ceorhetter Sabihin Retains Mabn Pica werst Fante D hg i AGARA RebwtY odes W law CEN Marhe j hbnrare Last Votlage Rerarrereficlier 9 Aae WAL Dotimertstior LAP25531 Uri Mole I Uenewer Modern aqua MELE iF Pahi Teerhetter capiti feertaons NeleriW Feie Accerot Fenter bat BS Ra GR Bis tM ee OR iH Las SEN ache j hinrarm LayenWothapet Me rarrereficles BESTT MORN Dotimertstior LAP31331 Una ADSNDSIN 1 U naver Modern silver CSS x To change the window design choose VIEW gt Change Design and then choose one of the designs listed Select Design l Select Design Current design 3D look silver T Current design 3 D look silver Flat simple Hint Some of the existing
468. t 12 W Show Dialog for entering the free wire lirit Save Settings Load Settings Cancel KC AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 104 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Function find all paths The function is implemented in AND 4 0 as from Build 770 The function is only enabled in the FiberCoax version The function lists all possible optical routes in the output windows that lead from the output point to the target point and at least the requested number of free fibers The routes are output in ascending order of their total length Clicking on the line in the output window marks the corresponding route in color and sets the visible section so that the entire route is visible Requirements e The output point and end point must be symbols of the following type optical worksheet symbol normal case optical passive component e The output points and the fiber optic cables must be located on the same worksheet as a project this is normally the GIS main worksheet of the project The algorithm for finding the routes treats the optical worksheet symbols as a symbol that interconnects all the worksheet connections The worksheet content is completely irrelevant For the route search it is immaterial whether the fibers of the route on the worksheet are really connected from end to end or still have to be spliced Selection of the output point If the symbol is a valid output point the item
469. t which is typically generated automatically See also Chapter Automatic Numbering of Objects Page 122 Location rectangles The installation number here depends on the specified type see Section Automatic Numbering of Objects Page 122 Use the installation numbers as often as possible these can then be indexed in the server for example This makes it easy to access the network documentation selectively When creating a disruption table for example the installation numbers are displayed allowing you to find the locations quickly Trace Fault report No in App Nor 556 09 no sound AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 226 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options Automatic apartment numbering You can have the program automatically number the installation numbers for sockets and ca bles that are selected in a block for an apartment for example This process allocates object numbers installation numbers In the drawing select a block and choose the Change Numbers command from the context menu The following window will open Change Cable Numbering 1 Here you can enter a number or a letter that precedes the automatically DbiectNo generated numbers iM Number MOU Positior Usually you will enter the object number of the Ascending numbering for floors building f downstairs to upstairs If this option is switched off x LOSE Ts eC TS EIS AND numbe
470. t Owner Owner 1 can be edited in owners xml q antes 1 7 Owner 2 q m F mt j E This list allows you to select more than one fiber using the Ctrl and Shift keys An owner can be set for the selected fibers via the context menu AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 103 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Coloring free fibers Coloring is implemented in version AND 4 0 Build 710 and higher To color free fibers click the following button on the toolbar mia Marking of Free Wires on off rep rr pme Clicking this button again deactivates the coloring function again When you click this button the following dialog box with coloring options opens Sire j ATA Color of free Wires Minimum count of free wires 2 Don t show this dialog in future me Here you can set the color and the minimum number of free fibers to which that coloring is to be applied This dialog box can be suppressed by setting the checkmark in the dialog box Do not open this dialog box again To reactivate this dialog box open Options Program Settings Thematic Colouring and set a checkmark for Input Dialog Box 0 Thematic colouring Options State Colouring Options State Unknown T State color Object color Line width Nom o Draw Crosses over the objects Signal Path Colouring Signal Path Color Free Wires Colouring 1 Fres wires Coir M Free wires limi
471. t and MarS sioman a 430 Report templates NEW assssssssrsrsrrsren 427 REDOKE tyYDOS henaa anaa a a 422 REPONS iridato a tn seae eens 422 Representation Options window 296 Resistance of passive components entering P EEA E A aha EEE EAEE E 398 Return Path Amplifier Setup window 316 Return path amplifier setting in AND 333 Return path amplifiers Setting target vae S sesataravesediancateuaantseeteanioowes 316 Return path calculation cceeeeeeeeeees 322 Return path calculation as part of the network CNECK ccccecueeeseeueeeueeeneeans 339 Return path calculation determining reception and transmission levels 339 Return path calculation disturbance check sn A nes wee EAA A Precate weep 340 Return path calculation ingress 340 Return path calculation level check 339 Return path calculation Noise in the return BAC agairecen tiaras sateen net aetaate aaa ea een 341 Return path lasers cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeneee 336 Return path Signals and disturbances 342 Right clicking a lOCAtION ccceeeeeeeee 21 Rotating while positioning 085 125 Ruler and GIS scaling sssssssssssrersrrs 66 Saving and loading worksheets 210 Page 449 of 452 SAVING DIOCKS erien naaa 129 Saving sheets cccccececesseeeeeeeneeeeeeesees 210 Saving test point NiStOry cceeeeeeeeees 356 SAVING aUt SAVC sscseuiiveaieilinceiend waaiad 294 E E sie can
472. t hotspot type properties dlg If the user changes later those properties the graphical appearance of hotspots within overview will change too according to those properties e Any metadot has an xml node that specifies associated global layer If the global layer is visible then the hotspot types that have that global layer assigned will be visible within overview If hotspot global layer is not visible within current zoom level then the hotspots are not visible in current zoom level e The user is able to move hotspots e The user is able to locate hotspots in overview Hotspots created by anyone are replicated through the whole system they are visible to others So if another user changes the appearance of a hotspot type those modifications will be replicated to current user machine after a Refresh Only the deletion of hotspots is immediately visible for current user A change of a hotspot is visible also in Webinfo Display properties When the user creates a hotspot type he begins by writing and setting the search and deletion options The Hotspot properties are e Type name this is the name that the user will write for the hotspot type metadot Writing metadot name is mandatory If it is not written an message will appear Please edit the metadot name e Searchable if this option is checked the hotspots of this type can be searched using Search dialog and located If this option is not checked the hotspots o
473. t is only produced during transmission Here you deactivate the o permanent component that is ModemBandwidth from 5 0 MHz to 65 0 MHz O the noise calculation in AND only includes noise production during transmission Noise Level a5 dBW measured at Bandwidth of 0 160 MHz The cable modems usually Modem produces always noise f Noze while sending O produce noise in a noise bandwidth gt transmission Signal Noise Ratio 90 0 dE bandwidth Meighbourchan Decreaz 3 0 dB Let saa ede 10 0 d In this field you enter the lower A limit of the noise bandwidth O0 6 You enter the upper bandwidth limit here Bandwidth for which the permanent noise level has been measured Difference between noise in the transmission channel and noise for a distance frequency The noise production during transmission is frequency dependent with a maximum frequency equal to that of the transmission channel The typical frequency response is portrayed by the bell curve Difference between noise in the transmission channel and noise in the neighboring channel in dB Ratio of signal to noise in the transmission channel O Continuous Signal FSK O Frequency Multiplex fe AM f Time Multiples C GAM O Time 4Frequencymultiples C OPSE The first column of radio buttons determines how AND summates the noise of the various cable modems only refers to the noise component during transmission Continuous Signal All modems
474. t point will be placed there 3 Move the mouse pointer to the location where the test point is to be placed and click with the left mouse button The Create Drawing Object Data window will appear Enter all necessary data 4 Now move the mouse pointer to the location where the label should be and place it there by clicking the left mouse button 5 Press the Esc key to finish AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 58 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Changing connections If you wish to change the connection on which the test point is to show the level you only need to move the test point to another connection Updating test points If the Automatically Update Test Points option is switched on in the Test Point Settings window all test points in that worksheet will automatically be recalculated when a significant change has been made to the network Further information about calculating connections can be found in the Calculating Test Points section see Page 360 If this option is not activated you can update all test points in the worksheet by clicking the Update Test Point List icon o EN i 4 E ow Labeling test points subsequently There are two ways of labeling test points subsequently 1 Move the mouse over the test point test points changes color to lilac right click and choose T Label Zoom all Zoom into Zoom detail Zoom last Ctrl PgDown Select all objects CTRL G
475. t was done by previous program versions version lt 4 2 860 21 Adjust Return Path Amplifiers All level values refer to bandwidth 2o MHz Bandwidth Target Level at Receiver Source The first amplifier will be adjusted that the reverse signals reach the receiver bridgepoint with that target level Use value set in service feo dB yi Calculate from the FM Level at the bridge point targetlevel 57 FM Pegel mas sending level of cable modem f Take level entered in bridgepoint If zero take es dB iy Mas Sending Levelt Use value set in service 114 dey Mas Sending Level 114 dB T alaran Bear sll sree Ini F 40 In this example AND uses 85 dBuV for every signal source with invalid target level 0 dBuV If you have set in the project settings Use value from service or from FM Level the level entered in the bridgepoint will be ignored AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 332 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation Return path levels over optical path Implemented from Build 4 5 1350 on Return path levels can be calculated even if an optical path is in between the cable modem and the receiver Return path amplifiers on the headend side can be adjusted too Calculate Return Path Level Transmitter From the transmitter we must know the output power and the OMI Output power The optical output power is read from the library object OMI For th
476. t were created independently of the index tree that is as Separate projects AND supports the geo schematic work method Symbols for network nodes the schematic portion correctly aligned trenches and cables the geographical portion can all be used simultaneously The advantage of this is that the site as well as the network logic can be entered into one document The technicians can therefore immediately recognize the signal order based on the symbols To retain the advantages of the geo schematic work method particularly with complex objects AND provides worksheets that encapsulate the corresponding circuit diagrams with the use of symbols in the site plan AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 175 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps 5 1 Maps AND supports raster maps TIFF JPG BMP and other pixel formats as well as vector maps in DXF format For the DXF format the most common variation of Version 12 is supported Coordinate systems and layer structures can also be imported into AND It is possible to load one of these backgrounds for every worksheet This automatically changes the worksheet to the Site plan category if you have not already converted the sheet into a site plan sheet You can plot network elements in a site plan sheet freely that is non orthogonally With the AND WmsClient Plugin as of AND 4 5 it is possible to query maps via standardized WMS to fetch them from any WM
477. ta from any third party programs OLE servers in AND To insert an OLE object choose the EDIT gt Insert New OLE Object command The Insert Object window will open Insert Object Object Type Create New Adobe Acrobat Document e Microsoft Equation 3 0 Microsoft Eecel Arbeitsblatt mit Makro inla Ax Microsoft Excel Arbeitsblatt Display As loon Microsoft Eecel Binararbeitsblatt Result Inserts a new Adobe Acrobat Document object i gt into your document Select the object you want to insert from the list below Object Type for example Microsoft Excel Worksheet and click OK Now draw a frame in the worksheet where you want to display the object When you click the frame the program where you can enter the data will automatically open When you have finished entering the data close the program again The data will now be shown in the frame AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 65 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode LocalArea Coax FibreCoax Ruler and GIS scaling ocima Cor Fen The ruler provides scale information in the drawing and can be used to change the scale 100m This is how to plot in a ruler and define the scale 1 Click the New GIS Scaling He icon on the toolbar 2 Draw ina ruler by clicking the start point left and the end point right with the mouse 3 The Create Drawing Object Data window will open Enter the length of the ruler 4 A query
478. tch columns in which you can establish the order of variables after import You cannot choose the same column twice AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 265 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots W Match columns Ea variable name Import column wl Column 1 ve Column 2 y3 Column 3 concel_ After matching the columns you can start the import The result is that the new metadot was created and 2 independent hotspots were created Run a search gt the hotspots appear in search result list Mr Mame Attributes Type File 1 Ty pel Variablei 1 Variables1 2 Variables1 3 Typel External interface 2 Ty pel Variable _1 Variables _2 Variables _3 Ty pel External interface In column Attributes you can see that the order of variables to import was respected according to what you choose in Match column dlg Observation The left and right spaces are not imported in database on import Info from csv file Expected result variable name Variable name Special cases when variable type doesn t match with the value of import column from csv file to import 1 If the data for a column does not match the variable type of the metadot in CSV file for example The variable type of the metadot Number integer And in the CSV file you write A3 for example then the result for Number will be O And in the CSV file you write 33A for example then the result for Number will be 33
479. te the mouse movements Each time you press the key the mouse pointer white arrow will move a certain set distance in the direction of the key pressed If you additionally hold down the Alt key the mouse pointer will move with pixel precision Spacebar The spacebar simulates the right mouse button Because it makes a difference when working with the mouse whether the mouse button is held down or released holding down the spacebar simulates one of these actions either holding down the left mouse button or releasing it More complex actions involving holding down or releasing the mouse can also be performed using the keyboard Here is an example of block selection see Page 33 Move the mouse pointer with the arrow buttons to the upper left corner of the desired area press the spacebar once move the mouse pointer with the arrow buttons to the lower right corner of the desired area and press the spacebar once again Backspace key The backspace key simulates the right mouse button Use it to open the context menu AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 24 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 5 Operating and drawing modes 2 5 Operating and drawing modes There are three operating modes in AND You can easily tell which mode is active by the appearance of the mouse pointer The operating mode automatically changes according to the action that you are carrying out Standard mode You are in standard mode by default In this mode
480. te this option and define the target values so that AND can make the amplifier settings automatically C Settings Built In Regulators Amplification 20 0 dE Equalization 0 0 a dE Plugged Components Attenuation 7 0 dB zation 00 E Equalization 0 0 I dB Frequency Flange 47 862 KMHe Amplifier data Mr 1 Amplifier data Mr 2 Transponder Mr 3 Power Consumption Mr 4 Current Values es Level at max Fr 1 04 dE pi Preemphasis 8 dB Target Level 1 04 dE pi Preemphasis 8 0 de Plugged Pad db Pad dB fixed Equalizer none fined Return Path Amplifier Retun23dB 23 1 8B Piot inone AND then tries to select controller settings and connector components so that the target values are reached Attainment of the target values is indicated by a smiling smiley 0 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 311 of 452 9 Calculations 9 2 Amplifier settings Successive settings with arrow buttons With the arrow buttons you can see the effect of continual setting to match your target values Reaching the target level has priority over the target pre emphasis If both are not possible AND sets the target level and not the target pre emphasis In the Current Values section you can read off the level for the currently successful controller settings in the uppermost channel and the pre emphasis If you make settings under Target Values see figure b
481. ted in the duct package AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 386 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Changing the direction of transportation Clicking on the microducts opens the editing menu in which you can set the direction of transportation of the microducts Microduck from top to bottom from top to bottom from bottom to top from top to bottom from bottom to top State from top to bottom from bottom to top from top to bottom rom bottom to top Fig 19 Changing the direction of transportation of the microducts Deleting microducts Deleting a microduct causes it to be retracted After selecting the microducts with the mouse you can delete it by pressing E or by choosing Delete Object from the context menu Inserting microducts manually Right clicking the duct package opens the Extend Microduct function When you execute this function the window for the direction of transportation opens After selection the microduct is appended to the duct package is in selection mode and can be freely moved Right clicking with the mouse ends the selection A Take Create Trench Envelope Block Deployment Deploy Microduct Add text labels Remove text labelis Lock object I Component information R Calculate optical power Mark optical line Locate Fiber breakage 1 Show Signalpath Colored Insert OLE Object Ekr K Load block Load sheet PrintiExport Schematic Plans Print active vi
482. tem 06 220 Project organization ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 Project Technology tab cccee eee 217 Project template file ccseeaseenneeneeaes 21 5 Project Type tab ccccccsecssceneeuneeneeans 219 Project Set Status fOr ccceeeseeuneeneeaes 230 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Index Project setting the planning type for 229 Raster files importing multiple 173 Raster IMADS iamsiaatie arias a sean ans a 171 Rasting tiles not drawn during panning PEPEE AET O EE EE E nolan 298 Readjusting amplifiers manually 306 Remote powering areas demo drawings405 Remote powering activating blocking CONNECUONS asione A 399 Remote powering basics in the libraries 395 Remote powering calculation details 400 Remote powering calculation results 395 Remote powering outputs and error MNMESSAGCS ara 402 Replacing missing objects in the library 42 Report DESIGNER sieniniai aiaia 427 Report Designer program window 427 Report Designer sections of the worksheet ET E seal oad when E E 429 Report Designer specifying the section NENG 429 REDOFETISTS tincavis bre teniadrwnatnenenseanatias 425 Report Template inserting data field VAnIADICS iienaa A 431 Report template inserting formula fields P A A A A tia 432 Report template plotting graphical elements and headings 00085 430 Report template setting page forma
483. th OK the connection will be saved and skipped during the automatic search A manually set plug connection is indicated by a cross on the pin Note If you move the associated icons the saved connection will be lost Recreate the connection list The best procedure is to edit the connectors after your plan is almost finished Use the Delete button to remove a saved connection AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 46 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Displaying and editing the pin information The pin information shows the type and attentuation loss for all connection in a network element as they exist in the library To display the pin information select the object and press the P key for Pin Information The Pin Information will now open Pin Info Pin No 1 AF Tap 12 506 RF Tap 12 5dB Symbol S64 F 0 9 12 5 f Edit Next Cancel Here you decide which pin you would like to display and edit for the selected object Use the Next button to switch between the individual connections that the object contains The active pin will be shown red Tip If you select the desired connection pin before calling this function that connection or pin will be shown first Finally click OK to edit the selected pin The Connection Information tab in the Edit Ob ject window will open E b ai Object Data Pin info Symbol ABZW F 0 9 12 5 Pin
484. that takes frequency dependency transmission function saved in the library into consideration and a more approximate method taken merely from the catalog data Calculation with the transmission function is only possible in AND FIBRECOAX The distortion calculation can of course also be applied to digital channels including noise like output increase from mixed products across digital channels Calculation without transmission function Only catalog values are known for the amplifier for example CTB ratio at least 60 dB at 110 dBuV output level and CENELEC42 raster A catalog specification such as the one above contains no information about the frequency dependency of the distortion It is not known at what frequency the worst ratio of 60 dB occur and how large the CTB ratio for other frequencies is In this case AND assigns the worst CSO CTB value of 60 dB to every channel Dependency of CSO CTB ratios on output level AND calculates according to the 2 1 method that is a level reduction of 1 dB improves the CTB ratio by 2 dB CSO is calculated according to the 1 1 method Dependency of CSO CTEB ratios on pre emphasis The library values for CTB CSO always correspond to a particular pre emphasis In LibEdit 3 1 all distortion ratios always correspond to a flat output level In LibEdit 3 2 you can also specify the distortion ratios for freely definable slopes If no transmission function is known the change in ratios can onl
485. the Calculated Return Path Level options are specified there both of these values will be recalculated for this test point For standard test points the level is always recalculated The calculation is performed in exactly the same way as in the corresponding Single point calculations e Checking the return path channel see Page 325 e Calculating the distortion products at any point see Checking Distortion Products Page 319 e Power line see Page 358 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 360 of 452 9 Calculations 9 9 Calculating test points Saving test point history A test point can be saved in the test point history at any time with all its channels test results and test data Click the test point to open the Edit Object window Enter the description in the area under Add to Test Point History Add ta TP History Description Pe Use alexander folkers Date 1 0 1 a720 T F Copy channels Time 3 48 27 PM T Then click Generate Input The values for the selected test point will now be added to the test point history as a new entry Level values Nr 1 Distortion Data Nr 2 Data to Display Nr 3 Testpoint History Nr 4 User 9 18 201073 50 00 PM alexander folkers 7 18 2010 73 50 00 PM alexander folkers 10 18 2010 3 50 00 PM alexander folkers 10 18 2010 3 50 00 PM alexander folkers iil 4 il p Freg MHz 48 25 67 3 E 119 25 68 0 175 25 68 4 191 25 68 5 207 25
486. the Management System type e Building objects and addresses are written and indexed for every location rectangle with the corresponding label type no in the AND Smart Server database e The NIS schematic plan generator in AND FIBRECOAX keeps track of the individual assembly groups within a location rectangle icon on the toolbar Draw in a new location with the New Location Rectangle iz Open a rectangle by dragging with the mouse The Create Drawing Object Data window will open Enter the data here E i 3 gt Drawing Object Data EON gm E Location Inst No Nr 1 Counter Obj Identifier Nr 2 Object Type l ba Identifier I izi V Add a Crosstext for this Data Format Text XN 2t 2H gt Auto Objektnr Installation Type Unknown v AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 61 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Using the location Rectangle for Searches You can use location rectangles to search for objects and components 1 Choose PROJECT DATA gt Locations from the menu 2 The Select Location will open Select location Available locations da245 45341 45341 40341 40341 45341 45341 45341 45341 45341 45341 40341 40341 40341 45341 45541 dg3dl Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge Altenberge
487. the desired component connection when selecting the component and then press the C key the Edit Object window will immediately open reae onee oix Object Data Pin info Connection E Symbol AVF 6533 Ent i Left contact m Right contact El Component information Connection Base data Nr 1 Object AVF 6533 Object BK AB 410 Symbol Data Nr 2 Type Female plug Mah Type Female plug Power supply Nr 3 Amplifier Nr 4 Ref 2 IEC Delete Ref 16 4 20 Frequency Respons L L L i nE Left connector m Middle connector 7 Right connector Colorlayer information Converts to Converts from Color layer informatic Type Female plug Type Direct cable EFi info Ref JEF Ref 40 02 Pin info Connection Connector Connector Connector E Dynamic data Faro FDS 11 BK APS 1 1 7 3 Amplifier data Nr 1 Transponder Nr 2 Database Location Inst No Nr 2 Corcel A connection can consist of up to three individual connectors or adapters All possible connectors adaptors are always shown in the three Selection lists Select an item If the connection fits the smiley will be smiling and you can click OK to save the connection Simultaneously the Selection list will appear filled in to identify the remaining options If the connection for the selected entry is not complete you can complete the connection in the middle Selection list If you close this window wi
488. the electrical network information schematic portion you simultaneously have relatively accurate documentation of the site in the plan Also the cable lengths will be drawn automatically from the scale which of course significantly speeds up your work To avoid the advantages of the geo schematic operating mode resulting in unclear diagrams in complex or extensive projects AND allows you to create multiple worksheets In this case separate diagrams are encapsulated in an icon in the site plan simply click the icon to call up the worksheet You will automatically switch to the geo schematic operating mode when you have loaded a background graphics in dfx or bitmap format TEL ta ahh Use the B icon or the F8 key on the Design Assistance WEYHE Wy 10 El toolbar to switch freely between schematic orthogonal and geo schematic operating modes AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 27 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 Navigating and zooming 2 Navigating and zooming If you are dealing with a complex AND project you can create a clearer overview of the network plan if you divide it into multiple worksheets When working with documents projects and worksheets you may be jumping from sheet to sheet or having to zoom in or out to achieve the desired ease of use That means you need assistance with navigating paging through the documents and worksheets and zooming enlarging or
489. the individual bundles and fibers with bundle labeling and fiber numbers with connection lines depicted in the color code Each end point has a mechanical pin Bundles can be expanded in fibers and collapsed again Fiber pins contain one pin with 1 contact point bundles contain as many contact points as fibers are contained in the cable So for example a closed bundle of an auto splice box on a 3 8 cable 3 bundles of 8 fibers each can be connected via a bundle object see bundle to a closed bundle of an OF cable 1 8 1 bundle of 8 fibers Auto splice boxes show the fiber numbers numbers 1 to 12 in the figure below The numbers appear relatively large so that they remain visible on the printout In the expanded bundle the bundle is labeled B1 B2 etc f a bundle is expanded a label appears with the bundle number on the root side B2 in the figure below The text is positioned at the center B4 a ap B5 D BE lt Bundles too can be expanded by auto splice boxes This makes it possible to vary the position of the auto splice box more for example in a cassette frame In the figure above the green bundle B2 is expanded into its 12 fibers Splice boxes can be drawn in a space saving way that is the closed bundles are exactly 1 pin grid apart If they are not drawn in a space saving manner the bundles are placed at the posi tion in the object where they would lie if the bundles were e
490. the level of each channel individually For each channel frequency the signal path and attenuation to the signal source is calculated and from it the level at a particular point is then derived as follows Level of a channel level of channel at signal source attenuation at channel frequency The total attenuation is derived from the sum of attenuations of the individual components The individual losses are taken from the values in the library In an AND drawing you can influence the level values with the following entries e Level values in the signal source See the Specifying Data for Signal Sources section Page 363 e Changing cable lengths e Amplifier settings changing the controller varying the connector components A drawing can have multiple signal sources Please note the following for the signal paths in AND e Only signal paths from inputs to outputs or outputs to inputs are allowed Signal paths from output to output or input to input are not allowed The only exceptions are taps and loop through sockets With these it is possible to install the components reversed that is if a tap is used the signal can for example run from the output to the tap output e You can start the level calculation at any connection in the network The result of the calculation opens in a window with a list of all channels and associated levels Channels for which the level calculation failed do not appear in the list of channels Start t
491. the splitter s Sheet manually and afterwards calling the automatic connection function once more Equal wire count on both sides If the wire count of the two pins to be connected is equal on the whole route AND creates the connecting links or bundles Sheet B3 i a m There is one path from Start to End with at least 14 free wires Path 0 Length 1398 1 m free wires 62 Elements Start gt B4 gt B3 gt End Connections in sheet B4 31 Created object from 2 1 to 2 1 Created object from 3 1 to 3 1 Connections in sheet B3 32 Created object from 2 1 to 2 1 Created object from 2 2 to 2 2 Created object from 3 1 to 3 1 The blue bundle is connecting two 12 wired pins the red and green one are connecting two single wired pins Sheet B3 Es gibt genau eine Route von Start nach End mit mindestens 14 freien Fasern Route O Lange 1396 1 m Anzahl freie Fasern 62 Stationen Start gt B4 gt B3 gt Verbindungen in Blatt B4 31 Erzeugtes Objekt von 2 1 nach 2 1 Erzeugtes Objekt von 3 1 nach 3 1 Verbindungen in Blatt B3 32 Erzeugtes Objekt von 2 1 nach 2 1 Erzeugtes Objekt von 2 2 nach 2 2 Erzeugtes Objekt von 3 1 nach 3 1 If the wire count of the pins to be connected differs AND is changing nothing in the whole route and the conflicting pins are displayed in the output window AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Pag
492. the whole database select Database You will find these settings in the list under Search Type A detailed description of the search options is also given in the GisArea Manual see Section 1 2 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 229 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options AreaAdressSelection 1 Right click in overview and select Add Hotspot Here then Address we LO 5 Zoom all zoom into Zoom detail Zoom last Ctrl PgDown Select all objects CTRL G Insert OLE Object Ctrl K Load block Load sheet View Cable Indices Back to Gis Area project Print active View Evaluation gt Add Hotspot Here Set hotspot geo position here gt two threee N four 344 vFdsvd dfs dh test recee 2 In the address dlg that opens select Search in DB ___ 22am DE gt the Search address dlg opens 3 Check the Area search checkbox 4a search 50 the edit box next to this checkbox gets editable and it might be filled in with the area extent around the cursor position to search for addresses Default value of Area search is 100 m The user can adjunst the edge length of this search square the possible extension is limited to 1000m DOT Properties x Address Country Zip z City E O Search Address Ea City district E Country Po 4 House number E Zip jf 0 House no supplement City
493. then defined by the properties specified in that project template A system may have several project templates Every project template has a unique individual name A template is applied to a project via this name The name of the template assigned to a project is shown in the System Data dialog box on the Project Header tab Project Header Project Properties Project Companies Order Info Project type Identification Project No f 011 0 01 YAA MIDT ier D B Client Project Type unknown z Zip City City district Street House number House number to House no supplement House no supplement to State Created by dominic pittraff at O11 2 2010 changed by dominic pittratf at 12 2010 Version Statys Unknown Date P 10A 2 2010 You can assign one of the existing templates either when you open a new project or later To assign a project template to a project select File gt Load Template or click the Set Template button in the dialog box shown above To remove the template from the project again click the Delete Template button If you do not assign a template manually the field remains empty and the previous settings still apply AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 220 of 452 6 Project organization 6 5 Specifying key data for search options To apply the project settings choose the Apply Settings from Template comman
494. ther project the editing options in the pin information window are deactivated and the content can only be read but not changed The editing options are only reactivated when the update command is applied Caution In wavelength multiplexing several functions for Set Status Priority and Connection ID stop at the multiplexer DWDM However the calculation dialog box routes the signals further and displays the real terminal units Setting owners of cables and fibers The list of owners is defined by the file Owners xml in the program directory The subsequent Owner Data dialog box only opens if the file Owners xml exists Edit Object Object Data El Cable Fiber 11 A Eb Component Informatie 2 Base data Nr 1 Customer No 2 Fiber Mr 2 Address Owner Contact Person EE Color layer informatio 4 Name Color layer inforr FI Owner Data Tel o b Owner Data E LayingT ype i Laying Type Fax pr F Mail Fiber ID Individual Wire Owners Cancel The owner of the cable is chosen from the Owner selection box The cable owner is also the owner of all fibers by default To set alternative owners for individual fibers press the Individual Fiber Owner button An additional list box with the owners of the individual fibers is now also displayed Mero l Fiber ID Individual Wire Owners Bide Wie Dare z 2 3 M OO i o l SEET Se
495. tically loaded from the server Undoing and redoing in the background editor Using the undo and redo icons you can undo actions or redo actions you have just undone Multiple actions can be undone Open the list of actions performed by clicking the arrow next to the icon This opens an action list Click the action up to which you would like to undo all of the steps Moye Tiff object fa Moye Oxf object Move Det object Move Det object Mowe Df object Moye Tiff object Undo level 100 As an alternative to the two icons you can use the keyboard shortcuts Ctril Z for undo and Ctri Y for redo AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 195 of 452 5 Editing background files 5 1 Maps Online and offline mode in the background editor If you are working on the AND Smart Server you have the option of switching between online and offline mode If the server is correctly configured then the Online Mode Eq icon is available on the toolbar Switch between online and offline mode using this button In offline mode missing GIS areas of the background are automatically loaded You can reload the entire GIS background or only the background for the missing areas yourself Select the Reload all Regions icon if you wish to reload all of the GIS areas S Select the Reload missing Regions A icon if you only wish to reload the missing GIS areas Setting the zoom factor Use th
496. tion 0 0 a dB Pad none fixed Equalization 10 0 dB Equalizer none fixed n Attenuation to next amplifier 16 9 16 9 dB Total atten to cable modem 28 7 29 7 dB i Input pad of next amplifier dB Passive distribution network 28 7 29 7 dB e AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 310 of 452 9 Calculations 9 2 Amplifier settings Readjusting amplifiers manually after each network change This manual method is time consuming because you have to readjust the amplifiers manually after every network change Activate this option if you want to readjust amplifiers manually after every network change oO Amplifier data p data Nr 2 a Sailings Built In Regulators Amplification 20 0 dB Equalization 0 0 dE Plugged Components Attenuation 7 0 dB Equalization 0 0 dB Frequency Range 47 B62 KH Transponder Mr 3 Power Consumption Mr 4 f Target Values Current Values Level at max Frg 1 O4 dE pi Freemphasis 8 dE Target Level 104 abu Preemphasis 8 0 a dE Plugged Pad db Pad dB fixed Equalizer nore fixed Return Path Amplifier Retum23dB 23 1 8B Pilot finon Setting amplifiers automatically with target values The recommended procedure is to enter the target values for level and pre emphasis slope within the channel bandwidth leaving AND to make the amplifier settings Activa
497. tion GmbH Page 391 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts 9 13 3 Manhole Schacht A manhole MD split in AND is a connection point between duct packages Fig 22 Manhole with a connected duct package Using a manhole Use the MD split from microducts lib After creating the manhole on the network plan press key A or choose Create Worksheet from the context menu Fig 23 to create a work sheet for the manhole u Substitute group X Calculation object Lock object I Component information Set counter manually A Convert to Sheet Insert OLE Object Ctrl V K Load block Load sheet Print active View Properties Enter Fig 23 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 392 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Creating an expander If a duct package is created on a manhole a microduct expander will automatically be created on the manhole worksheet Right clicking the end pin or pressing key Fig 24 opens a similar autosplice box Fig 25 Block Deployment Deploy Microduct lt Lock object I Component information Insert OLE Link Ctrl Shift V Insert OLE Object Ctrl V K Load block Load sheet Print active View Create Expander Properties Enter Fig 24 Museumsstr 14 Museumsstr 16 Museumsstr 18 Fig 25 In Fig 25 you see that the lower duct of the microduct is free By pressing W in the context menu of the selected microduct pin you
498. tion produced by its active components and the portion that has already reached the signal source in your network If you are only interested in the portion that your network produces you have to set the distortion in the signal source to an ideal value for example CNR CTB CSO 100 GB for all channels The distortion calculation depends heavily on the channel spacing To obtain the correct CSO CTB values you must specify all channels in the signal source Selecting only certain channels as was sometimes practiced in earlier versions of AND leads to incorrect too good results You can of course also load or save channel spacing in the signal source dialog box 9 7 1 Distortion checking in the network check Using the warning settings in the network check you can determine which disturbances are calculated in the network check and from what limit values are warning should be output see the Return Path Signal and Disturbances section Page 347 You can activate and deactivate checking at the subscriber with the Ca culate and Verify Distortion Ratios at Subscriber option Examination HES NE4 Wam ifthe distortion ratio at a subscriber is out of the following limits Terrestrial analog CTE modulated 60 0 d CTE 55 0 dE CN 43 0 dE C50 modulated 62 5 dB C50 60 0 dB Terrestrial digital CAN 32 0 dE C fmax CSO CTB 40 0 dB MER QAM 28 0 dB BER let AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution G
499. tions Import Import of hotspots can be done via SOAP or via AND Client from XML CSV file format Import CSV file from AND Client The menu entry Import hotspots is located within the main menu Manage hotspots To use this functionality the user needs at least the Add Right which can be set in the Import service rights within DbAdmin For the Import two formats are supported e CSV file format semicolon separated daavar values e XML file format AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 260 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots E Import options File to import 1 Browse Column separator E Text is enclosed by I Import file has header 5 i Tab character Space character Decimal separator Create new metadot f Other character e Hotspot fe Find matching metadat Position 4A y C 1 alumn Mo position WET Column Two columns olumn Transform coordinates Source reference system Destination reference system Import File content 2 el This dialog allows the user to configure the import parameters select path and file filter on xml csv 1 for csv allow setting if the file contains a header as first line 5 allows setting of separation characters tab space 3 allows selection of text enclosure characters none allows selection of decimal separator remember last setting at this w
500. to have project counter C in planning type Headend and sheet counter c in planning type NL4 for the same object this is the same for external counters 20 AND checks if a counter has been changed in the format e g the format changed from having project counter to one having sheet counter in it and performs a renumbering on all objects of that type this implies a setting of the new format and new numbering new counters are given to objects This is done to avoid counter conflicts clashes be tween the old values and the ones created with the new numbering Numbering format in object properties dialog The numbering format of an object can be seen in the object properties dialog AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 125 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode Locationlnst Wo Mr 1 Reference Yerstarkemr 001 001 Location 001 001 Position Type Ls Position Belongs to object Hierarchy specifier Group Amplifier Value 5000 Site type Location type no location record History of Installation numbers For a sheet the numbering format is present in sheet properties Object Data Work sheet El Work sheet Amplitiersheet Component information Identification a i Base data Nr 1 ID 8 No 3 i Symbol Data Nr 2 5 UAL Auto Number sheet 3 Format Sheet wC P URL Sheet name Unnamed Colorlayer information 2 Colorlayer informat
501. to middle To place the clicked point in the middle of the screen e Zoom detail To place the clicked point in the middle of the screen and display it enlarged 7 3 2 Moving image sections With the keyboard Hold down the Ctrl key and use the arrow keys to move the image section up down left or right With the mouse Move the mouse to the edge of the document window while holding the right mouse button The visible section moves half of the width of the window Opening linked projects For linked projects you can open the neighboring project from within an open project Right click a node and select the Load Next Project option A window will open in which the projects linked to the selected node are shown Select the desired linked project The related project will now be displayed directly in the original project window This function is only available on the AND server Note If nodes or links overlap you can reset the view with the EDIT gt Reset Positioning function AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 287 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 3 Navigating in NIS structures To simplify the search for related projects you can color the nodes that function as project links This is done using VIEW gt Colour Project Link Nodes EFEFEF Colored project link nodes Fertig NUM Searching for nodes by installation number You can search for nodes by their installation numbers within the
502. ton the Auto Zoom function will be switched off that is the zoom level will not change Use the context menu to copy the content in the output window into a text file or to the clipboard Use the CALCULATION gt Warnings gt Delete All Warnings command to clear the window 2 1 3 Status bar The status bar displays information about the edit status of the open project and which functions or modes are active 0 O Standard Modus No object No selected object BI 001 144 00 6 00 FANG Active mode Object to be positioned Object selected under the cursor Sheet number Current X coordinate Current Y coordinate Snap function activated deactivated SQOO000080 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 15 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 1 The AND program window and its elements 2 1 4 Tooltips If you pause with the mouse pointer above the icons on the toolbars or above a component in the object selection window or the worksheet without clicking a small window tooltip will appear with text This window tells you what function the icon triggers which component the icon displays in the drawing or the library from which the icon originates Wert 2 tach F Wert 2 fach F p AE E TEE N E AR Width mm A Status coloring on off E Tooltip for a component drawn on the worksheet Tooltip for an icon on a toolbar 2 1 5 Edit Object window The Edit Object window opens automatically when
503. ts are small conduits for installation of small diameter fiber optic cables They typically have a diameter of 3 to 16 mm and are packaged in bundles of conduits DuctPackage 9 13 1 DuctPackage New type LibDuctPackage in the library In LibEdit we have implemented the creation and processing of the new object type LibDuctPackage Name in LibEdit DuctPackage Data of a LibDuctPackage For each microduct Color a value up to 256 Labeling e g Blue 2 Reserved Yes No Priority uses automatic assignment for standardization Blue 1 is always connected to the first house The priority is not an additional attribute It is passed into the lib object based on the sequence of the microducts Duct Package Data Number OF Microducts 4 Microducts Con Label Reserved Fig 1 Setting the quantity color label and reservation AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 379 of 452 For all microducts Inside diameter Outside diameter Reference to connector Reference to sub conduit For all Microducts Inner Diameter o 0 cm Outer Diameter o o cm Reference to Connector o et Reference to Subduct pO Set Fig 2 Setting the diameter and references Line style of the microduct e Line style Dash Dash Dash Dot etc e Option No double line Linestyle Standard Standard Dash Dash Dash Dot Double Line Long Dash Lona Coat Dot Linestyle Dot Dot Fi
504. tt lt Name gt lt ID gt 1091 lt ID gt lt AutoHotspotGeneration gt 1 lt AutoHotspotGeneration gt lt DisplayName gt 0x409 Phase_Symbol 0x407 Abschnitt_Symbol lt DisplayName gt lt DrwObjMeta gt Save the Metadata xml Go to DbAdmin Project Root System Delete the old Metadata xml and add the new one that was modified Open AND Client Create or edit an hotspot type X metadot and create a link to Phase_Symbol by ID see 0 Link jump between hotspots and other dots AND objects Press OK button Check out and open a project Add insert a Phase_Symbol within the project Check in the project Search the hotspot Here we can encounter two situations 4 1 If you choose to add the object within a geo project you can also locate the Lap and see that the hotspot X was created at same position as the object the hotspot can be located too d E Abschnitt frie 4 2 If you choose to add the object within a schematic project The hotspot is created but cannot be opened located The user can search for it AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 258 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Search result list Mr Mame Attributes Type File 1 Metadot_Hpt_type TETE Metadot_Hpt_type External interface 2s Metadot Hpt type 1102148755 External interface Open Locate Synchronize The link between meta object and hotspot is created right click the
505. ttenuation output by the network check is however the absolute minimum attenuation across all transmitters and across all return channel frequencies That means the output minimum attenuation is that of the minimum transmitter socket at 15 MHz The maximum attenuation is that to the maximum socket at 65 MHz The same small deviations can also occur with the return frame function as it too only calculates all attenuations at the higher frequency of 65 MHz AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 344 of 452 9 Calculations 9 4 Return path calculation LocalArea Coax FibreCoax Disturbance check ee a If the disturbance check is activated the disturbances will be calculated in the network check Disturbances comprise two components e Noise and e Ingress The network check also calculates the sum of both disturbances A warning is output if the ratio defined in the service falls short of the sum of all disturbances You can set the parameters for the noise calculation as described in the Adjusting Method section see Page 323 Ingress The real ingress varies with time frequency and location Describing these complex and statistical interrelationships would require much time and effort to determine and enter the necessary data AND therefore uses a constant worst case ingress value There are two types of ingress e Ingress that enters the network from the return path transmitters This portion depends on the r
506. ttings command The following project settings can be made Library list and component or object selection See the editing library lists section page 39 Page setup See the page setup section page 422 Worksheet settings See the worksheet settings section page 208 Project data See the project data section page 219 Layers See the layers section page 216 Automatic labeling and numbering See the automatic object numbering page 122 and automatic object labeling sections page 115 Warning settings for the network check See the warning settings section page 315 Return path presettings See the return path setup section page 336 Setting up temperature groups See the warning settings section page 315 Calculation settings See the calculation settings section page 366 Material report settings See the reports section page 427 Test point settings See test point settings section page 296 Signal connection point presettings See following pages AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 295 of 452 8 Settings 8 2 Project settings 8 2 1 Test point settings Test points in AND contain calculated and optionally measured levels and distortion products for specific reference points in the network In AND in addition to standard test points there are also display test points and live test points Live test points and display test points These test points show levels such as the distortion product or t
507. tworks Select the network type t F m sos Rs y the IF Matrix option is Syet Home ioen Onon Caoil a not avilable at this time Select the type of signal source to be be used Enter the work area for which Signal Source BP create symbol for signal source C Headend Worksheet the drawing is being created Working Area Worksheet Block AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 148 of 452 3 Automatic drawing modee 3 1 Selecting a network type Entering the signal source You can select the Connection Point signal source in the first worksheet of the project The component you define in the Components tab for the Source parent level option will be used You must use the Worksheet Entry signal source for sub worksheets You can only use the Headend Worksheet signal source in the first worksheet This cannot contain any further sheets The signal source is then loaded as a new sheet from the specified drawing Please note that the selected file must be a saved headend sheet that is a sheet without entries and can only have one exit Use the Change button to search for the file Defining the work area Here you define whether the automatically generated network will completely fill the active worksheet or whether it will be inserted into the active worksheet as a block If you selected the Worksheet work area the network will be placed above the act
508. u edit route command In the figure above the route is selected through fiber 5 of bundle 6 When you select Edit Route the following dialog box opens in which you can enter the attributes of the selected route Edit Route Priority State Connection ID Bundle description i Overwrite only lower states W Assign the descriptions only to mono wire bundles OK The attributes Priority Status Fiber ID and Bundle Description are written into all fibers of the route e Only overwrite status if less than The status of a route is only replaced with a new status if the old status is lower in the following sequence Open lt Planned lt Reserved lt Splice Patch Ordered lt Assigned e Only assign description to mono fiber bundles The value of the field Bundle Description is only set for single fiber bundles If this checkbox is deactivated the description is set for all bundles The changes made to the route are logged in the output window Output Segment 1 Bundle 1 Wire 3 State not in use gt resgerved Conmection Id gt 4158 B Segment 2 Bundle 1 Wire 3 State not in use gt reserved Commection Id gt 4158 B You can jump to a particular segment by clicking a log entry AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 95 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode b Context menu co or optical route command Colors the optical route for s
509. uation in the previous amplifier If the Warn if the attenuation to the next amplifier is not compensated option is activated an error message is output during setup for every amplifier that cannot compensate for the preceding attenuation The amplifier directly behind the receiver is set such that the target reception level is met AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 323 of 452 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check Advantages and disadvantages of both methods Attenuation compensation method This method is easy for the user to understand easy for technicians to measure and it is local that is a change made to the network at a certain location usually only affects the setting of one amplifier However this method has the disadvantage that it only operates under additional conditions e All passive house networks should have the same attenuation e Attenuation between the amplifiers must always lie within the control range of the amplification e The target reception level must lie within a particular range so that it can be set up by the amplifier directly behind the receiver To fulfill these conditions it will often be necessary to use special return path attenuators The noise to ingress ratio is worse with this method because the transmission level of cable modems cannot be maximized with amplification control Maximum transmission level Unity Gain method This method works under more general conditions because onl
510. unt Limits Signal points Level settings Define the relation between amount of MDUs and the required level Unna de _ Page 318 of 452 Checking open tap pin levels 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check This check function only enables you to plan up to the TAP output before the house to be supplied if it is already Known which parameters are required on the drop line Set up warnings for Net Check Warnings Here you set the desired level limits at the open tap outputs Here you set the level limits as a function of the residential units to be supplied Checking distortion products V Check net structure WV Setup amplifiers V Temperature drift V Check remote supply V Check socket levels WV Check bridge points Check open tap pin levels G C Check distortion V Check connectors Setup Return Amplifiers C Check upstream Test point CURRENT TARGET com C Check leakage limit For check of level and distortion Check redundant optical line too The Tap level check discovers all levels for each frequency at all open tap exits and compares them with the limits given below Level min 6 0 deyv Level max 80 dB Level difference max 6 0 dB Take values from settings Change Settings If you know the drop line parameters this function lets you plan to the TAP exit in front of the house that is to be qupplied
511. urement series The transmission function is saved with the other library data and enables a precise calculation of distortions for any frequency spacing Signal ripple data and pre emphasis The measurement series are stored in separate files They remain with the manufacturer and are not included in the library or disclosed outside of the company The transmission function calculated with the measurement data is saved but invisible to users making it impossible for users to change it The transmission function is not copied together with the amplifier into the Component Editor Comparing the two calculation types The following two images each show the CTB spectrum of the same amplifier under the same conditions ideal flat input flat identical output level catalog frequency spacing The first image shows the calculation result from using simple catalog specifications The second image shows the spectrum calculation with the aid of the transmission function 42 Kan le 42 CW Analogkanale St rabstand am selektierten Punkt CTB Abstand 54 8 dBc Frq 45 789 MHz Cursor auf beliebige Frq CNR 30 0 INI HI 40 150 260 370 480 590 700 810 CTB spectrum calculated without transmission function With no information from the library available the worst ratio approx 54 8dB was assumed
512. ust has to click on Import option and the hotspots will be imported To cancel the import click on Cancel option and the hotspots will not be imported AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 267 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Export Any user is able to export hotspots from overview according to his rights Read rights needed for export Hotspots can be exported as XML or CSV file via cluster hull Example 1 Open an overview create a new Cluster Hull like in picture bellow Cluster Area is created with no problems S ae R a s 1 Create new GIS Cluster lt 1504 ar 1a oT imal idiz GIS Cluster Hull TA 2 Click on GIS cluster Hull Edit object dlg opens and tab GisArea Data is displayed Choose the object metadot type s you want to export in this case metadot Hotspot Type is chosen to be exported in CSV file in specified path tt Edit Object _ S o Es Object Data Gistrea Data E GIS Cluster Hull URL Obiecte dd URL Address E Color layer information MEE Color layer informatic Gis rea Data Export options Gis4rea Data C XML Path VADiana Horoba e l CSV Object type Hotspot type 3 H_H_DIANA_12_Apr_10_14_16_2 7 csv Export gt Cancel 3 Next step is to click on Export button Result hotspots within cluster hull of specified type s are exported as CVS file s in the path
513. ut field to the next both with the tab key and with the cursor keys Similar to Microsoft EXCEL you can select a row by clicking the gray square in the left margin You can select several channels simultaneously by pressing the Ctrl key Clicking the gray square top left selects all channels The Channel and Frq MHz columns are automatically linked to one another When you enter a valid number in one of these columns the other columns are automatically updated When working with level reduction you must make sure that you not only specify the value for the level reduction for example 10 dB but also set a level that is 10 dB lower For example PAL channel Level 70 dBuV and level reduction 0 dB QAM 64 channel Level 60 dBuV and level reduction 10 dB If you change the signal type the bandwidth and the level reduction will automatically be set to standard values for the new type The values for level frequency and distortion are changed according to the new bandwidth and level reduction There are two practical ways of entering non PAL channels e First change the signal type and then enter all values correctly e Specify all the values as if for a PAL channel and only then switch to the correct signal type The values are automatically corrected when you switch over for example a PAL vision carrier frequency of 48 25 MHz is converted to a digital mid range frequency of 51 0 MHz Editing multiple channels directly in the
514. ut not the signal data Dynamic labels can be used to display information for library symbols e g patch fields with data from the next final connection point Example Am Moitterteld co H Lars 5 m E Lar um aa a H ot tnt mu me ma 1i Example of a patch field with dynamic labels Connection points Final connection points are e Pins of terminating devices or unconnected Entry Exit points EEPs e Pins from path dividing elements splitter filter etc Next connection points are final connection points or if present e Pins with the Patch Pin attribute set e Splices Cables or bundles of type spliced or uncut in cassette Hierarchy Apart from the address of a connection point or the start reference point the pin name installation number can be displayed Since this data in general is not sufficient without context information the hierarchy path or hierarchy number path can be displayed in dynamic labels and is used in splice patch reports i e the surrounding context of the pin splice symbol can be displayed The hierarchy is recursively built from e Pin name or splice name e the hierarchical parent symbols of the pin symbol e cassette location rectangles surrounding the outermost parent symbol or rectangle Examples general syntax see below e RO117 PFO4 P01 Rectangle Rack with installation no RO117 patch field PFO4 Pin with name PO1 e 121 C01 K0001 B
515. ut the orientation of the amplifiers conflicts with this A component typically a connector is incorrectly defined in the library it either contains only inputs or only outputs There are problems with the taps see Reversed Components section Page 307 Attenuation values in the library There is a list of frequency attenuation value pairs standard data packet in the library for passive components and cables The attenuation for a certain frequency is determined using linear interpolation between neighboring nodes For a tap or a loop through socket the standard packet describes throughput attenuation while the tap attenuation is normally specified in the tap user output independent of frequency If the attenuation values of the tap user output are to be calculated based on the frequency you have to use the Component Editor to create a second standard packet for the tap user output and then specify the frequency attenuation value pair In addition the Describe Attenuation With Standard Packet option must be switched on in the tap user output Calculating equalizer attenuation is not achieved using linear interpolation between frequencies and the upper pivot point but rather with the help of a typical equalizer frequency attenuation curve This curve is cable inverse and was derived from a range of standard commercial equalizers Connectable cable simulation modules are defined in the library as connector equalizers with negati
516. utomatically 7 Twisted pair cable between links Type Twisted Pair Kabel 7 Length 2 0 m Load Settings Cancel OK Save settings If the checkbox is off the controls inside the frame are disabled and you have no cable as de fault for links If the checkbox is on you can select the cable s type using the button labeled and delete it with the X button If you change the cable type and the new cable has fixed length the field for the length is filled automatically Individual Cable for Links You can attach a cable different from the settings Mark a link object with the mouse and press return to get the edit dialog for the link AND Solution GmbH AND Client Manual IV C Page 369 of 452 9 Calculations 9 11 Calculation settings By default the cable behind a link is the default cable from the calculation settings and the ra dio button is From Settings If you switch to Manual the controls for editing the cable s type and length become enabled The individual cable applies to the whole link object pair it doesn t matter in which of both links you enter the cable It is also possible to set none as manual cable for a link pair I e if you have a standard patch cable as project default but behind a concrete link there is no such patch cable A cable attached to a link object without partner is ignored not counted in any functionality Name and length of the cable are d
517. variable DOT Properties x Hew Metadat DOT Name I Variable 1 PA Text Size fion Text Angle Jo 00 Text Justification Base align Lett GeoPos POINT 4568 Reset geopos Ok Cancel Type refers to the variable s Type Examples of types Integer Real Number String Option specific data mandatory M 8584 Address Date Yes No value Long Integer String om Integer Real number String Option Address Date Yesino value Long integer AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 255 of 452 6 Project organization 6 8 Independent Hotspots Variable s How is shown when adding a hotspot Type Option To specify the options for a Se option o variable of type Option insert the options separated by in the Specific Data column According to example above variable var 2 option has specified options opt 1 opt 2 opt 3 opt 4 Address To add or edit an Address use po ii the button with glasses icon zoe ames of x The known dlg for address ae Ae DEU 25356 Freising Meisenstr 5 ri appears and the user can search and add an address Date Variable D ate T z 0z 2010 w d 11 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 25 1 2 4 4 Heute 02 02 2010 Checking the checkbox means I Yariable YM that the user choose Yes option Unchecking means that the user chooses No option Observation After creating the variables they cannot be deleted Type name ca
518. ve equalization AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 306 of 452 9 Calculations 9 1 Calculating levels 9 1 2 Reversed components You can also install passive components in the reverse directions For example you can use a splitter to link signals For each level calculation AND calculates afresh whether a connection is an input or output You can view the latest interpretation of a connection by clicking the component connection and selecting the Connection Info tree item in the Object Data tree in the Edit Object window Under Pin Type you can see how AND currently interprets the connection 2i Edit Object a LE a Object Data Pin info Connection You can force a particular connection 5 Symbol 11608 Stichab B Component information direction by selecting the direction aT M a Attenuation 0 0 dB i i Symbol Data Nr 2 and activating the AAE E l efault packet Nr Pin Type RF Input z Freeze direction option Frequency Respon saer URL p s Color layer information Color layer informat Z Remote Supp ae i Pin info Cut off reverse path Max current 99 Fay Connection Dynamic data Level Mdu informat ee E E Database a Location Inst No N Connector Reference lt i t Type Female plug Reference 1 F This screenshot is only provided as an example The information actually displayed as connection information and which functions can be selected d
519. view another area of the background After selecting the icon the mouse pointer changes into a green magnifying glass for zooming and into a green arrow icon for moving O Hold the left mouse button down and drag the object in the desired direction Rescaling the background If you would like to enlarge or reduce the background within the worksheet borders use the Rescale icon The mouse pointer changes into a red magnifying glass CA icon Hold the left mouse button down and drag the icon across the monitor up means larger down means smaller You can recognize enlargement reduction in relation to the worksheet because the background frame turns to gray This frame represents the extent of the worksheet If you are working online on the AND Smart Server any potentially missing areas of the GIS background will be automatically loaded from the server Moving the background in the background editor If you would like to move the background within the borders of the worksheet use the Move Background icon The mouse pointer changes into a red arrow ap Hold the left mouse button down and drag the icon horizontally or vertically across the screen You can recognize a movement of the background in relation to the worksheet because the background frame turns gray This frame represents the extent of the worksheet If you are working online on the AND Smart Server any potentially missing areas of the GIS background will be automa
520. view with address and installation number 7 2 2 Horizontal Vertical display The network can be displayed vertically or horizontally To switch between these options chose VIEW gt Horizontal Structure g NIS Editor FN000219 8041 Kleeweidstrasse Ioj x 4h Datei Bearbeiten Einstellungen Ansicht Fenster o x Os a S J EE EE els ww www A H g NIS Editor FN000219 8041 Kleeweidstrasse Sifa x ah Datei Bearbeiten Einstellungen Ansicht Fenster l x DSWE kE E JIE RE a He e He SP 4 aA Fertig Fertig NIS structure displayed horizontally Displayed vertically AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 284 of 452 7 NIS Network Information System 7 2 Displaying NIS structures 7 2 3 Service views Nodes can be assigned certain services for example IP or telephony You can filter the NIS structure according to services By default all nodes are shown for all services Choose VIEW gt Services to open the Services window where you can select which services will be displayed f ao Services TY vV Show other services Cancel Nodes that do not support the selected services will be displayed white You can also completely hide nodes that do not support the selected services Do this by deactivating the Display Other Services option Se Se gt Se Me HE ei Nodes that do not support the selected services
521. will now be attached to the mouse Click the location where you wish to place the label Press the Esc key to finish AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 168 of 452 4 Civil works planning 4 4 Trench cross sections To display and edit the trench cross section data left click the trench cross section object The Edit Object window now shows you the cables and condits that are in the trench on the Trench Cross Section tab Edit the contents of the trench section in this window by adding or deleting conduits assigning cables to individual conduits and assigning colors to the cables Object Data Trench Cross Section Data E Trench Cross Section Trench List amp URL URL Color layer information Color layer informatic The trench list shows the trenches over which the cross section runs Shows how many conduits are in the trench Use the sign to add a new slot for conduits and the sign to delete slots Empty slot for a conduit Open the list of conduits to assign a conduit to the cable Cables and Conduits List m Cable Color Conduit placeholders If you do not know in which conduit a cable is laid you can assign the cable to a conduit placeholder First define a conduit placeholder Do this by selecting an empty conduit slot Place the cable whose conduit is unknown to you in this slot m Duct Information Il
522. will open Here you specify which input frequencies are to be set Here you specify which output frequencies Should be set and define the frequency ranges f Do not set converters Output frequencies f Set all converters Frequency Range 48 25 Mhz f Set empty converters only min C Do not set converters mar 855 25 Mhz W Allow neighbor channel Cancel The following errors may occur e Input frequency is outside the frequency range that the connected converters can convert e The input frequency of a converter cannot be set because no suitable frequency is available e The output frequency of a converter cannot be set because no suitable frequency is available If calculation was successful this will be indicated by a message AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 348 of 452 9 Determining signal paths 9 6 Determining signal paths 9 6 Determining signal paths AND offers two methods of marking a signal path e Marking the signal path from one connection to the signal source e Entering one or more sources of interference and marking the signal source 9 6 1 Signal path from connection to signal source Move the mouse over the required connection and press the J key for Color Signal Path As a result the signal path from the signal source to this point will be colored yellow 0 Signal path marking can be executed on all points with an RF downstream signal and on optical connect
523. window 2 In the center window of the Component Editor double click the connection you want to define where the component is graphically represented The Edit Connection window will open f Edit Pin Properties You should select Power Supply Pin Type AF Outpy 3 A when defining the connection type gt n ie RF Userouiput for connections that are only used Z Remote Supply Possible i Redundant Assembly Pin for remote Power F Do not show level in Amplifierist Power Pin This simplifies the path search for Can be open AND in the RF area and Connector Reference reduces the possibilities of error Type Female plug Cancel OK Activate the Remote Power Compatible option AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 401 of 452 9 Calculations 9 14 Calculating remote powering Influencing remote powering paths by specifying group numbers For complicated components it is sometimes necessary to further limit the remote powering paths You can do this by assigning group numbers in the Edit Connection window Only remote powering paths between connections with the same group number are possible Edit Pin Properties Pin Type 7s Output Max current 199 A V Remote Supply Possible Redundant Do not show level in Amplifierist Can be open Connector Reference Type Female plug Reference 18 5 8 E Cancel Entering power supply data
524. window will open in which you must decide whether the scale will be activated for the cable length calculation for this sheet Click Yes 5 Another query window will appear if the automatic component scaling is activated Now you must decide whether the objects should be scaled Click Yes and all objects will be adjusted to the size You can only draw in one ruler per sheet You can grab the ruler on the right side at any time and change its length The label text will be constantly updated as you do this Note Use this function with caution as all existing objects will be resized and may become too large or too small for the worksheet Make sure that reasonable values are entered in the worksheet dialog box for the component scaling See also Editing Background Files see Page 175 Tip Draw in the ruler at any angle along a known length of an object After you have set the scale move the ruler and press the 0 key The ruler will now be horizontal Optical transmitters Optical transmitters are the source of optical signals Optical transmitters have fixed output ratings see above The channel modulation must be specified for each transmitter under Dynamic Data The program corrects the value specified for the calculation if the value is not feasible for the current channel capacity The channel modulation value has no effect on the output power If the optical receiver is unregulated the channel modulation has an effect on the rece
525. work type you use Curent Type of Network Loop System gt The settings will be saved Amplifier Search separately for each Amplification network type ee Reserve 0 10 dB V Location Rectangles Equalization Amplifier Labels Reserve 0 10 dB Subscriber Labels Top View Labels Add space for stair house AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 153 of 452 3 Automatic Drawing Mode 3 4 Generating a drawing 3 4 Generating a drawing Once you have defined all of the components and cables you can begin with the automatic drawing of the system by clicking OK The AutoNet Info window shows the settings you have made If you wish to change anything go back again AutoNet Info AutoNet with 1 house s House info House 1 Loop System floor no 2 flat no 2 Sockets connection Directly Network type in the House Distribution Level Splither System between houses Splitter System Source info Signal source BP create symbol for signal source Signal Direction From Bottom to Top Working Area Worksheet Levels info Level at source 0 0 0 0 Necessary Subscriber Levels 60 0 64 0 6 0 AND may display one or more of the following messages before generating the network If objects exist in the active sheet AND will ask how you wish it to proceed Delete will delete all objects from the active sheet except signal sources and then generates eee New doc Cancel a new network
526. work structure you must first select the nodes You have a number of options e Selecting with the mouse e Selecting with the Selection toolbar e Selecting with the Edit menu Selecting with the mouse With the mouse button held down drag a rectangle around the desired nodes The selected nodes will be displayed blue If you wish to expand the selection hold the Ctrl key down and drag additional selection rectangles around the desired nodes Press the Esc key if you wish to remove a selection rectangle Selecting with the toolbar Select nodes with the toolbar as follows 1 On the toolbar choose the type of selection by clicking the appropriate icon 2 Move the mouse pointer to the node you want to select The node you have selected will be shown violet Depending on the selection icon other nodes will be shown blue These are also selected This is the standard selection on the toolbar Here the only node that is selected is the one with the mouse pointer above it This will also select all of the nodes that are subordinate to the node that is selected It will also select all of the parent nodes to the node that is selected Moreover it selects all of the parent nodes of the nodes subordinate to the node that is selected It also selects all of the parent nodes of the node that is selected plus all of their subordinate nodes It selects all nodes in the same location rectangle as the selected node It also selects all n
527. worksheet connections with the target address The target address is the address to which the cable leads irrespective of the signal direction The path search covers the whole cable not just individual fibers Setting the labeling rule The worksheet connections are labeled with the target address if the labeling rule for the worksheet connections contains one of the address abbreviations t H or T The dialog box for the setting is reached using the project data menu Numbering and Labeling menu item Automatic Labeling and Numbering E x Format string tH vin Font size 22 Min number of digits for sheetnumbers fo Min number of decimals for lengths fo T Label immediately after insertion Show edit dialog in Edit Location Set Format string for automatic labels read only Location Search Dontsearch Searchinsheet Search in whole project recursivly Default font N Select E a 7 Update all labels when dialog is closed D Reset label s textsize Save Settings Load Settings Cancel Fig 1 Dialog box for setting the labeling rule Please ensure that the correct planning type is used in the setting The default rule is t H for lt street gt lt house number gt When loading files that were stored with versions older than Build 4 0 788 the old no longer meaningful default rule D is automatically replaced by t H AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 212 o
528. xpanded The bounding rectangle is recalculated and adapted accordingly AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 83 of 452 2 Fundamentals 2 14 Network planning mode For comparison The same splice box on a 4 12 FO cable depicted in non space saving manner left and in space saving manner right Splice boxes have output and input pins that are interconnected by so called links In the case of non automatic splice boxes the user connects the pins manually or with an automatic splice function in the properties dialog box AND LibEdit In auto splice boxes the links are automatically generated Splice boxes are automatically mirrored when they are drawn if the first bundle or fiber pin is neither positioned top or right Subsequent mirroring is also possible This is done by removing the pins and links and the frame with the pins are regenerated but exactly in the reverse order including the links CreatePins CreateLinks in CDrwObjAutoSplicebox in Netlist When drawing or changing the appearance of auto splice boxes remember that the auto splice boxes remembers the position of the input pin as the fixed point from which the new position of the object is determined The position of an object is determined by the upper left corner Depending on the drawing setting Space saving or non space saving and the number of pins number is derived from the closed bundles and fibers and the mirroring properties half of the fra
529. y If you perform the calculation at the end of a fiber optic cable and the cable has multiple fibers a window will open requesting you to select the fiber for which the output is to be calculated AND calculates the output as follows The optical transmitters lasers are considered signal sources of the optical path search AND seeks the path to the transmitter and adds up the attenuation of the path AND uses the middle of the range specified in the library under Optical Output from to as the output value for the transmitter output The output at the selected point is thus Output at transmitter output sum of attenation to the selected point You can also transmit multiple wavelengths to a fiber AND searches for the path of everywavelength separately as well as the attenuation of the associated transmitter The result of the calculation is displayed in the window with a list of wavelengths and associated outputs The attenuations of the passive components are defined in the library There is also the attenuation as a result of splice loss which you can specify For more information see the Calculating Levels section Page 305 AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 371 of 452 9 Calculations 9 12 Calculation for optical Networks 9 12 2 Optical disturbance calculation Calculating noise The noise calculation can be applied both to 1310 nm sections and to 1550 nm sections Noise comprises 3 components e Tra
530. y be estimated according to the following formula Improvement of the CTB ratio per 1 dB pre emphasis 0 5 dB Deterioration of the CTB ratio per 1 dB pre emphasis 0 7 dB A change of 0 7 dB is a typical value for CTB whereas a value of 0 5 dB is a pessimistic assumption To guarantee planning security the pessimistic value is applied to improvements while the typical value is used for reductions For CSO distortion a global estimate of the effect of pre emphasis on the distortion ratio would be imprudent Depending on the amplifier type either an improvement or deterioration may result In calculation without a transmission function AND assumes the CSO ratio to be independent of the pre emphasis If instead of CSO CTB values IMA KMA values are entered in the library the latter are used Typically when creating interstage amplifiers in the library the CSO CTB ratios are assigned to the output level Distortions in the levels before them are specified as ideal 99 dB ratio AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 355 of 452 9 Calculations 9 8 Information about the distortion product calculation Calculation with transmission function To achieve more exact results specify measurement series from your multichannel measuring station in the Component Editor The expanded Component Editor ARD that makes this possible is available in AND FIBRECOAX The transmission function of the distortions can be calculated from the meas
531. y for remote powering Power Supply component type in the library e Connection elements cables splitters taps etc The calculation consists of two steps 1 First AND determines the network structure Which consumers are connected with which power supplies The sequence of amplifiers and the size of the ohmic resistance between them The result is largely determined by how the network is drawn and how the components are defined in the library You can change the supply area of the remote powering source by block or activating certain connections for remote powering 2 Then AND calculates The voltage of each consumer The total current taken from the power supplies Whether all consumers are reached by remote powering Whether the remote power can sufficiently supply all of the amplifiers being reached Whether all areas are reached by the remote power source The areas supplied by remote powering are colored depending on the settings 9 14 1 Starting the remote powering calculation Calculating remote powering can be done on its own or as part of the network check To define the remote powering check as part of the network check open the network check warnings setup window with the CALCULATION gt Warning Settings command and switch on the Check Remote Powering option shortcut Alt W To start the remote powering check separately go to CALCULATION gt Check Remote Powering shortcut AIt F AND Clie
532. y the cooperation of all controls can produce the desired reception level and the maximum transmission level The planner need not worry whether the return path is functioning and it will rarely be necessary to use special return path attenuators The transmission level and therefore distortions are optimized Disadvantages of this method e Increased in situ measurement time e The settings found by AND are difficult to reconstruct but necessarily incorrect and are dependent on the entire network If a change is made to one particular point in the network the control of all return path amplifiers may change The result of the return path amplifier setting is displayed in the output window together with the input level output level and the amplification for every amplifier Click an amplifier to locate the associated amplifier The transmission level of the cable modems behind the house amplifiers is also output AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 324 of 452 9 Calculations 9 3 Network check Checking the return channel Ww The return channel is checked while the return path amplifier is set up First the return path amplifiers are set up before the level and distortions are checked The return path check is performed in two stages e Level check e Distortion check x Here you specify what it to be Set up warnings for Net Check ij ae checked in the net check Warnings i i Check net struc
533. ying the cables in the microducts Connecting cables Connection via the microducts is set up automatically when you connect the cable to the mi croduct pin at the end of a leg or in a worksheet where it is connected to an expander Disconnecting the cables No additional function necessary simply drag the cable away from the microduct pin Updating the entire cable length The entire cable length is displayed automatically via the microduct and is updated in the Cable dialog box Fig 30 Object Data Cable data Nr 1 Cable End Nr 2 Cable End Nr 3 El Cable Fiber 2x6 Lengths El Component inforrnat Calculated 3 50 hid ar mn O Manual 0 00 Color code Mr Whines 750 URL oe URL a Color lay er informati Total length over channel 20 4409 i Total wire length over Owner Data af cen 20 4409 S Laying ype Laying Type Cable type Fiber 2x6 B Dynamic data Cable data Mr 1 Cable End Hr 2 F Allow Trench Cross Section to Change the Color Cable End Mr 3 Copy the properties to the cables connected through sheet connector F Database Backbone ncation lnst N 7 Connection Info I Description Defect Wires gt gt AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 395 of 452 9 Calculations 9 13 Microducts Checking the power at optical NTUs The network check started with Alt N checks whether all optical NTUs are receiving a signal This is indicated in the output Fig 31
534. you click an object in the worksheet a component cable text etc For worksheets and worksheet attachments FA press the Enter key or choose the Properties option from the context menu The content of the window is dynamically generated and is adapted to the selected object As there is a lot of data relating to each object the window is divided into multiple sub windows tabs The left side of the window shows the tab tree which you use to open the various sub windows r ii Edit Object So Object Data Amplifier data Nr 1 Amplifier data Nr 2 Transponder Nr 3 Power Consum ption Nr 4 7 Symbot Amp ane er C Settings Target Values Current Values E Component information Base data Nr 1 Built In Regulators E Symbol Data Nr 2 m p Level at n Power s pply Nr 3 Amplification 18 0 dB Target Level 98 dB max Frq 0 dBy a a Ea gt O Amplifier Nr 4 Equalization 0 0 4 dB Preemphasis 0 0 dB Preemphasis dB Amplifier Nr 5 d ET Meon Respons Plugged Components Plugged RL Attenuation foo H dB Pad fixed E Color layer information f Color layer informatic Equalization 0 0 l dB Equalizer none i fixed E Owner Dal 2 a Owner Data Frequency Range Return Path Amplifier none xl Caen ats 47 862 MHz Piot none AND Client Manual IV C AND Solution GmbH Page 16

Contents - AND

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents